This Book Belongs To:

Limited edition hand-bound copy number:

 About The Author
The Author wishes to remain as anonymous as possible. The reason is that he no longer
seeks fame or publicity. The sincere seeker will be able to uncover his identity if they
desire it. However, it is the message of this book which is important, not who wrote it.
Since the focus of this book is wealth creation, the reader needs to know that The Author
is a multi-millionaire who has trained over 30,000 students worldwide in the methods of
achieving wealth, power and freedom in their lives. This is mentioned only to give the
reader confidence that The Author knows his subject and is qualified to write upon it.
The Author wishes you every success in your pursuit of these goals the same goals
which have been attained by millions of people before you.
Note
Various amounts of money are mentioned throughout the book. If you are reading this
book many years after it was written, please just index-up these amounts to bring them
into modern money. For example if you are reading this book ten years after publication,
then 10,000 should probably be 20,000 or more.
For legal reasons we are obliged to state the following:
Disclaimer: To the fullest extent permitted by law, the publishers are providing this written material, its
subsidiary elements and its contents on an as is basis and make no (and expressly disclaim all)
representations or warranties of any kind with respect to this material or its contents including, without
limitation, advice and recommendations, warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
The author is not a psychologist or Independent Financial Advisor - the information is given for entertainment
purposes only. In addition, the publishers do not represent or warrant that the information accessible via this
material is accurate, complete or current. To the fullest extent permitted by law, neither the publishers or any
of its affiliates, partners, directors, employees or other representatives will be liable for damages arising out of
or in connection with the use of this material. This is a comprehensive limitation of liability that applies to all
damages of any kind, including (without limitation) compensatory, direct, indirect or consequential damages,
loss of data, income or profit, loss of or damage to property and claims of third parties.

Copyright Material

All rights reserved. No reproduction, copying or transmission of this publication may be made
without written permission. No paragraph of this publication may be reproduced, copied or
transmitted without written permission, or in accordance with the Copyright Act 1956 (amended).
All cartoons, diagrams and comic strips are copyright to the original artist. No reproduction of the
cartoons, diagrams, drawings or comic strips is permitted without prior permission from the
publishers.

This book is sold for entertainment purposes only, and the

author, publishers and/or distributors are not responsible for any
actions taken as a result of reading it.

V110621

Published in the UK by:

Wealthshare limited, 268 Bath Road, Slough, SL1 4DX United Kingdom
 Section One
The Teachings
 Grade One: The Beginning
1. I am The Author. You are The Seeker.
2.Who I am is not important. The message is. If you are highly motivated you can find me,
but that should not be your primary purpose.
You seek after something dimly glimpsed. You cannot yet manifest it. It hides for now,
3.
waiting to be discovered. These teachings will help you reveal this treasure.
What you really seek is... you. You are what you seek. Right now, that probably seems
4.
mysterious.
5. Like a rare diamond lying in crude mantle; like a sleeping princess under an evil spell;
like a prince in beggars rags, the real you awaits discovery.
6. You have been waiting all of your life. Now it is time to wake up and be magnificent.
7.You have been dreaming. All is not as it seems. The world you see has not the solidity
you imagine. It is mostly empty space inhabited by a boiling mass of quarks and photons
masquerading as ships and string and sealing wax and cabbages and kings.
8.The society you inhabit is a giant construct carefully built to keep you asleep and
dreaming, in service to your masters.
9.The opaque veil between you and what you seek is woven from your illusions. Each
thread is a belief, each stitch an opinion. Together they make a picture called ego.
Nothing can be seen behind or through its projections. Your task is to tear down the veil
and reveal the hidden temple.
10. The picture woven in the fabric of the veil is the illusory you. It is your reflection. One
illusion reflects another. Look around you and see the infinite hall of mirrors and the
myriad virtual images shimmering and bending.
11. This we call Wonderland.

1
 Grade Two: Welcome to Wonderland
1. Wonderland is where you live. It is where you are now, reading this.
2.It is a place of enemies and a place of allies. To achieve your dreams you must identify
the enemies and avoid them. You must identify your allies and cleave to them. Above all,
to survive and prosper, you must wake up from your dream.
3. Wonderland is the society which surrounds you. It is a giant construct comprising
belief systems called memes. It is largely illusory, but it feels very real.
4.Wonderland is inhabited by deeply unconscious beings called Thralls derived from the
word enthralled. You are a Thrall as was The Author before he woke up. Until now, you
have been asleep and dreaming your life away, trapped in the construct which is called
Wonderland. You have spent your life so far creating and maintaining your own corner of
this illusory world.
5. Most people are so firmly ensnared in slavery and illusion that even mild disclosures
about the true nature of Wonderland can provoke a powerful backlash.
6. People do not want to wake up. They do not like having their safety blanket illusions
stripped away from them and they will become annoyed if this is done to them. They have
been conned all of their lives but cannot bear to have this pointed out to them. You need to
wake up quickly. You do not have unlimited time to realise your vision and greatness.
7. Wonderland is a world view promulgated by everyone, but in particular by those with a
vested interest in dream-weaving. This dream they weave is very convincing it seems
indistinguishable from reality. The dream is used to extract values from the weak and
gullible Thralls. Failure to realise this prevents you from achieving your true desires.
8.Guiltless wealth and true personal power can only be achieved by waking up from your
dream world by escaping from the illusion which is Wonderland.
9.If you believe you are awake already, think about your life and how it is right now. Are
you living your dream life? Are you wealthy? Powerful? Free? Does something seem to
be holding you down into poverty and powerlessness? Have you ever wondered what that
something was?
10.Waking up from Wonderland is essential and non-negotiable if you are to progress
Beyond Wealth. This is because Wonderland is an illusion and wealth is created in this
world by facing the facts of reality. Power and Freedom are obtained by waking up to the
truth about yourself, other people and the world. This means exposing Wonderland for the
construct that it is.
11. Happiness is obtained not by mindless consumerism, accumulation of status
possessions and building ego-empires it is attained by being in balance with the world,
free and helping others.
12.Wonderland is constructed by others and by you. It is created by our egos filtering
reality down to a tiny sliver which we are pleased to call the truth. Other Thralls apply
different filters, manifesting different truths. There is almost one truth system per Thrall.
There is Israeli truth and Arab truth; boss truth and worker truth; rich womans truth and
poor mans truth; freedom fighter truth and terrorist truth. How does your truth serve you?
How does it harm you?

2
13.All of these billions of truths are woven together to construct Wonderland. It is here
that you live and move and have your being.
14.Because your filter only gives you a small sliver of The Truth, it would be fair to call
your current version of reality an illusion. A single hair plucked from a leopard is, of
course, real; but it is not a leopard. To believe it to be so would be to believe in an illusion.
15.The Thralls are fast asleep or at best, barely conscious. They firmly believe they are
awake and fully conscious of course, but this, like their lives, is an illusion too. You have
been in a long dream or a nightmare. But the dream seems so real it is hard to accept that
you are barely conscious. It is painful but liberating to know that you have largely slept
your life away so far.
16.All of the pain, all of the suffering, all of the hate and tears in the world arise from a
single cause mankinds unconsciousness.

The Fate of Thralls

17.Thralls are destined to be born, to work, to consume, to entertain themselves and to die
after being drained of their usefulness. Their life energies go mainly into maintaining and
building their corner of the illusion called Wonderland. They rarely glimpse their true
purpose. They die leaving the world a slightly poorer place than when they arrived.
18.One person in every million is ready to wake up and expose the illusion which is
Wonderland. Is this you? Such a person desires wealth, power and freedom in their life.
Are you the one?
19.If you are not the one then you may experience some of the following feelings whilst
reading these teachings: gradually mounting irritation; a hot under the collar feeling as
your previously solid world is wobbled slightly; a strong desire to stop reading, bolt for
cover and dive deeper into Wonderland for comfort and security.
20.Most people do not have what it takes to wake up (or even realise there is anything to
wake up to!). They are happy to drift and dream their lives away, floating down stream in
the lazy current, carried this way and that by their whims and random events until they
die. They are part of someone elses story but never the author of their own.
21.Are you willing to wake up? If you are tired of having less money and power than you
would like, it is due to your fear and deep ignorance on the one hand, and the fact that you
have been cheated out of what is rightfully yours by external con artists on the other
hand and you have been asleep enough to allow them to take it.
22.Whilst you have been dozing on the bridge, pirates have taken over your ship and
have been busy steering it in the direction they want to take it. They thrive on
somnambulant Thralls who they can exploit at their leisure. You are supposed to be the
captain, but you have been slumped over the wheel, so your ship and cargo have been
free for the taking.
23.Unsuspected by you, you have been stripped of the bulk of your money and kept
powerless by forces you only dimly suspect. You have been lied to and manipulated by
others who want your money, time and talents. You have been side-tracked from the path
of financial freedom, actualization and real happiness. This is why most people live in
quiet desperation never achieving real wealth or contentment; not really understanding

3
what is going on; believing the media, politicians, religions, adverts, films and TV. Living
powerless dream-lives in slavery to the system.
24. And that means they never get to realise their true, brilliant potential, make themselves
wealthy and free, and make the world a better place.
25.Are you weary of never having enough money to pay your bills, let alone enjoy the
good things in life? Are you angry at being pushed around by society, bosses, religions,
businesses, governments and anyone else who feels like conning you out of your life
values? There is a long list of people with their palms stretched out to take your money
and talents if you are willing to let them.
26. These teachings offer the key to crafting a life which can make you and your family
wealthy and allow you to fulfil your true destiny. This is not a fantasy. Millions have
achieved this. You could do it too.
But only a few are ready for wealth and freedom. Most long to stay wrapped in the
27.
comforting illusion of Wonderland, despite their protestations to the contrary.
28. You can break free, if you will it. Are you ready?

4
 Grade Three: Choosing a Better Life
1. This is how you are: broke and powerless. This is not criticism, it is an awakening.
2.If you cannot walk out of the door today, a free man or woman, never needing to work
again as long as you live, you are a trapped wage slave, no matter how high your salary.
3. Most personal power has been stripped from you long ago, leaving you with just the
illusion of having power. You have agency only within the tight confines allowed to you
by Wonderland and its masters.
4.Your energies are being squandered on trivia and sacrificed on the altar of routine. This
has been going on for a very long time all of your life in fact. You are trapped in a near
identical series of days spent in servitude to an idol you secretly despise. This is
unbearable for you to face and so you pretend to believe in this idol and its world. The
pretence allows you to get through another day whilst your tortured soul is screaming for
release. In this way you help to construct your particular corner of Wonderland.
5.Your work is unfulfilling to your deeper self a mere means to an end which is base
survival, tempered with a few small luxuries. You are prostituting your incredible talents
and irreplaceable life-energies for a modest income which is spent mostly on survival and
entertainment.
6.Right now, you are a willing slave to this system, but something deep within you, barely
glimpsed, yearns to be free from this tyranny. You groan under the weight of holding up
the world and long to drop this heavy load. You hope one day to walk out into the sunlight
a free person. Something in you knows that only then can you begin to live.
7.Yet all of this is only dimly seen in brief moments of lucidness before falling asleep
again. Such thoughts are quickly suppressed as your dominant emotion fear impels
you to scrabble again for security, comfort and status. Days pass. Months pass. Years pass.
Time is running out, yet you pretend it is infinite. Soon there will be no more time. The
8.
moment for you to shine is now.
9. But you cannot shine if you are deeply in thrall to the twin enemies of fear and
ignorance. These teachings will release you from both.
10.You are terrified of change; you have a mortal fear of the unknown. This freezes you
into inaction and dull routine. Fear drives you to cling to the known, even as it slowly
destroys you.
11.You have another secret fear: that you are talented beyond measure; that your power
may know no bounds; that you have the energy and ability to make the world a better
place and to help your fellow travellers. You fear this because if you allowed yourself to
glimpse it, you would have to throw off your shackles and take bold, decisive action. You
would have to change. Slavery is more comforting and this is why you choose it. The
Master is not so bad. The hours are bearable. The work is not too excruciating. You can
survive for another year and then maybe see...
12.Now is the time to vow to change all this it is totally within your power. All that is
required is to wake up, become angry at what you have allowed to happen to you and then
to take action.

5
13. Here is what such a change could look like for you. You are financially free. That
means never having to work another day if you do not want to. You have enough money
to live a comfortable life but you have transcended ego and so your life is devoid of status
possessions. You are working with passion, energy and enthusiasm in work which you
love and which you believe is making a real difference to others. You are happy and
contented. You are free from almost all fear. You are an inspiration to others who seek out
your wisdom and guidance. This and more is within your grasp right now. Whilst small in
percentage terms, millions have achieved it, so this is not some fantasy.
Will you take the steps that are needed to arrive at this state yourself? Maybe this is
14.
why you are reading this book.

6
 Grade Four: Regaining Your Independence
1.This is how you are. You have allowed yourself to become a weak dependant. This is
not criticism it is an awakening.
2.Compared with your ancestors and compared with others far less fortunate than yourself
in the world today, you are weak beyond belief. You have sacrificed your dignity and
freedom for illusory safety.
3.You have allowed yourself to become soft and complacent with very little fight left.
Your warrior spirit has been broken, but not on the rocks of hard fought battles. Your
passion is a barely glowing cinder which never was scorched by the flames of a life lived
in the furnace of trials.
4.You sold your soul for comfort and safety long before the chance of real adventure
could arise. Whilst the few set sail for exotic new worlds, you remained on shore, working
in a humble counting house for a regular shilling a week. You are not alone. This is the
choice of the majority.
5.It is fear which keeps you here. Fear of failure and fear of success. You are terrified of
responsibility and wish for others to relieve you of this burden. They are happy to oblige
because the price you are willing to pay is everything. Your life, your soul, your
freedom, your happiness and your wealth all will be gladly given by you, if only they
will promise basic comfort and safety.
6.Some are dependent upon cradle-to-grave government paternalism. Nearly half of all
people are net recipients of government money. We expect the government to educate us,
feed us, protect us from enemies, compensate us if we are injured or financially
embarrassed, provide roads, railways and healthcare. Any attempts to reduce government
handouts are met with howls of indignation from the Thralls.
7.Some depend on religion with its message of a loving father watching over us and
protecting us a personal saviour to whom we can pray when the going gets tough. Others
bow and scrape in supplication to God directly, moaning incantations and begging for
special favours, prostrating themselves in the dust. Government and religious paternalism
resonates with our deepest desire to be children again and to return to a time when our all-
wise, all-loving parents would make everything alright; to a time when we were loved
unconditionally and had no responsibilities. The lure of this is very hard to resist.
8.Some are dependent upon the media with its litany of bad news and gloom which
enfeebles the human spirit and makes all efforts seem hopeless, just as it makes our own
drab lives seem bearable by comparison with the suffering of others.
9.Some are dependent upon drugs and alcohol with their pain-numbing properties. These
are the crutches that get them through another unbearable day of tedium which is a by-
product of choosing safety. When the soul has been crushed, the pain and despair can be
tempered by addictive chemicals.
10.Some are dependent upon comfort and luxury; shopping, consumerism, shiny baubles
and trinkets. When the spirit is polluted by pessimism and despondency, it seeks solace
and comfort in indulgences. When the outlet for our energy and talents is blocked we seek
to gratify and puff-up our egos with undeserved and entirely illusory status.

7
11.Some are dependent upon entertainment, and waste, on average, one thousand hours a
year in this pursuit. When the mind is diverted from the great work of life it seeks
amusement in trivia and inconsequential things. It takes just ten thousand hours to become
an expert at something which could change your life dramatically yet people elect to
spend 1,300 hours each year watching television (the average, with Internet, is 3.7 hours
per day).
12.Some are dependent upon being admired, lusted after, loved and wanted. When the soul
is driven into isolated loneliness by the seeming impossibility of being and shining, it cries
out for connection of any sort at any price.
13. This is how it will remain until you die, if you allow it.
14.But if you will it, you can break free, although it is not easy. You must seize back your
independence as much as is possible in this place and at this time. We live in an
interdependent world of course. You do not have to make your own car or sew your own
clothes, but here is what you must do: stop expecting others to save you, to look after you,
to nurture you. If they do, it is a wonderful unexpected bonus, but do not depend upon it.
Stop looking to others for answers about your life they do not have any for their own so
why should they have any for yours? People are entirely obsessed with their own lives and
have close to zero spare capacity to devote to yours. Do not expect help. If it comes, it is a
blessing but it is usually comes at a price. Vow to break free; to stand on your own two
feet; to follow your own dreams and ideas.
15.Do not give your power away to others. Do not bow your head in supplication to
anyone and certainly not to an illusory god. Get up out of the dust you are a glorious
human being and do not belong there with the worms and the cockroaches.
You are the equal of any person on the planet. Be proud but not egotistical. Be
16.
powerful, but gentle and caring.
17.Do not take any handouts except in the direst of emergencies and even then, know you
are selling your soul. Avoid interfacing with government as much as humanly possible in
the way a recovering addict must resolve to forsake his old haunts. If you are a net
recipient of government (i.e. other peoples) money, make it your urgent task to change
this as soon as is possible. No fully functioning, self-respecting person takes handouts
from others. It destroys your self-respect at the core.
18.Minimise (but do not exclude) entertainment this is diverting you from your true
calling and keeping you asleep. Use the thousands of hours and thousands of pounds saved
in order to advance your dreams.
19.Stop being dependent, weak, needy and seeking acknowledgement and validation from
others. They will pick up on your neediness and be repelled by it.
20. Do not fear your uniqueness. Do not care what others think about you.
21.Minimise, and ideally totally remove, all drugs from your life. These include non-
essential prescription drugs (after you have checked with your doctor); alcohol, tobacco
and recreational drugs. These last three are methods of controlling the masses to keep
them docile and in harness.
22.These steps will require you to engage your long-dormant will. Are you willing to do
that?

8
 Grade Five: Know Your Perfection
1.This is how you are. You are wonderful and perfect beyond measure but you do not
know it yet.
2.Your essential nature is love but you do not know that either, so these are mere words
to you. Until you know this, your life will be that of a controlled and unconscious puppet.
3.You have lost contact with your inner self, the real You; it is what you seek. If you could
but reconnect with it, you would be blinded by its light and power. These are not words to
comfort you, it is the truth.
4.The world has corrupted you and you are ensnared in its illusions. This has caused you
to fall asleep to lose consciousness, if you like. This means that you act largely
unconsciously, even though you might not yet believe this. You are not alone. Most of the
world is populated by unconscious Thralls.
5.The next phase of human evolution is increased consciousness. You can either be with
that wave, or against it. This is what is meant by the battle of light against dark, good
against evil. The battle is really between consciousness and ignorance.
6.No conscious person could hurt another. No conscious person would squander their lives
in trivia. No conscious person could stand by and not try to alleviate some of the terrible
suffering of the world. No conscious person would play it safe, hide in fear, posture, brag,
seek to control others, hate, despise, pollute their bodies with drugs and junk food, abase
themselves at the feet of an illusory god, accumulate ego possessions, become intoxicated,
fail to help others, lie, cheat, prostitute their talents, manipulate, deceive, sneer, feel
superior or spoil their minds with cheap ideas, cheap opinions and cheap slogans.
7.Your escape from this hell, for such it is, is to wake up from Wonderland and become
fully conscious. This is possible and it usually happens by degrees. If you will it, you too
can wake up and reveal what lies behind the veil. It is none other than You. The god you
seek outside has been inside all along. The tales you have heard of love, compassion, yes
and holiness, are tales about You. If only you would shine you would be the living god.
8.Your perfect essence has been covered by layers of protection against the slings and
arrows of a harsh world. This we call the ego. It is your ego which causes all of your
suffering and prevents you from realising your true nature and power. The ego tells you
that you are better than others or inadequate compared with others. Both serve to keep you
separate, alone and suffering.
9. You fear being hurt. The ego seeks to protect against this but only causes more hurt. The
flickering light seems so delicate that you feel it is best hidden away from the storm which
is the world. That is why you hid it so long ago; you have almost forgotten where, and
what it looks like. It has become The Holy Grail which you seek far and wide throughout
the kingdom, when all the time it was safe and close to your heart. You made a mistake all
those years ago a simple childish error. That which you thought lost forever is safe
within. This light cannot be extinguished by the gale. It grows stronger with exposure to
the elements just as it grows feeble and weak when hidden away. It is indestructible.
Now is the time to give yourself permission to shine once again, just like you did as a
10.
young child.

9
11.Our deepest fear is not that we are inadequate. Our deepest fear is that we are powerful
beyond measure. It is our light, not our darkness that most frightens us. We ask ourselves,
Who am I to be brilliant, gorgeous, talented, fabulous? Actually, who are you not to be? ...
Your playing small does not serve the world. There is nothing enlightened about shrinking
so that other people won't feel insecure around you.... it is not just in some of us; it is in
everyone. And as we let our own light shine, we unconsciously give other people
permission to do the same. As we are liberated from our own fear, our presence
automatically liberates others. Marianne Williamson.

10
 Grade Six: Your Quest For Wealth
1.This is how you are: you seek wealth but do not know why. You think you know why,
but right now it is unlikely that you do. This is not criticism it is an awakening.
2.The why precedes the wealth. Without a valid why you cannot become a wealthy
and contented person.
3. Some want money for security and survival. Some want it for comfort. Some want it for
lifestyle and status. These are very little whys and not worthy of your greatness. They
are survival whys. They are ego whys. They are comfort whys. You are greater than this.
You are more magnificent than these poor aspirations but you do not yet realise it. It may
be that you stay asleep never realising it. We shall see.
4.Some want money for space just to be free and to explore their inner world. This is the
beginning but not the end of wisdom.
5. Some want money to make the world a better place and aid their fellow travellers. This
is wisdom.
6.You may question the assertion that survival is a trivial reason for wanting money. It
was not always so in our past, and is not so in many poorer countries. But here, in the first
world, it is trivially easy to get your basic survival needs met. What consumes the bulk of
your precious time is striving for luxuries, comfort, status and prestige.
7. At the moment you almost certainly have less money than you would like and have
followed a life-path not necessarily of your choosing. You are almost certainly not
following your life calling and may even be unaware that you have one. You probably
also suspect that unseen forces are stopping you from getting ahead of the game.
8.There are several reasons why you are not free and not wealthy. These teachings expose
those who seek to enslave you and keep you powerless and poor. Knowing this allows you
to take avoiding action. They do this out of unconsciousness, not enmity, but you still
must protect yourself, just as you must protect yourself from a physical assailant. You will
be shown how to leave them far behind as your true power shines forth and guides you to
the wealth and freedom which you seek. You must also conquer some inner demons and
these teachings will show you how.
9.Due to programming since birth, most people are superficially greedy and lazy. They
want money for no effort so that they can buy more ego and status-driven consumables. In
short, they are deluded and are dissipating their life-energies. Soon they will die having
achieved little of note and leaving the planet in a worse condition than when they arrived.
10.They are trapped deeply in the debt illusion with the result that they sacrifice their lives
in the (usually fruitless) pursuit of cash and consumables. Their lives consist of work,
survival and entertainment (the bar, TV, sport, internet, shopping, eating out, holidays,
computer games, etc.). In this way they drift and dream their lives away whilst rushing
towards death.
11.This is about as far away as it is possible to get from Beyond Wealth philosophy. If you
are after fast cash to buy yourself toys, to consume more, to big yourself up, to feed your
ego, to assuage your terror, to prove yourself or just to have fun then the core message
of these teachings will not please you.

11
12.The teachings offer true wealth. For some that is many millions to put their unique
dream out into the world. For others it is an extra 20,000 a year and everything in
between. There is unlimited money out there for you but you have been using totally the
wrong method until now. You have been driven by a why which does not resonate with
your deeper values.
13. The proper use of money, over and above funding a reasonable lifestyle, is to improve
the lot of your fellow travellers. This is not altruism. Doing this brings contentment and
ultimately lasting happiness. It is therefore a selfish goal, not a selfless one. This is a key
point. Many will use the weapon of altruism in order to try and extort your life values
from you so you need to be watchful.
14.Almost all wealth seekers are trapped, either in fear-based lack mentality or ego-based
status mentality. Pity the poor person who is a millionaire in pocket but not in spirit.
15.Right now, you probably want money for security, comfort and status. You think the
principles of Beyond Wealth sound abstract and a little airy-fairy. You believe that when
you have a lot of money, all will be well. You believe that when you are rich, you will be
happy and then you can turn your mind to higher things if there is any spare time or
money. This is part of the delusion called Wonderland. The Author was deluded for thirty
years. Your task is to wake up as quickly as possible in order to propel yourself through
survival, through comfort, through ego and onwards Beyond Wealth.
16. A Beyond Wealth initiate has left the issue of money behind. He or she acts from a
position of power and strength. Money is secondary and can even come automatically in
the service of the higher ideal which is to improve the conditions of mankind or the planet
(with the aim of helping mankind). This is likely to seem puzzling to you at present as you
struggle for bare survival, or to build your mini ego-empire in your frantic search for
status, acknowledgement and respect. You have been struggling and building for years.
Doing more of the same will not bring you the wealth and happiness you seek.

Avoiding The Traps

17. These teaching aim to speed you through The Poverty Trap, The Security Trap and
The Ego Trap and rapidly into a state where you have all the money you could
conceivably desire. Enough to live on and enough to put your unique vision out into the
world. How much money is that? It depends on your dream. The bigger the dream, the
bigger the price tag. As an example, Bill Gates started life as an ordinary person. After the
success of Microsoft he transcended ego into the realm of Beyond Wealth. Guided by the
belief that every life has equal value, the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation now works to
help all people lead healthy, productive lives. In developing countries, it focuses on
improving peoples health and giving them the chance to lift themselves out of hunger and
extreme poverty. The amount invested by the foundation in the last fifteen years is three
billion dollars. Bill and Melinda are setting out to eradicate polio from the globe. That is a
big dream with a big price tag and yet Bill and Melinda probably started with less than
you have now.
Smaller dreams have a more modest price tag. The scale of the dream is not critical
18.
what matters is allowing your light to shine, maybe for the first time in your life.

12
19.Imagine if you were the one to make a huge difference to the lives of others. Imagine
ten people, a hundred people, ten thousand people being freed from destitution, grinding
poverty or starvation as a result of your vision.
20. Imagine saving a species. Imagine being instrumental in eradicating a disease, or
bringing water to the thirsty, or saving children from prostitution, or rescuing sick
animals. Imagine a beautiful place created by your willpower. It is you who cured the sick,
helped the lame to walk, fed the hungry, beautified a corner of planet. There are a million
dreams like this. These are just small examples. You have the power to bring such dreams
into the world.
21.Now contrast those dreams with the dream to live in a mansion; to lord it over others;
to own three cars a helicopter and a boat; to have a wardrobe full of ludicrously expensive
designer clothes, two holiday homes and a 30,000 Rolex watch. Imagine that your
dreams extend no further than lying on a beach in some exotic location being served iced
drinks. There is nothing wrong with living comfortably and a little luxury from time to
time of course, but imagine that these things are the full extent of your dream the
absolute pinnacle of your desires. What a desperate and shocking waste of human
potential, and yet this is what most wealth-seekers aspire to. Maybe you are still trapped
here?
22.You may not yet know what your dream is. That is because you are trapped in wage
slavery and have little free time or energy. Basically you are too tired, stressed and
worried to think about helping others. You believe you will do this one day when you
are a wealthy man or woman. That day will never come without a guiding hand.
23.These teachings aim to free you from slavery and poverty and help you uncover and
achieve your own unique life purpose.

The Beyond Wealth Mission Statement

24.The mission statement of Beyond Wealth is to free as many people as possible from
lack mentality, poverty, wage-slavery, control and disempowering beliefs which keep
them trapped and wasting their precious life-energies. This frees them to contribute to
humanity with their own unique energy, talents and purpose. This brings true contentment
and happiness.
25.Each awake, wealthy, free and happy individual touches many other lives. Thus the
effects of the teachings are spread and multiplied through example. That is why this book
came into being.
26. At any one time in evolution, only a tiny percentage of people are aware and conscious
enough to see the power of this mission and join it. The rest are destined to dream and
waste their lives trapped in poverty, slavery, mindless consumption, ego games and
illusion.
27. That is how it is. We do not rail against the given.
28. The teachings in this book are neutral and can be used to attain wealth for whatever
purpose you want, including all of the comfort, ego and status reasons above, but the aim
is to persuade you to walk in the sunlight Beyond Wealth. Ultimately this will depend
upon your level of consciousness.

13
29.If you are after instant cash and your vision extends no further than plans to buy
shiny, expensive toys with it, then Beyond Wealth will help you achieve this but realise
this is a very low consciousness goal and one which is unlikely to make you happy long
term. This book will help you raise the bar and be more than you dared to dream you
could be.

Five Serious Wealth Questions

Take some time now to ask yourself five serious questions about wealth:
Have you ever thought that others, who are no cleverer than you, were getting ahead,
30.
making great money and enjoying life but that some unseen force seemed to be stopping
you from joining them?
31.Have you worked hard most of your life but not really arrived where you long to be?
You are probably reasonably comfortable but do not have enough money to enjoy life
without working (if that is what you want). That is what financial freedom means.
32.Do you find that when you get your pay cheque it is almost immediately swallowed up,
not by luxuries, but by debt and the ordinary costs of living? Maybe you are slipping
further into debt with each passing year.
33.Have you also noticed how seemingly impossible it is to make more than a modest
wage, without someone trying (usually successfully) to take it away from you? It is almost
as if there is some plan to keep the poor working Thrall just above the poverty line. Just
when you think you are getting ahead of the game, along comes something to knock you
down, time after time. It does not seem to matter how much you struggle and strive, you
never quite seem to 'make it'.
34.Have you ever suspected that there was more to your life than an endless round of
working, consumption and entertainment? Have you ever thought you had something to
give to the world? You may not know what it is, but you suspect it is there. The pressures
of survival have so far prevented you from giving it more than scant attention. You hope
one day to be able to look into this. Is that you?
35.To awaken you to a wonderful life of power, wealth and freedom, you must first
glimpse the truth of this, then open both of your eyes fully and start out on an amazing
adventure which leads to your dream life. If you have ever thought you were worth more,
that you could achieve more, do more, contribute more, help more, be freer, wealthier,
more powerful, happier but that something seemed to be stopping you, then maybe
just maybe now is the moment to step out of prison and awaken to your true potential. If
you are on the threshold of awakening, Beyond Wealth can give you the quantum leap
you need.
36. Take some time now to write out your genuine reasons for wanting to become wealthy.
Do not pretend to aspire to greater things if they do not resonate with you right now. You
are where you are and it is the task of these teachings to raise your consciousness. So be
honest. What do you want money for? If you won the lottery, what would you do with it?
These are likely to be small whys but even these are far preferable to no guiding
principles at all.

14
 Grade Seven: Why You Seek Escape
1. What are your needs?
2.To have a hope of escaping from Wonderland, you have got to have a why. You
cannot just hurl yourself at the barbed wire; you will lose energy and momentum. Soon
you will be escorted back to Wonderland control.
3. What is driving you to escape?
4.All your actions and desires are driven by your needs. This might be your need for
approval, recognition, status, safety, love, food, shelter or any one of fifty different
needs. So when thinking about your dreams, remember the concept called the hierarchy
of needs you might have come across this before. It goes like this:

The Hierarchy of Needs

5.When life is a desperate struggle, we are overwhelmingly consumed with the desire for
food. Every waking moment is spent in pursuit of nourishment. Nothing else matters. We
scour the earth from dawn until dusk with little on our mind apart from the thrill of
discovering another root or berry. There is little time for philosophy or self fulfilment. We
work, we sleep, we eat if we are lucky.
6.Food is the first need, assuming we have basics such as air and water. If, due to human
ingenuity, we manage to crack the food supply problem, our next need becomes shelter
and warmth somewhere cosy to lay our heads at night. If we achieve all of these things,
the next thing we seek is love and belongingness.
7. And after that? Recognition, self-esteem and the esteem of our peers.
8. The final higher consciousness needs are meaning, purpose and fulfilment.
9.This is a very important realisation for you. It is very likely that you already have water,
sufficient food, a roof over your head, a modest amount of money and a certain amount of
love and friendship. Therefore your dreams will almost certainly reflect your next need on
the list which is your desire for recognition, self-esteem, admiration, respect,
acknowledgement, achievement and so on.
10.These are called ego needs. It is the level at which most people are currently trapped.
If you want ten million pounds, then this is almost certainly an ego need unless you have
transcended into the higher realms of consciousness. You want the money because you
want to be somebody and have the respect and admiration of society, not because you
need a larger house or extra food. In other words, your dreams of wealth are likely to be
driven by your need for respect, efficacy and acknowledgement. It is important to know
these things. This is the sort of knowledge which will allow you to break free.
11.Recognising your ego-desire for adulation, fame, infamy call it what you will helps
to clear your head and focus your mind more firmly on your goals. It can also help you to
detect erroneous or incorrect dreams.
12. Yes, there are such things as incorrect dreams!
13.An incorrect dream is defined as an overly complex or grandiose strategy for filling a
simple need, when a far simpler (and more achievable) strategy might suffice.

15
14.Achieving a net worth of ten million pounds is actually a difficult task and one which
will exercise you for the next five or ten years at least. There is absolutely nothing wrong
with this, if it is what you really desire. But if this dream is being driven by a craving for
recognition, admiration or respect then there may be an easier way of satisfying your ego
desires without going through the decade of effort required to amass ten million (one
million is much easier and can be achieved in a year or two).
Perhaps you can get the recognition you crave in some other simpler way by writing a
15.
book, appearing on television, being a star in your local community or any one of a
hundred easier ways.
16. It is just something for you to think about

Recognition or Money?
17.Once you understand that it is our ego-need for recognition, not money, which drives
most people in an affluent Western society, you will be less puzzled by the things that are
going on around you.
18.The rise in crime and delinquency for example is not caused by poverty, it is caused by
tens of thousands of young petty crooks wanting to be somebody, or teach society a
lesson or to 'get respect' they are, if you like, ego crimes not fiscal crimes.
19. A century ago most crime was survival crime. People stole to eat. Vandalism was
almost unknown. A vandal leaves his or her mark on the furniture of society it is a
statement of ego.
20.The dramatic rise in divorce rate has little to do with people being worse husbands or
wives these days, compared with the past. If anything, they are a lot better. It is driven by
people's desire for recognition. They want to be appreciated and acknowledged. They are
not prepared to suffer the drudgery of marriage without reward. A century ago this would
have been unthinkable. You stayed married because the survival of your family was at
stake. Your precious thoughts of wanting appreciation were inconsequential in the
struggle for plain survival.
21.Look at advertising on television. Most products are sold on the basis of raising your
self-esteem, not on the benefits of the product. Most adverts these days have the hidden
message 'be somebody.'
22.So learn to look at your dreams with a critical eye. Ask yourself what the underlying
need is behind the dream and then ask yourself if getting rich is the only way you can
achieve it. Do not get fixated on the actual method or strategy of getting the need met;
often there are many different ways of achieving satisfaction. First work out what the
actual need is, and then plan the simplest, most realistic strategy for meeting it. That may
not be amassing untold wealth.
23.Many people struggle throughout their lives to make big money only to find that when
they have got it, they still feel hollow and empty. Many millionaires are in this state. This
is because the money was just a symbol for the underlying need which still has not been
met. This is not, of course, the same statement as poverty is good!
24.A classic case would be a woman who sacrifices everything to reach the top of her
profession and makes a lot of money, only to realise that she has spent twenty years trying
to gain her father's approval and love and this was the way she thought she could get it.
16
What a hard route and it did not work! If only she had recognised the underlying need
(for approval and love) and considered some alternative strategies, any one of which could
have been far easier than the struggle she put herself through.
25.Beyond Wealth is all about propelling you as fast as possible through these ego needs
and on to the real deal meeting the higher level needs. These are what we are all longing
to fill in our hearts. Peace, love, meaning, contribution, purpose, fulfilment. We long to be
a part of something larger than ourselves. In our hearts we are weary of our pettiness and
our greed for status and comfort. The fact that you are reading this book means that you
have probably glimpsed this already.

17
 Grade Eight: The Illusion of Finite Wealth
1. Earlier the term meme was mentioned. A meme is a commonly held, widespread
belief. Very often such beliefs are false, or sometimes they are an almost infinitely small
slice of The Truth.
2.Many memes have the function of controlling people and keeping them docile and in
harness.
3. An example of such a meme is The Finite Pot of Wealth.
4.This illusion stops many kind, well-meaning but powerless Thralls from achieving their
dreams. The message of the meme is this: There is a finite pot of wealth in the world and
every hand that dips into the pot to grab a handful of money means there is less for
everyone else. Some greedy people grab more than their share, meaning there is none left
for others. Consequently they starve or live in squalor. If you are a caring person, you do
not want to cause that suffering, so keep your hands out of the pot in order that there may
be more for those who really deserve it.
5.In our unconscious, corrupt, greedy and exploitative world there is a sense in which this
is true of course. There are countless stories of greed and exploitation resulting in misery
for others. But a deeper truth, and one you rarely hear, is that the pot is almost infinite in
size when you see money in the correct way and not in the distorted way spun by the
media, films, politicians, religious people and television.
6.It is clear you cannot become guiltlessly wealthy if you believe this meme. You may
become wealthy, but it will always pain you if you believe that your wealth was somehow
gained at the expense of others.
The truth is very different and rarely discussed. It is this: making a large amount of
7.
money can actually increase human wellbeing and wealth, not decrease it.
8. Surely that is the only decent and honourable way to become wealthy?
9.How is this possible? This is hugely important because people have such confusion and
guilt over money that it is time the truth was told. If you are a caring person, then of
course you do not want to greedily grab more than your share at the expense of those less
fortunate.
10.What a perfect tool of control this is. If your idea is to loot as much money from the
Thralls as possible; what better way than to get them to believe that money is bad; that
trying to get wealthy is greedy; that the money you make is taken out of the mouths of
starving children in the third world or has been grabbed from the poor defenceless folk
living in urban poverty. It is diabolically clever. You simultaneously loot people and
brainwash them into believing that making a lot of money is evil.

Wealth Creation For All

11. For illustration purposes, here is an example of how someone could make (say) one
billion pounds and simultaneously enhance the lot of their fellow man and make each one
of them wealthier, not poorer. Please note this is an illustration of a wealth principle you
are not being asked to become an inventor!

18
12.Imagine the motor car had not yet been invented. Let us also imagine the average
person spends two hours a day walking around doing the routine errands of life, say to the
market and back home again. You come along and invent a simple motor car. It takes you
many hundreds of hours of thought and work, but eventually you crack it. Sales are brisk
and soon almost everyone has a car. All you ask is 100 royalty per car sold so you get
one billion pounds immediately with another few tens of billions around the corner. If
100 seems high, let us make it 1 to illustrate the point. You would still make hundreds
of millions.
13.According to the (entirely false) finite pot of money illusion, the world must now be a
poorer place since you have greedily grabbed one billion pounds. Some poor losers must
have lost out to your con and be starving even as you stack another gold bar in your
vault and rub your hands together in glee. But wait something is not quite right with that
logic. The opposite has happened.
14.Your invention has released two billion hours of creative work per day since people no
longer have to waste time walking endless miles to get food and provisions. They are all
two hours a day wealthier and that time could, of course, be turned into hard cash. You
have made yourself wealthy and made others wealthy and made their lives better.
15.If you are still struggling with this, think of it this way. The royalty you receive for
your car is (say) ten minutes each day of work from each of a billion people they get to
keep the one hour fifty minutes which you have created for them. Obviously with that
amount of work being done for you every day (thousands of man hours), you would be
rich beyond the wildest of dreams.
16.This is what happens when money is used correctly in the service of true human
needs. Please read that last sentence again. It indicates the way for you to become
guiltlessly wealthy (not by inventing the motor car of course!).
Few things are better than making a lot of money and contributing to the happiness and
17.
wellbeing of your fellow humans. This should be the object of any financial endeavour
you engage in.
18. To underline the point, here is a further example. Your house is falling down and you
know nothing about brickwork. It would take you one hundred hours to fix the walls, and
still it would be a poor job. You hire a bricklayer who does it perfectly in twenty hours.
You pay the bricklayer forty hours of your time (or the money equivalent of course).
Havent you both gained? Check the sums. The bricklayer worked for just twenty hours
and got paid forty hours so he is richer by twenty hours. You saved yourself sixty hours
on a job which would have taken you one hundred hours and so you are richer by sixty
hours, having paid just forty hours. You are both richer. In a sophisticated society we pay
each other in money, not time but it amounts to the same thing. It is this division of
labour which is behind the startling improvement in peoples standards of living over the
decades, of course.
19.This powerful thought should now release you from this illusion. It is possible to
achieve guiltless wealth. It is possible to become wealthy without harming others. It is
possible to become wealthy and help others to be happier and wealthier too.
20.In fact, this is the only honourable way of making money by meeting true human
needs.
19
Grade Nine: The Secret Link Between Wealth and Happiness
1.There is another big illusion (meme) which the majority believe unquestioningly.
Simply stated it is: The more money you have, the happier you will be.
2. This is maybe the primary illusion of our time.
3.Many people pay lip-service to the opposite. They will say: Money doesnt make you
happy. yet in their hearts, they yearn to be wealthy. Many such people do lotteries,
hoping against hope to win millions.
4.Most people believe that money will bring them happiness
and this is despite their own personal experience and despite the
experience of almost every rich person they know something
about.
5. Think about wealthy pop stars, footballers, television soap
stars and suchlike. Do they seem happy, contented, wise and
calm? Or are their lives usually a sordid mess of booze, drugs,
shattered relationships, unseemly brawls in clubs and ego-driven
tantrums?
6. Maybe that is a peculiarity of show-biz, so think about
wealthy city banker types who are often overweight, bored
with life and usually trapped in a deeply unhappy marriage
which they maintain for the sake of appearances; or oil-rich Sheiks who live a life of
reckless and greedy indulgence.
7. Yet still we cling to the MONEY = HAPPINESS illusion.
8.Forget the rich and famous. Think of yourself. Your own life experience shows you that
every time you thought a windfall of cash would make you happy, when you got it, the joy
was fleeting and within a few short weeks or months you returned to normal. The new car,
the holiday, the sofa, the redecoration of the living room all of these things brought you
just a quick fix of happiness. Soon you were back to normal.
If you have ever owned a new car you will know that you were excited when you drove it
out of the showroom, but a month later, you just threw your briefcase or handbag in the
back and drove off without thinking about it. It is just another car, after all.

9. This is vitally important because this is a book on wealth creation and it seems pointless
to go for wealth if we cannot first make some sensible link between wealth and happiness.
After all, surely it is happiness which you seek? We do not want freedom from control for
its own sake. What is the point in being free and miserable? We want that freedom

20
because we want to be happier. When we think about getting more money, we do not want
it for its own sake we think of the things we can do with it, and imagine being happier as
a result.
10.You may still be stuck at the give me the cash and let me sort it out level, and believe
the con that buying expensive toys will bring you happiness. It will not. All that does is
transfer your money (i.e. life) into the hands of the operators of Wonderland who will
gladly take it from you.
Lottery-winner surveys frequently show that people who win a fortune are either more
11.
unhappy a year later, or about the same as they were before the huge win.
12. A few are happier and it is these people who interest us for they have accidentally
discovered a secret which you need to know.
13. They have discovered the real truth about money and happiness.

The Real Truth About Money and Happiness

14. Some people say money brings happiness they are mostly wrong.
15. Some people say money brings unhappiness they are mostly wrong, too.
So what is the real truth about money and happiness? First, let us agree that our target is
16.
happiness, not money. You may want money, but it is just a tool to allow you to live a
contented happy life. Money is not an end in itself. The object is not to amass a glittering
tower of gold and sit on top of it gloating. That is, in fact, a very poverty-stricken life.
17. We do not have to guess at the link between happiness and money, because the truth is
well known, although you may not have seen it before. Careful research has been
conducted on how increasing amounts of money affects peoples level of contentment, and
the results are fascinating.
18.This research indicates that if you are desperately poor and barely existing on (say) 5 a
day, then getting a raise to 10 a day has a dramatic impact upon your happiness.
Doubling your income approximately doubles your happiness. If you now increase this to
50 a day (in other words, by five times more), yes, your happiness goes up, but only by,
say, 50%. So increasing your salary by five times now only increases your happiness by
one half! Interesting
19.We can play this game as long as we like, but you can see where this is going. If you
make 20,000.00 a year, then doubling it to
40,000.00 a year brings a mere 10% increase
in happiness (these figures can never be exact
of course, they vary from person to person.) If
you make one million a year, then increasing
this to ten million a year also may bring about
a 10% happiness increase.
In other words, getting ten times the money
20.
now brings only one tenth more happiness.
You know it from your own direct experience
of course. If you like graphs, this theory
would look a bit like the one shown here.

21
21.It seems in the light of this that we should abandon our intense longing to become
wealthier and just settle for what we have. Even a substantial amount of money only
seems to increase our happiness by a few percentage points, if at all. People with a
socialist leaning seize upon such graphs as proof that greedy materialism is a bad thing.
22.If this graph were the whole story, you would rightly wonder why this book about
wealth creation came into existence. However, there is another missing piece of the jigsaw
and one which is always ignored by those on the political left.

The Quality of Money

23.So far we have only discussed faceless cash the quantity of it, not the quality of it.
And herein lies the secret relationship between wealth and happiness. It can be
summarised in the following true story recently told to the Author by a Christian friend of
his. This mans son had come to him and said Dad, I know what I want to do when I
grow up. I want to make lots and lots of money! His father had mildly reproved him,
saying something along the lines of: Thats not very Christian, son. To which the lad
immediately replied But Dad, I havent told you what I want to do with the money yet!
24.Money itself is neutral. It is what you do with the money which adds to, or subtracts
from your happiness and the wellbeing of others, and remember, it is happiness we want,
not just money. Money is merely a tool.
25.Most people chase more money without knowing how much they want, or what they
want it for. At best, they have some vague notion of buying more toys maybe a
conservatory, a new sofa, one or two flashy cars, expensive holidays, a fancy watch,
designer clothes... all of the consumer junk which, to be fair, they have had sold to them
since they were old enough to watch television. So it is no surprise that when people win
the lottery, they buy a big fancy house, five cars, expensive label clothes, a boat, a plane,
jewellery and other silly (but shiny) baubles and trinkets. When they have done all that,
they sit back and wonder why they are no happier or maybe why they are even more
miserable than before they received their windfall.
Ask yourself again why you want more money than you have already and how much
26.
you want.
27.Think about these things just for a moment. It is truly hopeless plunging headlong into a
search for something (money) without a firm idea of what you want the money for or
when you are going to have enough if ever!
28. Money is not for buying trivial but expensive consumer toys. Nor is it for buying pretty
little baubles to amuse yourself with. Nor is it for gluttony, greedy consumerism, gaining
status over your fellow life-travellers, manipulation and negative power. These are all
memes which you have been brainwashed over decades into accepting. It is these and
countless thousands of other memes which lock you into Wonderland.
29.Many people who have money use it for all these things and more. And since each of
these things contributes to unhappiness, you can see why the graph starts to flatten-off the
more money you have. Unlessyou get real and start to understand the link between
money and happiness, which will now be explained.
30.Once you use money in the correct way first to free yourself and then to create
guiltless wealth and/or happiness for yourself and others, then the happiness money
22
chart looks far more like the one shown below. The more money you get, the happier you
are. A simple story will illustrate this. Imagine your dream is to fund a simple operation
which restores the sight of an African child. The more money you have, the more
operations you can fund. The more
children you save from blindness, the more
your happiness will increase. You need
hardly contrast this sort of happiness with
the happiness attained by getting the
ninth sports car in your collection, or the
fiftieth expensive oil painting.
31.Do not make the mistake of thinking
that the only route to happiness is to
accumulate money and spend it wisely.
That is not what the graph shows it
shows that if you make money and you
spend it wisely in the service of human
needs, then you will get increased
happiness.
32.It says absolutely nothing about other ways of gaining the same happiness of which
there are many.
33.Happiness comes from becoming free and then using the money in a way which meets
our need to aid the growth of other people. Meeting this need is selfish it brings us
increased happiness, just as it brings happiness to others. This form of rational selfishness
is a very good thing.
34.This may be completely contrary to everything you have ever believed about money.
We have been taught that wealthy people must have got it by grabbing it from the poor
and thereby contributing to their poverty and misery. We believe that wealth is a zero sum
game your wealth must have come at the expense of others. Why do you believe some
version of this lie? It is because the con artists have brainwashed you with the greedy
robber baron meme. It serves to keep you poor and them rich and powerful. After all, you
do not want to become one of those nasty, cigar-chomping greedy capitalist pigs, do you?
No. Better to stay poor, humble, meek and mild. You will get your reward when you die.

23
 Grade Ten: Beyond Financial Freedom
1.These teachings show you how to get the freedom to be who you really are (you
probably have no idea about this at the moment); power to create your dream and make it
happen, and most importantly enough guiltless wealth to achieve this. That means as much
money as you could possibly ever want.
2.Why is this a book about wealth? Because money gives you the pass key to your cell
door. Money is not for greedily consuming loads of disposable products, as you have seen.
3.Money is for buying your freedom from wage slavery and then putting your dream out
into the world and making it a better place.
4.You may not share this vision yet. You may scratch your head and wonder what dream
you could possibly have. It may even seem weird or a bit flaky to you. That is normal. At
this stage you should not be actively against such a vision. There is an exciting road ahead
of you.
5.The first benefit of applying the teachings in this book will be to attain Financial
Freedom.
6. This is defined as: enough income, without having to work for it, to cover your chosen
lifestyle forever (barring dramatic changes).
7.You get to choose your lifestyle (it could be anything from a Zen monk to a super-
wealthy life) and then you get enough money so that you can live like this for the rest of
your days without ever having to work again. Of course you can work if it brings you
pleasure and furthers your true purpose on this planet but you dont have to. No more
jobs, bosses, commuting, office politics, stress and hassle.
8.Achievable? Most definitely. And it does not stop there as you will see. The sky is the
limit if you want it.
9.Achieving financial freedom is just the start. You are not a wealthy man or woman at
this stage, you are merely free. That means you can live comfortably without working.
When students arrive at this financial freedom stage they need to answer the question:
What is the money for? Of course they will have thought about this often on their
journey.

Five Reasons For Wanting Money

10.There are five usual answers to this depending on the level of the persons
consciousness:
I want money so that I and my family can be secure.
I want money for comfort, pleasure and lifestyle.
I want money to build my mini empire.
I want money just to be still, at peace and to reconnect with my inner self.
I want money to help others and make the world a better place.
Many people want to do more than one of these things.
11.Imagine that! You are free. You need never work again. You are comfortable, totally
secure, and you can help others (friends, family those less fortunate). If you have a passion

24
or a dream you also get enough money for that too. One student was keen on collecting
omnibuses and he uses his considerable fortune (obtained through Beyond Wealth
techniques) to buy buses!
12.Fun though it is, you should know that such a life-plan is fairly low-consciousness
according to Beyond Wealth teachings. It is what is called an ego-plan.
13.There is way more to life than living through fear (desire for security); living for
comfort and status (desire to boost ego); or empire building (more ego). None of these is
the noble purpose of your life. That might surprise and excite you.
14.Is it time you seized control of your life? Tens of thousands of people have escaped
from wage-slavery and are living wealthy, free lives fulfilling their unique destinies.
You have always been programmed to believe you were excluded.
15.Soon, you could be the one enjoying a wealthy and free life. You could be the one
realising that you have a unique purpose and set of gifts which can help others and the
planet. With the free time and the money, you can now put those gifts to work.

25
 Grade Eleven: Power
1. These teachings show you how to attain wealth, freedom... and power.
2. What do you think about power? Take a moment to think about it. Power is a meme.
3.Power has a bad press. It is associated with cackling maniacs poised over the lever-that-
will-destroy-the-world, ready to pull unless one trillion dollars is transferred to their Swiss
account.
4.Power is associated with back-stabbing corporate types; lying, scheming politicians;
organised crime; manipulative billionaires and despotic regimes the list of bad uses of
power is very long indeed.
5.But what about the good uses of power? You rarely hear about those. Why do you
suppose that is?
6.What about the power to heal? The power to build a dam which brings life-giving
electricity? The power to make positive changes in your community? The power to save a
species, create a business, feed the starving?
Power can also be a truly enormous force for good, but your Wonderland masters do not
7.
want you to realise that because they do not want you to have power.
8.Living a life of power means you move out into the world with positive power the
power to bring enormous change for good.
9.Hopefully you can see this, because power, like money, has been deliberately smeared to
make you unhappy about seeking it the result is that most people spend their lives in
neurosis desperately wanting money but believing it is evil desperately wanting
power but believing it is only harmful.
10.These teachings will show you how to be who you really want to be and to have a
dramatic positive impact on the world and those around you.

Learning to be Comfortable With power

11.Money gives you more choices in life. It also brings you power and freedom if used
correctly. So to be comfortable with becoming wealthy, you need to be comfortable with
the notion of having personal power. Many people are deeply uncomfortable with this
again because all they ever hear about are the negative, corrupting aspects of power.
12.Power has the same bad press as money. Do you think those in control of Wonderland
might have some interest in promulgating a meme that power is evil? How convenient
that those who are being looted of their values also sign-up for a meme which says that
being meek and mild is a good thing?
13. Are you starting to glimpse how Wonderland works?
14.Most people have chosen to be weak and powerless; they did not have this forced upon
them. Most people do nothing in their lives to change the world for the better. They are
born, they consume and they die leaving little positive impact. They dream away their
lives in Wonderland. Sad but true.
15.The effect of this is paralysis and a life lived at about one tenth capacity. You are
revving the accelerator whilst standing firmly on the brake. Now pause for a moment and
ask yourself who might want you in this state and why.
26
16. Do you want that for yourself? Was that part of your plan?
17.Personal power is the difference between giving a pound to a homeless person or
creating a nationwide charity (not just giving to one) which provides temporary shelter to
thousands of homeless street people (assuming this is something you are passionate about,
of course.) Again, the more money you had, the happier you would be.
It is spending your life creating marvellous childrens stories which delight and inspire
18.
generations, compared with churning out tedious reports which are never read.
19.It is starting your own superb business which is hugely profitable and which produces
goods and services which enhance the lives of others, compared with working in someone
elses mediocre business because you need the money to pay the gas bill and the
mortgage.
20. It is becoming a sportsman or sportswoman compared with watching sport on the
television.
21. Which is the more powerful life? Is this power evil?
22.Stop having childish fantasies about power (or money) coming for no change on your
part. This is a delusion. Power and money come through effort. Thousands of hours of
discipline and honing your skills until you are lean and mean. Forget the snake-oil
purveyors of quick and easy power and wealth solutions they are there to exploit your
greed and childishness.
23. Become serious about gaining power positive power to make the world a better place.
Fight the meme that conditions you to believe that power is evil and ultimately corrupting.
This is not true of positive power.
24.Do not pretend to be humble you are not that great! True humility arises from a basis
of personal power, not cowed servility. Only the great in spirit can be humble with
integrity.
25.Do not let others walk over you. Fight your corner. Not with anger and hatred but with
determination and fearlessness.
26.Be wary of the meek. With certain rare exceptions they are often deeply angry. Like the
cowed runt of the pack, their meekness is a learned strategy to avoid conflict. Often they
crave negative power but currently lack the wherewithal to gain it. If they do gain power
they often show their true colours.
27. You will know genuine humility (and hence genuine power) when you see it. This is
not the same as fake meekness. There is a luminous, undefended quality to it which
arises from spiritual attainment. It will never have a crafty, subserviant or hungry quality
to it.

27
 Grade Twelve: Who is Controlling You and Why?
1.To become wealthy you need to break the bonds of servitude. You need to rise above
Thralldom.
2.Allowing yourself to remain enthralled has serious consequences for your life, your
happiness and your freedom. It is also impossible to become wealthy as a Thrall.
3. Due to the deep unconsciousness of your fellow travellers, being a Thrall opens you up
to exploitation. You need to understand that there are dark forces arrayed against you. You
need to unmask them so that you will not be damaged. I wish it were not so, but in a world
of unconscious people, the light of love is sometimes very dim.
4.There is light in the world of course. There are many awakened, loving and wise people
who will aid your journey. But it is very hard to see them when you are a Thrall.
Somehow they are invisible. You push them away and even seek to destroy them. Such is
the power of unconsciousness.
5.On the shadow side, there are people in the world thousands of them millions of
them who want your money, your talents and your life-efforts for themselves. They are
driven by fear and lack-programming and victim mentality. The more dangerous ones are
driven by ego, status and negative power. For them, almost any means justifies the ends of
getting resources. Their motive is simplicity itself. If they can con these values out of a
Thrall, they can enjoy many of the wonderful things that life has to offer just as you will
enjoy less.

Forgive and do Not Try to Redeem

6.They are not evil. There is no evil in the world, just love screaming to be heard. Like
you, these people know not what they do and hence require our forgiveness not our
violence. Yet we must protect ourselves from them as well. They are us, on a different day
in a different year, with different genes and a different upbringing. We acknowledge that
this is how they are; we forgive them; we avoid them if they seek to damage us. Only at
the very higher grades might you try to redeem them, for this is a very fraught business
requiring superior skill and considerable enlightenment. For now, do not attempt it.
7. There are others who will love and support us. We must seek them out as allies for it is
hard to walk this path alone. However, often we only see angels when we begin to wake
up. Until then, we only see demons.
8. Wonderland is a world view promulgated by those with a vested interest in dream-
weaving. This dream they weave is very convincing it seems indistinguishable from
reality. The dream is used, amongst other things, to extract values from the weak and
gullible Thralls.
9.Exposing their con-tricks allows you to stop being taken advantage of. True wealth and
power can only be achieved by waking up from your dream world.
10.These teachings are intended to wake you up. This will not be easy. You have never
been awake before. Your dream world has seemed totally real to you and you have
rarely, if ever questioned it (except perhaps recently). It is frightening to have it wobbled,
even slightly. Hold on because the truth will set you free.

28
11.Why would you be controlled, manipulated and deceived by other Thralls in
Wonderland? Simple: so that they might profit from your efforts. In their
unconsciousness, this seems reasonable to them. We do not blame them, we merely
observe and avoid.
12.Your life-values have been consistently stolen from you by others. And you have not
even noticed! Most times you have handed over your values like an obedient zombie.
13. But why would someone take money from you unfairly like this? Why would they take
advantage of your weakness? After all, it is hardly sporting to rob a drunk or a sleeping
person. Their motive is not so hard to understand. If they can profit from your efforts, for
no work whatsoever on their part, that is a terrific deal for them. It is a clever trick. Yet it
seems inconceivable that anyone could pull off such a stunt. Who in their right mind
would fall for this? How on earth do they get away with it?
14.The very best way is to keep you asleep drifting and dreaming your way through life.
The last thing they want is for you to wake up, because then you would stop working for
their profit. It stands to reason. If you were to wake up, you would want to get wealthy
too. You would want to keep the values and money you created and not allow them to be
confiscated. You would not fall for adverts which hypnotise you into handing over your
hard-earned money for trash. The Cash For Trash deal. You would not squander parts of
your life in futile religious nonsense. You would not allow your friends and family to
hold you down to their level of squalor and powerlessness or to leech from you. You
would want freedom and power and would no longer be content to be a caged worker-
drone watching others live powerful, fun-filled lives at your expense!
15.But how do they stop you claiming your birthright? How can they keep you willingly
enslaved like this? You are really not going to like this because what they do is leave you
just enough so that you can pretend to be in control, pretend to have ambitions and
pretend to reach your goals, when all along, you are a powerless slave. It is diabolically
clever.

The Pharaoh Principle

16. This is called The Pharaoh Principle. In ancient Egypt the kings were under the
delusion that they were divine. This brought a lot of willing Thralls to worship them, slave
for them and provide for their every need, including dying in their thousands to construct
their final resting places. Please be clear. The Egyptian Thralls sacrificed a huge portion of
their lives to keep the Pharaohs in luxury.
17.The Egyptian Thralls were deep into their own Wonderland and had probably never
questioned if any of this fantasy about divine kings was actually true. They almost
certainly did not see through into a deeper level of reality. The truth was that one Egyptian
was conning values out of thousands of other Egyptian by putting on some kingly clothes
and a big head-dress and pretending to be a mini-god. Back then you would have been
considered insane if you had tried to expose this ridiculous illusion. Everyone believed it,
including the Pharaohs.
18.The principle is the same today. If a 'Pharaoh' can con you and other slaves into
sacrificing your life-efforts, then the 'Pharaoh' can obviously enjoy more of the good

29
things in life, just as you enjoy less. And that is what has been happening to you for
years. All of your life, in fact.
19. The truth is you are broke (by any sensible definition of the word). You are powerless
(almost all personal power has been stripped from you). And you are enslaved (any
illusion of freedom you might entertain is just that an illusion.)
20. Do not despair. You could not help being a Thrall until now, that is. Alone and
unaided it is almost impossible for someone to realise they are fast asleep in Wonderland.
It would take an extraordinary effort to wake up unaided because life around you seems so
real; the society you live in seems so normal; governments seem so essential; TV, radio
and movies seem such fun; newspapers seem so informative; taxation appears such a
reasonable idea, so do ID cards, spy cameras, DNA profiling, satellite tracking,
government databases, chip implants, tags and 101 other tools of state control.
Exploitative big businesses seems so inevitable; advertising seems just a part of normal
life; religions seem so comforting.

Hall of Mirrors
21. There are dozens of mirrors in this hall and you have probably never thought to
question the reflections you see there. Why should you? You have been taught since birth
that they are not distortions at all but reality. How things should be!
22. You have been bedazzled and confused. If you are struggling to get your brain around
all of this, it is not surprising. You see you have never learned how to use it. If you
think it is hard to de-program someone from a religious cult, that is trivial compared with
waking up from Wonderland unaided. Few people can manage it alone.
23.The terrifying truth is that you were born in servitude, you have spent your entire life
(until now) ensnared in its illusions, and you were scheduled to die in Wonderland (like
billions of others) after you have been drained of your energies and talents and outlived
your usefulness.
24.You do not have to accept this of course. You can stay asleep and dreaming, or you can
wake up and join the thousands of other escapees in a glittering life of wealth, power and
freedom. Right now, they do not yet have complete control over us. They are working
towards this end, but right now it is still possible to escape. But the truth is that you are
most unlikely to believe this unless you have already suspected that something funny is
going on if you are that 1 in 1000 who is on the verge of waking up.
25.Maybe you have a question along these lines: You have explained why they might
like to exploit me, but who has been doing this to me? In other words, who are they?
26.Firstly, please know one thing. There is no global conspiracy where world leaders meet
behind closed doors together with religious leaders and heads of big business to plot the
fate of the world. There are lots (millions, in fact) of mini-conspiracies of course. Big
Business conspires to maximise its profits; religious leaders conspire to maximise their
flocks; politicians conspire individually and in small gangs to cling on to or attain
power; media conspires to maximise circulation or viewing figures; individuals
conspire to climb ladders of power.
27.But there is no secret cabal of Jewish bankers, no Illuminati or white-coated
government technocrats meeting in an underground bunker to see how they can
30
manipulate the docile puppet-population this week. Such fantasies, like alien abductions
and faked moon landings are for conspiracy theory dreamers; powerless people trapped
deeper than most in Wonderland.
28. The truth is far easier to understand and far more frightening. Like any good detective,
if you want to find a culprit you can start by asking: What is the motive?
29.The motives are money and power; two very powerful reasons for exploiting you. It is
not a conspiracy, it is a straightforward heist.

The Wonderland Business

30.For example there are billions to be made each day from the The Wonderland
Business. There are vast profits and huge power to be gained in keeping us fast asleep
and dreaming. This is why governments, advertisers and religions all have the same
agenda to keep us asleep.
31.There are many examples of people who want your money because they are greedy for
power and unearned cash and the best way the absolute taking candy from a baby
way to get it is to hypnotise you into handing it over without a murmur even with a
smile on your lips. You, for example, hand over 50% of everything you earn to
government bureaucrats to squander on whatever they feel like, even if that is murdering
innocent people (e.g. troops in places they have no business being), supporting despotic
regimes (the list is too long to include here), handing out free to people to sit at home
doing nothing, or to build nuclear weapons designed to incinerate millions of civilians, or
destroying the environment. You do this without a murmur of protest. You have no say in
how your money is spent and you cower in fear about what they will do to you if you
disobey. This single fact alone should cause you to question your imagined freedom.
32. Another example is advertising. Watch any advert selling anything from cars to
hairspray and note how most of them are in the dream business not the product business.
They want you asleep so they can sell you their illusion. The tools they use are clever
images and sounds to hypnotise you whilst they implant their message. Please be aware
that hypnosis (flashing, brightly coloured imagery linked to certain sound combinations) is
a primary tool of advertisers and others seeking to enslave you. It is not personal. They do
not know you and they do not care about you. To them, you are a faceless cash machine.
You need to appreciate that they just want your cash, and cash comes more easily from
asleep people than from awake people.
33.There is no one person or secret group scheming to keep you asleep and dreaming. It
is pretty much everyone except those few who have escaped.
34.Wonderland is nothing more (and certainly nothing less) than the zeitgeist the
cumulative tapestry woven by all humans alive today and in the past. Those who are born
pick up the needle from those who have died and continue sewing their corner of the
Tapestry of Illusion.
35. The only thing creating Wonderland and keeping you in Wonderland at this level are
other people and your belief in their illusions. These people take on different disguises as
lovers, spouses, friends, family, politicians, business owners, media people and so on but
all are people weaving their own particular portion of the Tapestry of Illusion.

31
36.Remember why they do this. Mostly it is unconscious, but a few know exactly what
they are doing. They do this because they want to extract values (power and money for
example) from those beneath them on the scale of slumber. The slightly awake scam the
mostly asleep, the mostly asleep scam the deeply asleep and so on. Many people are
acting for their own interests (that is good) but are trying to manipulate and control others
to achieve their ends (that is bad). Your freedom comes through unmasking their
manipulations.
37.This section has explained that one key to your freedom is to expose the outer forces
which are trying to push you down into poverty and helplessness and it has touched upon
a few of those. They will now be described more fully. The point is to expose these
negative forces so that you are forewarned. They are the force of unconsciousness, not of
evil. There are also loving, caring, amazing people in the world millions of them, but
this and the following chapters fall under the heading of knowing your enemy.

32
 Grade Thirteen: Schooling
1.If you want to be wealthy, powerful and free first you must wake up to what has been
done to you.
2.This should make you a little angry because you are going to need some anger to get
debt-free and then to make some real money.
3. The brainwashing and control began early. Most schools are little more than Thrall-
factories designed to turn out compliant worker drones. Putting it more benignly, they
attempt to make students fit for the current workplace by giving them the skills which
the current generation of bosses demand.
The sequence is important. The bosses demand the skills, the government turns out the
4.
workers to comply.

Obedience
5.What is the basic message of school? Sit down, be quiet, obey, go through the system,
get a job at the end.
6. Now ask yourself what will be the effect on the minds of the children after years of
attending such an institution?
7.Will such a regime turn out individual free-thinkers? Wealth-generating entrepreneurs?
Or will it produce (in general, of course) restless youngsters who are bored beyond belief
and trained in obedience? Wonderland fodder.
8.If ever you are puzzled about a social problem and are looking for a place to start to
unravel it, you might begin by asking the question: Is this problem caused by
government?
9.So let us start there with a question. Why do many American (and increasingly British)
schools resemble high security prisons? They now have CCTV, scanners, metal detectors,
guards on the door, ID cards, microphones, random searches for guns and knives, and bars
on the windows.
10.The answer is that like real prisons, schools contain a percentage of dangerous, out of
control, sometimes violent young people. Let us probe further and ask Why?
(Government's do not ask why, instead they ask: What draconian, violent force can we
bring to bear in order to crush the symptoms of this problem? What new laws can we
pass? What new criminal offences can we create? What technology can we bring to bear
to monitor and control the perpetrators?)
11. The answer is surprisingly simple: the students are attending out of compulsion.
12.Not one single student, even the brightest, has made a voluntary decision to attend
school. When you are compelled to do something, your own feelings in the matter are
rendered irrelevant and this makes you angry. Students are forced to attend by
bureaucratic decree, and whether they want to be there, or do not want to be there has no
bearing on the matter.
13.Be clear that we are discussing force here. This is not a voluntary matter. Failure to
send your children to school will eventually result in police visiting your house to arrest
you. Continue to resist, and you will be jailed until you pretend to think like the

33
government and mouth the words of compliance they want you to hear. If you hold out,
your children will be stolen from you, placed into care (a misnomer if ever there was
one) and forced to attend the school regardless of your (or their) wishes.
When you are forced to do something, and your desires in the matter are overridden,
14.
how do you feel? Usually angry. Perhaps you even feel like breaking something?
15.Many children, particularly teenagers, feel exactly this way. They lack the intellectual
skills with which to unpick the finer philosophical points of the argument, but they know
force when they see it, and it makes them angry sometimes very angry.
On some deep level they know they are being programmed to become dutiful Thralls
16.
and they do not like it. Sometimes it even makes them want to break things.
17.The government uses force to compel you to hand over your child to Wonderland
programming at age 5 the younger they get them, the more thorough the brainwashing.
This is why the government is so keen on as many nursery places as possible this gets
the children into the regime at age 3. It also has the dual advantage of making more young
mothers available for drone work too.

The Government Education Agenda

18. Who decides what is taught at school?
19.No surprise to learn it is the government again. Regardless of the interests, talents, or
abilities of the child, all are squeezed through the same sausage machine, the stated
objective of which is uniformity: sameness. Each child educated to an identical standard,
holding the same values and ideals, becoming a perfect, tame little consumer/producer
Thrall ready to take his or her place in society.
20.Apart from the standard subjects, all schools major in the key topics of obedience to
authority, sacrifice to society, working as a team and the ruthless elimination of
individuality.
It is laughable to read the glossy brochures which pretend to state the aims of a school
any school, they are all the same in tone. They read like this:
21.We at Hilldown School believe that each child is an individual. It is the aim of this
school to encourage the individual talents of each unique child, to nurture those talents and
to help each child to reach his or her full potential. We encourage diversity in all matters,
particularly of race, culture and religion.
22.You have been school. Individualism, (called being a clever show-off by most
teachers) is the very last thing which is encouraged, indeed it is stamped on very hard.
23. An individualist has another name in most schools, and that name is troublemaker.
24.Just like prisons, schools want a quiet life and will move quickly to crush any resistance
or rebellion. This is not an attack on teachers, most of whom are dedicated and hard-
working. It is just that they have so few options other than to comply with the demands
made upon them by their Wonderland masters. They have very little freedom of
movement. What they teach and how they teach it is almost totally controlled by
government.
25.You do not have to ask yourself what all this does to the childs mind; you merely need
to remember what it did to yours. The state got you a long time ago, and so it requires a
34
real effort of will to question such a fundamental Wonderland concept as compulsory
state education. But let us examine it for a moment.

School Education A Shockingly Poor Process

26.Education is a lifelong process. You have taken a choice to educate yourself through
this book. Be honest with yourself, most of the things you have learned almost all of
your knowledge was obtained after you left school or college. You watch
documentaries, you buy books and magazines, you subscribe to courses, you talk to other
people, and most importantly you learn from life.
27.Hour for hour, those tedious days you spent staring at a blackboard whilst the teacher
droned on, produced a very poor return in knowledge compared with the time you spent in
studying something which caught your interest in later life. Over 90% of your current
knowledge and ability was probably obtained after you left the state education system.
28. Governments believe they 'own' our children, and have conferred upon themselves the
right to indoctrinate them in any manner they see fit. It is they who set the standards, they
who dictate the National Curriculum, they who say what must and what must not be
taught. The teachers job is to comply and do what they are told. They know who is
paying their salary.
29.The object of school is to turn out compliant, obedient, not too highly educated Thralls
who will eventually create more wealth for the government to confiscate and thus keep the
whole show rolling along. Above all, they should not be taught to question Wonderland or
that they can change anything.
30.That is what has been done to you. Although you cannot go back and change it, you
should be aware of what has happened as this is part of your waking up process.
31.After twelve years or more in such a state institution, nearly all resistance has been
eliminated. You end up with a population of tame, unquestioning sheep, who will stare
blankly at you with big sheeps eyes if you explain that they are trapped in Wonderland.
They will look genuinely bewildered if you explain the true nature of the society in
32.
which they live, or how to create real wealth, or how to escape from the sheep pen.
Certainly, these subjects are not on the school curriculum.
33. A few slip out of the pen: the delinquents who will not accept authority. They
eventually stagger from the school gulags and split into two groups. The go-getters and
troublemakers. One group use their anger to fight and to win to prove that the system
has not beaten them to escape from Wonderland.
34. The other group break things and hurt people and end up inside prisons.
But these are the few. Most emerge in doe-eyed contentment, marry, breed, and settle
35.
down into a Thrall lifetime of mediocre work; never questioning, never rebelling and
never becoming all they could be. You cannot blame them. Since age five (or three) they
have been systematically lobotomized; even the words required to question and rebel have
been forbidden to them.
36.How many lessons can you recall on the subjects of revolution; resistance to authority;
defending yourself against a police state; personal freedom; getting wealthy; how all

35
governments tend towards tyranny; alternative lifestyles; independence; your right to
privacy; the evil of socialism; why taxation is theft; individualism; your basic rights, etc.?
37. There is a very long list of prohibited subjects in schools.
38.Instead these words were replaced by: sacrifice, duty, humility, obedience, citizenship,
silence, multiculturalism, selflessness, altruism, sharing, not showing off, being no better
than the next kid, not showing pride in ones achievements (in case it offends a less
talented child).
39.What were you taught at school about making money? About property? Shares?
Business? Finance? Saving? Or how about the benevolent uses of power? How someone
of brilliance and creativity can help others and the world? Or about how only individuals
push humanity forward, not committees? Nothing!
40.In fact you are most likely to have been taught that it is the team that counts and no
member should shine. These days schools do not even like winners and losers in sporting
fixtures.
41. Are you starting to glimpse just how deep this rabbit hole goes?

Sheep Fodder
42.Instead you were force-fed thousands of dreary hours on such riveting subjects as sheep
farming in Australia, the geography of India, the history of the Corn Laws, Latin, Greek
mythology, rudimentary French, acute angles, and countless excruciating hours of games
regardless of ability, aptitude or interest. (Games, you see, build team spirit so you learn
the basic lesson of not being an individualist, but rather how to subsume yourself into a
vapid team where no single person can claim individual credit.)
43.All of this schooling is overlaid with the infrastructure of a statist government:
prefects, head girls and boys, masters, senior masters, head mistresses and now CCTV,
stop and search, and ID cards. All intertwined with the methods of a police-state;
punishment, obey authority, detention, obey authority, ridicule, obey authority, expulsion,
obey authority.
44.Few children have the maturity and resilience to resist this onslaught, and so they
knuckle down and try to survive just like you did.
45. They quickly learn that survival means:
1. Keep your head down do not attract attention.
2. Obey authority. Make the right noises. Shuffle your feet and look with downcast
eyes if challenged. Say Yes Massah and No Massah. Do not be truthful if you get into
mischief the truth gets you into deep trouble. Say Dunno Sir to any and every question.
If saluting is allowed salute.
3. Above all, do not be an individual. Individualism spells t-r-o-u-b-l-e. Be one of the
crowd; faceless. Do not stand out. Mimic the Thralls. Even your peers will give you a hard
time if you dare to be a bit different!
4. Do not show too much ability. This will incur suspicion in the teachers and
hostility and derision from your peers. Moderate ability is fine, just as long as it is well
within the teachers standard range of abilities. Excessive ability will draw attention and
attack. Dumb yourself down. Remember, your objective is to be a perfect little Thrall.
36
5. Do just enough to get by. Do not aim for excellence.
6. Dont talk, run in the corridors, bring money into school, forget your games kit,
lose your locker key, answer back, be cute, be late, jostle in line, take two plates, use the
bathroom too often, use the drinks machine before 10 a.m., rearrange the chairs in the
lunch room etc.
46.The government dictate what will be taught at the institution. One of the main core
subjects is Compliance and Obedience to Authority 101. No deviation is permitted. The
government pay the salaries of all those working at the institution, thereby ensuring
obedience. In any event, most teachers believe in the use of state-backed force to ensure
compulsory education. They think this is a good thing. They think the ends justify the
means.

Force to Pay For it Force to Carry it Out

47.All school facilities and salaries are paid for out of money looted by force (taxation)
refuse to pay the money and you will be jailed and the money stolen from you anyway.
You will pay regardless of whether you have children or not. You will pay to educate the
children of people you will never meet. Alternatives (home schooling) are actively
discouraged and subject to a bureaucratic nightmare of inspections, examinations and
standards to ensure you do what a normal school does.
48.In these institutions, all individualism is ruthlessly stamped out. All children are forced
to study near identical subjects, regardless of ability or aptitude. A long list of prohibited
subjects is never taught.
49.This is the regime we have. This is the regime which most people think is great
absolutely wonderful. This is Wonderland. They love it. Nobody challenges it. In fact it is
held up as a shining beacon of democratic values and progress.
50.Some children, mostly teenagers, start to resent this enforced servitude. This manifests
itself as behaviour problems, shouting, swearing, vandalism, lack of respect for
authority. Instead of recognising that this behaviour stems from the use of force against
the child, the government responds, as always, with more force. In the past it used to be
beatings. Many children were caned into submission for their own good. Now it is
detention, ridicule, and in America, armed guards, searches, metal detectors, ID cards and
spy cameras. Already many UK inner-city schools are calling for their share of the
money for American-style security systems.
51.When these people leave school, what do they do? Get a job of course, just like they
have been trained to do. What job? Well, anything really. The vast majority of people are
not very engaged by their work. If asked if they enjoy their work they would say it was
okay. The rest of their lives are spent in similar brainwashing by the television and
media to keep the programming alive in their brains. They are told what to buy, what to
aspire to, what life-style is theirs, what is trendy, what is fashionable and they
blindly comply.
52.And finally, society conspires to reinforce the brainwashing. Remember it is mainly
society and its memes which keeps Wonderland functioning.
53.It does this by frequent repetition of brain-washing memes which play like an endless
tape-loop throughout the life of a Thrall.
37
54. Amongst the countless thousands of repetitive meme-loops are these:
Rich people are unhappy.
Wealth makes you greedy and sadistic.
The rich get richer, the poor get poorer.
Wealthy people are cheats and scoundrels.
Money should be confiscated from the rich and handed out to the poor.
Power is evil and corrupting.
Servility and humility are fine virtues.
Obedience to god and country are the highest ideal.
On and on it goes, an endless sheep-fodder diet from the media, television and films.
55.
You do not notice it seeping into your brain, drip-feeding you the poison year after year.
56.Now it is time to wake up and see what has happened to you and what is still happening
to those all around you. Then you must refuse to play their games any more.
57.To become a free individual you must fight against unreasonable control with every
fibre of your being.
58. You will now learn about the primary agents of control in Wonderland.

38
 Grade Fourteen: Government
1.The first and probably the most powerful external force arrayed against you is
government.
2.If you do not know how you got into your current position of servitude and what dark
forces are at work to keep you there, you will never break free. The way you have been
trained to obey is your biggest enemy.
3.As well as money, people also want power. The evolutionary reasons for this are,
obvious. The more power you have, the more resources you can command and hence the
better you can feed your family. For men, you are more attractive to females too. This is
as true today as it was 100,000 years ago at the dawn of human civilisation. Power gives
you access to resources and women still find wealthy, powerful men more attractive than
broke powerless ones. Women who escape Wonderland see through this (and other)
programming and refuse to play anymore.
4.The only people who claim not to want power are totally powerless people without a
chance of getting it. These are the meek referred to earlier. And they are the ones trapped
deepest in Wonderland. Good and bad power was discussed in a previous section.
5.Ask yourself if negative power comes from trying to control awake people, or asleep
people?
6.The answer is asleep people because they cannot control awake people. If you are
awake then you have unmasked their ridiculous con tricks. All of the juggling balls come
tumbling down; the rabbit wriggles out of the magicians sleeve; the Wizard of Oz is
revealed to be a short, balding man pulling a few levers behind a curtain.
7.All governments of every colour are in the sleep
business. They want a tame, docile population of
sheep who will produce the wool and not bleat too
much about it. Red, Blue or Yellow party, they are
all in the wool business. They differ (slightly) only
in the con tricks they use to round up the sheep into
their coloured pens.
8. The sheep love it. Really, they can hardly wait
until pen changing time. It comes around every
four years or so and they get to the illusion of
choice. You can stay in the coloured pen you
currently inhabit (red, blue or yellow)... or you can
change to one of the other pens.
9. The excitement is gripping. The sheep run around
baaing in frenzy. The sheep media are bursting with it for months. Which pen to choose?
Which colour is best? Which master is claiming he will sheer you slightly less, maybe
leaving you with an inch more wool? Millions stay up until midnight to see which
coloured pen eventually attracts the most sheep. Exhausted by the thrill of it all, they fall
asleep again for another four years.
Why would people allow themselves to be exploited like this? The answer is very easy.
10.
People crave safety and security.
39
11.The Thralls will give up any and all freedoms if someone promises them a warm,
cotton-wool nest. They will allow the majority of their money to be confiscated from them
by force; they will sign away their human rights and liberties; they will allow themselves
to be electronically monitored, spied upon and tracked; they will put their name to any
atrocity (invasion of other countries, selling weapons to despotic regimes etc.) in short,
they will sell their very souls for illusory comfort.
12.They do not shout for more freedom or to keep more of their own money, or to have
their names removed from the support list for genocidal wars. They do bleat and loudly
but for more comfort, security and services. They want free health care, free schools,
free transport, and if possible, free food, free housing and free money.
The Thralls do not want less government, they want more. More handouts, more police,
13.
more security, more surveillance, more controls.

Enslavement and Confiscation of Wealth

14.In particular, what they most want is the enslavement of the productive. A big part of
Wonderland is ordinary Thralls and their unconsciousness. Governments are merely happy
to oblige the wishes of the somnambulant majority. Whatever the masses want, that is the
latest government policy.
15.The more deeply asleep, locked-into-Wonderland they are, the safer most people feel.
Such people feel threatened by bright, self-motivated and actualised people. They want
them enslaved, their life efforts confiscated and handed over to them. (Governments
oblige with a system called taxation) and they want them broken down to their level of
ignorance and poverty (media oblige with relentless attacks and smears on the wealthy and
successful).
16.Governments keep you asleep in order to gain power and kudos for themselves.
Politicians get to decide the fate of the people. They get to make up laws, knowing they
will be the ones controlling others, monitoring them, taxing them, fining them,
imprisoning them. There is a power buzz to be had in invading countries and killing
innocent people or covertly spying on your citizens.
17. If you doubt this, ask yourself: Do governments want savvy, awake, wealthy, self-
actualised, smart citizens? Or do they prefer ignorant, tame, servile, broke and above all
frightened Thralls? (Frightened of terrorism, frightened of environmental disaster,
frightened of the authorities, frightened of diseases like bird flu etc.)
18.Why are people attracted to politics? Many are well-meaning and get into politics
motivated by a heartfelt desire to make the country a better place. But because they, the
media and the Thralls are deeply asleep, they often end up as functionaries slightly
higher level robots running around keeping Wonderland intact for their masters. Of course
they do not see it like that. To them they are helping to pass useful laws, serving the
community and suchlike.
19.There are also the power-hungry. They typically end up in the higher levels of politics
as ministers, presidents, congressmen and prime ministers. To get there, they have to learn
the fine art of manipulation, spin, lies, distortions and half-truths.
They must abandon many principles. Politics has little to do with principles, it is to do
20.
with negative power. And to get such power you have to concentrate very hard on what
40
the masses are currently calling for (focus groups are set up to do exactly this) and then
serve it up to them. You also have to kiss frogs (which is a euphemism for abandoning
your principles and embracing people you despise.) Many of their decisions are based not
on what is right, but on what manoeuvre will be the best for their ladder-climbing career
prospects.
Taxation
21. Taxation is state theft of your resources backed by naked force.
22.Governments perpetrate terrible crimes in the country by the legalised extortion of your
life values through force. It would be called a shake down racket if organised criminals
used threats to extract money in this way. But because everyone is asleep in Wonderland
they merely stare vacantly if you start to talk about taxation as theft which it is.
23.To play their power games they need huge, unimaginable quantities of our money; 54%
and rising by the last count (when you include hidden taxes). To do this, they threaten you
with extreme force (doors kicked-in, officers raiding you, prison) if you do not comply.
Not one person in ten thousand thinks this is a bad thing. If ever you wanted proof positive
that Wonderland exists, that single fact should suffice.
24. No matter what the various political parties say about free-enterprise, they do not like
strong-minded, wealthy individualists. The state gets nervous if a worker drone has
significant personal power. You cannot control and exploit people who have personal
power. They prefer faceless production units hovering in a no mans land of false hope,
kept just above the absolute poverty line by confiscatory taxation. The burden is carefully
calculated to stop just short of causing people to riot in the streets. It is designed to allow
the Thralls to have some small hope of dragging themselves out of debt one day, or being
able to pay their daily bills or maybe have a small pension. Pay rises give the Thralls the
illusion of getting slowly ahead, little realising that their rise is stolen back by
governments who deliberately inflate the value of your money away.
25.People pay their taxes for one main reason fear. And they are right to be very afraid.
Each year, hundreds of doors are kicked-in by baton-wielding agents of force; people are
dragged from their houses, often to the huge distress of family members including
children. They are hauled off and imprisoned like criminals (which they are in the eyes of
the Wonderland Masters). Meanwhile, their assets are looted by the same agents at their
leisure.
26.Please be very clear about one thing. These people want your money and they are going
to get it by any means at their disposal. They are serious. They cannot operate
Wonderland without cash. Lots of if. Billions of pounds of it. Your money; your effort,
your work taken from you through intimidation, or if that does not work, brute force. To
enforce this requires a veritable army of bureaucrats and petty officials with draconian
powers of arrest, search, seizure, spying and interrogation. This is all coupled with the
sophisticated surveillance methods of a police state.
27.Most people think this is a good thing. There is virtually no complaint or protest.
Direct taxation is naked extortion. There is no difference (in principle) between taxation
and a mafia shake-down operation. People pay out of fear. Individuals are terrified by the
power of the forces arrayed against them. Fear immobilises. It stifles creative thought and
value production. The only reason the economy staggers onwards is because the terror is
41
partial, not total. Our slave-masters know that if they leave one small corner of our minds
free then we will continue to work and struggle in desperate hope until we die. This is why
they confiscate most of your efforts, but throw you a few scraps to keep you quiet.
28.The government is not your friend. It is probably the most powerful force you will find
arrayed against you.
29.It is very hard to fight this powerful system. The best advice is to avoid all interface
with government unless absolutely essential. Pay the legally minimum tax you can, and
unless it is your lifes mission, do not directly confront vicious agents of force as you will
lose. They hold all the weapons, all the power and they delight in breaking people like
you. Do not give them that pleasure.
30.Pay your taxes but do not become a happy taxpayer that is known as sanction of the
victim and is a weak position. Try to hold your head high until this tyranny is
overthrown.
31.Every society in living memory has been run by a more or less despotic government or
royalty. Historically, the injustice we suffer these days, although unacceptable, is at the
light end of the scale. For this we should be grateful.
32.Work around the system; use your intelligence and skill to create, thrive and prosper
despite the heavy hand of the state. Do not use any of the dark forces arrayed against you
as a cause for inaction. These forces are being exposed in order that you might have
knowledge. With knowledge comes power.
33.Wean yourself off the dependency culture. Be a warrior. The dependency culture is
promoted by governments who want compliant citizens amenable to bribes. Do not take
their handouts, even if due to you.
34.We yearn to return to childhood where everything is taken care of for us. Governments
play upon this desire, promoting cradle-to-grave social security. Aim to want nothing from
them. Pay your own way in everything.

42
 Grade Fifteen: Media
1. Another primary tool of Thrall control is the media.
2.The media make millions of pounds a day from their activities, some of which are
benign, some of which are not. Even the benign output serves to reinforce the normality of
Wonderland.
3.Those running this propaganda machine are not evil. They are asleep like most people.
They take their salaries and enjoy their status. In return they produce Thrall-fodder for
consumption by the sheep.
4.Politicians positively scurry when the editor of a major tabloid calls him or her in to the
office (and it works that way around, not the other way. That shows you who has the real
power).
5.Politicians need the media to spin their policies. They need cheap tabloid opinions and
the equivalent for the blanked-out Thralls to read and regurgitate. Politicians care very,
very much about what bias a particular media outlet decides to put on a story.
6.Over one billion newspaper pages are printed every day in the UK alone. That is a pile
one hundred miles high. What is on those pages? News? Maybe a little, carefully chosen
and sensationalised items. But mostly it is political propaganda; celebrity tittle-tattle;
gossip; acres of sports coverage; malicious smears against those who cannot defend
themselves; bringing down of the successful and wealthy; cheap sex; cheap opinions;
cheap readers offers; dozens of loan adverts so that the Thralls can borrow to consume
more; regurgitated easy reading sound bites for the masses to repeat as their own
opinions.
7.Newspapers make their money from selling advertising space. So do they want alert,
bright, discerning readers? Or do you think they prefer semi-hypnotised robots who will
buy products?

Financial Press
8.You can completely ignore the financial press. At best they print fantasies, at worst they
are little more than a confidence trick. Also they are out of date.
9.Ask yourself if you think that any 'news' you read in the financial press will not already
have been priced into the market? By the time the papers get around to the story, it is old
news and everyone 'in the know' has cashed-in long ago.
10.The papers exist to make money; that is all. They have no other reason whatsoever for
being in existence. They make most of their money from advertising, and only a little from
the cover price of the paper. Pick up a financial paper and look inside it. You will find it is
packed with page after page of high priced adverts for Investment Funds, brokerages etc.
Each advert makes thousands of pounds for the paper. All have the same theme. Buy this
investment now and make healthy gains.
In the light of this, how likely do you think it is that the financial press will run a story
11.
with the headline: Stock Market Crash Imminent! Share Prices Greatly Over-Valued. Sell
Now!

43
12.Instead, they are much more likely to run a headline such as: Market Still Has Plenty of
Steam Left. Is This The Next Big Upswing?
13.They will talk about any down-turns in share prices being a 'correction', and they will
urge you to buy on this dip and 'take advantage' of the low price before the next big surge.
14.If they were to run a really negative headline, all the advertisers would immediately
pull out and the paper would go broke overnight. Not only would people immediately stop
investing in the advertised funds, many of them would immediately cash-in these
investments. So forget the financial press you will not learn anything interesting from
reading it.

Television
15. Then there is television, the ultimate Big Brother control tool and money-making
machine. Tens of thousands of hours of junk programmes are produced for the Thralls to
sit in front of and watch. Could you possibly imagine saying to someone a hundred years
ago that they would have a way of making people sit still in front of a box, for hour after
hour, as they willingly allowed themselves to be indoctrinated? They would not believe it.
The average amount of television watched by the Thralls is 3.7 hours per day. That is the
average. You can now add many hours a week of Internet surfing to that total.
16.What is on this box? Well, it is entertainment mostly. After a hard days labour in
Wonderland making other people rich, the Thralls need to be entertained by trivial
reality shows, soap operas, car chase movies, hilarious sit-coms and suchlike. They sit in
front of that, night after night. They also watch adverts. Thousands of adverts a year,
hammering messages into their brains about how they should want this or that product.
17.It is a perfect set-up. Their desire to consume keeps them slaving in Wonderland to earn
enough to buy more consumables. They come home and watch indoctrination messages
about how they should want more products. They fall asleep exhausted (and often drunk
or stoned) ready for another hard day on the hamster wheel.
18.The advertisers and companies selling them this junk are laughing at them! So are the
banks and loan companies who are up-fronting the money for them to buy more than they
can afford.
19. Welcome to the seamless con which is Wonderland.

Films and Television Dramas

20.Films and television dramas also often feature a brainwashing message designed to
keep you asleep and dreaming.
As an exercise, when you next watch a film, television drama or (in particular) soap
21.
opera, see how many of them have one of the following messages:
1. Life is a hopeless struggle. No matter what you do, you just cannot get ahead.
2. Being poor is good. Although it might be nice to have a little more money, we
are happy because were poor. Getting more money only brings big problems of jealousy
etc.
3. Poor people are decent through and through, rich people are evil to the core.

44
4. Being rich is awful. It causes misery and jealousy. Rich people are cold, uncaring
and greedy. Rich people are corrupt and cheat their way to the top.
22. Check to see if it features one of these story lines:
1. The life of a depraved/wasted/diseased person or an alcoholic, drug addict, rape
victim, AIDS sufferer, battered wife, criminal, murderer, victim, psychopath, serial killer,
bent cop or mentally ill person.
2. Death, disease, murder, mayhem, destruction, crime, rape, drugs, war, failure,
massive disaster possibly involving the destruction of the entire planet.
23.Many dramas you see at the cinema or on television will be concerned with one of
those themes, and this has an effect on your subconscious. The effect is simultaneously to
block your desire to escape whilst making your own drab life seem not too horrendous
when compared with all of this disaster.
24.Notice that aspirational adverts are rarely, if ever, about encouraging you to become
truly wealthy. Their manipulations are aimed at a far lower level called Thrall-rich. This is
the illusion that if you have certain chocolates to pass around at your dinner party you
will be seen as wealthy; that if you buy a cheap leather 3-piece suite, your friends will
envy you and think you are rich; that if you drink this cheap, fizzy wine you will be in the
wealthy set. Once again, they are laughing at you. The objective is to sell you goods and
services which allow you to fool yourself into believing you have made it.
25. The very last thing they want is for you to really escape and really become wealthy.
It is worth mentioning that media people, film directors and suchlike tend, on average,
26.
towards the left end of the political spectrum. There are exceptions of course, but in
general their hearts lean towards collectivism. This is reflected in their output.

A Case Study - Titanic

27.The 1997 film Titanic was a superb example. It majored on the following entirely
incorrect, but typically collectivist and Wonderland ideas, and hammered them
mercilessly into the audience: Being rich is bad. It is a worthless thing. All rich people
are evil. They are either crooks or snooty aristocrats who inherited their money.
28.This film was teeming with wealthy people and we are assured that not a single one of
them was worth saving. They are bad through and through totally corrupt and downright
evil or even psychopathic in the case of Roses fianc. His overriding preoccupations are
extortion, violence towards women and cheating in the most caddish fashion. He is the
stereotype of the evil millionaire without a single redeeming feature. He is the
melodramatic sawmill owner, twirling his moustache in glee as the helplessly roped girl
inches closer to the spinning blade...
Scene of rich man trying to buy a place on a lifeboat with a fistful of money. Cash flung
29.
back in his face by noble, poor and decent sailor: Your moneys no good here, mister!
30.The film shows us that rich people are devoid of compassion or decency. They are bent
solely on saving their own skins.
31.Scenes of struggling poor people locked behind doors by the cigar-chewing evil rich as
the waters slowly rise... Let the scum drown! First Class passengers only if you please,

45
this way for the lifeboats ladies. Back you filth! Well get to you when all the first class
passengers have been seated...if there are any places left...!
32.We are reassured that being rich is no fun. In fact it is a crashing bore. The rich are
incapable of enjoying themselves. They sit around looking terminally bored, sipping
champagne with their fingers cocked at just the right angle, talking trivia and trying to
outdo each other. Their children are stilted and restricted by having to learn ritualistic
table manners.
33. Scene with Rose looking horror-stricken towards upper-class little girl at dinner
learning how to sit properly. Thinking Oh no! This is just too, too awful. How can we
torture our children like this? What monsters have we become with our money and fine
ways? There must be something better. Oh how I long to be poor and free. If only I could
find a quaint, preferably Irish, poor person to sweep me off my feet and teach me the true
meaning of life. Those poor folk are so wise and so happy...
34.Meanwhile, back in third class, the message is hammered home that being poor is good.
To be poor is to be happy. Poor people are noble, brave and wise. They think not of
themselves but of others. Sacrifice and self-immolation are good, lofty standards to hold.
35.Scenes of noble poor folk sacrificing their place on the lifeboat to other, more deserving
people whilst evil rich men are trying to sneak onto boats reserved for women and
children, even grabbing babies in an attempt to cheat their way to safety at the expense of
others.
36.The poor are good through and through. There is not a rotten apple in the entire basket.
The poor suitor (Jack) would sacrifice his life so that his love (Rose) might live. The rich
suitor would abandon his love so that he might live.

Poverty is Fun!
37.The film leaves us in no doubt that being poor is tremendous fun. Really terrific. An
absolute riot. Poor people really know how to enjoy themselves whilst the rich just
pretend.
38. Scenes of quaint character Irish folk dancing wildly on the tables below decks and
knocking back the Guinness, whilst russet-haired Irish beauties lift their skirts in time with
the joyful beat of the Gaelic drum. Beaming ragged children are whirled into the frantic
dance, careless of the fact that they have not eaten for two days. Compare with any scene
of poor people enjoying themselves from A Christmas Carol or Mary Poppins they are
all the same.
39.Meanwhile, in first class, in what can only be described as a funereal atmosphere,
women are dabbing their sated mouths with delicate silk handkerchiefs, unable to cram
down another morsel of caviar, whilst the men politely suggest that they leave the ladies
and step outside for a cigar and fine brandy.
40.The screenplay writer even changed history by implying that it was rich peoples greed
which caused the disaster. Apparently it was not caused by the captains ineptitude or the
inattention of the lookouts (they were humble, common sailors, so they cannot possibly be
to blame if you are a collectivist by inclination).
41.Finally on the subject of Titanic, here is an interesting question. Why are we obsessed
with this 100+ year-old story? Of course it was a terrible disaster and 1500 people were
46
killed, but millions have died since in a variety of nasty ways and so it is not the number
of souls lost which ensures that this story will never die. There have been countless
disasters since in which about 1,000-2,000 people have died. (A ferry sank in Egypt a few
years ago with the loss of 1300 lives. Media coverage? Virtually zero.)
42.The reason for its fascination stems from exactly the same anti-progress, collectivist
philosophy which skewed the film so far to the left. The message (and the fascination) is
this:
Man is an impotent worm. He is arrogant. He thinks he can outsmart mother nature. His
so-called 'marvellous' machines and inventions are so much match wood and tin in the
face of nature. How dare he think that he can cross the Atlantic and conquer Gods
oceans? Look what happens to those upstarts. One iceberg and their plans and dreams are
smashed. Such is the fate of all men who fly, Icarus-like towards the sun. Their wings will
melt and they will crash to earth.
43. And here is the knock-out punch So let this be a lesson to any Thrall who might
strive to conquer, to fight, to dare and to win. You cannot escape from Wonderland!

The Glorification of Failure

44.The story of Titanic is a story of failure mans arrogant attempt to try to dare and to
win only to receive a well-deserved slap down from old Ma Nature. This is the sole reason
for its longevity.
Why do people like to watch failure? Because, sad to say, many people are failures and
45.
watching other people fail makes them feel safe and not alone.
46.Thralls love nothing better than to huddle together in a warm, vapid mass of
commonality. If they can watch a disaster movie together, that is a bonus!
47.Failure just means they have not done with their lives that which they could have
done. They are living a life which is a pale shadow of the glory it could be if they would
only dare.
48. In any great endeavour from Titanic to the Space Shuttle there will be failures that
is, stepping stones on the road to success. The bigger the disaster, the more it means we
are striving for something big.
49.Small minds set small targets with vast safety margins accidents are rare, progress is
minuscule. Big minds have big ideas with huge agendas. Large scale projects involving
the unknown (e.g. crossing the worlds oceans, exploring space) carry the risk of setbacks
and disaster.
50. Of course Titanic was brilliantly filmed, hugely enjoyable and made some valid
historical points. The society of 1910 was class-ridden and elitist. Many third-class
passengers were trapped below decks and proportionately more rich made it than poor.
We know all that. But the fact that in this film the rich are so irredeemably and uniformly
evil, and the poor so uniformly good and decent, leaves no room for surmise regarding the
directors political leanings and the desires of the viewing millions.
51.The last scene is entirely fictitious, not historical. The fact that the entire film leads up
to and culminates in the final gesture of Rose, as an old lady, throwing the priceless

47
necklace into the sea confirms our worst suspicions. What is the real significance of this
gesture?
52.Money is worthless trash to be flung away by the million. It is worth less than an
eighty year old memory of a brief shipboard romance. Get rid of it. It is a dead weight
around your neck. Only evil can come from it. Toss it into the ocean. It belongs there, at
the bottom of the sea where no person can be corrupted or tainted by its evil influence.
53.That is the message in the film. That is the theme which ran centrally throughout the
plot. This is the ideology which the scriptwriter and director selected for our special
attention. Worse, this is an entirely fictitious storyline, invented especially to run
alongside the factually accurate historical details.
54.Needless to say, the broke and powerless Thralls love this stuff. Here is an actual
review which someone placed on an Internet film review site: The ending, when Rose
drops the necklace into the ocean, sending it back to the Titanic is a nice finish. And I
think the treasure hunters in this movie have learned something in the end. Maybe more
people will learn some day. Lets hope.
Learned what, exactly? Learned to stay at home and never to go looking for adventure
55.
and treasure? Learned that wealth is only evil and that treasure is only corrupting?
56. Yes, that is exactly what she means.
57. Welcome to Wonderland.

What to Do?
58.There are several practical things you can do to begin the break free from media
control.
59. Firstly, stop buying newspapers. If we are very lucky, in the near future, all
newspapers will go broke as their circulations are all falling year on year. People are now
getting their news from a variety of sources, most of them more reliable and less biased
than newspapers. The national dailies are struggling to make an on-line model work,
meanwhile they are losing circulation. That is very good news. Removal of newspapers
removes a steady drip-feed of Thrall poison from the system.
60.TV, radio and newspapers thrive on what they call 'news'. This is rarely a straight,
factual presentation of some important incident. More often it is a hand-picked bad news
story chosen for its maximum depression value. They also delight in cutting down tall
poppies (people who have created and achieved great things). They particularly relish
putting the scythe through poppies they have hand-reared. The media builds people up,
then cuts them down again.
61.Ask yourself when you last read a newspaper story in praise of (say) a top industrialist
or creative person. Still thinking? Now ask yourself when you last read a story smearing
such a person and dragging them into the gutter via some cheap, sleazy journalism?
62. Journalists are merely playing to the lowest common denominator in the general public.
It is what they do for their money and what they are trained in identify the lowest value,
repackage it, and feed it to the masses. The message is this: Do not use your virtue to
create values. All people who succeed are corrupt and flawed. Join with us to pull them

48
down to our level. Savour the thrill of seeing them hurt, ruined or destroyed. You are
powerless, but we will help you get power to destroy others.
63.All of this could be stopped instantly, of course. If tomorrow morning, people refused
to buy another trashy newspaper ever again, the vast empires of envy, tittle-tattle and
hatred would go bust. But the Thralls are hooked on a daily fix of negativity and sleaze
and cannot wean themselves away. It is not surprising really. Many people have tedious,
mundane and pain-filled lives. Newspapers allow them to live vicariously through other
people (soap stars, pop idols, sporting heroes, etc.) and the disaster stories make their own
lives seem less painful.
64. Imagine the pain of reading day after day about other people's success and how well
they were doing, how wealthy they were becoming and how fulfilled their lives were! It
would be unbearable to many.

Stop Listening to The News!

65.Save yourself the daily drain of energy, enthusiasm and hope which the poison of the
'news' bulletins causes to your delicate psyche. Realise it is not the news, it is carefully
selected, edited and tasty sheep bites chosen for Thrall consumption. The bites are
selected for maximum emotional appeal and feature disaster, grief, loss, destruction, crime
and fear. The effect of listening to this is very insidious. It is a steady drip of corrosion
into your psyche. The cumulative message is that people are rotten through and through
and the world is going to hell. What will that do for your desire to win, to achieve, to put
your dream out into the world?
66.Many people comment that when they listen to the news a lot or buy a paper they feel
depressed for quite a while afterwards. As an experiment, The Author once avoided all
news for two years and felt a great deal better. If anything really important happens (e.g.
9/11) you will rapidly hear about it, and so there is no loss. Try this experiment for
yourself. Be strict. Do not even read the headlines on newspapers as you walk into a shop
or garage.
If you really must listen to the news, restrict yourself to one quality bulletin a day. If the
67.
world is coming to an end you will hear about it without turning on the news every hour.
68.Sit down and honestly work out how many hours of entertainment you allow
yourself each week. Add up the television hours, the radio, newspaper reading, the
Internet surfing and films. Now add in extended meals out, time in the bar and time spent
otherwise entertaining yourself. The object is not to remove entertainment from your life.
The object is to dramatically reduce it (particularly the Thrall versions like soap operas
and cheap TV) and use that time to make yourself a fortune and actualize your dream.
69.3.7 hours a day (the average television viewing) equates to 1,200 hours a year an
amazing thirty 40-hour weeks a year. That number is very hard to believe but it is true.
What do you think you could achieve with thirty 40-hour weeks completely devoted to
your dream? Halve it and that is still 16 full working weeks a year devoted solely to the
practice of becoming wealthy.

49
Turn Off Adverts!
70.Only a lobotomized Thrall would actually sit in front of the television and watch the
adverts. If you must watch some television, reach immediately for the mute button and
press it as soon as they come on. Keep an educational book handy and read a page or two
during the commercial breaks.
71.With any adverts you see (including billboard adverts) start to wake up teasing out the
basic message from the clever imagery. Boil it down to fundamentals. Habitually say to
yourself something like: Ah yes, buy that aftershave and dozens of beautiful women will
fall at your feet, or Ah, I see, buy this cheap sofa and you will enjoy total freedom from
all of lifes problems, or They are saying that if I drink this poisonous alcoholic
beverage I will have lots of very good friends and be admired.
72. This is a very powerful exercise and one which will free you from manipulation.
73.Analyse films. If you watch films, do not allow yourself to get totally drawn in. Keep
part of your consciousness aloofly to the side to give you an overview of the message they
are trying to put across. Use the example of Titanic above as your template. Most films
are little more than a collection of stereotypes bolted together around a thin storyline.
Stereotypes are one way of solidifying Wonderland the endlessly repeated memes such
as the nerdy computer-geek; the wise, incorruptible black police chief; the evil serial
murderer; the vulnerable woman; the karate-chopping, good-as-any-man woman, etc.
74.Try to analyse any film you see in one sentence. E.g. for Titanic it would be Evil
capitalists cause the death of 1500 innocent poor people in their greedy rush for even more
wealth.
75. Having condensed the film down to a sentence, extract the meme the unit of
Wonderland which they are feeding you. For Titanic it would be: Do not fight, dare and
try to win. It is evil and you will fail anyway. Money corrupts you so do not strive for it.
76.Be highly selective and critical of news. Most news is provided by self-serving
organisations with an agenda. This means they put a spin on the news. Even selecting the
news items is a spin, of course. If you must watch the news, hop around the news stations
and include some foreign channels such as Al Jazeera. You will be astonished at the
difference it is almost as if they are reporting from different worlds. In this way you can
build up a more complete picture of what is going on.
77.Try not to have opinions. This is a hard one. Realise that (unless you are a real expert)
you know as close to nothing as makes any difference about this or that particular news
item. Your response to news (which does not directly and immediately affect you) should
be one of opinionless curiosity. It may be true it may not be true. These people may be
right, but they may be wrong also.
78.It is a huge ego-trap to be stuffed full of opinions on everything in the news. Resist at
all costs the temptation to voice them. If others voice their opinions, do not challenge
them. They are merely regurgitating Thrall-fodder they have been fed from the media and
their egos are totally identified with their views. A few days ago they could not have
pointed to the relevant country on a map, but now they are experts full of emotionally
charged opinions. Answer their assertions with a bland: Yes, you may be right.
79. Acting in these ways sets you on the road to liberation from control by the media.

50
 Grade Sixteen: Big Corporations and Advertising
1.To become wealthy, your income must exceed your outgoing for a long enough time
that you accumulate a surplus.
One of the biggest factors keeping the Thralls poor is that they are spending too much
2.
money. Usually they spend more than they earn and so they are getting poorer, not richer.
3.The main reason they spend too much is because they are allowing themselves to be
conned by business and advertising into buying things they do not need.
4.Big corporations want you locked into illusion, consuming products. The more of their
products you buy, the more money they make and the more powerful they become.
5.Their advertising (desire-generation) is aimed at keeping you asleep. They do not care
much if their products work, are harmful to you or ruinous to the environment. Just
dont whatever you do wake up and see their cons. If you ever did that you would
stop buying their trash.
6.This is not a conspiracy and it is not personal. They just want your money. The more of
your money they can get, the more fun and freedom they can enjoy. You, meanwhile, will
slave your life away amassing a huge pile of junk, most of which will be dumped in the
skip when you die by house clearance specialists.

The Advertisers
7.There are tens of thousands of people out there who dedicate their whole lives to
extracting money and values from you and they get paid handsomely for doing it. We
are talking about the advertising industry, of course.
8.You should understand that they are very, very good at what they do. Some of the best,
the most brilliant, the most imaginative and creative minds in the world are employed by
this industry. They have Masters degrees in psychology; they know the techniques of
persuasion; they understand how to use images and sounds to manipulate human
emotions.
9.They are top pros please do not underestimate their skill. The next lame advert you
see on television is most likely to be far from lame. Every tenth of a second has been
carefully crafted. Every camera angle, every shot duration, every colour, every
actor/actress has been painstakingly selected to meld into a seamless whole which is the
advert. And it has but one aim to get the target audience to part with their money.
Advertising works. We know this because they are fiendishly expensive and if they did
10.
not work, then nobody would waste their money on creating them.
11.You are exposed to tens of thousands of advertising messages a year. Often you will see
100+ adverts in a single day. That really is extraordinary when you think about it. You
probably think you are superior to most mere mortals and are not affected by adverts. You
may think they are for the Thralls. You would never be influenced in fact you hardly
notice them and wonder why they bother putting them out.
12. This is a classic example of underestimating your enemy with fatal consequences.
Advertising is just one (rather minor) tool of control and you are controlled by it. If
13.
you doubt this, go to your refrigerator and open it. Then check the larder. See all those

51
brand names? What about your clothes, your trainers (the very fact that half the
population is walking around in 100-a-pair tennis shoes should tell you something!) your
car, your mobile telephone... It is most unlikely that you have any old mobile, any old
TV, any old car etc.
Where do you shop? Any old supermarket? Maybe, but you are probably brand loyal
14.
and have a favourite.
15.What car do you drive (or aspire to drive). Any old car with all the panels the same
colour? Unlikely. Car adverts in particular are carefully honed to appeal to a sub-sub
niche, e.g. A/B aspirational women aged 29-34. Each frame of the advert is crafted to
tug the strings of that particular puppet. Sure, that advert may go over your head, but what
about the other 9,999 you will see?
You are steeped in a river, a flood, a tidal wave of images created by top professionals
16.
who know what they are doing. And remember it is not personal. They just want your
money. They are there to extract your cash and you are a helpless pawn in their hands
until now.
17.This is not to suggest that you should never buy goods or services. People also have a
legitimate right to try and sell us their products. You, however, are going to break away
from the Thralls and join the Beyond Wealth initiates in a glittering, wealthy, happy and
free life.
18.Who cares what the Thralls do, how many adverts they sit and stare at, how drunk or
stoned they are, or how much they stack their homes full of consumer trash to ease their
misery? These teachings are concerned with helping you to break free from this insanity.
You can do this, but it is going to take discipline.

The Simple Agenda

These people want your money. They want your life-efforts handed over to them. Why?
19.
Because they can then spend your life efforts on themselves.
20.If you work 100 hours to buy a product which takes 3 hours to produce, then you have
just given someone 97 hours of your life effectively you have slaved for them for that
length of time, just like the slaves did in ancient Egypt. This is the name of their game.
This is what they want.
21. How do they get it? They need an endless queue of shuffling, lobotomized Thralls who:
1. Will sit mindlessly in front of their brainwashing image loops for hours.
2. Are so ill-disciplined and unaware that they allow a need to arise in them without
the slightest thought about how they have been manipulated into needing this
item or service.
3. Will shuffle off like the good, dutiful little Thralls they are, and buy the item or
service, ideally on credit. Again they are like children. Show them some sweeties
and they will rush to grab them.
22. Years and years (literally) of your life are thus squandered in working (usually in a job
you barely tolerate) in a desperate scrabble to generate enough money to fill your life with
consumer rubbish. After a few years it is literally rubbish. The Nintendo Games console
and ten games (total 900+) is now being picked over at the car boot sale or sold on eBay

52
for a tenner. The 159 VHS video tapes at 10+ each which you bought and only watched
once now 15p each if you are lucky. You are, right now, probably repeating the mistake
with DVDs and will repeat it again with Blue Ray. The new car? It lost 8,000 the minute
you drove it out of the showroom. Yes you got some use out of it, but a few years later
you are truly horrified to be only offered 4,000 for something that cost 26,000. The
new kitchen; the new suite; the expensive holiday; several mobile telephones, fancy
devices from Apple with i in front of them; the new flat screen television we could go
on forever and even if all of this is not exactly your story, a lot of it probably is.
23.The countless thousands you have spent (maybe tens of thousands?) on stuff you just
thought, for some incomprehensible reason, you had to have. Most of it is now worthless
junk clogging up your home and your life.
24. Now say you are aloof from advertising pressure!
25.You have been duped by the advertising masters of Wonderland and you have bought
the dream. A lot of your angst and pain probably comes from not having enough consumer
trash! You would like more because the adverts have stimulated you into wanting more.
You are dissatisfied even though you are richer than almost all human beings ever to have
lived on this planet. You probably want wealth so that you can spend more and more
money on things.
If we estimate that in total 15 billion people have lived since the dawn of humankind,
26.
you are, right now, in the top wealthiest 0.01% at least! The reason you are not satisfied is
because you inhabit Wonderland and it tricks you into believing that you should have
more.
This is where your discipline comes in. To escape this particular hellish corner of
27.
Wonderland you need the discipline to do the following two things at least.

Minimise Your Exposure to Adverts Now!

28. This was touched upon under the section on media.
29. It is impossible to make this zero of course, unless you become a hermit.
30.In particular, avoid the most persuasive type. These are the indoctrination loops they
play over and over again to the Thralls who watch television and films. Notice something
about television adverts? The volume is 20% higher and the colours are fully saturated.
That means louder and brighter. If you know your NLP, you will know what is going on.
If you do not, it is not rocket science. It is called brainwashing. Loud and bright gets the
attention of both children... and Thralls.
31.If you must watch television (a habit you should work hard to eradicate) then become
disciplined about turning off the adverts when they come on. At the very least, mute your
TV. Only a totally mindless Thrall (of which there are millions) would actually sit in front
of a television set watching the adverts!
32.Do you enjoy the cinema? Next time you are there look around at the Thralls as they
stare mindlessly at the screen when the (endless) adverts come on. It is a scary and surreal
experience.
33.Never, ever sit there flipping through colour supplements or catalogues to see if
something grabs you and stimulates your greed.

53
Stop! Check! Do You Really Want This?
34.When thinking of a purchase, have the discipline to triple-check with yourself if this is
something you really need and is not something which is largely to do with image
getting one up on others, imagining you will look good, imagining you will feel good.
This is illusion. You will not look good and feel good for more than half a day. That is an
expensive half a day.
35.Check with yourself if you really need the latest anything phone, car, TV, Hi-Fi,
MP3, i-this or i-that, computer, DVD, kitchen, sofa, bedroom furniture, bathroom,
conservatory, swimming pool or holiday. All this is fine if you are loaded down with so
much cash you have not the faintest idea what to spend it on. If that is the case, the things
you buy are not really controlling your life because they need virtually none of your effort
to get them. But that is rarely the case.
36.Most people are flat, stony broke and maxed-out on every credit card they own and
have borrowed to the hilt from any fool stupid enough to lend them more money.
37. They need a lot of money to buy all this junk.
38. This is not a call to live monk-like with your robe and begging bowl. We are talking
about FREEDOM your freedom. Buying into this ludicrous dream is costing you your
life literally. So you must try and snap out of this delusion as fast as possible.
The action required here is simple stop buying stuff you do not need and which you
39.
cannot afford.

54
 Grade Seventeen: Religion and Spirituality
1. This section of the teachings concerns the negative effects of the larger world religions.
Adherents accept a more or less rigid adherence to a set of beliefs, dogmas or creed
usually with its associated written materials (the Holy Books) which are believed to be
divinely inspired and possibly even infallible.
2.These teachings do not apply to spirituality. Spirituality and religion are usually
negatively correlated. The more religious you are, the less spiritual you are likely to be
and vice-versa. There are exceptions of course.
3.Religion is discussed here because it is virtually impossible to be free, wealthy and
empowered if one has signed up to (and actually believes) a major religious system.
The Four Existential Truths
4.The world can be a painful place. Religion buffers us from the pain of four existential
truths. This is the main reason mankind clings desperately to these illusions and all
variations of them.
5. There are four important truths about existence which you need to know, absorb and
fully accept before you can live a happy, empowered life, here on earth. They are not easy
truths to accept, but they will set you free.
6.The First Truth. The universe is essentially Meaningless with a capital M. This is
meant in the wider what is it all about? sense. It is futile to demand a reason for the
existence of the universe, or to postulate a disembodied consciousness which created it.
Questions such as Who created the universe? are entirely devoid of meaning. The
universe is, by definition, everything which exists. There is no outside. Time, also, is
within the universe. It is, in fact, a characteristic of the universe and cannot exist
independently of matter. Questions such as: What was there before the universe? cannot
therefore be asked at this stage of our evolution.
7.It is therefore wise to completely abandon any search for Meaning because such
Meaning, if it exists, is entirely unknowable to humans at this stage of our development.
Do not waste any significant time on this pursuit. Pondering it for light amusement is
acceptable.
8.We humans create our own meaning (with a small m). This is what we do. These
smaller meanings are what keep us functioning, so they are important.
9.We desire to know that our lives matter. We seek significance and this is the emotional
experience of the will to life. We seek to understand how our lives serve a bigger context
hence the religious desire to serve God of course.
10.We can obtain meaning by having an inner, rooted sense of significance and worth
(sometimes called self esteem). It can be attained by service to, and acceptance by,
others in society. It can be attained by the creative process. It can be attained when we see
ourselves mirrored in others. It can be hinted at in the answer to the question: Does it
matter if I live or die?
11. The Second Truth. You are born alone, you die alone. Of course, you meet and
interact with people throughout your life, but nobody not even your life partner of fifty
years, knows very much about what it is like to be you. They know one millionth of your
55
thoughts, feelings, hopes and aspirations. Your communication with others is little more
than the crude banging of a jungle drum, good enough to grunt out a few exchanges of raw
information, but entirely hopeless at transmitting the finer nuances of the essential You.
12.You are alone in a small fishing vessel, floating on a dark sea at night. Nobody will
ever visit your boat, but it is comforting to see the lights of other friendly boats, bobbing
in the darkness alongside you. The very best you can hope for is to have a few friendly
boats by your side, with perhaps the odd shouted word of encouragement from the unseen
captains of these vessels.
13. The Third Truth: You, and everyone you love or care for is going to die. Fact.
14.Man has existed for an estimated two million years and there have been about 15 billion
of us in total. Not one has cheated the grave, despite fables to the contrary.
15.You will not cheat death either. Sorry. Within about 120 years, every single man
woman and child alive on the planet today will be dead. There is no mechanism for
surviving death, despite our most fervent wishes. Our attempts to invent survival
mechanisms (reincarnation, heaven, immortal soul, etc.) although understandable, are
rather sad and desperate.
16.When you die, you will live on for a short while as a shadowy memory in the minds of
a handful of other boat captains. One millionth of what you were will exist in some small
corner of their clutter-filled lives. One by one, their boats will sink too. Some day, there
will be one last boat whose captain is the only person alive on the planet ever to have
known you. That boat will also sink, leaving nobody not one single soul, who ever knew
you personally. You will be utterly forgotten.
17.You cannot take so much as a paper-clip with you. All of your worldly possessions will
be divided up amongst the living. Your precious letters, ornaments and knick-knacks will
be dumped, burned in a large house-clearance bonfire or given to a charity shop. Anything
of value you own will be sold and the money divided according to your Will. You will be
remembered hourly, then weekly, then monthly, then yearly. Then...not at all.
18.Exactly the same fate awaits everyone you love and care about. Your children, your
significant other, all of your friends and everyone you have ever met or known.
19.Any lingering belief you have about surviving somehow is mere wishful thinking.
You will not. Perhaps you hope that they will invent immortality, just in time to save
you. Alas they will not. Perhaps you think that you are somehow special, and will cheat
death? This is a comforting delusion. Perhaps you believe you will go to heaven and live
with the angels? That is just sad.
20.This knowledge is both deeply humbling and hugely empowering. It means that you
have to seize control of your life right now because you only have a little time left.
21. The Fourth Truth: You are the sole director of your own life and destiny.
This follows from the other three. There is no supernatural ghost directing your life. You
are not influenced by another mystical dimension, because there is no such thing. You are
all alone, and despite your kicking and squirming, your evasions, lies, hopes and self-
deceit that leaves just one person at the helm of your ship. You.
22.You are all alone on the bridge as your ship plunges forwards into icy and hostile seas;
rudderless, directionless. Instead of seizing the spinning helm, what are you doing?

56
23.You get to your knees and pray that some ghostly spirit will seize the wheel and point
the bow to a safe harbour for you.
You long for one of the other boat captains to leap aboard your vessel and stand by
24.
your side, guiding you and keeping you safe from the rocks.
25.You analyse each crashing wave, searching for its meaning and significance, trying
to discern patterns in the waves, the gusts of wind and the lashing rain, hoping it is all for
some higher purpose. You play childish mental games with yourself, promising to be a
good boy or girl, if only the wind will drop and the seas become calm. You throw charms
and amulets at the waves; go to your cabin and light incense in front of a picture of a still
ocean; do tarot readings to discern which wave will hit you next; read your palm to see if
drowning lies in your future. You get out your crystals and try to channel wave-reducing
vibrations towards the ship; you scream to a long-dead prophet to stretch out his
merciful hand and stay the elements.
Meanwhile above the moaning wind, you scream: Why me? Why me? I am special.
26.
Other people drown, but not me, oh please, unknowable ghost, not me!
27.And all this time, your unguided ship tosses about on the stormy sea for want of a
captain...
28.So much pain. So much angst. The pain of our own death, the agony of an infinite,
meaningless universe, the terrible, terrible loneliness and the horrifying responsibility of
command. Is it any wonder that we seek buffers any illusion will do to save ourselves
from the truth? We will believe anything anything rather than face this pain. This is
where religion feeds upon our pain by offering illusory solutions.

The Truth Will Set You Free

29.In reality these four truths are hugely empowering because they release us. They allow
us to flourish in this life, on this planet. We can be courageous and go into battle, aim for
victory and shoot for glory.
30. Religion seeks to buffer us from these existential realties.
31.Religious people are often the most deeply asleep of all Thralls and it is close to
impossible to awaken them. They have bought into maybe the biggest con trick ever
perpetrated on the human race. Their natural awe and wonder at the mystery of the
universe, coupled with a deep sense of spirituality are hijacked in the service of rigid
dogmatism.
32.Religion is a primary tool of control over the Thralls who are called The flock. The
flock are instructed to hand over their life values to The Master in return for
compensation when they die. The values they hand over are money, respect, kudos, time
and much else besides. Meanwhile you attempt to live by their artificial code of morals.
33.'Moral', as stolen by religion, means never lying, cheating, stealing and so on, but in the
context of obedience to an illusory supernatural being, not because these actions are
damaging to your human life or values. And 'goodness' is a kind of cloying, sacrificial,
simpering act in which you pretend that the values of a total stranger are superior to your
own values, and struggle to act accordingly. Meanwhile you fight the gloomy depression
which settles on you whenever you engage in such a distorted act as exchanging a higher
value for a lesser one.
57
 The primary duty of a religious adherent is obedience. This is usually obedience to a
34.
non-existent invention of man called God. In reality the heads are bowed to real live
humans who set themselves up as the priesthood.
35. Secondary duties are servility, humility, altruism and destruction of pride. The message
is: Sacrifice your life values and be happy about it. Do not complain.
36.The priests manipulate the flock by telling them simple childrens stories in order to
extract values of money (salary) and kudos (respect, admiration). Many sincerely believe
what they are preaching, many do not.
37.You are unlikely to succeed in your desire for wealth, power and freedom if you are
religious. You will believe totally in that corner of Wonderland. To you, it is real and
nothing will shake that delusion. Please recall the difference between religious and
spiritual they are often polar opposites.
38.You cannot seize control of your destiny and set out to live a life of positive power,
with pride in what you do, if you have signed-up for a belief which has as its central theme
obedience to something which does not exist. If you intone mantras of humility, sacrifice,
duty and subservience one day, you cannot go out with pride, independence, power and
industry the next not and remain sane, that is.

Religion v Spirituality
39.Religion has hijacked spirituality and twisted it for its own nefarious purposes. A deep
sense of wonder and awe at the miracle of life, the universe and our place in it is not only
laudable it is absolutely essential if you are to transcend ego. This is not religion which
is a stagnant, codified set of ritual observances and prescribed beliefs with only the
faintest echo, if any, of the original, brilliantly awakened mind which gave birth to it.
40. If you are lost in a hall of illusion, your rational mind is in jeopardy and this is an
essential tool if you want to become a wealthy man or woman. It cannot thrive on a diet of
illusions, fairy-stories and falsehoods. Such food is poison and a part of your mind withers
and dies every time you allow such exposure.
41.The High Priests of religion know exactly what they are doing. Their goal is the
enslavement of the flock, not our freedom and enlightenment.
42. Many religions defame and defile man whilst masquerading as saving us. They
proclaim that we are weak, we are sinful, we are dirty, greedy and lustful. We should hang
our heads in shame. We cannot do anything for ourselves. We are utterly powerless
without God. We exist, not for our own ends, but to serve an illusion. Our place is in the
dirt, heads bowed in supplication.
43. Blind, unquestioning faith and obedience are the highest virtues espoused by religion.
This leads to the suppression of hundreds of millions of tortured souls, wracked in guilt
44.
and agony. It locks them into starvation and poverty. It causes bloodletting and fanaticism
on a truly horrendous scale.
Religions mostly all work on the same set of principles. Sacrifice your power, energy
45.
and talents to the 'priests' and 'church' in return for a direct line to the force which is ruling

58
your destiny. Your sacrificed power, time, energy and money will be gratefully received
by the people (not gods) running this illusion.
46. Religions debase mankind and destroy pride. They corrupt altruism which is another
good and decent value (properly understood) by yoking it to the service of a powerful
elite. According to the religio-statist mantra, your purpose is to toil under the yoke of
human servitude until every mouth is fed, every child is clothed and each human being has
the basics of life. No matter that this is an impossible task, you will labour until your
back is broken and you can turn the wheel no more. Your reward will be waiting for you
in heaven.
47.You will not even be granted pride in a job well done. Pride is sinful. Your task is to
labour for no reward not even satisfaction. You are not even permitted to see the results
of your efforts. These will be distributed by the priests of collectivism to the needy and
you will not be consulted or shown the outcome of your labours. You must not think of
what you want. This is selfish. Instead you must constantly search out the needs of
others and strive to fulfil them. It is critical that you understand the difference between a
scam-artist imposing these values on you so that they might profit, and any inner sense
you might develop for wanting to help those less fortunate than yourself or create
something of value to others.

Lovingkindness
48.According to Beyond Wealth teachings, this stage of genuine loving-kindness can only
be voluntarily reached, it cannot be imposed through force, threats or guilt.
49.Once again mankinds natural care and generosity are polluted by the guilt-inducing
admonitions of religion. Sacrifice becomes a duty. Caring becomes a tedious chore. Love
becomes a bargaining chip to get into heaven.
50.Our purpose on earth is not to grovel at the feet of an illusory god and his self-
appointed representatives. We exist for our own sake, not for the sake of others. Our
highest, most noble purpose is to seek our own happiness. Our natural compassion and
feelings of interconnection compel us to help others along the way and this brings real
contentment. This is one of our finest selfish pleasures, but this is not our duty. It may not
be demanded of us.
51.No person has the right to place a mortgage on anothers life, neither does anyone have
the right to demand the smallest portion of anothers estate.
52.Our nature is basically good and decent. The correct way for us to interact is as traders
each creating values and trading them non-coercively. In this way society advances
beyond measure and the lives of all people improve dramatically. In contrast, religions and
governments use a combination of bribes, threats, extortion and outright force to
confiscate your life efforts and redistribute them to others, buying kudos for themselves as
they do it. This destroys altruism at its root.
53.We gain our reward here, on earth. It is here that we take our pleasure and pursue our
happiness. Reject outright any fantasies about an illusory paradise where you will collect
your heavenly reward. This is such a blatant confidence trick it would be laughable were it
not for the misery, evil and destruction it causes world-wide. If you had never heard it

59
before you would laugh loud and long and call the person uttering it a fool to his or her
face.
54.Always strive for control in your life. Do not give your power away. If you are weak,
someone else will snatch control of your life from your faltering hands. Remember, this is
the Pharaoh principle the more slaves another human being can command, the greater
their personal power. If you have little interest in seizing control over your own life, then
someone else will quickly sign you up for their self-serving project.
55.Mankind is a glorious, positive, goal-oriented species. We are capable of almost
anything. We will conquer space. We will conquer disease. We will conquer all diseases.
We are brilliant. We should be proud and stand tall. We do not need the help of dead
prophets, piles of rocks, animal entrails, wooden crosses, the sun god, spirits, angels,
holy books, illusory pan-dimensional beings, astrology, tarot cards or Ouija boards.
56. We can do it alone. Indeed we have to, since we are alone!

Deluded and Terrified

57.People who sign up for religion are not bad people. They are asleep and deluded, just
like almost everyone in society. They are also terrified, whilst simultaneously desiring the
benefits of religious membership. These include a sense of community; human warmth;
friendship; an approved outlet for their nascent spirituality; a safe and simple set of
beliefs which will not tax their minds; a holy reference book dictated by God himself
which has all the answers to lifes complex questions; feelings of being right and knowing
the truth and that the disbelievers and wicked people will all be punished; moral
direction without any grey areas; a rationale for their poverty, as money is evil; a rationale
for their powerlessness, as everything is part of Gods plan; protection from existential
angst and an analgesic for the pain of our own mortality since this life is a mere dress
rehearsal for a glorious afterlife. There are many more benefits of membership, which is
why approximately two billion people worldwide have joined the branches of the various
religious cults.
58.One of the worst aspects of religion is its insistence upon obedience. This undermines
our free will and independence. The primary directive is obedience to Gods will. This
translates as obedience to his temporal representatives on earth, of course. Such obedience
encourages weakness. You are actively encouraged to seek guidance and help not from
your own resources but from an illusory external spirit. This leaves you weak and
powerless which is precisely the point. Rational enquiry is actively discouraged.
Disbelief will render you an outcast at best, or subject to the death penalty at worst,
depending on the brand of fanaticism to which you have signed up.
59.Religions encourage in-group, out-group hatred and violence as each believes they hold
the truth and will often fight to the death to protect it.
60.Many, if not most religious people are kind, generous and well-meaning of course. If
they do not believe too strongly in the illusion (and most do not) they can gain all of the
benefits mentioned above, but suffer little of the downside.
61. There is nothing wrong with this unless your purpose is to wake up and be wealthy,
powerful and free in which case you will be stopped dead by your religious beliefs, if you
have them. Religions are just more Wonderland illusions for entertaining and controlling
60
the Thralls, no better and no worse (except in rare extremes) than a dozen other such
illusions.
62.Reclaim your spirituality! You do not need a dead, dogma-driven religious structure to
allow you to reconnect with the god within. Indeed, such a structure is highly likely to
prevent you from so doing.
Let your awe and wonder envelop you. Be astonished at the immensity of the universe
63.
and the fact that it exists at all. Find your inner light and let it shine. If you choose to call it
God, so be it, but do not abase yourself before it, pray to it, or demand help from it.
64.Do not let a single person, let alone a self-appointed priesthood stand between you
and your version of the truth. You do not need anyone to mediate the truth for you, you
can discover it for yourself in quiet contemplation or meditation.
Start seeing religions for what they are entertainment designed to amuse, baffle and
65.
control the Thralls. They have little, if anything to do with spirituality.
66.You want to become a wealthy man or woman? Reclaim your power from those who
have taken it from you. Laugh when they suggest you sacrifice yourself to them. Unmask
their manipulations when they try to trick you out of your life efforts for their
aggrandisement. Stand tall if they tell you to bow your head. Get up out of the dust. They
want you there, kneeling and bowing in supplication, shame and weakness. Do not give
them that pleasure.
67.If God existed he would want you standing proud, walking tall, striding into the world
with positive power, being all you can be, fighting, daring, winning, loving, sharing,
helping. He would not want you on your knees mumbling incantations. He would not want
you whining and begging to him for favours. He would not want your dreary, hypocritical
lip service belied by your actions. He would not want you wracked with guilt, feeling
sinful and dirty, struggling to fathom his mysterious ways, hating your religious
opponents, sneering at the fools who do not know the truth.
68. He would want none of these things. In your heart, you know this.

61
 Grade Eighteen: Friends and Family
1.A critically important factor in your success is the nature of the people you surround
yourself with.
2.It is hard to succeed in life as a complete loner, without support. Hard becomes
impossible if those around you are actively trying to undermine your plans for wealth,
power and freedom.
3.You need to make a careful inventory of your friends, family and most importantly your
significant other if you are in a relationship.
4.Your partner will have the largest effect upon you. If they are not on your team it will be
extraordinarily hard to succeed. A health warning: many people who change and go for
wealth and freedom end up divorcing or leaving their partners.
5.The reason for this break-up rate is simple. When your partner got together with you,
they selected you more for your solid, dependable characteristics than for your risk-taking,
wealth seeking, freedom-loving attitude. If you suddenly change from home-loving to
freedom-loving, this will bring about a mismatch in your partners world-view. This will
cause fear which can lead to anger.
6.Your partner wants you how you were dependable, bringing in a regular, safe wage,
looking after him or her or at least contributing regularly and dependably. They will not
take kindly to your bid for freedom, not least of all because a desire for freedom in one
area (financially) can, they think, spill over into a desire for freedom in other areas
freedom from them. They are correct in their suspicions.
7.Their fear will make them highly nervous about any risks you might want to take to
achieve wealth. The result is that they will persuade you, cajole you and nag you to play it
safe, not to take a risk, to stick with what you know.
8.If you persist in your escape plans they may up the ante and become argumentative,
aggressive and even violent. This is their deep fear in action. They are terrified of losing
what they have. They do not share your vision of wealth and freedom. For them safety is
everything. They will choose safety and boredom over adventure and riches any day.
There is no contest in their minds.
9. If this is your story, sadly you only have two choices. You must understand that it is
possible, but most unlikely that you will persuade your partner to join you in your bid for
freedom. The best you can hope for is if they are willing to stand aside, not interfere and
let you get on with it. The two remaining options are to abandon your plans or to abandon
your partner. These are hard truths, but true nonetheless. You must either settle for a life
of safety and mediocrity, or lose the stability of a possibly good relationship and shoot for
glory. Only you can make this choice, but try to spare yourself the heartache of a
protracted, lengthy attempt at persuading your significant other to your viewpoint. If they
are not on board fairly immediately, they are unlikely to be persuaded.

Family
Now let us turn to family. Here, a lot depends on how close your ties are to them. If not
10.
very close, they are unlikely to affect you much. If your ties are close then you need to be
aware that they will most likely not take kindly to your plans. You will be on the receiving
62
end of a lot of well-meaning, friendly advice about the danger of taking risks. You will
hear stories about people they know who lost everything on this or that venture.
11.Friends and family want you, bless their hearts, to be like them. This means, in
Wonderland. Do not rise above your station. Just be a robot like them. Obey orders. Do
not stick your head above the parapet. Do not be different. Get a safe job. Settle down.
Forget your dreams. Support us. Feed us. Look after us.
12.You may wonder about the motive of these people. If they truly cared about you, surely
they would support your dream? Consider yourself lucky if they do. Their motive in
making you play safe is quite easy to understand. If you become wealthy and free, that
means they are out of excuses for making this happen in their lives. People are faced with
two choices do what it takes to be a success, or do what it takes to reduce the successful
down to their level. The second route is far easier than the first, and this is why many
people opt for this. It is why the tabloid newspapers delight in stories about once
successful people now losing everything. This is what the Thralls want to hear.
13.Understand that your friends and family are not evil. Hopefully they do not want to hurt
you. All they want is to spare themselves the pain of having someone like you act as a
shining beacon and showing them what is possible. For then they would need to take
action too and they do not want that. People crave comfort, security and routine. As a
general rule, if you rock this boat you will pay a price.

Jealousy
14.When you succeed you will also immediately attract jealousy. People do not want to
make the considerable effort it takes to become wealthy. They want the money but for
free. This is why they do the lottery. If someone close to them becomes wealthy they will
start to attack them, either claiming it was luck, or hinting at some secret advantage, or
suggesting wrongdoing.
The truth (that you became wealthy through hard work and skill) is unbearable for them
15.
because the route to their own fortune has just been disclosed. Now they have no more
excuses in life. Better to pretend the route is a fraud, or luck, or does not apply to them.
That way they save themselves the effort of trying.
16. These are hard truths to hear, but you need to be warned.
17.There are friends and family who will support your dream if you are lucky. You must
cleave to these people and make them your allies. They will share in your fortune when
you make it. Sadly these people are rarer than the former type.
18.You need to take action. Ruthlessly assess your friends and those you hang out with.
Where are they going? What are their principles and guiding virtues? Do they support
endeavour, industry, wealth? Or are they lazy, poor and always on the lookout for easy
handouts? Gently float your plans past them in a very casual way. What is their reaction?
Supportive or hostile? A lot more will be said about this important area later when we
discuss Type B people in the next chapter.
19. Realise that you may need to leave all of your friends behind. Realise that you may
need to change your partner. With luck you will have a supportive partner and enthusiastic
friends, but be prepared to change both.

63
 Grade Nineteen: The Type B Person
This is a long section on a highly important topic the people you surround yourself
1.
with. This may be the most important few pages you have ever read in your life.
2.It is virtually impossible to become wealthy as an isolated individual. You need to
recruit others to help you to realise your dreams.
3.However you must choose wisely. There are many people in your life who wish to take
your talents, energy and money. They have become highly skilled at doing this, so in order
to thrive you must be able to identify and eliminate such people from your life. You may
need a little ruthlessness to do this.
4.Without this ability, you are very exposed and can be taken advantage of. You could
lose a very great deal of your wealth and life-energies if you are not careful to avoid being
sucked into these peoples manipulations.
5.These people will be called Type B people for the purposes of this discussion. This is
in contrast with a productive, honest and open Type A person. If a Type A person decides
to become wealthy then he or she does this by open trade with others and does not seek to
leech unearned values.
6.The intention here is to identify type B people so that you may expose and avoid them, it
is not to demonise them. We identify to protect ourselves, just as we did with government,
religions, the media and advertisers. We do not sit in judgement, blame or try to change
these people. They are not evil. They are how they are due to their conditioning.
7. There are no evil people just people acting in evil ways.
8.This distinction is important. Once you start talking about 'bad people' as opposed to
'people behaving badly' you fall into the trap of splitting people into good and evil. From
there, it is a short step to violence.
9.All human actions are an attempt to serve life, even if they end up destroying life. All
any sane human is trying to do is to get his or her needs met. Sometimes, like the Type B
person, they do this in very distorted and harmful ways. We are all tempted at one time or
another into faking or cheating or using force to attain that which we desire.
10.What we call an 'evil' person is really someone who habitually, chronically and
probably subconsciously uses anti-life strategies in an attempt to gain pro-life values.
They are often deeply unconscious.

Second-Handers
11.Whilst not evil, there are millions of people engaged in parasitical Type B behaviour,
slowly leeching life values from their hosts.
12.These people are the 'second-handers.' They are people striving to get the pro-life
values they need. It is just their strategy which is wrong. It is the strategy of the parasite.
13.They have worked out, many years ago, that gaining true values from reality is very
hard work. It requires constant effort, focus and will.
14.They think they have found a way to bypass all this hard work and effort. All they have
to do is fake it, lie, cheat, entice, cajole, frighten do whatever it takes in order to get

64
Type A people (for only they can produce values) to hand over the values for free, to the
Type B person.
15. Please read that paragraph again because it contains the important sentence 'for only they
can produce values'. Type A people produce, Type B leech and it is this truth which renders
the parasite utterly powerless for he or she is a dependant.
16. The parasitical strategy is doomed because it is a requirement of human nature that we
do this work for ourselves, thus Type Bs are always left defeated, unhappy, depressed,
angry, violent and many other negative things beside.
17.Values gained through cheating, lying, manipulation or outright theft, are just illusions.
If you doubt this, ask yourself, did you ever hear about a truly happy, contented and
fulfilled career criminal or gangster? Think of someone you know who fits the description
'manipulative.' Is this a happy person? Think of people on benefits who routinely live by
the efforts of others. Are they happy? No, they are not. Frequently they are angry and
depressed.
18.You must learn to recognise these dangerous men and women in order to protect
yourself from the mayhem they will cause in your life if you let them anywhere near you.
They are often slick, plausible, friendly and highly manipulative they are not that easy to
spot, unless you have been tipped-off. Soon you will have the power to unmask them.
We are not trying to identify robbers, rapists and serial con-men here. The Type B is far
19.
more subtle and can often present as charming, affable, amusing, likable and personable.
This is no accident. These 'people skills' are their main weapon an essential tool for
manipulating Type As.

The Type B Person

20.Let us now take a glimpse into the psyche of those who would keep you enslaved for
their own ends.
21. These people are not, in the main, robbers, muggers and rapists. They are more plentiful
than these aberrations. We are talking about people who habitually use parasitical
strategies to get their needs met.
These people are highly dangerous to you, your life, your happiness and your financial
22.
well-being. You must learn to recognise such people, unmask their strategies and refuse,
point-blank to become a victim or 'host'.

Type Bs Require a Host

23.Here is the biggest human secret you will ever learn: just like all bullies, these people
are powerless, whilst seeming to be frighteningly powerful.
They are powerless because without you, or people like you, they are utterly helpless.
24.
They derive their power from you. If you refuse to give it, they are impotent.
25. Their primary orientation is towards other people, not towards the outer world.
26.Without people (victims or hosts) they are cast adrift, completely unable to function.
Deep down, they are the frightened ones for they are staring daily into the abyss, buffered
from oblivion only by an illusion which they have used to fool their victims.

65
27.Let us take a look at how these people operate. To understand the psychology of a Type
B, you first need to understand that they have needs exactly the same needs as you have,
in fact.
28.They want to have their needs met, just like you do their physical needs and their
emotional/spiritual needs. But here is the key: The Type B person needs values but does
not want to expend the effort required to achieve them.
29.Their strategy is simple they will seek out a 'host' who will provide the values to
them, free of charge or effort.
30.It is important that you understand then, that a Type B is primarily oriented towards
other people, not to external practical matters. They are 'people' people. They thrive on
their contacts, their friends, their circle which they forever seek to expand. The larger the
circle, the bigger the safety net and the more potential victims there are to suck values
from. This does not mean that anyone with a lot of friends is a Type B person or that you
should be a loner.

The Type B Target

31. What 'hosts' do Type B people seek out?
32.Not any old people. The Type B is searching, radar-like, trying to lock-on to a Type A
productive person. Now here is the trick: how do you get a Type A productive person to
hand over values to a Type B, second-hander? There is only one way (apart from force).
33.The Type B must first trick the Type A into thinking well of the Type B. How to
achieve this? Easy. Steal his or her morality. If you like, seize the moral high-ground.
34.The moral uncertainty of some Type A people can be quickly spotted by the Type B.
Only force can get an unwilling victim to hand over values, and force is outlawed in
society. Only governments can use it to extract values from Type A's (e.g. via taxation).
Instead, the Type B seeks victims who will give him or her permission to loot them. This
knowledge is of vital importance if you are to survive an encounter with a Type B.
35.To summarise thus far: a true Type B has one primary skill. He or she is an expert at
scanning for and locking onto Type A, productive, rational people who have been so
corrupted by society, religion or philosophy that they are uncertain of their moral ground,
and if they feel a little guilty about their virtue, so much the better. Such a person makes
an ideal victim or host. When the Type B has finished, the target will willingly sign over
any values asked of him or her.
36. To continue with the shake-down, the second-hander must get the Type A person to
view the Type B as superior. Not equal, but superior. To do this, the Type B must play
tricks with the Type A's sense of morality and right/wrong.

Someone You Know?

37.Before we continue with our exploration of the Type B person, be aware that this might
be a little painful for you for two reasons:
1. You might recognise aspects of yourself in these pages the ouch experience.
2. You might have an 'aha!' experience as you suddenly realise that someone close to
you fits this description perfectly. It might even be your partner or a close relative. This

66
can be disconcerting because once you have identified such a person, there is no going
back. They are forever unmasked.
38. The health warning is that this knowledge can be a relationship destroyer.

The Type B Arsenal

39.Type Bs have an impressive array of weapons at their disposal. Having identified a
victim (remember, much of this is subconscious) they will just go through the weapons
one after the other, in quick succession, probing for vulnerabilities, searching out
weaknesses. Once the right weapon is identified, the Type A will be subjected to a
relentless assault until he or she either gives in and becomes a willing host, or manages to
escape. If the latter, the Type B dispassionately moves on to the next target host from their
extensive contact list of such people. Typically they are working several 'marks' at any one
time, and so it is no problem to them if you wriggle free. It can become a big drama if you
have been a willing host for several years and then try to wriggle free. The Type B will
fight to retain your valuable services.
40.Here are just a few of the weapons they will use. You may have the disquieting feeling
that you recognise someone 'near and dear' to you in this description.
41.Weapon #1: They seek to pretend to have equal status to you. E.g. I'm good with
people, you're good with things. Translation: You're so good at facing reality and
creating the values needed for survival. I'm just all fingers and thumbs when it comes to
that practical stuff, but I am really excellent at chatting to people and getting them to like
me. So we're equal. See? You're good at one thing, I'm good at another.
42.Weapon #2: Seizing the moral high ground. A true sign of a Type B is if they imply
that they are morally superior. E.g. Running a lumber yard is necessary, I suppose, but
there is so much suffering in the world. I feel so very strongly we should be doing more to
help those less fortunate than ourselves. After all, does the world really need more wood?
43.That would be a typical Type B double-whammy, beautifully executed. In one sentence
they have seized the moral high ground and subtly undermined your own pride in your
achievements. Their case is also sufficiently nebulous to make it difficult to argue with.
Your protests can sound like I do not care about the suffering in the world, I only care
about timber.
44.Weapon #3: Needle at the vulnerabilities of the Type A, or create new ones which
the Type A had not realised existed. E.g. Yes, psychiatry is very interesting and I'm
sure you make a lot of money from it, but don't you sometimes wonder if you are doing
more harm than good?
45.This is an 'Amber Warning' type of comment. Be on alert if you hear this sort of thing.
Start getting used to translating it in your mind. This 'innocent' question, translated,
becomes: Psychiatry is not very interesting. You do it just for money, don't you? I want
to needle a little at your fear and insecurity that you might not be doing a good job. It is
just a guess, but it is my first stab at you. I feel confident that you will have some
insecurity which I can exploit.
As a check, ask yourself why any well intentioned person would ask such a question?
46.
They would not. Such a person would say something like: Psychiatry is something I
know little about I'm afraid. Tell me what it is which attracts you to such a profession? Is
67
it your desire to help people to live happy and fulfilled lives? Tell me about some
interesting cases you have handled.
Weapon #4: Through careful, 'innocent' questioning over a protracted period, the
47.
Type B person seeks to answer one important question: What do you feel guilty
about?
48.Once they have discovered this, they are home and dry. They will use your guilt against
you. So, the Type B is not interested in what joy the steel magnate feels at seeing the rolls
of red-hot sheet pour from the press. No, they want to find out if he is guilty about the
environmental damage, or perhaps the health of his workers, or maybe the unfair
competitive advantage he has over his Japanese rivals. The ex-wife strives to discover
how guilty the ex-husband is feeling about lack of contact with the children and uses this
information to extract values. The husband discovers that his wife is guilty about not being
a perfect housewife, cook and mother, preferring instead to study for a degree. He uses
this fact to get at her in subtle digs and sneers; the intention being to get her to work
harder, faster and longer producing values for him.
49.Warning: A one-off or occasional manipulation does not make someone a Type B
person! We are all guilty of this in moments of stress and anger. What you are looking for
here is a consistent pattern. If you have a Type B in mind, you should, by now, be
nodding sagely to every weapon and be thinking: Yes, thats Brenda alright or Wow!
Thats spot-on for David. The giveaway is consistent, habitual use of these weapons.
50.Weapon #5: Inversion of your moral code. If you are mostly a Type A person
yourself, you will have the virtues of rationality, integrity, pride, independence,
productiveness, honesty and justice in some measure. To spot a Type B, look for the
inversion of these virtues in the things they say. Thus:
51. Rationality: Reason is impotent. There are more things in heaven and earth than
reason. You can't deal with people using reason. Emotions are more important than
reason. They will also attack the tools of reason. Logic: a mere linguistic convention.
Sense perception: Unsound and prone to error. They elevate irrationality and mysticism
as 'higher' knowledge over your rather coarse and brutish rationality.
Motive: Your reason is the sole weapon which you have to unmask this parasite.
52.
He/she must attack your reason at source and make you doubt it.
53.Integrity: Sometimes you have got to give a little on your principles. Principles are
made to be broken. You are so inflexible. Getting the result is important, not how you got
there. Integrity is okay for saints but it gets you nowhere in the real world. You weren't
very principled when...(gives example) You are only principled when it suits you, so why
make a fuss over this, right now?
54. Motive: Integrity is loyalty to rational principles. Such principles do not include
supporting freeloaders. The Type B must get you to see that integrity is malleable that
circumstances alter these 'rigid' principles of yours; that the very word freeloader is a
boorish linguistic convention. Type Bs are always moral relativists.
55.Independence: We are all in this together. We have to look out for one another.
Independent people are greedy and selfish, only looking out for number one. To each
according to his need, from each according to his ability to give. Communism is an
excellent system but it just hasn't been tried properly in practice Russia and China did
68
not practice true communism. Everything you achieved, you did off the backs of others.
You are just a small cog in a big machine.
56.Motive: Obvious. The Type B is a parasite. Nothing makes her more fearful than the
virtue of independence. If you become independent, you cut her loose. She is incapable of
being independent. She must get you to believe that independence is a selfish evil which
only a self-centred glutton would subscribe to. She must get you to believe that sharing is
the way. Sharing with the less fortunate. Sharing with her in particular. They must at all
costs smash your independent spirit.
57.Honesty: A little lie never hurt anyone. The truth can be more painful than a lie.
Youre always trying to work out the truth of the situation. The truth is there is no truth.
Life is what you want it to be. So are facts. What is truth anyway?
58.Motive: The Type B uses smoke and mirrors to dazzle and confuse you. The last thing
he wants is for you to see the truth of any situation. You might realise the truth of your
relationship with him that he is a parasite and you are a provider.
59.Pride: I really hate people who trumpet their achievements. Take that bigheaded Jack
at the party the other night... Pride is a sin. You should keep quiet about your
accomplishments otherwise people will think you are bragging. Everything is a team
effort and so no one person can justifiably be proud everyone did their bit.
60.Motive: Destruction of your joy in your achievements. Whilst you are a proud man or
woman, you cannot be manipulated with altruism. This means you cannot be made to
sacrifice your values to the parasite. They will extort you to rise above pride.
61.Justice: Youre always so righteous. Stop judging people. Others didnt have the
same chances as you. It is easy for you, you are bright and clever and probably good with
your hands. Others find it far more difficult. Who are you to judge?
62.Motive: It is very important for the Type B to smear your notions of right and wrong
and good and bad actions. Everything must be reduced to a uniform shade of grey. Notice
also the emphasis on luck, not skill and application. To a Type B person, wealthy and
successful people are just 'lucky' it is something which just happened, randomly 'to'
them. This evasion on their part protects them from the awful reality of the truth that
wealth, happiness and success happen as a result of squarely facing reality and applying
oneself.
63.Productiveness. We have covered this already. It usually manifests itself as a sort of
whining apology that they are so useless at the 'practical' things in life. They love to boast
that they cannot boil an egg and do not know which end of a screwdriver to hold. This is
all delivered with a subtle smear against those who can and do. Their 'helplessness' is
often designed to trigger your natural desire to help. They need to keep you productive but
destroy your joy in your productiveness and make you believe it is an evil, not a virtue.
64. Motive: To make it appear that some are just randomly handed the gift of
productiveness and others not. It is therefore the duty of the productive to 'share' their
'lucky' bounty with their disadvantaged fellow men and women.
65.So how do you discriminate between such a person and someone who is genuinely
affable, likable etc.? Here are a few differences between Type A and Type B:

69
Reason
66.The Type A person prefers to use reason to guide his or her actions (this does not mean
they have no emotions!). In sharp contrast, the Type B person sneers at reason and will
take any opportunity to distort it or to devalue it.
67.Any attempt you make to argue logically with such a person will be either dismissed or
forcefully and viciously attacked. Reason is like a shining light these people wish to lurk
in the shadows and truly fear the illumination which reason can bring. Reason in this
context means an orientation towards reality and a desire to understand, not a nerdish
insistence upon arguable facts.
68. This might be a typical conversation between an A and a B:
A So I'm trying to understand why you are so angry right now.
B Yes, that is typical of you always trying to understand.
A What is it right now, that you are angry about?
B What? You haven't worked it out logically. Hah! I thought you were the great
logician. Haw, haw.
69.In this invented and hence somewhat artificial exchange, notice the wilful refusal to
move towards understanding and clarity. Instead the response is a deliberate sneering
attack on the very foundations of reason itself.
70.There is a reason for this. The Type B must control the Type A as this is his/her source
of parasitic values. Please read that again. This is serious.
71.To do this, reason must be ridiculed and destroyed lest the Type A unmask the dynamic
of the Type B.
72. Type B people are almost always mystically inclined. Since they have eschewed the
only proper way of gaining values (through their own rational efforts) they are forced into
the only alternative.
73. Warning Sign: Mystical and wilfully anti-mind and anti-reason. Trying to hold a
rational discussion with such a person is like wrestling a slippery eel. You will feel
frustrated and angry. You will feel your energy slipping away in a 'hall of mirrors' maze of
confusion and illogic. You will know what a vampire attack would be like, if such
creatures existed. Your energy and life will be slowly drained away.

Independence
74.The Type A's primary orientation is towards external reality, not to other people. They
work out how they can achieve their needs by engaging their rational mind with the
problems of the world (inhabited by people, of course).
75.In sharp contrast, the Type B is entirely focussed on other people, for this is how they
gain their values. They are true second-handers and would literally die without a group to
leech values from. Their focus is social climbing, getting 'in' with the 'right' people,
learning to manipulate and control individuals and groups.
76.They are skilled at subtle wordplay, innuendo, office politics, backbiting, currying
favour, worming their way into positions of importance, being in the right place at the
right time.

70
77.The very thought of the word 'independent' makes them shudder in terror. Independence
means that they would have to stand on their own two feet, create their own values, make
their own way in the world. In order to control you, they must attack your independent
spirit. Thus a conversation might go something like this:
B: You're so selfish. All you ever think about is you, you, you. What is it you are doing
locked away in that office that is so important, anyhow? I think youre really scared.
Scared of relationships, scared of other people that is why you like your own company
so much. If you spent more time with others you would be exposed for the shallow
hypocrite which you are.
78. Such people are 'party animals.' They are never more comfortable than when
surrounded by a (preferably sycophantic) crowd, for they truly cannot bear their own
company and feel depressed if left alone even for a short time. It is a strong indicator of a
Type A that he or she is perfectly happy with their own company, if circumstances
conspire to make this happen. It is a strong indicator of a Type B that they are almost
terrified of being left alone and for good reason. To be left alone leads eventually to
death for such a person and they subconsciously realise this.
79.Warning Sign: Sneeringly contemptuous of your need for solitude, independence and
privacy. Constantly craving company and attacking you for not wanting to come to this or
that function, party etc. Insecure. Cannot bear to be left alone. Will use guilt and other
manipulation tactics if you threaten to leave them, even for a short while. Cannot stand the
thought that you have any secrets from them or might lead any kind of independent life.

Integrity
80.The Type A person knows what methods produce values and so strives, to the utmost of
his or her ability to remain loyal to rational principles. The Type B person considers such
principles to be 'rigorous,' 'inflexible,' and 'stuffy.' To him or her, 'principles' are entirely
flexible and malleable. They are whatever you want them to be today and tomorrow they
are something different. Life is a matter of expediency. This is precisely the morality you
would expect from an opportunistic hunter of course. Typical Type B comments in this
context would be:
Stop being so stuffy!
Lighten up!
Everything is so serious to you.
Go by your feelings. Do whatever feels right.
If it works, go for it!
81.They are often whim-driven, impulsive and incapable of planning and executing any
long-term strategy. Why? Because they have no need of this any more than a hunter-
gatherer has. They have found several Type A people to handle all of this tricky stuff for
them. Their motto is Eat, drink and be merry, for tomorrow ye may die. In fact, there is
no tomorrow for such a person, only an endless today during which they will be provided
for... somehow.
82.Another very strong indicator of a Type B is that they have no long-term goals and
strategies. Asked what they might be doing in 5 or 10 years, they will stare at you blankly.

71
Such a question is almost meaningless to them. The answer depends upon who is around
to provide for them.
What little long-range planning a Type B does is confined to ensuring that they have
83.
enough victims lined up well into the future.
84. Warning Sign: Laughs at values, particularly those held consistently. Will tell you to
'lighten up and stop being so stuffy.' Prefers to live moment to moment and will become
bored or agitated if you try to discuss long term plans they have no need of them. Will do
whatever 'works' regardless of morality. To them the moral is the expedient.

Honesty
85.A Type A person completely rejects unreality and illusion. Type Bs wholeheartedly
embrace it. Why? Because unreality and mysticism buffers him from the pain of the awful
truth that he is a parasite. To avoid this truth, he will twist and turn.
86.Their main strategy is faking reality, in any and every way possible. Their objective is
to busk their way through life on a wing and a prayer hoping that their convincing veneer
of lies, charm and pretence will be enough to achieve the immediate value they seek.
87.This might be unearned praise for a job they did badly, but covered up enough to
receive an accolade. It might be unearned love from a partner who has not yet seen
through the shallow illusion which they have presented.
They might say:
Perception is reality. What you appear to be to other people that is what you are.
You've got to fake it to make it.
I don't want to know! Don't tell me!
88.Warning Sign: They lie habitually, often about things which make no difference. They
have lost any discrimination for what is true or false they no longer even know they are
lying. They are image-obsessed. They care about their looks, their image, how people see
them. They care little about what they really are. Often, the car they drive, the clothes they
wear and their line of patter all add up to one big lie. The warning signs come thick and
fast. You discover that this fact is not true and that statement is a lie. At first you give
them the benefit of the doubt but you keep catching them out in endless small fibs and
distortions. When challenged, they pile lie upon lie and become angry and accusatory if
challenged. They vilify you for your lack of trust, and their lies become wilder as they
attempt to shore-up the crumbling edifice. Being an honest person, you justify and forgive.
Eventually, the awful truth hits you...

Justice
89.The Type A person judges (selects) men and women according to their virtues. He
knows we must select amongst people and to do this, we must judge (choose). Errors in
this department will cost us dear. This form of judgement (choosing) is different from the
other use of the word which means to label someone as (say) fat, ugly, stupid etc.
90. To the Type B, all people are potential fodder to be used.
91. This person does not discriminate between good and bad actions in people.

72
92. The Type B is constantly looking for certain people Type As who are
philosophically and morally confused and who can be manipulated into handing over
values for nothing.
93. They are looking for hosts.
94. They will reject outright the strong Type A, for this person will have seen through the
illusion and cannot be manipulated. They will likewise avoid other parasites for the simple
reason that they produce no values. The target is the Type A who has been corrupted and
softened mentally by societal pressures, upbringing or religion into believing that it is
acceptable to have their values confiscated and given to the 'needy.' Often the Type Bs
are in favour of leniency for criminals and harsh sanctions for the productive.
95. Here are some Type B comments:
Who are we to judge? Let him who is without sin...
I get along with everyone.
The real criminals in this world are the capitalist bosses, not those poor people currently
in jail.
He can't help it. I can't help it. They cant help it.
96.Warning Sign: This person seems undiscriminating. He counts amongst his pals,
several obvious villains who he will justify by some comment like: Oh, Steve's not so
bad once you get to know him. He will often surprise you by supporting an immoral act
and then later, attacking a moral act.
97.She might appear to be big on justice but look closely. The only 'justice' she wants is
sanctions against Type A people who refuse to become hosts for parasites. Thus her
particular scorn is reserved for honest business people, inventors, industrialists and heroes
(e.g. astronauts, loan yachtsmen, explorers etc.) You will hear comments like: They
never really landed on the moon, you know. or Anyone could swan-off around the
world on a yacht if they had daddy's money, like that guy did. Conversely they will often
support immoral actions: They wouldn't have to lock up that guy for stealing if the
government paid him a decent living handout.

Productiveness
The Type A person harnesses nature to provide for his or her needs. The Type B person
98.
harnesses other people. The difference could not be more striking. Please remember that
we are all dependent upon each other. The Type A is not a loner. The difference is, as
you should now realise, the habitual and primary orientation of the Type B towards other
people to provide unearned values for him or her.
99. Type A people constantly seek to educate and train themselves in the use of tools
(physical or intellectual) which will allow them to use the natural environment more
efficiently; either that, or honestly trade their skills and values with others who can do so.
100.The Type B is contemptuous of such people. Their sole focus is on other people
hosts who can be persuaded to provide for their needs. Type Bs are in favour of tough
laws which strip money from the productive and make it available in free handouts to the
needy.

73
101.You might think parasites would praise the productive (since the productive stand
between them and annihilation). The reason they do not is because of the pain which
productive people cause them. Such people remind them of their parasite status.
102.For example, if you have ever loaned money to a family member or friend, you might
have experienced ongoing hostility from them, bordering on hatred the exact opposite of
what you might expect for your generosity. This is because you are effectively saying to
them: You are incapable of producing what you need to survive through your own
efforts. I, however, am more than capable and have even produced a surplus which I
hereby lend to you. By implication then, I am superior to you.
They deride productive people whilst being utterly dependent upon them. They wish to
103.
make productive people feel worthless, to destroy any pride they might have in their
productive ability.
104. They might say things like:
Work always comes first for you, doesn't it? Is all you ever think about.
That's not a proper job!
Your are so clever! I wish I could do that. Thank goodness I have you to provide for me,
otherwise I don't know what I would do.
105.Warning Sign: This person will vilify the productive in general, although sometimes
use wheedling false praise on their host. Similarly they will praise those who seek or get
the unearned. They love social programs in which the 'little guy' is artificially rewarded or
promoted without reference to their ability. It would be most unusual for such a person to
have an obviously productive job. They are more often found in nebulous service
industries, local government, politics, advisory and consultancy roles, etc. (it hardly needs
saying that not all or even most people in such professions are Type B people!) They will
be in a job where they can hide away and pretend that they are engaged in something
important and worthwhile whilst paper shuffling. The job will also have a certain
amount of 'image' associated with it.

How to Identify a Type B Person

You need to be careful here. Most people are mixed some Type A strategies, some
106.
Type B. We are not on a crusade to out the potential Type Bs! Also remember the adage
when you point a finger at someone there are three other fingers pointing back at you!
That said, here are some signs of a possible Type B: you feel tired or ill at ease around
107.
such a person; they almost seem to suck energy out of you. They always seem to want
something often you are unsure exactly what. They seem hungry somehow. When you
argue or discuss with them, you feel uncertain and confused. Nothing seems to make
sense. Things you know are true are called into question; the subject is frequently
changed; you feel you are on quicksand.

The Envious Man

108.Another name for a Type B person might be Homo Invidius The Envious Man. Here
are seven characteristics of such a person. Then you can judge if he or she is dangerous to
your life and values:

74
109. 1. They are the product of impotence and inferiority.
Everyone feels impotent at times; everyone feels inferior at times. The Type B is
overwhelmed by such feelings.
110.What emotions does he or she feel? Simple. Just look into yourself when you are
feeling inferior or impotent, and multiply this by ten times and make it permanent. You
feel anger, you feel hatred. You want to destroy the smug, successful people around you.
You want to get your hands on what they have at any cost. You want to smash
something and grab 'your' share of the loot.
111. 2. They focus on destruction, not acquisition.
In order to build, create and produce you need to hold what is known as the 'benevolent
universe' premise. This is not the same as unwarranted cheerfulness or optimism. It is an
unshakable belief that the universe is auspicious to life and that all sorts of achievements
and growth are possible to you, assuming you act correctly.
112.Pain is viewed as a temporary exception to a happy, successful life. Setbacks are speed
bumps on the road to a better future. Most importantly, you believe that we humans are
efficacious that we are powerful and can achieve. The benevolent universe premise also
holds that humans are basically good and strive to serve life, and that evil actions are
exceptions, not the norm. Furthermore, evil actions are misguided attempts to serve pro-
life values (to get ones needs met).

Malevolent Universe
113.In contrast, Type B people hold the malevolent universe premise. This, as you might
expect, is the opposite view. They believe that the universe is basically a 'bad' place intent
on destroying man. They believe that people are basically evil at root (wild beasts reigned-
in by a thin veneer of civilisation and held in check by naked force or the threat of it) and
that any good they see is an illusion people are pretending to be good just to gain
something. They see pain as the normal lot of man, with any happiness being a temporary
aberration, quickly to be swept away by more pain. Life is a state of pain, misery and
suffering.
114.Not surprisingly, they view life as a dog-eat-dog existence where you have to use force
to grab whatever values you can or to defend yourself from the marauding mob. This
leaves Type B people passive, resigned, depressed and defeated. If someone holds the
malevolent universe premise they cannot possibly create values the universe is against
them, so what would be the point of even trying? So they are left with just one action
destruction. Every creative act is a slap in the face to their belief structure. Every act of
war, disease, destruction and mayhem bolsters their belief system. They almost cannot
bear to see creativity or success yet rely on it utterly for their survival.
115. 3. They see both virtues and faults but they acknowledge only faults.
Their conversation will consist of one long moan, given half a chance. They delight in
repeating bad news the more horrific the better. Their sentences will often start with
Did you hear that dreadful news story about the... On the face of it, they are presenting
as being shocked and appalled by the story. In this way they gain some kudos for being
'caring' and 'sensitive'. In reality, they are adding to the destructive effects of the story and
relishing the additional pain and disharmony they are causing. This is power, you see.
75
When you affect another's emotions, you have power over them you are manipulating
them. Type B people love to manipulate. Type Bs will rarely, if ever, offer you praise. At
very best you will get a grudging acknowledgment, followed quickly by a fault: That was
okay, I suppose, but look what a mess you have made here...
116. 4. Their envy is unappeasable.
This is such an important point. No matter how many kindnesses you show to such a
person, the result will be to entrench their hatred of you and increase their anger towards
you even though they may disguise this. Why? Because with every generous act, you
demonstrate your efficacy and undermine their primary belief that the world is a chaotic,
unintelligible, frightening place where efficacy is impossible. A true sign of a Type B is
their reaction to any help you offer, assuming they have asked for help. If the reaction
some time after receiving the help is hostility, contempt or anger, you have a card-
carrying Type B on your hands.
117.5. They experience pleasure at the misfortunes of others. Type Bs love reading
newspaper stories about once brilliant people falling from grace or being exposed as weak.
They love to read celeb tittle-tattle about this or that star being seen out drunk, or with a
bad hair style. Similarly they devour biographies as long as the book 'exposes' the dead
star as a fallible, evil or rotten person. They do not enjoy biographies which praise the
dead person. One of their favourite expressions is pride comes before a fall. Be on high
alert if you are with someone and they appear to take pleasure in another's misfortune.
118. 6. They do not seek to emulate you.
Sometimes they will talk about how much they admire you and how they want to emulate
your success, but never actually do anything to achieve this goal. You are an anomaly to
them.
119. You seem successful, happy, balanced. What secrets are you holding back?
120.Not taking the action required for success has two benefits for them. Firstly their
malevolent universe premise is saved (you are just another corrupt, weak, powerless
human, just like they are) and secondly they now have the means, through your own guilt,
to control you. So be clear crude envy is not the same as a desire to emulate. If someone
says (and means) I wish I could serve a tennis ball like Pete Sampras this is a positive
desire to improve a skill, not an envious statement.
121. 7. Appeasing or apologising invites more envy, more hatred.
Faced with such a person, we learn EAS Envy Avoidance Strategies. We will apologise
for being big headed or proud. We will hide our true achievements play them down.
This is just what the envious person wants. Remember, all of their power flows from you.
They constantly search for your weakness in order to have a lever to control you. Here you
are giving them the keys to the truck! You are announcing, loud and clear, that you feel
guilty about your abilities and achievements. They will seize this with both hands.

Self Defence Techniques

122. Let us now turn to what we can do to defend ourselves against such people.
123.First the Type B needs to get a foothold. They will often do this by running a 'sucker
test' this is a quick test to see if you are susceptible to manipulation. This might be a

76
quick comment to check out your guilt threshold. Let us say you are a doctor, they might
make a comment such as Isn't it a shame there are so few medical facilities in the third
world, whereas we, in this country have so much?
124.In itself, it seems a harmless observation, but in reality it could be a sucker test. They
will listen carefully to your response, senses finely tuned for any hint of guilt.

Technique #1
125.The self defence technique is to expose their true motive. You must respond quickly
with a comment such as Im puzzled what exactly do you mean by that? Is third world
medicine something you have a particular interest in? If they are a Type B, they will twist
and turn and try another tack or hurriedly back down and move in on another mark. Keep
harrying them to explain themselves clearly and unequivocally. Do not let them off the
hook with ill-defined concepts, loose talk and half truths or innuendo. The number one
weapon you have is the spotlight of truth.
126.Another test might be something like: I'd love to go on a holiday like that, but there is
no way I could afford it... Again, it seems (and could be) innocent, but the way the
question is left hanging in the air reminds you of a fisherman dangling a hook. They are
waiting to see if you can be suckered-in to 'helping' them go on holiday (or whatever). The
defence technique here is silence or a bland: Yes, I can see that would be difficult for you
in your current situation.

Technique #2
127.Please remember that the Type B person's power derives from you and so the self
defence techniques are often nothing to do with blocking an attack. They have much more
to do with holding on to your power. One thing to be aware of is the 'benevolent
projection.'
128.Because you are (hopefully) mostly a Type A person (we are all mixed), you mainly
hold the benevolent universe premise. This means you have a weakness the tendency to
project benevolence onto the Type B standing in front of you. Put more simply, you are
strongly inclined to give them the benefit of the doubt over and over again. You are
childishly naive when faced with their manipulative strategies and you can hardly believe
that they are anything less than 100% honest. The defence technique here is to be more
willing to raise your guard and to be more alert to the little warning bells which are going
off all the time. Do not ignore them act upon them.

Technique #3
129.Type B people are in camouflage. They may present as loving and caring people, often
overly so. Your defence technique is to learn discrimination. Do not take what this person
is saying at face value. Be cautious if they seem overbearingly kind and caring.
130.Discrimination allows you to differentiate between a Type B and a person who is
genuinely warm and caring. The latter will be far more subtle in their presentation and will
almost certainly walk the talk. Type Bs talk only there is no positive action. Type Bs
will whine about the poor, but will not give so much as a penny to their aid. A genuine

77
person is usually the opposite they give generously and rarely, if ever, mention it. So
be careful 'nice' people may be Type Bs in camouflage.

Technique #4
131.You are prone to see such people as irrelevant or unimportant, thus you diminish the
real danger they pose. Again this is an error you are prone to, not a power possessed by
the Type B. They are in fact devious and dangerous. This is the same advice as not
underestimating the speed, strength and wildness of a tiger and believing it to be harmless,
cuddly and cute. The Type B is powerless to create values (he or she must rely on you for
that) but he or she is not powerless to destroy. In their fury at not getting their own way,
they can and will attempt to destroy your life, your happiness and your values.
The take home here is not to underestimate your enemy.

Technique #5
This is a big one. The Type B's primary weapon is guilt. They will constantly probe
132.
you for things you feel guilty about and then exploit them mercilessly.
133. The defence technique is as follows: do not accept unearned or exaggerated guilt. You
are not responsible for the world's poor, the enslavement of the Negro in previous
centuries or the horrors of Nazi Germany. The fact that you have some money should not
cause you a flicker of guilt about those who have none (note this is about guilt not genuine
kindly concern maybe leading to assistance); the fact that you are free should not cause
you to feel guilty about the enslaved. The fact that you are happy should not cause you to
feel guilty about those who are miserable. If someone tries to manipulate you with guilt,
throw it right back in their face. Also, name what it is they are trying to do: I am
wondering why you raised that point? Are you trying to make me feel guilty about my
money?
134.Naming the truth always phases a Type B they do not like it one little bit. Sure, you
have things that maybe you feel a little guilty about welcome to the human race. Just
make sure that your guilt is in proportion to what you have done. By the way, guilt has no
real place in a balanced psyche. Replace guilt with a proper concern to act better than you
did last time, when faced with the same situation.

Technique #6
135. Banish your moral uncertainty!
There is nothing the Type B thrives upon more than your loose, liberal, wishy-washy
136.
morals. They love the fact that you are so uncertain, even about obvious things. They will
worry away at the sore until it opens and bleeds. This is a big chink in your armour and
you must seal it quickly.
You need to know several things and believe in them consistently. Let us call this your
137.
credo. This is not slavish adherence to somebody elses creed, it is fidelity to your own
values.
138.Here are a few suggestions: you need to know that the universe is a benevolent place
for life; that we humans are efficacious; that you can succeed and prosper, despite
setbacks; that humans are basically good; that the world is intelligible; that mankind
78
survives by a certain methods and that attacking those methods is to attack human life
itself; that mankind attains values through right effort; that evil cannot triumph because
it draws its power from good.
139. The Type B will attack, smear and ridicule all of these, using innuendo, false logic,
convoluted argument, mystical pronouncements and any other weapon they can. Their
intention is to shake your belief. They will point to the vilest scoundrel they can find and
say: Look! There is your hero. See how he is lower than the gutter! They will attack the
human species: Man is dust, man is impotent. We can know nothing. Our logic and our
minds deceive us daily. All man's strivings are but hubris and pride. Or: If global
warming (nuclear war etc.) happens it might wipe out all human life and maybe that
would be a good thing. If you ever hear someone saying something like that run a mile!
If they are not routing for their own species, all hope is lost! Above all they will sneer at
and attack your virtues. Your only defence is to stick closely to your principles and values.

Compassion for Type Bs

140. Finally, pity the poor Type B. Think of Gollum in Lord of the Rings!
141.He or she lives in hell. Evasion is very hard work. Pretending that 2+2=5 is a strain.
Attacking pro-life principles causes deep anguish and despair (because deep down we are
all pro life). Living as a 'not-man' by leeching from the productive causes huge stress to
the organism. Pretending, lying, manipulating, currying favour, probing for weaknesses,
hurting others, destroying the creative all take a terrible toll on the perpetrator.
142.A final warning is that the current society you live in is giving out a strong Type B
message daily via the media, politics and entertainment. You are surrounded by partial
Type Bs and you will almost certainly know several fully fledged Type Bs. If you have
not done so already, you must get these people out of your life, whatever the cost. Get the
vampire off your neck fast.
143. Here is how one person described his encounter with the dark side:
Thesethingsaresohardtopindown.ButthemainthingwashowIwasfeelingandthatwas
thatIfeltstealthilyattackedbyverysubtlecomments,silences,actions,nonactions,secretsand
unfulfilledpromises.I'dliketothinkI'mprettyrobustbutendedupquestioningmyownsanity
and having to seek therapy, talking endlessly about it for hours on end. Also, my work
performancealmostcompletelyevaporatedandIendedupbarelyfunctioning,eatingorsleeping
forthreemonths.It'sasifmyworldwasclosinginonme.
144.In concluding this long and important session, we will begin where we started with the
assertion that you will need a strong circle of support if you are to realise your dreams.
Nobody does it alone. This makes your judgement (choosing) even more essential in
deciding who you surround yourself with. Are they mainly Type As or Type Bs? Think
of your circle of friends. Are they self motivated, positive people or are they negative
losers who subtly undermine your position? It is hard, almost impossible to succeed when
surrounded by negative people, but having the love and support of positive people can be
a total blessing.
Rally the support of those who are on message; those who love and care for you and
145.
support your endeavours. Ruthlessly expunge all parasites from your circle.

79
146.Since this is a book about wealth, ask yourself if the people you associate with are
comfortable with your financial aspirations or if they will seek to subtly undermine you or
leech values from you. Values freely given and freely accepted do not fall under this
heading.
147.You are who you associate with and it is within your power to change your circle of
friends and your intimate relationships. Ask yourself if it is now time to move on from the
old crowd. There is no right or wrong answer only you can judge.
148.You can no longer say I didnt know. You are now an expert on the Type B
personality and how to avoid them.
149. That concludes the section on the forces arrayed against you. To remind you they are
governments, religions, the media, big business, friends and family, and Type B people.

80
 Grade Twenty: Can Everyone Become Rich?
1.Having examined some of the dark forces arrayed against you let us now return to the
subject of destructive memes. Another common meme is this: Only the lucky few can
become wealthy. It is not for everyone.
2.This can be used as an excuse for inaction. If it is very hard and very rare to make
serious money, this can make you give up before you start.
3.Most people think: No. It is not possible for everyone to be rich. In order to get rich
you must exploit other people. You must somehow trick the masses into handing over
their money to you. If you can trick or con a hundred thousand people into giving you 10
each, then you become a multi-millionaire, but they are all poorer to the tune of 10. This
was exposed earlier as the finite pot of wealth meme.
4.Most people think: The rich get richer off the backs of the poor working stiff. Wealthy
people take advantage of the 'workers' and leech their life-values from them in order that
they might become 'fat cats'. There is some truth in this, but not as much as you might
think.
5.Most people think: The rich get richer and the poor get poorer. There are plenty of
examples of scam-merchants and exploitative bosses of course. There are also lottery
winners, millionaire drug-dealers, successful criminals (not many), currency exchange
billionaires and those who inherited a fortune. None of these people earned their wealth by
creating values, but these are the exceptions.
You should not care about these people or let them divert you from your chosen course.
6.
The truth is that everyone can become wealthy because everyone is wealthy at the
moment and can become a lot more so.
7.We are talking about first-world citizens here. The proof of this is to pick a date from the
past. Any date. A hundred years ago? Two hundred years? Five hundred years? A
thousand? You pick the date it does not matter. Now let us interview a typical citizen of
(say) 300 years ago and find out how they live.

The Past Was Not Pleasant

8.The first thing to forget is any notion we might have of pleasant halcyon days with
pretty maids clothed in white, dipping their indolent fingers into gently babbling streams
watched by men lazing in the sun before maybe chucking another pitchfork of golden hay
onto the wagon. If you travelled back to any time more than (say) 100 years ago, you
would be aghast at the appalling squalor which passed for 'life'. It is beyond
comprehension. For every ten babies born, eight died often killing the mother too. Life
expectancy was about 40 years. No running water, no electricity, no heating, no decent
artificial light apart from guttering candles and stinking oil lamps. People existed on an
unhealthy diet which seldom varied and comprised a disgusting gruel with a lump of
bacteria-ridden, fatty meat floating about in it, a chunk of stale, dense bread and some thin
rancid ale.
9.In towns, people lived amongst their own filth and sewage; they rotted in their crude,
course clothing (no soap, no hot water, no disinfectant) which had to last a generation, not
a few months like at present. Crime and banditry were rife (no police).
81
10.Medicine was crude, barbaric and largely ineffective so people died by the millions
from minor diseases. They died in terrible agony too no pain killers other than a tankard
of rum. Dentistry barely existed and so most people's teeth were rotting, painful stumps. If
you couldn't make a living, you starved to death and they did starve in their millions.
Further north, in a bad winter people just froze to death in their tens of thousands. Whole
families huddled together in a frozen tableau in their stinking crude hut made of twigs and
daubed with mud.
11.Work was a mind-numbing, back-breaking, soul-destroying tedium which never varied
for year after dreary year until death seemed welcome. Twelve hours a day, seven days a
week bent double in a muddy field of turnips (or equivalent).
12.People were donkeys. Mere beasts of burden. They slaved from the crack of dawn until
well into darkness in the sort of physical labour few could handle for an hour nowadays,
let alone a lifetime. They toiled in rain, sleet and snow. There was no respite. Even this
level of toil was hardly enough to put more than a few greens and potatoes in the family
pot. Many a mother watched her infant children starve to death in front of her eyes for
want of a few vegetables or a morsel of bread. There was no birth control, and so women
were pregnant most of the time. The unrelenting toil in the fields, the miscarriages and
constant pregnancy ensured that few women survived past forty. Those who did, often
looked twenty or thirty years older to our modern eyes.
13.Let us ask one of these women from 300+ years ago what 'rich' means to her. She
would reply that if she could feed her family one decent meal a day, keep the rain out of
the hut and only work (say) ten hours a day, six days a week, then this would be rich
beyond her wildest dreams. If you were to ask this person if everyone could become this
rich, she would answer No. That wouldn't be possible. Nothing would shake her from
this conviction. She could not possibly imagine being so wealthy herself, and for everyone
to be this wealthy? No. It just couldn't happen.
Now think of yourself for the moment. You can feed yourself and your family for about
14.
one hour's work a day, if you eat sensibly. You are wealthy beyond this person's wildest
imagination. And almost everyone in this country is at least this wealthy too.

The First Big Wealth Revolution

15.Then along came the industrial revolution, about 1775. Nowadays people moan about
how 'awful' the industrial revolution was. All that 'child labour' and people 'forced' to work
in factories. And there were no guards on the machinery and no hot water in the
washrooms. How dreadful! It never should have been allowed! We even hear the factories
were cold sometimes! But that is from our modern, cosseted perspective and completely
misses the reality on the ground.
16.People were desperate to get into the factories. They had a burning passion to work
there, to which our lazy, indolent, well-fed modern psyches can only dimly relate. They
queued and fought for a chance to prove themselves worthy of one of these new cushy
ultra-highly paid jobs in the safe and warm factories.
17.The factories were surreal luxury compared to what had gone on before. Here was a
chance to make enough money to feed the entire family by working a mere eighty hours a
week. This was an undreamed of opportunity.

82
18.These people could hardly believe their luck working 'just' eighty hours a week. What is
more, it was indoors! In the warm! No rain, no snow. You cannot imagine how unbearably
awful it was toiling in those fields in the cold and rain. We fondly think of peasants in the
field in the glorious July sunshine, indolently chucking another pitchfork of hay onto the
hay-rick before stopping for another cider break and a romp with a saucy lass. It was not
like that.
19.The new factory work was regular. Before the industrial revolution, nothing, but
nothing was worse than getting laid off if the harvest was bad, because that meant you and
your children died.
20.Although boring, the new factory work was not arduous compared to what they had
done before. If you had to do this factory work you would keel over after about an hour
and start bleating about coffee breaks and repetitive strain injury. But that is because we
have all grown soft beyond belief compared to these people. To them, it was sheer heaven.
They did not care about the lack of guards on the machinery (they were careful
something we have forgotten how to be in our safe, compensation-culture world). They
did not demand fire escapes, pregnancy leave, maximum and minimum temperatures,
regular breaks, five week holidays, disabled toilets, crches and baby-changing facilities.
All this was to come much later.
21.Here is the important point. The industrial revolution was created by genius heroes who
became deservedly extremely wealthy. They achieved this by creating values (e.g. the
steam engine). This is how you are going to get guiltlessly wealthy too.
22.Whenever values are created, everyone becomes a little wealthier. The person who
created the values becomes very wealthy. This is just as it should be. The rest of the
population become a bit more wealthy for zero extra effort another critically important
point.
23.One hundred years before the industrial revolution, the average peasant was working 90
hours a week for the equivalent of ten turnips and a sack of potatoes. One hundred years
later, their descendants were working 70 hours a week for meat, potatoes, two veg and
probably a tasty pudding thrown in for good measure. They became wealthier. And here is
the thing they did nothing to achieve this, in fact they did a lot less than their ancestors.
24.This is such a vital key concept that it is worth stating it again the 'workers' did
nothing extra in order to be made wealthier by the creators of the industrial revolution.
They merely claimed their 'share' of the extra wealth which that revolution produced. It
was created for them by the inventors, industrialists, and yes capitalists who in turn
became extremely wealthy. The workers, in fact, progressively did less and less as work
became easier.

Everyone Gets Richer

25.Creating values makes everyone wealthy as we have seen, it does not suck the wealth of
the poor or leach off the less fortunate. It does precisely the opposite. Remember the
earlier example of inventing the car?
26.Without the new machines created by these heroes, the 'workers' would still be
grubbing in the fields for turnips twelve hours a day. Take a look at any country which has
not yet had such a revolution. Without exception, the populations of these countries are
83
still enslaved in numbing poverty and harsh physical labour. The people are worn out and
old before their time.
27.Let us move forward in time and talk to our factory worker of 200 years ago. Firstly, let
us ask her how life has improved since her great-grandfather's time (say 100 years before).
She will passionately describe how brilliant life is now compared with how terrible it was
when her Gran and Gramps were young. She will bore you all day with their old stories of
bare-footed five year olds out in the frosty fields for ten hours a day, and how a family her
grandmother knew froze to death in the winter of 23 (that's 1723, of course).
28. She is, of course, already richer than the 'impossible' level of riches dreamed about by
our woman from just 100 years previously, and so are most other people she knows. But
let us ask her what 'rich' means to her, now.
29. She would say that to have a brick house and to be able to eat meat three times a week
whilst working for just sixty hours a week would constitute undreamed of riches. She
would also like a new dress once every couple of years. Now that is luxury for you. Only
'toffs' get to live like that. Shall we ask her if everyone could become that rich? It is hardly
worth asking, is it? Her answer would be a shrill laugh. No. it is impossible. There will
never be a day when everyone will be that rich.

The Real Heroes

30.But along come more men and women of imagination, enterprise, daring and skill.
They improve the machines. They make them faster, more efficient. The age of steam
matures. On the farms, people are liberated from back-breaking toil. The tractor can do the
same work in one tenth of the time. In the factories the machines become safer, faster,
better. The factories are now heated and lighted with the new 'gas light'. Now factories can
run all night, too.
31.People work fewer hours (for the same or greater wealth). The jobs are less arduous,
less dangerous. There is no need for child labour. Not because the bosses magnanimously
banned it out of altruism, not because activists fought for childrens rights. This is not
what happened. The workers became richer and so did not need to send their children to
work. For the first time in history, ordinary children were freed from premature
enslavement. Read that again for the first time in the two million year history of
humankind!
Now they had time to go to school where they learned the skills required to become the
32.
next generation of value-producers.
33. Again, it is important to realise that the workers received all this for free.
34.They did not contribute one jot of extra energy, neither did they contribute brain power
or ideas they hitched a ride off the back of the creative geniuses who made all this
happen.
35.Indeed, their work load became progressively lighter and their lives progressively
wealthier, due to the brilliance of the designers and inventors who justifiably became
wealthy men and women as a result. These were the people who created values (e.g. new
machines like tractors) which made everyone wealthier. There was of course a downside
to all this, the social upheaval costs were sometimes horrendous and some industrialists

84
were shockingly exploitative but the net benefit to humanity was incalculable and
positive.

Life in The 1800s

36.Let us now interview the factory worker from the 1800s. Has life improved? You bet!
He will talk for hours about how his old mum did a sixty hour week and only had meat
every now and then and one weekend off in four. How the factory was so cold in winter
you could see your breath. How there was no lighting and so people ruined their eyes by
working in the gloom. Things are much better now. He is already richer than the
'impossibly rich' scenario painted by his mother, and so are most other people he knows.
37.What does he consider 'rich' to be? Well, he can now easily feed his family, so 'rich'
means luxuries. Sugar, cakes, confectionery, decent cheese, fine ale, wine. Oh yes, and gas
light in his home, now that would be something. And a bicycle, or maybe his own horse
and carriage if he really makes the big league! He has also heard that some homes are
heated in every room but that is an impossible luxury so he hardly likes to mention it.
The toilet is still a hole in the garden, so 'rich' would be one of those new flushing toilets,
plumbed-in. This would still be an outside toilet, of course. He would also like to work
shorter hours. Say fifty hours a week? Now that would be nice. Having your own
carriage? Now that is real money. Could everyone be this wealthy and have a carriage to
ride around in? He laughs. No mate. No chance. Why, if everyone had a carriage youd
need a big 6-lane road running right around London and it would be jammed with
carriages morning and night! Only the rich get to live like that!

Life Today
38.Let us fast forward to the present day. The vast majority of people today (in the 1st
world) are impossibly, fantastically wealthy compared to 100, 200 or 300 years ago and
beyond. People from these previous centuries would have been astounded at the level of
wealth enjoyed by us even those without jobs. We are well fed and nobody need go
hungry. More money (far more) is spent on confectionery, snacks and junk food than is
spent on 'real' food. We are so well clothed that purchases of new clothing are determined
by boredom and fashion, not necessity. Most people have wardrobes and drawers stuffed
to bursting with clothes they never even wear.
39.Can you possibly imagine that! Even a single-parent mother on income support will
move heaven and earth to ensure that her child has the correct logo on the back of his
jacket and an acceptable brand name of trainers. Not to mention the latest mobile phone
and a new console with all the games. Try explaining that to the starving woman from
1720. Single parent mothers in those days died in the gutter, or prostituted themselves for
a crust of bread.
40.We have cars, telephones, radios, computers and television. We take foreign holidays
and our houses are well-furnished and warm. They have lighting, hot water (an
inconceivable luxury just 100 years ago) and are dry. Today's 1st world poorest are living
like the wealthiest landowners of 300 years ago when you factor-in everything like
transport, medicine, utilities and so on.
41. So now comes the important question. What does 'wealthy' mean to you?

85
 The answer is likely to be something like this: Enough money to be able to give up
42.
work altogether, to buy a decent house and car outright and to absolve me from all money
worries forever.
43.Now slot yourself into history's time-line. Do you see the continuity? Are we at the end
of the line for humankind? No more inventions, no more ideas? No more progress? Is this
it? Do we all just work forty hours a week for our current (excellent) standard of living?
Progress is accelerating, not slowing down. This is what happens when you free-up
hundreds of billions of productive 'think hours' by liberating the population from tedious
manual toil.
44.If you create values which others want to buy, this will make you wealthy in today's
terms (we are all fabulously wealthy in yesterday's terms). This means that you can give
up work altogether, and enjoy an excellent and meaningful life. You will also be freed to
fulfil your potential as ultimately, this is the only thing which brings happiness and long-
term satisfaction. It hardly needs mentioning that giving up work and fulfilling your
potential were fantasy luxuries at any previous time in two million years of human
history. The fact that you can even think about this shows you how far we have come.
45.The rest of the people (as they have always done, and always will do) will struggle
along behind you at the 'standard' level of wealth, locked into Wonderland and allowing
their life-efforts to be looted from them. They will all get slowly wealthier (for zero extra
effort) as a result of your creation of values but that is okay. In fact it is a bonus as we
care about the wellbeing of others.
46.If enough people of creative ability can escape from Wonderland, they will continue to
invent and design. Who knows what they might come up with? Certainly there is no
shortage of energy in the universe, or elements, for that matter. The larder is getting a bit
empty here on planet Earth, and we certainly have to take environmental matters into
consideration, but again it is creativity and genius which will solve all of these problems
not a return to some illusory agricultural idyll. Also, those in the third-world will not be in
a position to provide solutions to these pressing problems. Their poverty prevents them
from having the required time or resources.

The Future
47.What will 'wealthy' mean to someone from 2100? Well one thing is for sure, he or she
will look back on us sad peasants with pity and disbelief! Poor them. They were confined
to Earth, you know. No starships in those days! They died of cancer and AIDS horribly.
They all worked most of their lives in dull, routine jobs, typically 40 hours a week can
you believe that? And, amazingly, their life expectancy was just 75 years! Incredible!
How did they stand it? Didn't they ever question their sad state of affairs?
48. So let us ask: What do you consider to be wealthy, Mr future-person?
Wealthy? Well, I wouldn't mind one of those new x-4rg star cruisers. They're really
something! Also, I'd like to own my own planet one day and design it to my own
specification like a lot of my wealthy friends have done. That would be neat. I've already
had the 150 year life extension therapy, but there's a new one out which can let you live to
300 years old. It costs a fortune and only the wealthiest can afford it. But I guess I'm
dreaming. Other people get to be that wealthy, not me.

86
49. Let us ask one more time: Could everyone be that wealthy, one day?
What?! Are you kidding me? No chance!
To become wealthy in todays terms you will need to create some values. You do not
50.
have to invent warp-drives, anti-gravity or a new energy source in order to 'create values'.
Most people get wealthy by creating small, incremental values. They make life just a little
better for everyone, and hence make themselves richer than average.
51.The wealth you control is limited by your vision of value creation. Everyone seems to
hate Bill Gates of Microsoft (a billionaire). But Bill Gates guiltlessly built wealth through
the honest creation of values. Nobody is forced to buy his products. People buy them
because they are exactly what they want until someone else comes along with better.
52.You do not have to start Microsoft Corporation in order to become rich. Just a modest
creation of values can make you a multi-millionaire. A small invention. A new service or
product or a twist on an old one. A well produced original course, concept, DVD/CD-
series or book or manual. That is all it takes.
Trading existing values is unlikely to make you wealthy. At best, it can make you
53.
wealthier than average due to your trading skills, but rarely will it make you rich.
54.We are all already 'rich'. We are all going to be 'richer', the fun of life is getting there
before everyone else!

87
 Grade Twenty-One: The Road to Financial Freedom
1. Most people are broke, powerless and stuck.
2. They have been that way for many years, often for all of their lives. This is not unusual.
It is very hard to escape Wonderland without a guiding hand.
3.Your first wealth objective is to become financially free. There are four steps to
achieving this. Most pass through these four levels or stages en route to financial freedom.

Level One
4. Outgoings exceed income enough to constantly decrease ones overall assets such
that financial disaster is imminent.
5. Your situation is as follows: your outgoings constantly exceed your income; you are
falling further into debt with every month that passes. To prevent disaster you are forced
to borrow more and more, probably at ever higher interest rates. You are close to being at
the limit of what people will loan you, and many creditors are pressing. You cannot see
any way out of your financial situation and are frightened by what the future might bring.
You are in a certain amount of denial and probably do not have an exact idea of how much
you owe, and to whom. You hope that something will turn up to save you. Meanwhile
you plod onwards getting ever deeper into the mire. Life is not fun. There is never enough
to pay the bills, let alone enjoy some of the good things in life. Your lack mentality
prevents you from contacting your deeper self and you have few thoughts, if any, of
helping others or putting your light out into the world.
6. Here are some examples of people at this level.
7. The man who works 50 hours each week, makes 1,000 per week and spends 1,200
each week. (Disaster might be a year or so away.)
8. The woman who works 10 hours each week, makes 100 per week and spends 125
each week. (Disaster might be a few months away.)
9. The millionaire who makes 100k a year interest and spends 250k a year. (Disaster
might be a few years away.)
10. The following people are not at this level:

11. The man who has ten million in gold under the floorboards, has no income or job and
spends 200k a year of his gold. His overall outgoings exceed his income but disaster is
not imminent. He can live for the rest of his life running down his capital like this. He is,
in fact, financially free.
12. The 70 year old woman who has savings of 400,000 from the sale of her parents
house and spends 40k a year from this (20k of interest and 20k of the capital). She has
no job and no income. Her overall outgoings exceed her income from interest but disaster
is not imminent. She can live the rest of her life running down her capital like this. She is,
in fact, financially free.

Level Two
13. Income matches outgoings and your capital base is static. But to maintain this
state you must work.
14. Your income almost exactly matches your outgoings. Putting this another way, you
spend every penny of your salary, but do not borrow more than you earn. You probably
88
have debts, but these are being serviced by your income and you are not drifting further
into debt. You are still a slave because you must work to sustain this lifestyle. There is
little left over for savings and people in this situation usually have no savings. Your life is
static. You are neither moving ahead nor falling behind. You are likely to be working very
hard to service your chosen lifestyle and so once again there is little time left for making a
contribution or working on your dream. You are also vulnerable. Redundancy or a change
in fortune would make you exposed as your outgoings are likely to be high.
15. Here are some examples of people at this level.
16. The man who works 50 hours each week, makes 1,000 per week and spends 1,000
each week.
17. The woman who works 10 hours each week, makes 100 per week and spends 100
each week.
18. The following person is not on level 2: the man who earns 10,000 a month from his
investments and spends 10,000. He is on level 4 financially free. We ignore inflation
for these definitions. In any case the definition holds. As long as he gets 10k and spends
no more than 10k without needing to work, he is financially free. Inflation means he
must choose an ever simpler lifestyle or get more money to top-up the loss and maintain
his lifestyle. The reason he is free is because he does not need to work for the income.

Level Three
19. Income exceeds outgoings and your capital base is increasing. But to maintain this
advance you must work.
20. Your income regularly exceeds your outgoings and so you save regularly. Your
expenditure is under control. If it was not, your outgoings would match or exceed your
income. This implies you have financial discipline. You are contributing towards a better
tomorrow and leveraging the awesome power of compound interest as a silent 24-hour
worker under your command. You have mastered greed and it no longer drives you. It is
highly likely that you have transcended ego to a certain extent and are not so motivated by
status. Here is why: if you were motivated by ego and status, your excess salary would be
consumed in buying the latest toys and showy status symbols. However you still must
work to sustain your lifestyle, and so you are also a slave. Anyone who must work is a
slave, no matter how much they enjoy their job.
21. Here are some examples of people at this level.
22. The man who works 60 hours each week, makes 500 per week, spends 400 and saves
100.
23. The woman who works 10 hours each week and makes 1,000 per week. She also has
unearned income of 500 a week. Total 1500. She spends 1200 and saves 300.
24. Important: The following person is also on level three: the man who is not currently
working, has 10,000 saved and is spending it at the rate of 1,000 a month. He is merely
taking a holiday from work (albeit a year long holiday). He is no different, in principle, to
the man who takes a day off work without pay. Both still must work (and hence fit the
definition) they are just deferring the work for a while.

89
Level Four
25. People at this stage have attained financial freedom. They have enough income,
without having to work for it, to cover their chosen lifestyle for life, barring dramatic
changes.
26. This means that without working, your income is likely to exceed your outgoings for
the foreseeable future ideally for life. Obviously disaster can strike anyone and wipe out
their finances, but barring highly unlikely disaster scenarios, you are set up for life.
27. Here are some examples of people at this level.
28. The monk who can easily beg 20 a day which meets all his needs, and he spends his
days in meditation or good works.
29. The thirty year old man who wants to live simply, 10k a year will cover it. He deals in
property and makes a windfall of 600k. He is most unlikely to run out of money if he
only spends 10k a year.
30. The 50 year old woman with ten million in investments who gets 200k each year in
interest and spends it. She would have another 50 years even if the interest rate was 0%
meaning she had to eat into her capital.
31. Just to make certain you have understood, the following people are not financially free:

32. The man with 300k who spends 30ka year. He is only free for the next ten years or
so. He is, in fact, taking an extended, ten year work break.
33. The woman who works in a job she would rather not do, makes 50k a year and spends
50k (or even if she spends 25k!) Her income covers her lifestyle but she has to work for
it. Hence she is not financially free
34. Which level are you on? Take some time now to decide. Be ruthlessly honest with
yourself. Knowing where you are is the first step to freedom.

90
 Grade Twenty-Two: The Four Stages of Wealth
1.As you saw in the previous section, there are three stages of relative poverty culminating
in a fourth stage which is financial freedom.
2.Hopefully you will agree that stage four, financial freedom, is not wealthy it is merely
free. You have been released by the master and you need never work again.
3. We will now examine the four stages of wealth.

Wealth Stage 1
4. The first stage we will be looking at together is becoming completely debt-free,
including your mortgage.
5. This is the most basic, essential task for every thinking humanoid (that means you) to
complete as a matter of extreme urgency.
6.If you are unable to do this, then you are making the following statement: I came into
this world with nothing. Despite countless years of work and striving I have been unable
to create a single penny of surplus. My entire life's efforts produced a negative balance,
not a positive one. Because I failed to make enough to support myself and family, I
borrowed the efforts of others and spent them on my own comfort. I will probably die
without even being able to repay these people.
7. What a statement! What a way to live a life!
8. In case you had the slightest doubt, this is not a life of power and passion. This is the life
of a poor, helpless, weak invalid who cannot even feed, house and clothe him/herself by
his or her own efforts. And this, in the wealthiest society since humans first walked the
Earth!
9.So stage one the absolute minimum stage is to become completely debt-free. When
you are entirely debt-free (including mortgage) you are one rung up from the absolute
lowest on the ladder of poverty. You are still a flat-broke Thrall with little personal power
and little freedom.
10.The reason is that although you are debt-free you still must work for your food,
clothing, telephone, petrol, gas, electricity etc. just like all the other Thralls. You are still
not financially free. You have absolutely no choice about working. Your only choice is
which master to slave for. After 40+ hours of slavery, you do not feel much like being
creative or fulfilling your potential. So consider yourself one up from a beast of burden.
11.By the way, you are most unlikely to be doing anything worthwhile for those 40+ hours
of slavery. You may be a doctor, nurse, teacher, farmer etc. but most likely you are cost-
control accountant for ACME Bin Freshening Ltd, or something similar. One of the
countless millions of Macjobs which are the equivalent of digging a hole in the morning
and filling it in again in the afternoon. You can check this for yourself by asking yourself
these simple questions:
Given a chance, would I do this job, or would I do something else if I was offered a
12.
50% increase in salary?
Or try this: Would I be thrilled and delighted if my son or daughter announced they
13.
wanted to be just like me and do exactly the job Im doing?

91
14. Or this: If I won the lottery would I bother to turn up for work tomorrow morning?

Gaining Your Certificate of Freedom - Wealth Stage 2

15.The next step (step two) after becoming debt-free is to become financially independent
level four from our previous chapter. The most powerful control that Wonderland exerts
over you is money. Take their control away in this area and you take a giant leap towards
freedom. Becoming financially independent is a massive start.
16.To achieve this, first you decide on whatever minimum level of existence you can live
with, then you work out how much money you need per year to maintain this level. Then
you amass enough capital, invest it, and use the interest (etc.) to pay yourself this amount
each year.
17.For example, if you need 20,000 minimum a year to survive, then you need roughly
half a million in the bank (i.e. invested) allowing for tax on interest paid. At 5% interest
that will net you about 20,000.
18. If you need 40,000 a year, then you need a million in the bank.
19.These are just approximate figures to give you the general principle. Later teachings
will go through this in greater detail.
It is tempting to think you have made it when you have a million. Maybe in 1950, yes.
20.
But today?
21.Even with a million you are still broke. All you have done is to un-manacle your arms
and legs from the cell wall, and walk away a free man or woman. You have reached level
four from the previous chapter financial freedom.
22.You are merely free. Nice, yes, but touch the capital and you immediately become a
slave again.
23. You are not rich, fulfilled, actualised or anything remotely like these things.
24. You do not have money to actualise your dream or to make the world a better place.
25.You have merely been handed your certificate of freedom by the master and are
walking away from the plantation into the unknown. Your lifestyle is the bare minimum
required for a civilized existence. You have a modest house, a small car and a few sticks
of furniture. You can eat (but not in good restaurants). You can buy clothes (but not the
best). You can go on holiday for two weeks (a package holiday, nothing special). You
cannot invest a lot of money in your dream. In short, you are bumping along in a middling
sort of life without being a slave.
26.With your Freedom Figure (say a million) under your belt, you are now a free man or
woman. You have probably never been free before. There will be a certain amount of
blinking in the sunlight and gazing in awe at the world about you. Then it is time for the
three Ps Power, Passion and Purpose...
27.It will be time to ask yourself: What is my special mission here on earth? What am I
uniquely going to achieve? How am I going to aid my fellow human travellers?
28. As long as you are an unhappy wage-slave, you have no time even to consider these
questions, let alone do anything about them. You just spend your days locked in
Wonderland living a Thrall life just like everyone else.

92
29.In short, without your freedom you are a powerless slave in Wonderland. You may
want a better world, you may want to contribute to the wellbeing of others, you may want
to pursue your dreams of happiness, but you are bonded in slavery and your life is leaking
away, year by precious year.
30. Yes, you can do a little here and there at evenings and weekends, if you are not too
tired. If you are lucky enough to be in a job which allows for you to make a positive
contribution, then that is great too. But most people are not in that situation.
31.With a million pounds you are just starting on life's real journey. Whilst not small
change, a million pounds is a very modest amount of money just enough to buy your
freedom at the time of writing this.

The Silly Toy Phase - Wealth Stage 3

32.Stage three. This is where you accumulate about two million pounds excluding the
value of your residence the exact amount varies from person to person but it is about this
much.
33.Why two million? Well, you need about one million to make you financially
independent as discussed in stage two above. Then you need another million to buy
yourself lots of silly toys so that you can get all of this garbage out of your system! With a
spare million, most rational people will rapidly run out of 'toys' to buy.
You want a decent house (nothing silly)? Done. Interior designed? Okay. A Porsche? A
34.
Merc? A 4x4? Have all three. A sensible boat? No problem. Suits, dresses, shoes? Small
change. We have not spent a million yet! Maybe you are now struggling. A Rolex? Done.
There is still change unless you are being silly about the house you want!
The point is that unless you are stupid and/or greedy, a million in spare cash will sort
35.
you out for everything your heart could desire. Only a lottery winning fool would have six
Rolexes up each arm and ten cars.
36.There is nothing sadder than someone with money, trapped at the toy stage. It is as
close to an obscenity as it is possible to imagine. Just think! All that money, all those
possibilities, and you buy shiny jewellery and designer clothes! That is the limit of
your vision? You make an extra 60,000 so you treat yourself to the latest 4x4 with all
the toys. Is that the best you can do? You make another 100,000 and add three more cars
to your collection. Surely you are greater than that?
37.So the point is to get through this silly phase as soon as you can. You have been trained
from birth to believe that being rich is all about driving around in exotica, wearing
designer clothes, buying trinkets and baubles with names like Gucci and Faberge and
eating at outrageously expensive restaurants etc. These businesses and the people running
them are laughing at you, as we discussed earlier.
All of that is frippery. It is a bit of fun, yes, but hardly the purpose of a noble life, dont
38.
you agree?
If, reading this, you are still firmly stuck at the Gimme a Mercedes and Rolex level,
39.
you have a long, long way to go.
40. Notice that even with this money (two million) you have achieved nothing of value.

93
 All you have done is to become a free man or woman and bought yourself some toys.
41.
Toys that will all end up as scrap a few years from now.

Being All You Can Be - Wealth Stage 4

42.Why would anyone want more than two million? After all, being debt free, never
having to work again, living in a decent house with all the toys is most peoples absolute
pinnacle of desire truly undreamed of luxury.
Why do very wealthy people get up in the morning? Why don't they all just give up?
43.
After all, they have got loads of money. Are they just greedy people who cannot get
enough?
44.Some are, but some have all passed into stage four the real point of life. The point
which few ever glimpse because most people spend a lifetime in a panic-stricken struggle
to raise enough money to pay the mortgage and the gas bill.
45. So what is stage four? It is nothing less than the purpose of a powerful life; the real
reason that we exist. The noblest struggle in which a man or woman of integrity can
engage. It is nothing more or less than the struggle to be all you can be as a person. To live
a life of power and passion (those words again) in the pursuit of your dreams.
46.Your dream does not have to require money to fulfil it, but it does most of the time.
You should look very suspiciously at someone who claims they do not need money to
fulfil their dreams. The test is to offer them a cheque for a million to see if that would aid
the realisation of their dream a little. Unsurprisingly, it often would!

You Are Unique

47.Every person is unique and has, if they did but realise it, a special set of talents and
abilities not possessed by another living soul in that exact combination. The purpose of a
powerful life and the thrust of Beyond Wealth teaching is to become free (debt-free;
financially independent; play with some toys) and then to follow your dream. Most people
achieve none of these. Just think about that for a moment most people never even
become financially free! Astonishing.
48.So what is the purpose of gaining money in excess of two million? What is it for? This
is your power, passion and purpose money. This is the money which you need to realise
your unique dream and move Beyond Wealth. And here is the real key Your dream, if it
is to bring you lasting happiness, must be something which meets the true needs of your
fellow men.
49. This is not altruistic selflessness or feel good rhetoric. Far from it. It is rational
selfishness. You are here on Earth to pursue your own happiness, not the happiness of
others. But as it happens, we are wired by a million years of evolution to be unhappy
when our fellows are suffering and happy when they are happy too. That is just totally
perfect. Once we realise this fact, it means that we can actively pursue our own happiness
knowing that our efforts can bring joy to others too.
50. Once you are free from the crippling burden of debt and then amass enough funds to
give you the very best chance of releasing yourself from Wonderland, then (and only then)
is your creative spirit released and your true, inner self allowed fully to blossom.

94
51.The excess money is for following your dream with power. The more money you have,
the bigger the dream you can actualise.
The limits to our dreams are often self-imposed by your poverty-stricken lack
52.
mentality.
53.The goal is to be all you can possibly be. This is enough. This single goal encompasses
all others. There is no 'retirement' you cannot retire from life until you die. The 'retire at
65' mentality is for the unconscious Thralls not for you.
54. You will pursue ever larger dreams and goals this is how to live a powerful life.
55. What is the alternative to this superb and inspiring vision of a powerful life?
56.To 'retire' at 65, flip magazines and do a spot of gardening? To take a day-trip to the
seaside? To watch a bit more television? To catch up on some novels?
57. Is this the noble human purpose? Hardly.
58.Of course it is hard to dream when you are tired. It is tough to have passion when you
are struggling to pay the electricity bill. This is why you must take a stand right now and
vow to break free of the treadmill.
59.There is a limit to what the printed word can do to inspire you. It is hugely important
that you arouse from your slumber and see that time is running out for you and you need
to act now.
60.Ultimately though, if you think this is too hard and you have no fight left in you, there
is only one course left to follow. Resign yourself to a life of third-rate mediocrity. Accept
that you will never achieve anything great. Admit that you will die broke and
embarrassed. Abandon your dreams. Stop talking about becoming rich and achieving great
things these are just meaningless words which you do not believe in; you are deceiving
yourself and making others laugh at you behind your back. Settle for less. Be like
everybody else. Sink into the enfolding arms of the warm masses. Lose yourself in
Wonderland. There is some comfort there. Mediocrity is reassuring.
61. If this last paragraph fills you with dread then you know the alternative.
62. Fight!
63.Fight with every ounce of your strength and determination. Vow to yourself that one
day soon you will escape from your shackles, that you will put your power out into the
world, that you will achieve something of note; that you will break free of the slavery you
have been subjected to; that you will become wealthy and use the money in the pursuit of
your unique dream; that you will leave the planet a better, a richer, a more wonderful place
than when you arrived all those years ago as a new-born infant.
64. Is it possible? Yes it is!

95
 Grade Twenty-Three: Levels of Consciousness
1.How you approach wealth and what you do with the money is highly dependent upon
your level of consciousness. Refer to the diagram at the beginning of this book.
2.There are five levels of consciousness and five associated traps which lie in wait for the
unwary.
3.This is the path you must tread, with its pitfalls, if you are to be happy, wealthy,
powerful and free. The path will now be described to you.

Level One: The Victim Level of Consciousness

4.People usually begin their journey trapped in Wonderland. They are poor and powerless
with no idea about how to become free, or who is enslaving them, or what tools they need
to break out of serfdom. This is known as the Victim Level of Consciousness. Its
dominant emotion is fear.
5.Others are viewed with hostility and envy. The victim has a chip on his or her shoulder
and moans that the world is not a fair place. They hate others to succeed and they seek to
drag everyone down to their level. This is the energy the tabloid newspapers feed from.
6.Their own ignorance and fear, coupled with the serious weight of external forces bent on
extracting values from the Thralls (described earlier), ensures that they are pushed down
into The Poverty Trap.

The Poverty Trap

7.In this trap, all income and significant amounts of borrowed money is spent on living,
with any surplus spent on perceived luxuries. These luxuries are usually illusions sold to
them by the con artists operating in Wonderland. Put more simply, they have bought into
somebody elses notion of the good life. Unaffordable amounts of time and money are
spent on entertainment for this anesthetises the pain of their hopeless lives.
8. The following prescient quote from George Orwells 1984 captures this state very well.
He is talking about the Proles which is a similar concept to Thralls (and he was writing in
the 1930s): There was a whole chain of separate departments dealing with proletarian
literature, music, drama and entertainment generally. Here were produced rubbishy
newspapers containing nothing except sport, crime and astrology, sensational five-cent
novelettes, films oozing with sex, and sentimental songs which were composed entirely by
mechanical means. The Lottery, with its weekly payout of enormous prizes, was the one
public event to which the Proles paid serious attention. It was probable that there were
some millions of Proles for whom the Lottery was the principal, if not the only reason for
staying alive. It was their delight, their folly, their anodyne, their intellectual stimulant.
Where the Lottery was concerned, even people who could barely read and write seemed
capable of intricate calculations and staggering feats of memory. There was a whole tribe
of men who made a living simply by selling systems, forecasts and lucky amulets. That is
hauntingly reminiscent of some aspects of society today.
9.In the Poverty Trap, the Thrall is diverted from attaining financial freedom. They are
massively in debt and a significant portion of their income goes towards debt servicing. In
order to numb the pain, they buy all of the latest high-price toys and gadgets, usually on
96
finance. They have no time or even inclination to realise their true potential. They do not
even dimly suspect that they might have any such potential. This is a very bleak state to be
in.
10. Money is sought mainly for security, for victims feel very afraid. Their lives are
squandered in a desperate scrabble for the basics; trying to get enough money to pay the
bills. They cannot see any further than the next shopping trip or the next bill that needs
paying.
11.If such a person becomes financially free, they will use the money in pursuit of more
security because their fear is not assuaged by becoming wealthy. Their lives will be
wasted in building ever thicker and higher castle walls.

The Ego Level of Consciousness

12. The next level up is ego consciousness.
As the name implies, the person is driven by their need for status, respect, security,
13.
admiration, comfort and lifestyle.
14.At the higher levels of ego, the person desires to put a dream out into the world, but this
is usually in pursuit of more status and respect, although it can edge over into Beyond
Wealth as the person contacts their inner self and learns gradually to drop the ego.
15.The ego level of consciousness can manifest at any degree of financial freedom. A
person can be at level 1 through to level 4 (financially free) and still be driven by ego
consciousness. They can also be at the first three stages of wealth creation discussed in
grade twenty-two.
16.In this mode all resources are harnessed to satisfy an endless and insatiable round of
ego needs (acknowledgement, respect, status etc.). Wealth is sought to gain financial
freedom, but not in order to be free to follow a dream, but because the ego feels
diminished by being a mere employee. They seek freedom from this state as soon as
possible so that they can be the boss.
17. If it is not achieved, the person will engage in power politics and strive to climb the
corporate or social ladder. The overwhelming desire is to be someone, to have others look
up to him or her. They will be the arrogant boss, the insufferable department head, the
brash sales executive and many similar archetypes.
18. If they do achieve financial success, they will use all of the cash they can get their
hands on in the service of one aim status. They will have the latest and newest car and
preferably three. They will have the up to the moment generation of mobile; the very latest
television; a designer kitchen, a very expensive Hi-Fi system. They will normally have a
collection of expensive objects cars, paintings, Faberge eggs.
19.They will often have a holiday home, a boat, an aeroplane whatever the budget will
stand. These objects are symbolic tokens used to display status to self and to others.
20.Because they move in wealthier circles they are always jealous of those above them in
the pecking order and so they will redouble their efforts to get even more money. No
amount of money is enough. If they were to become a billionaire they would be envious of
someone with ten billion. If they had a five million pound yacht, they would be hankering
for the ten million pound model.

97
21.Their nemesis is The Ego Trap. When ensnared in its vice-like grip, they are doomed
to squander an adolescent life playing safe or playing with toys and accumulating status
possessions. They will also often be empire builders, but only for ego purposes. They have
few thoughts of helping others or making the world a better place. Their motivations are
safety, pleasure and status.

The Wisdom Level of Consciousness

22. The next level up is the wisdom level of consciousness.
23.Here we have the beginnings of awakening as the person turns inwards, not to seek to
gratify ego desires, but in a sincere endeavour to contact their inner spirit or sense of
being. This is the real You we touched upon earlier. It is what everyone seeks, although
most do not know it.
24. Since childhood, this essential self has been obscured behind the veil; overlaid with
thick levels of the protective shell called ego. There it has lain dormant all these years, a
flickering light barely glimpsed. In rare moments it has flared up and shone brightly, but it
was quickly suppressed, either by the persons fear, or by the slings and arrows of a harsh
world.
25.But for the seeker, the light is not to be denied. People at this level of consciousness
instinctively strive to scrape off the layers of mud and reveal the diamond buried within. If
they are unfortunate, they will get diverted from this task by one of the major religions. If
they are careful they will avoid this and find their own path to enlightenment.
26.Such people want money mostly to buy the space need to explore their inner world.
Although this can be done in the maelstrom which passes for many peoples lives these
days, you have to be very dedicated to achieve enlightenment this way. It is far easier if
you are free from the need to work, and can take yourself off somewhere quiet to meditate
and reconnect. This is, of course, why monks typically take to monasteries.
27. The object of this exercise is to learn how to be. Without striving, without judgement,
without ego. With practice, anyone can reconnect with their real self the light within.
The seeker experiences a gradual awakening (although it comes suddenly to some). At the
higher end, the seeker comes to realise that everything is connected and there is nothing to
strive for. Those are very deep truths. More commonly, seekers have a smaller awakening
which results in the diminution of the ego and an associated massive reduction in suffering
for most of our suffering arises from the ego with its stories.
28.There is no hard and fast route to take here and no prescribed outcome, for we are in the
realm of true spirituality and there are as many pathways to this as there are people on the
planet. Suffice it to say that any wealth attained over and above that required for this
lifestyle will be spent on aiding fellow travellers and not on status possessions. Such a
person is moving Beyond Wealth.
29.Even at this level there is a trap. It is called The Seeker Trap. Being ensnared in this
trap results in a dissipated life spent lost in the complex labyrinths of the psyche. An
endless series of gurus will be followed, and countless courses and systems trialled.
Service to others is incidental; improving the world is not a key motivational factor. In
fact the ego can be quite dominant here as it seeks enlightenment in order to be better than
others, or feels it has all the answers and that others are fools to believe what they do.
98
Such people live to meditate rather than meditate to live. They do not act, often believing
that action is worldly and hence unspiritual. There is also a serious danger of attraction
to various drugs in order to enhance the mystical experience.

The Transformative Level of Consciousness

30. The highest level of consciousness considered here is called the transformative level.
31.At this level, ego has been virtually destroyed, although be aware that it is very hard to
eradicate the final vestiges of ego.
32. With ego out of the picture, lovingkindness can shine through from the essence of self.
33.The pure self looks outwards, not inwards. It shines like a beacon on all within its field.
The attention is placed on others and their pain and suffering. The alleviation of this
suffering becomes the goal of the Beyond Wealth initiate.
34.Such a person can live a comfortable life, but all wealth creation efforts over and above
this are directed at social projects held dear by the initiate. Such projects (big or small) are
always concerned with improving mankinds lot in some way.
35.We are not here discussing pure Buddhist enlightenment as this is a very rare thing. We
are discussing the higher levels of wisdom which many, many people attain. It is not an
especially rare thing and it is well within your grasp, if you will it.
36.Because we are not discussing pure enlightenment, it is worth repeating that the initiate
gains selfish pleasure from helping others. Thus he or she is free and happy. If you met
such a person, you would immediately know they were somebody very special. You
would be drawn towards them.
37. This state is attainable by you. It leads to true contentment.
38.Yet even here there is a final trap for the unwary. It is called The Spiritual Trap and is
well known in religious circles as the sin of spiritual pride. Once again the ego sneaks
back in to confound us. We feel superior to other mere mortals. We are doing great works,
whilst they (poor fools) are bumbling around in a pile of trivia. Cant they see? If only
they were as wise as us...

Beyond Wealth
39. Beyond Wealth is a status which has been gained by millions. You too can achieve this.
40.Do not be put off by the earlier descriptions. Enlightened masters are naturally in this
stage, but you do not need to be such a master to reach it yourself.
41. To arrive at this stage is not easy for Thralls deeply asleep in Wonderland. You must
first wake up to the realities of Wonderland. Then you must attain financial freedom.
Finally you must strive to reduce the ego as far as possible. Only then can the real You
shine out. This will give you true direction, telling you why you are here on earth and
what particular contribution you are here to make.
42.When you reach the status of Beyond Wealth you will be free, happy and directed.
Each day you will do work which brings you immense pleasure and helps other people.
You will truly be living life for the first time. You will look back on your Thralldom with
shocked amazement, wondering how you could ever have allowed yourself to sleep for so
long.
99
 You will walk out into the sunlight as a free man or woman, ready to craft your life of
43.
power, passion and purpose.
44. Finally it is worth noting that a very small number of people manage to get to Beyond
Wealth without achieving financial freedom. This is rare because without money, the
pressing needs of life divert you from any inner calling (even the Buddha was a wealthy
prince whose money gave him the freedom to explore the nature of existence). These are
the humble saints amongst us. People doing very mundane jobs, living very simply and
yet deeply touching everyone they meet. Their lives are wonderful examples of love in
action. Because they do not have money, their actions are usually strictly local and limited
but that does not detract from their power.
45. Such people are very rare because it requires a special presence to be like this whilst
still struggling for survival in Wonderland. The well-trodden route which most people take
is to start in relative poverty, then free themselves from wage slavery. They usually then
become ensnared for a while in ego as the money allows them to puff themselves up.
Many remain forever entangled in The Ego Trap. Those that pass through this stage turn
inwards in contemplation, meditation or other soul-searching before emerging into the
sunlight of transformative consciousness and Beyond Wealth. This is not the only route,
but it is the most common.
46. So spend a few moments now to think which level of consciousness you are currently
at. Be honest with yourself. There is no shame in starting the journey from where you are
currently. Indeed, it is impossible to start from anywhere else.

100
 Grade Twenty-Four: Overcoming Fear
1. Fear is your mortal enemy.
2.It was forged in the long-ago mists of time as a very basic emotion having three
dimensions flight, fight or immobility. Each was a powerful survival strategy which
helped to protect against life-threatening danger.
3.These days we have so little need of fear it could almost be removed, apart from the very
rare times we are in physical danger.
4.Some small fear is possibly useful; most of your fear is not. It is what is called
maladaptive.
5.The fear that was designed to make you run from a sabre-toothed tiger, has now been
hijacked to make you make you run and hide from a miniscule potential loss of face or
self-esteem or loss of small amounts of money.
6.The fear that immobilised you as a survival tactic when faced with mortal peril, now
immobilises you at the thought of a job change, starting a part-time business, going to a
party or giving an after dinner speech.
7.People are riddled with fear; controlled and utterly dominated by it. The result is that
people are highly risk-averse. The ultra-safe society we have created has not helped in this
respect. People expect, even demand total safety. At the slightest hint of personal injury
(emotional or physical) they run to lawyers for compensation and bay for tougher laws to
ensure such a thing can never happen again.
The result is that we have created a society where almost all danger has been removed.
8.
The most dangerous thing people do is to drive a car or cross the road.
9.Despite the almost complete safety of our societies (for the first time in the history of
humankind) we are more fearful than ever. We fear crime, pollution, food additives,
terrorism, gangs, environmental disaster and epidemics.
10. At the safest time ever, we are the most fearful ever.
This soft, risk-averse, fear-riddled attitude is absolute death to your search for wealth.
11.
To make serious money you will have to take some risks. Risks with time and risks with
money.
12. The greater the wealth you seek, the greater the risk.
13.Many people are not prepared to take even the smallest risk to make their dreams come
true. They want it all for no risk, no outlay and no effort. The result is that they stay poor
and safe.
14. The world is filled with nice, safe, dead people.
If you want wealth you must develop a warrior mentality and overcome your fear no
15.
matter what it takes. It is highly likely that you have been brave at some point in your past.
Think about that time. Use the energy of it to propel you forward.
We are not talking about being rash or foolish. We are talking about carefully weighing
16.
up the pros and cons of a course of action and then boldly stepping up to the plate and
swinging the bat.

101
17.If it is just fear that is holding you back from the success you seek, strive to conquer
this and push forward. Growth is everything. Fear stops you growing. Every time you
overcome one of your fears, even a small one, you grow. Every time you succumb to a
fear, you die a little.

Huge Rewards
18. What can you lose, really? Not very much. What can you gain? Everything you ever
dreamed of: the lifestyle you always wanted; absolute financial security; the chance to
make the world a better place. To achieve this you must be prepared to take a risk or two.
19.One of the few ways of becoming wealthy is to start a business. This involves risking
time and money. Many people contemplate this in the shower, but by the time they have
towelled off, fear has driven them to play safe and stay in a mundane job.
20.Here is a key life strategy: take bold decisive action and then let go of the outcome. Be
non-attached this is the key to overcoming fear. Ultimately all life projects are failures
because they are created in a transitory world. This fact stops you worrying about
failure.
21.Non attachment does not mean you do not care. It means you are open to learning from
the results and are not attached to one particular outcome.
22.When you are attached, you feel fearful if the outcome looks like it may not happen.
This freezes you and stops you making corrective manoeuvres. When you are non-
attached you can observe the outcome impassively and make suitable corrections for the
next attempt.
So much of your life-energy is wasted in endless debate, procrastination, agonising and
23.
worry about the effects of your decisions.
24.If you would only take bold, decisive action, then something almost magical can
happen. The way opens up for you and the problems and obstructions melt away.
25.The transition may not be smooth, but most of your fears will be unfounded, and many
of your anticipated problems will not happen. Those that do will not be problems at the
time. Problems are generated in the mind when it anticipates future events. A powerful
insight is that you almost certainly do not have any problems right now, this microsecond,
as you read this. All of your fears and problems are mind-generated as it starts to worry
away at the future.
26.What is really going on is subconscious resistance to change. We really do fear change,
for good survival reasons. But in order for you to have a joyous, wealthy life, you need to
embrace change and welcome it into your life. You need to be constantly at the cutting
edge of your fear neither too comfortable, nor scared witless.
Ask yourself what is the worst that can happen? Is that so bad? How likely is it, in all
27.
honesty, to happen?
Do you fear starting something because you may be found out that is, found
28.
wanting? Fight through this.
29.Do you feel superior to others and think maybe they will not understand your great
vision? That is simple fear of others and their opinions. It comes from being ego-attached

102
to your opinions and ideas making them part of who you are, your story, rather than a
means to an end.
30.Do you fear the criticism of others? This is the fuel you need to spur you on to greater
things.
31.Does your fear force you to close down and become more insular, staying with the safe
and known? The very opposite is required to succeed you need a fearless outward-
looking temperament which embraces change, difference and challenge.
Do you fear incurring the displeasure of others? This is inevitable if you succeed. At the
32.
very least some people will be jealous of your success.
33.Do you tend to settle for what you have, not wanting to make waves? This is your fear
at work fear of others not liking you. A major key to removing fear is to stop caring
what others think about you. Here is a key insight: they do not actually think of you very
often.
34. Do you fear being alone, a rugged individual? This is the deepest fear of all. We long to
have others take care of us, to nurture and protect us. This is the desire to be a child again.
This is one of the fears which religions play upon. You are all grown up now. Your
parents can no longer protect you. There is no personal, loving God watching over you. It
is time to face the world with courage.
35. Many people are timid and completely risk-averse. Their quest for safety comes way
above their desire for pushing the boundaries and living a powerful life.
36. Do not let your desire for safety overwhelm your desire for growth. Push forward
through fear. Recognise it for what it is, an ancient system to warn us of mortal danger,
honed in the Pleistocene wilderness many hundreds of thousands of years ago. Do not let
it rule you today.

103
 Grade Twenty-Five: Discipline
1.There is one crucial character trait which marks out those who are likely to succeed from
those who will just sink back into the enfolding arms of Morpheus. That trait is discipline.
2.Successful people know that they must sacrifice something today in order to achieve a
lot more tomorrow. Unsuccessful people want it all today, with no effort.
3. In many discussions with other multimillionaires, this was the word they used most
frequently when trying to explain their success. This was the key concept which
differentiated the rich from the poor; the successful from the failures.
4.The truth is that without discipline you are never going to have what it takes to escape
from Wonderland.
5. Without it, you are doomed to become one of the failures in life. Failure is not a
judgement. These people are failures by their own admission and definitions. If you were
to ask them if they feel they have succeeded in life, or failed, they would confess to having
failed, although they would blame factors outside of themselves for their failure. They are
partially right but they never took the time to identify those outside factors as the
meme and con-artists bent on keeping them in Wonderland. They wasted their lives in
bondage to the system, never even glimpsing that freedom existed, let alone challenging it
and making a bid for freedom!
6.With discipline, you have a good chance of rising above the crowd and retiring early as
a wealthy man or woman. And wealth gives you freedom to be all you are supposed to be.
7.It is essential to avoid reaching retirement with nothing. If you reach retirement as a
pauper relying upon charity, having lived a life of quiet desperation, locked in servitude,
frustrated, never having achieved anything much of note, not really having had a good
time (apart from the odd high point), never having dreamed, never beaten a real challenge
then your life is a failure by any standards, but certainly by your own.
8.If you are happy in your powerlessness and poverty, then none of this matters. There is
comfort in Wonderland. You do not have to think too much. You do not have to act to
change things. All you need to do is just go with the flow. Be like the rest of the Thralls,
obey orders, be a nice, tame, compliant milk cow.
9.If this is not for you and you want to make some escape plans, then here is an important
question: Are you a disciplined person, in general?

The Disciplined Mind

There are many indicators of a disciplined mind, no single one of which is essential, but
10.
put together, they start to add up to a pattern.
11.Can you get up in the morning? Are your shoes clean, your hair and teeth brushed? Is
your house tidy? Are your personal papers (gas bills, bank statements, etc.) filed in some
sort of reasonable order? Do you turn out a good job of work, even when nobody is
looking? Do you ever get drunk? (No disciplined person would ever get drunk! Alcohol is
one of the many drugs used to anesthetise the masses and keep them compliant). Do you
use recreational drugs? Is your car reasonably tidy or a junk yard on wheels?

104
12.There are many more indicators. It is up to you to look at your life and make an honest
assessment of your level of discipline or lack of it. This is not judgement. You are free to
live how you want to live, including in a filthy squat, unwashed and doped-up or drunk
half the time it is your life. But if you want a life of power, freedom and wealth, then
you will never get it if your life is anything like that which has just been described.

What is Discipline?
13. One definition is being strict with yourself.
14.It is not a pleasant thing because it spoils your immediate gratification and enjoyment.
But the long-term benefits and rewards vastly outweigh the greedy, thoughtless and short-
term gratification of our desires.
15.Another definition might be 'gratification postponement.' Not eating the whole jar of
sweets right now. Eating some and saving the rest for the next few days. Not because it is
'naughty' to eat all the sweets. Not because it is 'wicked or sinful' to eat all the sweets and
God will be displeased. It is because if you eat all the sweets now, your enjoyment will be,
say, ten units. But if you eat some now and save some for later, your enjoyment will be
twenty units. We delay gratification for purely selfish reasons.
16. Disciplined people save money. They do not spend every single penny they have in
their pockets on goodies to gobble up right now, as fast as possible. They do not then rush
out and borrow more money to buy more goodies to consume because they cannot wait
until next pay day. Such people are eating all the sweets in one sitting, then borrowing
sweets from their friends so they can eat those too! What would you say to a child who did
that? Why, what a spoilt and greedy child that would be, don't you think?
17.One of the keys to a successful life (however you define it) is the ability known as
gratification postponement.

The Power of Delayed Gratification

18.The name speaks for itself and successful people learn this ability and its advantages
quite early on in life. At its most fundamental, it is the ability not to eat all the sweets
today, in order that you will have some left over for tomorrow. As you grow up, it
manifests itself in several ways. For example:
1. As a child: Your ability to delay playtime until you have completed all of your
homework.
2. As a teenager: The ability to postpone the advantages of cash in your pocket right now
by leaving school and getting some mundane job. Instead you do further study so that you
might enjoy a higher salary later on. Every hour of study you do gears up through your life
to an effective rate of thousands of pounds for each study hour but paid later, not right
now.
3. As an adult: The ability not to spend every penny of the money you earn on goodies,
but instead to save a percentage so that it might grow and you can enjoy more goodies
later on.
19.The point is not to deny yourself forever and always postpone pleasure, possibly even
until you die. The point is to enjoy today with all of its richness and pleasure, but to

105
master the trick of gratification postponement for a percentage of lifes pleasures. And this
has only one, entirely selfish aim to enjoy more of lifes pleasures tomorrow.
20. The object is to be wealthy, happy, free and empowered in THIS life on THIS planet.

Saving a Sign of a Disciplined Mind

21. The savings habit is an absolute give-away sign of success or potential success. To save
takes discipline the discipline not to spend every penny you earn, but instead to put a
little by.
22. Most people do not save. They cannot manage the trick of postponing the gratification
which the immediate use of their money will bring; consequently, they are always broke
and struggling for cash.
And that means they must submit themselves to the bondage of their masters (e.g. by
23.
working in a poorly paid job for most of their lives) in order to feed their spending habits.
Truly they are addicted.
24. Disciplined people save money from a position of 'enlightened self-interest' or
selfishness, by another name. It is important that you realise this. You are doing it for you,
nobody else. They know that if they take some pleasure now (spend some money), then
postpone the rest of the pleasure for a later day, they will get far more pleasure in total
than if they spent all the money in one go. Everyone knows this. It is something we all
learn at about age eight.
25. But disciplined people apply this knowledge it takes will-power not to spend
everything right now undisciplined people just cannot keep their hands out of the
sweetie-jar. In practice, this means that every time they get some money they immediately
think of something to spend it on.
26.Modest saving over your lifetime just 10% of your wealth means you can retire with
a quarter of a million in the bank.
Not saving means you retire penniless and with a few pieces of useless junk which
27.
would not fill the average skip. What a difference!
28.The key factor at the root of many peoples poverty and frustration is indiscipline,
rather than lack of opportunity.
29.Put another way, successful people are disciplined and that is just another way of
saying they are able to postpone their pleasure temporarily whilst they get their sleeves
rolled up and do what needs to be done.
30. Discipline often means doing what you dont particularly want to do right now, in order
that you can gear-up your efforts and enjoy a better future.
31.That future comes around fast, and those lucky disciplined people who were able to
keep their hands off the sweeties, are soon able to enjoy their reward. Meanwhile the ill-
disciplined look on in envy at those lucky people with spare resources and are often
bitter about the unfair state of the world in which some people seem to have all the luck
and others have none.
32.They almost certainly then vote for politicians who promise to steal money by force
from people with too much and distribute it free to the needy.

106
Discipline Brings More Than Just Money
33. Discipline produces success even if your idea of success has nothing to do with money.
34.If you want to be a concert pianist or painter or an inventor, then to get there you must
postpone immediate trivial pleasures such as watching television or going out to a bar.
Instead you must practice the piano, study painting, or read books about great inventors of
the past. Even if your definition of success is to be at peace with the world and to be in a
blissful connected state with the universe, you must first practice the long hours of
discipline required for meditation, and practice the minute-by-minute discipline of
mindfulness by pushing out the constant chatter of thoughts from your mind. A Zen monk,
for example, could be said to be almost perfectly (and perhaps excessively) disciplined.
35. Unsuccessful people are often ill-disciplined for two main reasons:
1. They rarely think of the future or plan for it. They live only for today.
36.This is exactly how most people are trapped in Wonderland. Like a fish in water they
are unaware even of its existence. Day to day, week to week, life drifts by in a dream.
37.Self-development guru Jim Rohns secret of happiness is 'enjoying today whilst
planning for a better tomorrow'.
38.Living for the moment (enjoying today) is only half of the story. You can only enjoy
today because of the plans you made or work you did yesterday.
39.Similarly you can only enjoy tomorrow because of the plans you make or work you
do today. This includes simple pleasures like a day walking in the countryside listening to
the birds sing. You can only do that because 'yesterday' (last month, last year, etc.) you
worked hard enough and saved some money so that you could take time off. It is obvious
that you can only eat today because of the work you did yesterday, unless you have set up
your life to sponge from others like the Type B people discussed earlier.
2. They spend every single penny they earn (and usually more) on pleasures
right now, today, and do not put anything away for the future.
40. This is like being given a weeks worth of sweets and eating them all in one sitting!
41.Disciplined people use their time and talents to create present and future wealth for
themselves. This is your escape route from Wonderland. This means getting out of the
armchair and doing something. This is hard. This takes effort and it takes will-power.
42.Undisciplined people watch soap operas three times a week, go to a bar often (a net
outflow of money), go out for meals (outflow), buy all the latest gizmos (massive outflow)
or generally fritter away their time, money and talents for thirty of forty years.
They are then astonished at being broke when they retire. Not only that but their entire
43.
working life has been as a wage-slave doing some job that they barely tolerated and
which helped someone else to get wealthy.
44.There is nothing wrong with watching television sometimes, going out for a beer now
and then and having the odd meal out. These are pleasures. This is sweets now. Then,
you turn the television off and get to work on projects which will make you wealthy and
lead to your freedom and happiness. You stay in several nights and work through until
midnight on the same thing. This is investing time in your future, and is an identical
concept to investing (saving) money for your future.

107
45.A disciplined person does not spend all his/her time in trivial pleasures. They save
some for the future. Time is funny stuff. You cannot put it in a box and save it for a future
day, say the end of your life, and then bring it out and get extra days of life. The rule with
time is that you have to invest it straight away. It multiplies and produces money in the
future. You use this money to buy time from other people. For example, the money
releases you from the need to work, and so that gives you a whole lot of time hopefully
much more than your original investment of time to get the money in the first place. Or,
you use the money to pay someone to work for you and that frees up a whole lot of time
for more important things.
46. So the analogy is exact. Undisciplined people squander all their free time now on trivial
pleasures (eat all the sweets) and get, say, 100 units of pleasure. Disciplined people use a
little of their time for pleasures (eat a few sweets now), then invest their time for the
future. This multiplies many fold and frees up large amounts of time in the future. The net
result is that they get (say) 1,000 units of pleasure in total over the years. This is their
reward for being disciplined.

The Rot Starts Early

47. Any failed or mediocre life is permeated from top to bottom with lack of discipline, and
it starts early. Here is a life report from one such man who admitted he was a failure (by
his own definition of success):
48.Failed at school because of lack of discipline (always played around instead of
working; always out with the mates instead of doing homework). Due to poor school
results, he got a mediocre job. He never had a decent pay rise because lack of discipline
meant he was often late for work and rarely did the job properly; always clock-watching
and never went the extra mile. Never saved a penny always spent the lot (and more) as
soon as it came in.
49.Never invested time for a better future, 'spent' the lot on trivial pleasures. Always in
debt, never solvent it takes discipline to control your finances. He eventually retired
broke, bitter, disillusioned...and surprised at his poverty!
50.Do not let this happen to you. Everyone has a sense of discipline. Without it, you would
never get out of bed in the morning. Discipline is exactly that voice which says to you
after the alarm has gone off: Right, come on, up you get! Without that, you would just
lie in bed all day. The trick is to start cultivating that sense of discipline that small voice
which nags away at you. You need to make it habitual. Do not suppress it. Listen to it and
follow it. This is the difference between success and failure. The 'secret magic formula' of
getting rich can be encapsulated in the quality of self-discipline.
51.As a trivial example, if you were disciplined enough to go out cleaning windows on a
Saturday (or a few evenings a week) instead of frittering away your time, then after ten
years of doing this and investing the money you would have a hundred thousand in the
bank! This is not an exhortation to start a window cleaning round, but to prove that you do
not need to start a stock broking business, or open a chain of restaurants to make money.
A simple piece of self-discipline in a lowly profession makes you a 100k in ten years,
200k in twenty years! Imagine what would happen if you really applied your talents! The

108
only thing which stops people doing this is lack of self-discipline, or to give it its common
name laziness.
52.With discipline you can achieve more in the next five years than you have in your life
so far.

Be Disciplined in Small Things

53.Your future wealthy and free life is governed by a series of choices which you make
from here on in.
Little choices. Hourly, daily, weekly choices. Most people always choose the 'sweets
54.
now' option. This route leads to failure and continual enslavement.
55.Every little choice they make is an 'instant gratification' choice to watch another hour
of TV, to sleep late again, to go down to the bar again, to have some more entertainment,
to lie in at the weekend, to eat some more, to buy some more toys, to book a holiday they
cannot afford, and so on.
56.Life is incredibly short. If you are over forty will know this already; if you are between
30 and 40 you will be glimpsing the truth of this, if you are under 30 you probably still
think you are immortal. But the rewards of life come to the doers, not the talkers. This is
so true. You receive riches from life in direct proportion to the amount of effort you put in.
True again.
57.You want to be wealthy? Of course you do and rightly so. But there is no 'miracle'
short cut to wealth basically, it is about getting out of the chair and actually fighting,
daring and winning against the system. Breaking free from slavery not letting them
control you.
It is a fight now, just as it was a hundred years ago, or a thousand years ago, for that
58.
matter. The rules have changed, but the game remains the same.
59.You need a better life and more money? Here is an important key to wealth: life does
not respond to needs, wishes or desires. It laughs straight back in your face. Only your
disciplined effort right now will plant the seeds of future crop which will meet your needs.
60.To complain that your needs should be filled right now is effectively to say: I have
needs. Someone else should work so that my needs might be provided for.
61.That is a pure Thrall statement it is exactly what those in control are attempting to
achieve, getting you to slave for them so that they can do less.
62.What would the soil say to your statement I need some corn? Why, the answer
would be Bring me your seed! The soil would not care a finger snap for your needs.
Who cares about your needs? Nobody. Furthermore the seed is not enough, is it? You must
also plant, tend, water and hoe it.
These activities can be summed-up by the phrase 'disciplined effort.' Effort means the
63.
sweat of your brow; discipline means meticulously and regularly applied. A little each
day. Gradually. This is how the rewards build up over the years. Not in a rush. You don't
hoe, weed and water all in one day and expect a bumper crop the next. No, it does not
work like this. You hoe a little one day, weed the next, water when it is dry, then go right
back to hoeing.

109
64.If this sounds like hard work then welcome to the real world. But at least you get to be
wealthy and free this way. Trapped in Wonderland you might work a little less hard but
the rewards are pitiful.

Nothing Comes From Nothing

65. Plant nothing, and get...nothing.
66. Spend all your money and save nothing, later in life you have...nothing.
67.Fritter your time away in trivia instead of learning then, when you really need a skill
or knowledge for that important money-making project you reach into your bag and pull
out... nothing.
Work to the clock and never go the extra mile when 'pay rise day' comes around then
68.
expect... nothing.
69.What is the magic solution for growing an instant crop? The crop you need now
because you are hungry now and couldn't be bothered to plant the seed and do the work?
Farmer Giles would scratch his head and say: I cant think o' one, m'dear.
70.There is no magic solution. There is a long term solution and that is to learn the habit of
discipline and make it your master. It can be done. It is highly likely that you are already
disciplined in some areas of your life you just need to extend this to your wealth creation
efforts.
71.Start with the small things and build up gradually until you become a powerful, self-
disciplined person.
72.Successful people are disciplined. They choose some pleasure now, but will then
choose hard work and effort over further immediate pleasure this sows the seeds in order
that they can reap a richer future harvest. They become successful and wealthy people.
73. Are you willing to give this route a try now?
74.This is a practical book. You need to make a start now, today, to change things. Pick
one area and change just that, otherwise it is too overwhelming for you. Pick your car
(say) and get that cleaned up you will feel so much better and it will give you the
impetus to change in other ways.
75. This is not a moral lecture. It is about saving you from spending the remainder of your
life in grinding poverty and in slavery to the system. You were told it would not be easy to
escape.
76.Wonderland has been painstakingly constructed over hundreds of years (thousands,
maybe) with one aim in mind to trap poor Thralls like you and extract your life values.
You think you are just going to walk out without resistance? It isnt going to happen. You
will have to fight, scrabble and claw your way out one step at a time. And it starts right
here, right now.
77.If you cannot face your ill-discipline and make some small changes then you will just
sink straight back into the welcoming arms of Morpheus. Sleep well. Years will pass
before you raise a bleary eyelid once again. By then you will be too old because the stark
truth is.time is running out for you to escape. You do not have forever.
Every year you spend in slavery is a year you do not get to spend in wonderful,
78.
empowered freedom. How many years have you lost so far? How many do you have left?
110
 Grade Twenty-Six: Precious Time
Time is running out for you. When are you going to wake up and have a real shot at
1.
wealth, freedom and power?
2. Time is too precious to waste.
3. To realise the value of ONE YEAR, ask a student who failed an exam.
4.To realise the value of ONE MONTH, ask a mother who gave birth to a premature
baby.
5. To realise the value of ONE WEEK, ask the editor of a weekly newspaper.
6. To realise the value of ONE HOUR, ask the loving couple that is waiting to meet.
7. To realise the value of ONE MINUTE, ask a person who missed the train.
8. To realise the value of ONE SECOND, ask a person who just avoided an accident.
To realise the value of ONE HUNDREDTH OF A SECOND, ask the athlete who just
9.
won a gold medal in the Olympics.
10. Treasure every moment that you have. Make it work for you.
Time waits for no one. Yesterday is history. Tomorrow is a mystery. Today is a gift.
11.
That is why it is called the present.
12. Stop thinking one day...
13.Stop waiting for your boat to come in, for your circumstances to change, for your
children to grow up, for your job to get better.
14. The time for action is now.

111
112
 Section Two
The Ladder of Wealth

113
114
 Lesson One
Congratulations on passing the twenty-six grades of the first section of the book. If you
have taken the teachings on board you will have clarity about the following things:
1. Total honesty about your situation. What The Author calls broke and powerless.
2. Knowledge that you inhabit Wonderland the society which surrounds you. It is a giant
construct comprising belief systems and memes. It is largely illusory, but it feels very
real.
3. An understanding of the dark forces arrayed against you, preventing you from being all
you might be. These forces are: government, religion, media, big business and advertising,
friends and family and type B people.
4. You have a burning desire to break out into the light of freedom and maybe feel a little
angry about what you have allowed to happen to you so far in your life.
5. You know about the two major internal forces of fear and ignorance which have held
you back so far, keeping you trapped in Wonderland.
6. You know about Thralls and have probably been one up until now. Thralls are destined
to be born, to work, to entertain themselves and to die after being drained of their
usefulness.
7. You have thought about your why the reason you want to become wealthy. The
why precedes the wealth. Without a valid why you cannot become a wealthy and
contented person.
8. You know that wealth in itself does not bring happiness it is the use of money to put
out a positive dream into the world which brings happiness.
9. You have smashed the finite pot of money illusion and know there is an almost
infinite amount of wealth available and that getting it need not negatively affect others.
Rather the opposite. Wealth attained in the service of others enhances everybodys life.
10. You are now aware of the secret link between wealth and happiness. Money itself is
neutral. It is what you do with the money which adds to, or subtracts from your happiness
and the wellbeing of others, and remember, it is happiness we want, not just money.
Money is merely a tool.
11. You understand the concept of financial freedom. This is defined as: Enough income,
without having to work for it, to cover your chosen lifestyle forever (barring dramatic
changes).
12. You realise that power has a bad press but that power can be a tremendous force for
good. You want to become a powerful person.
13. You understand that due to the deep unconsciousness of your fellow travellers, being a
Thrall opens you up to exploitation. You need to know there are dark forces arrayed
against you. You need to unmask them so that you are not damaged.
14. You realise how your schooling most likely programmed you for Thralldom.
15. You have unmasked the Type B people in your life.
16. You know that everyone can become rich, not just the few.
17. You know about the four stage of financial freedom.

115
18. You know about the four stages of wealth.
19. You know about the five levels of consciousness: Victim, Ego, Wisdom,
Transformative and Beyond Wealth) and the four associated traps: The Poverty Trap, The
Ego Trap, The Seeker Trap, The Spiritual Trap.
20 You know that overcoming fear and attaining a disciplined mind are essential
prerequisites to becoming wealthy.
Armed with this knowledge you are now ready to begin your journey to wealth. You have
been unable to do this before because you have been disarmed intellectually and morally
by the forces of Wonderland. Now that you can see clearly, the brakes should be released
allowing you to accelerate towards your goals.

Welcome to The Ladder of Wealth

The remaining sections of this book are written in a somewhat different style to The
Teachings which comprise the first half and this needs a word of explanation.
The Teachings in the first half of the book were written solely by The Author with a view
to making them timeless as far as possible. The majority of The Teachings should still
have resonance if they are read (say) fifty years after they were written.
In contrast, The Ladder of Wealth is written by The Author, drawing on his own
experience of becoming a multi-millionaire and also drawing on the experience of two
other multi-millionaires all of whom bring their considerable knowledge of making money
to the task of helping you to break out of poverty and into wealth. The writing style is
therefore rather different.

No Silver Bullet
When we started to put this section together an immediate problem became apparent. It
would be impossible to suggest exact routes to making money for two reasons. Firstly
these routes would become dated very quickly and later readers of the book would find
them laughable. For example, imagine if you read that one of the simplest ways to make
some fast money is to sell discounted typewriter ribbons! This would seem ludicrously
old-fashioned to you and you would be likely to stop reading, secure in the knowledge that
the advice in this book was old and not worthy of further attention. At the time of
writing, typewriters are long obsolete, but the temptation now is to talk about selling
domain names or eBay trading or any one of a hundred currently fashionable Internet
ideas. But within ten years (let alone fifty!) these will seem very quaint. They will sound
like Become a Windows 95 Troubleshooter! or Create Information Cassette Tapes and
Sell Them! or Mechanical Adding Machine Repair For Fun and Profit!
The second reason we could not discuss specific business ideas is because there are,
literally, millions of such ideas, any one of which could make you a fortune. As an
example we have just heard about a company turning over three billion dollars a year in...
are you ready?... selling mink pelts! There is obviously vast profit to be made in this area
and yet the team could have written a hundred business ideas an hour for a month and not
come up with this one!
As an example, here are just a handful of ideas which the team personally know have
made life-changing money for the people behind them.
116
1. Creating a new brand of lime pickle to go with Indian Food.
2. Selling DVDs of financial freedom seminars.
3. Writing a best-selling novel.
4. Trading the FOREX.
5. Scrap copper.
6. Solar energy installation.
7. Dealing in repossessed property.
8. Renting out mailing lists.
9. Writing and selling a guide on penny share dealing.
10. Videos on preparing raw food.
As you can see there is virtually no similarity whatsoever between those ideas and yet all
have made small fortunes for those running them. We could have filled up this entire book
with thousands of such ideas and so you can see the pointlessness of singling out any one
way and saying this is how you should make your money.

Fast Pace of Change

You also know by now that the world is a rapidly changing place, the ultimately fluid
hunting ground for the aspiring entrepreneur. Nothing stays the same for five minutes let
alone five years. Making money is all about scanning for the opportunities, rolling with
the punches, being ready to adapt and change in a heartbeat.
Having said that, unless you are reading this book many years after it was published, you
should have received one or two specific up to the minute business plans with it. These
plans we can constantly change and update to keep with the times, whilst leaving the book
as timeless as possible.
This part of the book frequently does mention specific sums of money. If these seem dated
to you, just index them up to the current value of money and all the principles are still
valid.
We hope you are ready now to put your first foot on the ladder of wealth. It starts with you
being broke and powerless and ends with you having up to one hundred million pounds to
put your dream into action. And even that is not the limit! You can shoot for a billion if
that is what you want.
We limited it to one hundred million for two reasons. Firstly if you want more than this it
will take you many years and probably a working lifetime unless you get very lucky. Even
ten million is a five to ten year project from a standing start. For your interest, five to ten
million is the typical average wealth level of The Author and this team and so we do not
feel qualified to tell you how to go for a billion, although we do give some pointers
towards a hundred million.
Remember, ten million pounds or dollars would give you:
1. Total freedom from wage slavery for life.
2. A very comfortable lifestyle with the house, car and all the toys you could want.

117
3. About seven or eight million left over for your power, passion and purpose money. This
is the money to put your unique dream out into the world, move Beyond Wealth and
further the human project.
The only reason you would want more than this is if your power, passion and purpose
required a very large amount of funds. E.g. if you wanted to eradicate AIDS from the
world you would be talking about hundreds of billions.

Making a Start
So are you excited to make a start on the ladder of wealth? It has twenty-two steps. You
only need to climb as far as you want, although the first 9 steps are non-optional if you
want to become a wealthy man or woman.
Here they are. Each will be covered in the chapters that follow:
1. Understand the entrepreneurial mindset.
2. Manifest the creativity factor.
3. Work out how much you are currently worth.
4. Calculate your Freedom Figure.
5. Get out of debt.
You are now debt free but with your income matching your outgoings and you still have
to work hard to stand still.
6. Get into the savings habit.
7. Stop spending!
8. Discover and activate your dream.
9. Set your goals.
10. Realise there are only 3 ways to get wealthy and only one of these really applies to
you.
11. Choose the lifestyle you desire.
12. Internalise the wealth formula X + Y = Z.
13. Work your niche.
14. Choose the ideal business.
15. Use the 12-piece jigsaw as a guideline.
16. Make 10,000. This might be seed money for a project.
17. Make 100,000.
18. Make a million.
19. Pause and ask yourself Do I have enough?
20. Make ten million.
21. Make one hundred million.
22. Review the concept called Beyond Wealth.
The skills and knowledge and techniques required to make 10,000 are very different
from those required to make ten million. This, by the way, is why many people do not get
past a million. They were not prepared to adapt and change.
So if you are ready to make a practical start on your wealth project, let us begin.

118
 Lesson Two: The Entrepreneurial Mindset
To make a lot of money it is not enough just to want it. Everyone wants money. If it was
free and easy people would have billions. But life is not like that.
One thing you can know for absolute certain is that it is above averagely difficult to
make a million. How do we know that? Because the average person is broke. If it was easy
to make a million, they would have done it easily.
To make above average money, you need above average qualities. This is not what people
want to hear. For example you need discipline, focus, energy, the work ethic, time, ability
to fight your fear, willingness to risk and a dash of luck (but not as much as you might
think).
The good news is, you have all of those qualities. If you take them one at a time it is
highly likely that at some point in your past you exhibited that quality. There was a time
when you had energy. There was a time when you had the work ethic. There was a time
when you had discipline and focus.
To become wealthy you now need to draw all of these qualities together and apply them to
the task at hand.
The task is to become wealthy, and one of the very few ways of achieving that is to be in
business in some form or other, even if it is a one-man/woman show.
Apart from luck (winning the lottery or inheritance) there are precious few other ways.
This makes your task very easy. You only have to look in one place for the money in
business. That means trading goods or services with others for a profit.
To do this you need one key skill which has not been mentioned so far the
entrepreneurial mindset.
This mindset is best described as a constant radar-sweep for money-making opportunities.
The question on your mind should be Where is the money-making opportunity? Putting
it more simply, you need to be often thinking How can I make money from this?
Ideally you need to apply that to your dream, hobby or passion. If you are interested in
something, and can make money from it, that is close to heaven. If not, you need to find a
way to make money which accords with your values and which you are interested in. This
cannot be a ten year unbearable grind as you will not stand the course.

The Creative Twist to an Existing Idea

If someone else is making money you should take a great interest. How can you make
money from it too? Can you apply a little twist to the idea and run it yourself? Can you
bring it from one market or country to another and make it work there?
If you are in employment, is there a service or product you could supply on a freelance
basis to your company? You have amazing insider knowledge not available to others;
this is a perfect example of a situation in which you ask Where is the money-making
opportunity?
If you are just starting out, look at small classified adverts, even adverts in shop windows.
Who is making money? What are they selling? Could you do this?
What needs are there unfulfilled? Can you service these and make a good profit?
119
Have you been frustrated recently by bad service? Have you been unable to get a
competent and reasonably priced gardener, plumber or tree surgeon? Those are radar-
scan opportunities. Real wealth creators are money-focussed. They do not care about
whether they have the skills or knowledge just show them the money and they will be in
there. Skills and knowledge are easily hired in. That is one of the key secrets of the really
wealthy.

Example of The Wealth Scan

Here is a true story known personally by The Author. One day, whilst walking through an
airport terminal, a wealthy businessman wanted to cash some pounds sterling into dollars.
There was a machine on the concourse which allowed you to insert sterling and receive
dollars less 10% commission. He was outraged at the 10% cost. He turned to his second
in command and said Find out where to get these machines made. I want ten in every
airport in the country. A year later he was the biggest UK operator of these machines and
he was making 8% per transaction. This amounted to millions.
The story is interesting because it shows the entrepreneurial mindset in action. Everything
this man touched was a potential money-making operation to him. He saw someone else
making a massive profit and his reaction was: How can I make the same profit too? This
should be your mindset also. Notice he knew nothing about how to make such a machine,
how to supply it with currency, how to operate it or how to get permission to have them at
airports. He did not need to know any of this because he knew that someone else would
sort out all of these details. All he cared about was getting a share of what was obviously a
profitable idea. His twist? He located his machines in the airport car parks!
Opportunity surrounds you. In fact it overwhelms you. The question should not be I dont
know what to do. What should I do? The question is How do I quickly eliminate 99 of
these 100 exciting opportunities which are staring me right in the face so that I can home
in on the quickest and easiest one for me?
Faced with opportunity, the average person feels a huge wave of lethargy and apathy
rolling over them. All of their energy dies. They cannot be bothered to pursue it. At the
first, tiny hurdle they give up.

Do Something Properly
You could make a fortune from anything you touch by following one simple piece of
advice, which is: do it properly.
Why is this so powerful? Because most small businesses are run by rank amateurs who
produce poor products and services. All you have to do in order to steal 50% of their
business is to do what they are doing, but do it well.
Run a garage where you actually fix the problem, on time and at a decent cost.
Run a plumbing service where you actually turn up, on time and fix the problem.
Run a printing works where you actually print the job properly and deliver it when you
say you will.
The point here is not to suggest you actually run these businesses (but you could, and with
no prior knowledge or skill). The point is to underline the fact, as if you did not know, that

120
it is hard to get decent service and products these days. Anyone who offers these is
instantly in business making good money.
What opportunities are right under your nose? One property tycoon suggests walking
around your local streets, on foot. He guarantees to be able to spot a hot property
opportunity anywhere in the country using this method. It may be a plot of land which
could be built on; one house which could be converted into two; a garage which could be
knocked down and an extra house built; a pathway which could be widened to provide
access to a locked-in plot, and many similar ideas. The point here is that people do not
bother to look right under their noses.

The Entrepreneurial Formula

The entrepreneurial formula is simple.
1. Be constantly scanning.
2. Always ask: Where is the money-making opportunity?
3. Who is making money and how? Can you improve on what they are doing?
4. What do you love to do? Can you make money from that?
5. Do not let your imagined poor subset of skills hold you back. The real money-makers
only have one skill making money! There is an army of experts out there all keen to
work for you and make your dream a reality. Hire them in. Offer them a slice of the
action. Get them working on your project.
6. What do people need but are not getting? Can you supply it?
7. What opportunities are there where you are now? At your work, near your home?
8. Start acting. Get your sleeves rolled up today and make things happen. Investigate some
ideas, try out a few things cheaply, have a go. Business is great fun.
9. What can you buy and sell for a profit?
10. What service can you provide for a profit?
If you make the entrepreneurial mindset a part of your psyche you will be astonished at
how much opportunity is right under your nose. You will be overwhelmed in fact. The
hard part is not uncovering opportunities, it is in selecting the one which will suit you best.

121
 Lesson Three: The Creativity Factor
This question is often asked by the aspiring wealth-seeker: Is there one single factor
which makes the difference between earning a fortune and just pulling down a living
wage?
It is always hard to come up with a single factor because there are so many candidates.
Here are just a few:
1. Passion.
2. Energy and enthusiasm.
3. Hard work and discipline.
4. Focus and staying power.
5. Ability to take defeat and come up punching for a second, third or even fiftieth
round with life.
6. Sense of humour.
7. Being big-picture focused but also mindful of the smaller details.
8. Willingness to learn all the time.
9. A positive mental attitude.
10. Knowing where you are trying to get to.
These are the top ten apart from the one which will be disclosed here, and that is
creativity.
Creativity is what makes all the difference between making very large sums of money and
just a mediocre salary.
The reason is that people pay you in life for your ability to solve their problems. The
bigger and more complex the problem, the more money people will pay to get it solved.
Really big problems can only be solved by highly creative solutions. If you can come up
with a creative solution, you will be able to charge a lot of money. If you spend your days
solving trivial problems which have been solved a million times before, then you will
merely be paid a living wage.
Please read that paragraph again as it contains a key wealth point for you.
Mundane problems are easy to solve. Anyone of average intelligence can provide a
solution and so the fee they command is quite small. Your garbage men get paid for
solving your garbage problem. This is not a very challenging problem. They just load the
garbage into a vehicle, cart it away and dump it in a hole in the ground. If you can walk,
talk and lift a bin, you can solve that problem. That means most people in the country
could solve the garbage problem if they had a mind to. The result is that garbage men do
not get paid much. But still they get paid, because they are providing a solution to a
problem.
Let us take another example. Your garage is paid for solving car maintenance problems.
That is a more specialised task and few people nowadays try to fix their own vehicles.
You pay your garage a reasonable amount of money to sort it out for you because good car
mechanics are worth paying. Notice you do not pay very large amounts of money, usually,
and the reason is that millions of people could, in theory, learn to be a competent car
122
mechanic and so there are plenty to choose from. Another way of saying this is that the
competition is stiff. In the case of expensive cars (BMWs, Mercs, Porsche, etc.) you pay a
lot of money. That is because a good Porsche mechanic is far rarer than your average
mechanic from the local garage. See the progression?
The fewer the number of people who can solve your problem, the higher the amount of
money they can command.
Forgetting subsidised health for a moment, what money can a top brain surgeon
command? Or a top heart specialist? What would you pay if you had a heart problem
which threatened your life and there was only one woman who had the skill to fix you up?
If she asked you, you would give her everything you owned in the whole world. Or would
you rather pay 1,000 and have some junior, inexperienced, third-rate heart surgeon do the
work for you?

Big Problems = Big Payments

The top money comes from solving big problems which affect the lives of millions of
people. The problems do not have to be exotic like heart surgery. In fact most of the
megabuck problems are very mundane, boring and sometimes even dirty and unpleasant
but the solution is creative.
For example, look at the vast sums made by the supermarkets. Now on the face of it, how
hard can it be? You just buy food at a low price, sell it at a higher price and bank billions a
year. That is not too tough. But really, an operation like Tesco is a huge multi-layered set
of interconnecting problems dozens of them; hundreds of them; thousands of them. Only
the most creative, the very sharpest brains are capable of providing solutions which allow
a company like that even to exist, let alone thrive and prosper. People who can solve these
problems are paid millions for their creative ability.
In case you had never considered it before, here are just a tiny handful of mind-boggling
problems which face you if you decide to set up your own supermarket chain like Tesco:
1. How do you attract, motivate, train and retain three hundred thousand employees
(yes, you read that right) in what is after all, a mundane, minimum wage, shelf-stacking
and till-operating job?
2. How do you ensure that each store is always staffed correctly, with the right mix of
trainees and experienced staff, through times of sickness and absenteeism? How do you
ensure that staff in Leeds respond to customers the same way as staff in Poole?
3. How do you ensure absolute safety for customers in your stores? That covers a
thousand different danger areas from securing overhead light fittings, to procedures to be
operated in the event of a spillage.
4. You need to source 48,000 different products from 16,000 different world-wide
suppliers.
5. You need to always be in stock (but not overstocked) with each one of those
48,000 products. Each time one is out of stock means several thousand angry customers.
(What do you mean you dont have any Robinsons Fig & Cucumber Marmalade? You
had it last week. Cant you people even reorder when you run out? What kind of shop is
this, anyway?)

123
6. Each one of those 48,000 products needs to be of an absolute consistent quality
and freshness, time after time.
7. You need to chop your costs right to the bone in order to take on Sainsburys,
Morrisons, Iceland, Aldi and Safeway. Most shoppers buy on price which is strange
because food is arguably the most important thing you buy. But no, the general public will
spend huge swathes of their cash on cigarettes, alcohol, nights out, gadgets and flat screen
TVs, but want the cheapest, poorest quality, cut-price junk food they can get their hands
on. If your competitors are even 1p cheaper than you, shoppers will desert you en-masse.
This means you have to be the toughest kid on the block when it comes to screwing your
16,000 suppliers into the ground but you also have to keep them motivated, profitable
and interested in supplying you.
8. You need to be able to take several forms of payment, right there, at the till
without delay.
9. You need to minimise check-out waiting times regardless of staffing levels. You
can rarely, if ever, predict how busy the store will be, and therefore how many check-out
staff you need.
10. You have to handle theft, which is an epidemic in most stores.
Not to mention: Disabled facilities; fire precautions; environmental impact (e.g. trolley
dumping) vandalism; staff security against irate customers; lost children; toilet facilities;
customer complaints; customer fraud; continuation of power for your freezers; car park
security; environmental activists; prevention of sales of alcohol, cigarettes, knives and
pharmaceuticals to under age customers...
This chain of supermarkets is nothing more than a set of complex, interlocking mega
problems which only the bravest of hearts would try to solve.
So, the people who can envisage all these problems and more, and yet put into place a
structure which solves them will, quite simply, make hundreds and hundreds of millions of
pounds. And quite rightly so.

Big problems + creative solutions = megabucks.

Staying with large problems for the moment, consider privatisation of the railways. This is
surely one of the largest, most intractable problems in the country how to get a regular,
clean, efficient and cheap rail service. It is worth thinking for just a few moments about
the sheer scale of this problem. Next time you are tempted to complain about a late or
dirty train, spare a thought for the immensity of this problem.
Here is just one tiny example. In the morning, everyone wants to travel to London. So you
need five hundred trains, ready and waiting at various locations around the country,
stacked ten deep for people to get into the capital. In simple terms, come ten oclock in the
morning after the rush hour, all 500 trains are stacked ten deep in sidings at Paddington
and Waterloo. What do you do with them? Leave them sitting there all day ready for the
return rush hour at 5pm? That is not a very good use of a twenty million pound train.
Using it only twice a day will guarantee bankruptcy! You want to keep the thing running
all day and night, if possible but how? Well... If you could come up with a creative
solution, you would make a fortune. That one has been worked out already, of course.

124
Anyone who takes on problems of this magnitude will make tens or hundreds of millions
at a time.
How do you absolutely guarantee to have a driver ready, on time, for each one of the fifty
thousand departures each day, without overstaffing? Think of the consequences of not
solving this problem! A train full of passengers just sitting at the platform.
How do you reconcile passenger safety with the realities of high-speed travel on outdated
track? How do you combat an epidemic of ticket fraud without using Gestapo-like tactics
which make your honest customers feel like crooks? How do you ensure your drivers are
fit to drive without seeming overly paternalistic and administering breath tests and drug
tests?
How do you manage the media, who are always out to get you? What do you say when a
rail disaster occurs due to (say) a driver high on drugs when you had a test available, but
elected not to use it to avoid alienating the unions?
It goes on and on and on. The problems are huge, but the rewards are vast.
Hundreds of millions of pounds even billions are on the table for anyone who can come
up with some creative solutions to problems like this.
On a smaller scale, any money you have ever made (not won, or inherited, etc.) in your
life came about as a result of your ability to solve someone elses problems.
Problem: I need a good hot meal right now for about five pounds.
Solution: Allow me to sell you some tasty fish and chips.
Problem: I need a clean car but don't have the time to do it myself. Anyway, I cant
stand that job.
Solution: Allow me to valet it for just 35.
Problem: I need social interaction, somewhere to relax after a hard, stressful day and an
intoxicating liquid which will numb my senses and make me feel happy.
Solution: Welcome to the Dog and Ferret sir. Can I suggest a pint of Old Peculiar and a
double whiskey chaser?
Problem: My wife doesnt fancy me anymore...
Solution: Lawks ave mercy. Youre a big boy, arent you? Come here, dearie...
You get the idea... Problems beg to be solved. The person who comes up with a solution
can make great money.
Creativity can also pay huge dividends in the arts. If you create a top selling song, or a
best-selling novel, or a film then you can be paid ongoing royalties for life. Author J K
Rowling is worth over one billion pounds all from creating Harry Potter.

Create Dont Just Copy

People rarely create. They just want an easy solution. In their hunt for this illusion they
merely copy an existing idea which maybe ten or a hundred people are currently already
running. They do not make the slightest modification or improvement to the idea.
Why do people do this? The answer is not that the people are stupid. The reason is that
people are very lazy. This must change for you if you are to become wealthy.
Here is a key wealth point. Making money is about exchanging values.
125
As an example, consider this book. Assuming you purchased it, then it was a trade of
values. You handed over a sum of money and hopefully you received something of at least
equivalent value, hopefully of greater value. In this case, it is life-changing information.
If you receive far greater value than the amount you paid for the book, then you will be
really pleased, and so will the publishers. You see it is possible to have two extremely
happy people engaged in a business transaction and certainly this is a prerequisite for
becoming rich.

The Super Transaction

This is called a 'super-transaction', and both parties have to be happy for this to occur. If
you only make the customer happy by (say) giving him your products for free, this is not a
super-transaction because you are not getting equivalent value, and you are not happy.
Similarly if only you are happy and your customer is displeased, this is not a super
transaction either.
In order to get rich you need to offer superb, unbelievable value for money. In other
words, the customer must be delighted to pay the asking amount for the product or service.
We are talking here about getting rich, not operating one of the tens of thousands of dull,
pointless 'make a living' businesses.
Now here is the key point which could make you seriously wealthy... to achieve this super
transaction status, you need to create, not copy.
Many wealth seekers do not want to be bothered with creating a new product or service.
Thinking takes effort. They merely want to copy something. They want to be told exactly
what to do so that they can carry out the plan like a slavish automaton like a Thrall, in
fact!
Most people would rather copy than create. Why? Because they see this as easy and lazy.
To create something takes an effort of will and discipline and so lazy people follow the
simple route and just blindly copy. This does not mean it is lazy to see an idea working in
one market or country and copy it into a different market or country that is creative (but
not as creative as coming up with your own, unique idea). The copiers see five people
doing an idea in one market, and so they just become the sixth or the tenth or the fiftieth to
do that identical idea in an identical market in an identical manner. Have you ever been
abroad in a tourist area and noticed that almost every shop in the tourist strip sells an
identical array of leather belts, wallets and handbags for example? That is laziness in
action.
When you copy, you are merely picking up the scraps from other people's tables. Also,
you cannot give superb value for money and make money (the 'super transaction'). Why?
Because of the competition. Everyone is doing the same idea and so the price comes
down.
If you just copy, you will only ever make a modest amount of money you can make a
living. This book is not about that. There is absolutely nothing wrong with making a
living if that is as far as your imagination takes you.
What do you think is the result of setting up the sixth mediocre take-away Pizza shop in
your town? Strange, you know... there just didn't seem to be the business around.

126
Do not take away from this section that you need to be a creative genius to make a million.
Neither do you have to shoot for a hundred million. You can make serious money by just
having a small creative twist on an existing idea or harnessing the creative power of
someone else and using it (with their blessing) to make a very great deal of money for
yourself. Remember the story of the foreign currency machines? The only twist he added
was to put the machines in the car parks rather than the concourse. That simple idea made
him millions.
You can bring an idea from one market (or country) where it is working well, and set it to
work in another market or country.
You can take an existing idea and make it slightly better.
You can bundle several good products together to make a super-product.
You can harness the creative ability of others who only want a modest sum for their
efforts whilst you make millions.
Whatever you do, please understand it is most unlikely you will become wealthy unless
you get your creative brain going. Do not imagine you have no such ability you do. You
can almost certainly recall times in your life when you were creative so get it working
again for you now.

127
 Lesson Four: Your Net Worth
You need to know two things before you can start to aim for financial freedom.
1. Where you are right now, financially. No pretence. No hiding.
2. How much you need to live on and hence how much you need in the bank (this is
called your Freedom Figure).
If you bought this book twenty years after it was published, at a local charity shop then
you are out of luck at this point because with it came a free CD called Wealthplanner
containing some simple spreadsheets. If this is you, a CD will be that almost forgotten,
old plastic thing which was used by some primitive people two decades ago to store data!
However, you do not need the CD as we will show you what to do using good old-
fashioned pen and paper assuming they still exist!
If you have a computer: it is time to get out your Wealth Planner CD-ROM you should
have received with the book and fire it up. Be sure to read the Readmefirst file first. In
this chapter we will be using the NetWorth program, the FreedomFigure program and
the BorrowSave program.
Read the instructions on how to use them in the Readmefirst document. With the
NetWorth, all we are interested in are the columns that list your assets and liabilities
resulting in a net worth figure in the appropriate box. When you have done this you now
know where you are financially.
If you do not have a computer or you got the book in a charity shop in 2050: Dont worry,
we have not forgotten you! Take a blank piece of paper and draw a line down the middle.
At the top of one side write Assets and on the other side, Liabilities. Now, think about
all of your belongings and put a realistic value for them under Assets. This is the value
you would realistically get for your possessions if you had to sell them and move away.
Do not use the as new figure. Include your house at its current market value.
Next, work out all of your debts and put them under Liabilities. Include everything you
owe including what you owe on the mortgage.
Remember: use realistic second-hand figures for your assets, not shop new prices.
Now subtract the liabilities (what you owe) from the assets (what you own) to get your
Net Worth. Please note, we are not asking you to write down your monthly outgoings or
your monthly income here. We are only looking at your capital situation.
Here is an example which should clarify things...

128
 ASSETS VALUE LIABLITIES AMOUNT
House Value 295,000.00 Mortgage 187,000.00
Car 3,900.00 Car Finance 1,800.00
Furniture 4,000.00 VISA card 2,600.00
Caravan 9,500.00 Loan #1 2,000.00
Savings at bank 400.00 Loan #2 3,000.00
Gold 8,000.00 Loan #3 1,000.00
Lloyds Bond 12,000.00
Shares 6,000.00
Other savings 3,500.00
Kitchen equip 1,900.00
Hi Fi etc 1,500.00
Piano 3,000.00
Misc other items 2,000.00
TOTAL ASSETS 350,700.00 TOTAL 197,400.00
LIABILITIES
NET WORTH +153,300.00

You can see from the above table that everything you own adds up to 350,700.00 and
everything you owe adds up to 197,400.00 and so if you were to sell everything and
settle-up today, you would be left with the difference; i.e. 350,700.00 less 197,400.00
which our calculator says is 153,300.00.
Now do this for yourself using your own figures. It shouldnt take long. No need to price
everything up to the nearest penny. Just imagine you are off to Australia with nothing but
the shirt on your back and a knapsack. Before you can leave you have to sell everything
and pay off all your debts.
Finished? Excellent. Now, you have just created a Balance Sheet of Yourself Ltd.
Balance Sheet is one of those accounting terms you have probably heard at some time.
It is a snapshot of what a company is worth at a given time. Well now you have a snapshot
of your own life, you know exactly where you are right now and how much you are worth.
Please do not be alarmed if the figure is a negative (i.e. you owe more than you own) as this is
quite common these days. We know you are broke whether the figure is -50,000 or
+50,000!
The next step is to work out the capital amount you need to buy your certificate of
freedom from the master. We will look at this next

129
 Lesson Five: Your Freedom Figure
Now you need to work out your Freedom Figure. This is the amount you need in the
bank before you can give up work and be a free man or woman. This is the amount that
buys your certificate of freedom from the master.
If you have a computer: Using the Freedom Figure spreadsheet on your Wealth Planner
CD then enter your essential monthly outgoings in the column and fill in a couple of other
figures and out pops your Freedom Figure automatically. The beauty of this (as well as its
simplicity) is that you can play around with your monthly outgoings and your freedom
figure will change accordingly.
If you do not have the CD: what you need to do is a 3-step process starting with another
small calculation. Step one is to work out your total monthly outgoings and multiply that
by 12 (obviously to give you a yearly figure).
Here is an example:

ITEM (monthly, remember) AMOUNT

Mortgage 1,632.43
Car expenses 254.00
Gas 45.00
Elec 32.00
Phone 63.00
Council Tax 165.00
Water 49.00
Food 400.00
Misc 120.00
Spending money 360.00
Caravan site fees 67.00
Caravan insurance etc 34.00
Life Insurances 100.00
Cat 25.00
Course Fees 100.00
Loan repay 100.00
TOTAL 3,546.43

In the example above the total monthly outgoings were 3,546.43 per month.
To find our yearly outgoings we simply multiply this by 12 = 42,557.16
130
Step Two is to work out the multiplier and this depends on the current interest rate (i.e.
what you can sensibly get on your money in long-term savings).
The Multiplier = 100/current interest rate.
Example: If currently you can get 5% on your money then the multiplier is 100/5 = 20.
One more example should give you the idea: Currently let us say you can get 6.3% on your
money. Your multiplier would be 100/6.3 = 15.9.
Step 3 is the final step to find out your Freedom Figure by multiplying your yearly
outgoings (as calculated in step 1) by your multiplier (as worked out in step 2).
Example: Yearly outgoings are 42,557.00, the multiplier is 20 (interest rates are about
5%) so your Freedom Figure is 20 x 42,557.00 = 851,114.00
That is the amount in the bank you would need to get 42,557.00 per year interest at 5%.
Nothing complex about that, is there?
Example: Your outgoings are 31,000.00 and you can currently get 7% interest. So your
multiplier is 100/7 = 14.3 and your Freedom Figure is 31,000.00 x 14.3 = 443,300.00.
All we have said there is that if you had 443,300.00 in savings at 7%, you would get
31,000.00 a year interest and that is exactly what you need to live on. This would set you
free. (To keep the calculations simple we have not allowed for taxation.)
We sincerely hope you do this exercise and that you find your own Freedom Figure very
illuminating. This is the start of your plan something to aim for.
And please do not think you can rely on a pension to support you when you eventually
give up work not unless you have a serious amount of money invested. (That is one
million pounds or more.)
As an approximate rule of thumb you will probably find you need between 500,000 and
one million pounds in the bank in order to buy your certificate of freedom.
Remember, this certificate means you need never work again as long as you live. It does
not mean you are wealthy! You are merely free.
For simplicity we have not included taxation here. The effect of tax is to increase the
amount of your freedom figure.
A good approximation at the time of writing is that one million is about what you will
need to live comfortably without ever working again.

131
 Lesson Six: Getting Out of Debt
Now that you have calculated your net worth and your Freedom Figure, it is time to learn
that your first real step on the road to wealth is to become debt-free.
And we mean completely including mortgage. We are all agreed that one of the main
secrets of becoming wealthy is first to become debt-free.
Each of us could write a book on how long it took us to learn this simply stated fact. When
we were broke, wealthy people we knew kept telling us this 'secret' but we refused to
listen.
We are talking here about consumer debt of course, not high-finance required to build a
corporation or money borrowed at low interest which is leveraged to bring in way more
money than the interest payments on the loan.
Consumer debt is money borrowed to buy stuff which you imagine you need. Usually it
is ego toys to earn you status. You are not alone. A quick calculation reveals that between
us we have spent 11.5 million on status toys, so we are not taking the moral high ground!
But we all agree we only started to make serious money when we first got out of debt.
This is not a moral question, it is one of time and money. If you are in debt then quite a
large proportion of your talents and efforts are spent in debt service; that is, earning
enough to pay the interest. Many ordinary people we meet are paying out over fifty
percent of everything they make in debt payments. Why do you think banks and other
money lenders are so wealthy?
Now imagine the freedom and energy released if you worked half as hard as you do at the
moment; i.e. if you had no debts to service. That would free up a massive amount of time
for you - time which you could use to become wealthy.

Excuses For Being in Debt

Most people think their debts are special and unavoidable. They are wrong.
Most people think that they, particularly, are unable to pay off all their debts. They are
wrong.
Most people think it is normal or even good sense to be up to their ears in debt. They are
wrong (and stupid!).
The first step on the practical road to Beyond Wealth is to rid yourself of all consumer
debts. And that means all. Then, you never, ever borrow any money again to spend on
silly consumer trash and lifestyle.
Unconvinced? Check out these astonishing figures.

An Example
Five thousand pounds is not a lot of money, you will doubtless agree. Certainly you would
be pleased to receive a cheque for this amount, but your euphoria would be short-lived. In
the past, you have almost certainly spent 5000 in one or two hits. A second hand car, or a
new washing machine plus a 3-piece suite would cost about this. And you have probably
borrowed the money to do this, even if it was on the card. So ask yourself the following
question:

132
What would be the difference, (ignoring inflation), to your net wealth after ten and
twenty years, between saving five thousand pounds, or borrowing five thousand pounds to
spend on some junk you really 'need'?
Without working it out, have a quick guess. You can check this for yourself on the
WealthPlanner CD. Use the spreadsheet BorrowSave.xls. If you do not have the CD it is
just a simple interest calculation.
Well, if you borrowed 5,000 at 9% APR, and didn't repay it, after ten years you would
owe about 11,836.00. After twenty years you would owe 28,022.00! Scary but true.
If you saved it at a mere 6%, and never drew out the interest, after ten years you would
have 8,954.00. After twenty years you would have 16,035.00!
The difference between these two figures represents the net change in your wealth. If you
borrow 5000 and spend it, then after ten years you are 20,790.00 worse off than if you
had saved 5000. After twenty years you are a whopping 44,057.00 worse off than if you
had saved instead of spent it!
Stated another way, if you saved it instead of borrowing it, you would be 44,057.00
better off after 20 years! Can you believe those figures? That five grands worth of junk is
starting to look pretty expensive now, right?
Okay, that is a bit artificial because in practice, inflation erodes your savings, and you
normally pay off a loan at a certain rate. But the principle remains the same. The
difference between saving money and spending money has a vast effect on the 'bottom line'
after only a few short years. We could openly weep at the amount of junk we have bought
over the last thirty years. This junk cost us hundreds of thousands of pounds each, and it is
all on the scrap-heap. This is stuff we 'really needed at the time you know, the latest Hi-
Fi, a new flat screen TV, a new car, an expensive holiday etc. etc.
We are not saying you have to be like Scrooge and save every last penny. You should
enjoy life whilst you can, and have fun. If a new car represents 1% of your disposable
income, go for it! If it represents 100%, then forget it! We can tell you it is a really terrific
feeling to wake up every morning knowing you do not owe a cent to anyone. It is truly
liberating. Much more fun than owning all that junk. Anyway, when you are debt-free,
you do not have to spend all that money servicing that horrible burden of debt. This makes
you much richer and you can buy far more stuff than ever you could before if that is the
extent of your vision.

Not an Easy Road

To become financially free and then wealthy is not a trivial matter. This is why only a
small percentage of people achieve it. Neither is it impossible or even ridiculously
difficult thats why millions have done it. We would call it moderately difficult.
Attaining your financial freedom will probably take a few years depending on how much
money you want. Some have done it in less, but very few. It takes this long to learn how to
do it.
This means that you must love whatever it is you are going to be doing to make this
money. This cannot be a several year prison sentence. It just won't work.

133
You cannot mortgage your present for some future benefit years down the line. You
cannot do something you hate whilst persuading yourself that it will be worth it in a
several years from now when you have the money.
To make a few million you need absolute dedication to the task at hand. This means love
for your work and belief in what you are doing. It means having a big enough why. If
you can achieve this you will have an engaged and happy working life and make a lot of
money.
But it all starts with becoming debt-free. To do that, you are going to need to generate
some anger about the pathetic situation you have allowed yourself to get into.

What is Debt Free?

Here is what we mean by getting out of debt. And remember this is about consumer
debt, so for the moment forget your mortgage (although that will need paying off too as
soon as possible) and ignore any loans you have for investment purposes.
The rest of your debt (bank loans, credit cards, loans from family and friends) is consumer
debt and your aim should be to get entirely consumer debt-free. Being consumer debt-free
is a vital step in the direction of gaining real wealth and personal freedom.
When you are in debt, a certain proportion of your income (= your time = your freedom =
your life) goes into servicing that debt because you always have to pay interest on any
loan.
When you start to look at big debts (like mortgages), then a great deal of your money (=
time = effort) goes into servicing this debt. Eventually you should aim to get rid of your
mortgage too but only because servicing this debt makes you un-free. You have to work
to make the money to pay this mortgage.
You cannot be free when you are in debt because you have to work for a certain length of
time each week to pay off the interest on the loans. In contrast, when you have money in
the bank, every 1000 you have buys you roughly ten hours of precious life per year
(assuming you get 100 interest per year, and you pay yourself 10 an hour). 10,000 in
the bank buys you 100 hours per year (about two and a half working weeks) of freedom.
100,000 buys you a massive twenty-five working weeks a year of freedom.
This is the way to look at it.
The fact that you bought this book almost guarantees that you are in debt. If you have
been in debt for quite a while you may be getting pretty fed-up with it. Maybe you feel
depressed and even trapped?
Sometimes you don't know which way to turn to make ends meet to pay the next bill. It
seems that just when you see light at the end of the tunnel, along comes another
unexpected bill or expense to knock you back down to the start. It's a bit like snakes and
ladders after a visit from a ladder thief!
You also probably do not know exactly how much you owe (although you probably think
you know).
You almost certainly do not know how fast you are slipping into debt or how much you
need to live on each month, and by how much your income falls short of this amount.

134
Very few people have the discipline to sit down for an hour and write out their outgoings
(gas, electricity, mortgage, food, car, insurance, etc.) and compare it with their income
Do not despair! You are no different from the seven million other people in this country
who are seriously in debt.
Can you pay off your debts right now? No. Are you slipping further and further into debt
with each month that passes? Probably yes.
Are you scared to look at the figures? Some people shove bills and final demands into
dark cupboards hoping that the invoice fairies will take them away in the dead of night!
They dread the arrival of the postman in the morning, because he might bring another bill
or final demand.
Some people become so depressed by their debts that they go out and buy something
expensive to cheer them up. On credit!
When their credit cards reach their spending limit they accept a higher limit and spend
that. Then, when they have spent up to that limit, they take out a bank loan to pay off their
card.
Does that sound sensible?
It might, except that they add another few thousand onto the loan in addition to the amount
they need to pay off their other loans. They use this extra money to buy a few things they
'need'; you know, really essential stuff like a new Hi-fi and a leather sofa and a holiday.
Stuff you cannot live without...
Does that sound pretty dumb so far? You haven't heard anything yet!

It Gets Worse
They then used the credit card (you know, the one they paid off with the loan) over the
next year, until they are once again at the limit of their spending. So now they owe the
card company exactly what they owed them a year before, plus a 5000 loan at some
horrible rate of interest.
Does this sound a bit like anyone you know?
Meanwhile, a 'friend' advises them that they are crazy to pay the kind of interest charged
by the credit cards and that the cheapest source of finance is another bank loan. So off
they trot to the bank manager with some invented story about needing money for a new
kitchen extension, or some such yarn. The bank lends them the money as they are good
customers with an excellent credit profile. After all, they had several credit cards and
made regular large lump sum payments to clear the debts on them...
The money is duly transferred to their current account. Now... what to spend it on? Well,
they were not completely stupid (!) so they pay two main credit cards 2000 each; that
does not leave enough to pay off the first bank loan, so they may as well spend it on some
more goodies.
So, over the next six months they spend the lot on various 'essential' bits and pieces. They
justify this to themselves (as one does) with memes like this:
For God's sake man, you're going to be dead a long time. Enjoy life, now, whilst you
have the chance.
Or a slight variation on the theme:
135
If you can't even treat yourself to a (fill in some non-essential consumer trash) then
whats the point of working?
Or: You work hard. It's about time you treated yourself to something which will give you
pleasure. After all, what's it all about? You can't take it with you.
Does this sound a little bit like you?
Here is how one person described it:
I became so thoroughly sick and tired of being in debt that I decided one morning to
become completely and utterly debt-free. Does this sound crazy? To just wake up one
morning and decide that you've had enough that you've reached the end of the line, that
you can only be pushed so far?
Are you angry for allowing yourself to become so bogged-down, so tied up in money
worries that you can't move. You need to become really angry. Angry that you have not
really enjoyed life (despite buying lots of expensive toys) for years. And angry that you
have been so conned by the 'system' that you believe that this is normal, even okay.
All of this is being mentioned just in case it sounds even a teensy-weensy bit like...YOU.
If so, you need to blast your way completely out of debt (it is not easy) until you became
entirely free from debt and do not owe a penny to anyone.
Then you must vow to never owe anyone money, ever again (apart from investment debt).
Here is the top secret (!) method...
STOP SPENDING!
EARN MORE!
You will need three weapons in your arsenal to achieve this. And you will need only these
weapons to get out of debt (and into wealth). They are:
1. KNOWLEDGE
2. ANGER
3. GRIM DETERMINATION
The first weapon 'knowledge' you are getting in this book. All you have to do is to read
and follow the advice and act upon it.
The other two essential weapons, anger and grim determination, are non-transferable
directly from us to you, although we hope that we can stimulate them a little.

Getting Angry
If you want to be free from your debts, and get wealthy, you have to get angry.
You have to be thoroughly fed-up with waking up every morning with that depressed,
sinking feeling. You must be sick of dreading the arrival of the morning post. You must be
hopping mad that you never have enough money, even for the essentials of life, let alone
the luxuries. And whilst we are working ourselves up into a lather, here are some more
things to be angry about:
Being stuck in a boring, lousy job which you hate because you need the money to pay
your debts, and you are too scared to change in case anything goes wrong and you end
up in more debt.
Shuffling bills around until you find one small enough that you can actually pay!
136
 Hiding bills in dark cupboards and hoping they will go away.
Having to live on charity and state handouts.
Borrowing money from friends.
Feeling completely out of control of your own finances. Basically, not even knowing
how much you owe.
Knowing you are sinking, but not knowing how fast.
Being jealous and resentful of other people who seem to be surviving without all this
stress.
Trying to get a job (or better job) and failing.
And most of all, feeling angry at yourself for allowing yourself to get into this mess
because that's what it is, a total, self-imposed mess.
Feeling a bit angry yet?
Hopefully yes. You will need lots of anger to get yourself out of debt and into wealth. You
have to start thinking something like: Right. This is it. I've just about had enough of this
stupid, pathetic way of going on. Things are going to change starting right now!
If you do not feel angry enough, then you probably will not succeed in becoming debt-
free, or wealthy for that matter.
Why is this?
Because if you are not angry then it isn't hurting enough yet. You have got a few debts,
yes. Sure, you would like a bit more money, but you have a mild, wishy-washy approach
to this situation, and you do not really care that much if the situation changes. Perhaps you
have a vague, wistful, half-hearted desire to see your debts paid off, but they are not really
hurting you. Perhaps you think it would be 'nice' to be debt free, or 'nice' to have more
money, but you cannot really be bothered to take the decisions required to bring this goal
to fruition.
This is a truly hopeless stance. It has got to hurt before you get angry.

Alcoholism
There is a close parallel to alcoholism here.
No amount of counselling, knowledge or advice will convince the alcoholic to give up
drinking until he or she reaches their own, private 'rock-bottom', and they think to
themselves: Thus far, and no further. At this point, some of them truly start their fight
with grim determination.
It is exactly the same with debt. You cannot blast your way out of debt with a wishy-
washy, half-hearted attitude. It is a bit like trying to knock down a double brick wall by
limply throwing the odd wet sponge at it now and then. At best you will succeed in paying
a few old bills in a fit of enthusiasm (like giving up drink for a day or a week) before
lapsing back into your old spending habits once the enthusiasm has worn off. After all, it
is no fun paying bills in fact it sucks.
You have to be so totally disgusted with the way you have been carrying on, that you
become determined to fix this problem now, once and for all.

137
What are the penalties if the alcoholic never finds what it takes to beat their problem?
Simple. They spiral downwards, relentlessly, until they die usually early. And they do
die, in their tens of thousands. Why? Because, ultimately: There is no 'safety net' in life
It is down to the alcoholic to want to change, and many of them do not want to change.
It is a well recognised fact that many alcoholics are actually attempting to commit suicide
the slow way, and you cannot really stop someone from committing suicide if they are
determined.
Depressing, yes, but this is important stuff and relates exactly to your own debt problem,
or lack of wealth. It is a vital part of your wealth training.
Now then, what is the penalty for not sorting out a debt problem?
Well, eventually, you spiral down and down until you hit rock-bottom. A bare existence,
living on minimum state benefit, unable to feed and clothe yourself and your children; no
self-respect; without power, miserable, unhappy and trapped. Some people reading this
might actually be close to this position right now. Others will be closing in on it, and yet
others will be spiralling slowly downwards.

Self Respect
It is all about self-respect really.
People only get angry with themselves when they look at their own lives and find that the
way they are living does not meet their own standards of self-respect and decency. If you
are happy, or even neutral about living in a two-room, high-rise flat with five children and
never having any money, then you do not have a problem. But if this conflicts with your
own standards (not somebody else's), then you should start to feel angry about it.
It is true to say that the alcoholic follows the same path. He or she will drink quite happily,
if a little guiltily, over many years until things start to happen which conflict with their
own self respect.
For example, they might be unable to remember what happened the previous night, or be
too drunk during the day to cope with their normal life. Then, when they sober-up, they
start to worry about this temporary dip below their normal standards. If this happens often
enough, then hopefully they will start to fight.
You too must stand up and fight. But mere words on paper cannot pull you to your feet
and get you punching if you are not ready to climb into the ring. If you cannot fight at this
stage of your life, then remember what you have read in these pages. There may come a
time in a few months or years when things do get bad enough, and you want 'out'.

The Debt Declaration

Your fight starts with completing the task below, but only if you truly believe it. If you
cannot honestly sign the declaration, then you are not yet ready to be debt-free (unless, of
course, you are already debt-free). Signing this declaration is an acknowledgement to
yourself that you 'have a problem', but also that you are ready to do something about it.
Photocopy it and sign the copy.

138
 DECLARATION

Yes, I am angry. I am totally fed-up with this stupid, pathetic mess I have
got myself into. I am furious that I could allow myself to get into this state.
Well, I have had enough. My sworn mission is to clear all of my debts as
soon as possible, and then live debt-free for the rest of my life.

SIGNED.....................................................................

Do not sign this declaration unless you truly believe it.

The Great Credit Card Scam

That is just step one. Words are cheap. Are you a man or woman of action or are you all
talk?
Here is your first action task:

Destroy Your Credit Cards......NOW!

Oh how simple this task is to write down but how hard it is to put into practice. You
could complete this task in the next minute, and then sail through the rest of this chapter
but we bet you wont. If this section applies to you, it will take all our powers of
persuasion to get you through this step.
If you do not have any credit cards (Visa, Electron, Amex, Mastercard, store cards, etc.)
then you can move right past this section because you have passed this level.
However, if this does not apply to you then reread the instruction in bold typeface above.
What does it say? It says:
Destroy your credit cards....NOW!
There can be no 'ifs' or 'buts' to this step; it is quite simple. All you do is go to your wallet
or purse right now, and remove your credit cards all of them. Then you take a pair of
scissors and you cut them in half, one by one.
There are no excuses for not doing this right now. This will not stop you making excuses
about why you think this instruction doesn't apply to you, but nevertheless it does apply to
you, and you cannot pass beyond this stage until you have carried out this instruction.
Why is it so essential to take this drastic step?

Reason #1
The first reason is that credit cards let you spend money you do not have. Money you have
not earned. Money which is not yours. Money you do not deserve.
Is that clear?
Here it is again in case you missed the point...
You do not have the money indicated by your 'spending limit' (e.g. 3000); it belongs to
someone else. It belongs to the banks customers. It has been deposited there by someone

139
else. It is someone else's money, not yours. You did not earn it or pay the price to get it.
Only this allows you the right to spend money.
You have no right to spend money owned by someone else. You can invest money owned
by someone else of course. In this instance they have temporarily given you stewardship
of it. You will make it grow for them and for you before returning the sum in full plus
interest.
Consumer spending is different. Remember the greedy child who cannot keep his hands
out of the sweetie jar? This is what you are doing when you spend someone elses money
on consumables.
The banks let you spend this money so that they can charge you a truly extortionate rate of
interest on the loan. They do this so that they can make lots and lots of money out of your
childish greed.
Yes, childish greed. Like a child who cannot stop eating sweets, you are not satisfied with
having spent all of your own money. Your eyes are big and wide. You are gazing hungrily
at other peoples money and thinking how you can have that, too. This is not said to be
rude or offensive. It is said because the only way out of debt is if you get angry enough to
make it happen.
The hard truth is that you will pay any price for your greed. You will pay extortionate
interest rates, you will mortgage yourself for years just as long as you can satisfy your
greed right now.
Is this not the truth?
Credit card companies really hate people who pay off their bill, in full, every month. They
get truly annoyed with this because they only make lots of money from the people who do
not pay off their bills each month. These are the people who get stung for massive interest
payments.
Make no mistake about this. The credit card companies (= the banks), make hundreds of
millions of pounds from consumer debt each year by borrowing money from one group of
disciplined people (e.g. those with deposit accounts, or other savings for example), and
then lending it out to another group of greedy children at a vastly higher rate of interest.
They also charge the stores a stinging 2% or so on every transaction you make using your
card. The suckers then rush out and spend the money on a heap of consumer trash which
they consider absolutely essential - electrical goods, holidays, new furniture, designer
clothes and silly baubles and trinkets to amuse their childish minds with.
Then they spend the next several years struggling to pay back the credit card company.

Reason #2
Spending money on credit cards does not seem like spending 'real' money.
This encourages you to go out and buy things you would not normally buy if you had to
hand over a large bundle of 50 notes for the same item. You know this is true, don't you?
If you own a credit card, you know that it is the easiest thing in the world to be tempted by
some major purchase, and go for it on the spur of the moment whipping out your plastic
with an impressive flourish. It is called 'instant gratification of desires' by the marketing

140
people who know exactly what they are doing. Unfortunately, the gratification soon wears
off, but the debt lingers on...
The Thralls want the approval of other Thralls. They even want the approval of total
strangers like waiters and store assistants. They want to buy a lot of expensive things and
then produce their credit card with a flourish. The card becomes a symbol of their
purchasing power, their strength, and (for men) their virility.
It is truly pitiful really, isn't it?

Reason #3
It costs you much, much more to buy with plastic, unless, of course, you pay off your card
in full each month. If you do this, congratulations, but you are still highly susceptible to
expensive impulse purchases.
Why does it cost you more? Because you are not spending your own money you are
spending someone else's. They charge you for this privilege about 1.5% a month (= 18%
a year!). Obviously interest rates vary, but the cards charge you roughly double the
amount you would pay if you borrowed money on a bank loan and that is expensive
enough.
No wonder they love people who buy with plastic and then only make the minimum
(broke persons) payment.
As mentioned earlier, the credit card companies actually charge the shop too so they get
their cut at both ends. The shop pays about 2% of the purchase price of the item. So on a
400 item, the credit card company get about 8 from the shop. This forces up prices, of
course. We all pay more.

Reason #4
If you were given the money you would spend it. This is just human nature. If you had a
windfall of 10,000, within a very short time indeed you would have dreamed-up how to
spend every last penny of this money on stuff you 'need'.
Same with 50,000.00? Almost certainly. And probably the same with 500,000.00.
After six months, that 10k or 50k would all be gone. Well the same thing is happening
with your credit cards. Your 'credit limit' is money which has been earmarked by the bank
for you to spend. They want you to spend it, because they are little more than outwardly
respectable loan-sharks.
Who amongst us can resist the temptation to spend money which has been placed at our
disposal like this? Suddenly you realise that you 'need' all sorts of things, and so you start
buying.
You could easily write down a list of things you need right now. The kitchen is looking a
bit tired. The car needs updating. The furniture and carpets could do with an overhaul.
Your wardrobe is looking dowdy and so yesterday Then there is a well deserved
holiday, some new curtains, a new television and stereo, a better computer
Pretty soon you are up to your credit limit, so what do the credit card companies do?
Write and point out that you have probably spent enough money now and that you should
be concentrating on paying off your huge loan?
141
No! They write and ask you if you would like to borrow more money. They recognise a
greedy and ill disciplined child when they see one and rub their hands with glee.

Excuses For Not Cutting up Your Credit Cards Now!

Everyone thinks they are a 'special case'. You, uniquely, out of the entire population of the
country you need your credit cards and could not possibly destroy them. Sure, you see
the sense of this chapter but it does not apply to you.
Here are the most common excuses, for your amusement:
Surely if I pay my card off every month, in full, then I am effectively getting 'free
credit' for a month. I'd be crazy not to make use of this free credit.
This is correct. But hardly anyone genuinely, unfailingly pays off their cards each month.
The people who do are ultra-cautious, highly stable, sober and serious citizens without a
single debt to their names a rare breed.
The vast majority of ordinary mortals do not have the discipline to do this. And anyway,
you are still left with the temptation of buying something on impulse just because you
have your card with you. Needless to say, the people who pay off their cards each month,
never act on impulse!
My credit card helps me to spread the cost of major purchases over several months.
Surely this makes sense, even if I am paying some interest?
That sounds a bit like a credit card advert, doesn't it?
The thinking behind this logic is totally wrong but typical Thrall-think!
If you possess the money to pay for this 'essential' purchase outright, then you should be
doing just that buying it outright. Why pay interest?
If you do not possess the money for this major purchase, then you should not buy it. This
applies to everyone, but particularly to those people who are in debt already. You are just
being an impatient kid who wants what they cannot afford or wants goodies they have not
earned. They cannot wait. They stamp their feet impatiently. They want it NOW!
And still you are left with the temptation to use that card for nonessential, impulse
purchases. (We live in the age of the 500 impulse purchase.)
My credit cards are a lifeline. Some weeks when money has run out, they are the
only source of funds at my disposal.
This is a really dangerous game, and absolutely typical of the 'loan mentality'.
Effectively, you are saying that every month, you are forced to borrow money from a
loan-shark, at extortionate rates of interest, to meet normal household bills, because your
usual source of money (salary, etc.) has been spent. This means that you are on a steep
slope towards heavy debt. You, of all people, need to destroy those cards right now. Then
you would be forced to sort out your finances. Please do not say that: Its all right for you
to talk, I cannot sort out my finances. Listen. Every person on the planet has to sort out
their finances.
It is a basic adult skill to learn not to spend more than you earn. It goes along with
learning to drive, having decent table manners and being able to talk to strangers.

142
Admission of failure in this department makes you child-like. Get to it right away and stop
complaining!
I take your point, but I really need credit-cards for flexibility such as buying petrol,
and entertaining clients.
Wrong! The only time where not having a credit card can be a nuisance is when you are
trying to hire a car or maybe buy an airline ticket. If you regularly hire cars, then make an
arrangement with your local hire company to open an account. Not being instantly able to
hire cars is a small price to pay for being credit-card free. And of course it is possible to
hire a car and buy a plane ticket without a credit card, it is just a little harder (you may
have to take your passport and leave a cash deposit for the car and buy the ticket in
advance using a cheque of bank transfer.)
Buy everything else with cash for preference, followed by cheque as the next best. If you
buy lots of petrol as part of company business, then get them to issue you with a company
credit card just for petrol. This is okay because they have to pay it off, not you; and you
cannot buy anything other than legitimate company purchases on it without getting fired.
Also a side bonus is you cannot be tracked, monitored and spied upon when you pay cash.
You have nothing to hide of course, but each time you use your credit card, your purchase
is logged. Few realise that the government can now build a profile on every citizen created
solely from their travel movements, spending habits, etc.
Credit cards are the single biggest source of temptation for you to overspend and of
course, overspending is the only reason why anyone is in debt. They have spent more than
they have earned.
You must destroy those cards right now if you want to become debt-free. It is an
amazingly liberating experience to cut all your cards up. Go on, try it! You will feel great.

Cut Up Your Store Discount Cards Too!

You may wonder why we suggest getting rid of discount cards? These are the cards which
allow you to save (say) 10% on everything you buy in a particular store. They sometimes
charge an annual fee of about 25. They are not credit cards, and obviously you will
expect to save at least 25 in a year, otherwise you would not sign up for one.
These cards are dangerous (although not in the same league as normal credit cards)
because they encourage impulse purchases. When shopping at that store, it is very easy to
buy something you did not intend to buy, just because you are getting 10% off. It is such a
bargain! Not surprisingly, this is exactly why the stores issue such cards.
Owning one of these cards is almost a guarantee that you will either:
a) Forget all about it, and so have handed them 25 for a piece of useless plastic.
b) Spend far, far more than you would have in that store, just because you are getting
10% off!
There is only one excuse for having a card like this, and that is if you are 'in the trade'. For
example, if you are a plumber or a builder who goes to a builders merchant almost every
day, then it makes great sense to have a card. If this is not you forget it!
So now, we come to the crunch. This step is really quite simple. Just go and get those
cards, right now, and snip them in half. You will destroy a major 'money sink' in your life,
143
you will also destroy a bit of your ego, no doubt. Note, you should not destroy your ATM
cards, debit cards or 'cheque guarantee cards'!

Have You Got What it Takes?

Maybe you have fooled yourself by thinking that you do not have to destroy your credit
cards oh no, that is a bit drastic. After all, it might be handy to have them one day.
What you will do is just cut back a bit and that will do the trick.
Forget it! You are self-deluded and delusion is the key component of debt misery.
You fool yourself that you really need all the goods and services you buy which gets you
into debt in the first place.
You trick yourself into believing that you can afford it by not sitting down and seriously
looking at your income and outgoings but instead doing a quick and dirty calculation in
your head. In this way, the same money gets spent two or three times. Result? Disaster.
You delude yourself that you will cut back on your spending like overweight people
delude themselves they will go on a diet, or alcoholics delude themselves that they will
drink less.
You really cannot progress past this point if you are in debt but still have a wallet-full of
credit cards. All you can do is read and pretend.
What do we mean by that?
You become one of those people who buy self-help books and courses because it makes
you feel that you are doing something when all you are doing is reading and perhaps
talking about getting debt-free and wealthy. It is a kind of armchair hobby for you and you
have not the slightest intention of actually doing anything to improve your financial status.

Its All About Action

The purpose of any self-help book (like this one) is to propel you into taking firm, decisive
ACTION, not to sit around reading it for light relief.
People do not like this very in your face approach to debt. They are used to being tip-
toed around.
What they want is messages like Youre in debt but its not your fault. Or even worse
they want mysto-quickfix answers such as:
Attract Wealth to You Like a Magnet!
Tap in to the Awesome Wealth-Creation Power of the Universe!
Live an Effort-Free Life!
The Zero Effort Money Flow System!
The Lazy Mans Way to Riches!
Why do you think this stuff sells so well?
It is what people want to hear. The safe and simple messages which lull them more
deeply asleep and lock them tighter into Wonderland. The publishers are delighted to
oblige of course it is a hugely profitable industry.

144
This book cannot drag you from your ringside seat and get you out there punching if all
the fight has gone out of you. If you are a limp, deflated and defeated shell of your former
self, all you can do is throw in the towel and maybe let someone else take care of you. It is
comforting at least.
But if you have a spark left in you a little fight in the old dog yet then you need to get
out there and punching.
Is it easy? Of course not! Easy is what the Thralls want.
Is it quick? No. You took years of mismanagement and carelessness to get yourself into
the sorry state you are in now. It is going to take time to get out.
Is it fun? Not really. Who likes paying down debt?
It is about self-respect. Either you want it badly or your self-respect vanished years ago
and you have no intention of hunting it down.
Please know that where you are right now is your choice. You got yourself there, you can
get yourself out. But only if you want to. Yes you have been a Thrall, controlled by your
programming, but you do not have to remain one.
So that is the message on debt. There are two components to becoming financially free.
Getting out of debt (because debt equals slavery) and then making a lot of money. The
correct order is:
1. Get out of debt.
2. Make a lot of money.
Many delude themselves that to get out of debt they must first make a lot of money. Or
putting this another way, they say something like: When I make a lot of money, then Ill
be able to pay off my debts and live on easy street.
Although this is true for some, it is not true for most, and maybe you find that surprising.
Here is why...
Getting out of debt is a discipline. It takes quite a lot of energy, discipline and focus
qualities which are almost totally absent in the Thralls (which is why they are in debt in
the first place of course!). It is a tough call, this getting out of debt business. You have to
face yourself square-on. You have to sit down with the figures. You have to come up with
a plan and stick by it through thick and thin. You need will-power. All of which is superb
training for youve guessed it starting an ultra profitable business which will make you
millions.
Hopefully you can see the truth of this.
But if someone is in debt and they believe their escape route is to make a lot of money,
this will rarely work out for them because the same ill-discipline which got them into debt
in the first place is carried over to their money-making efforts with disastrous results.
So they may attempt to start a business, but they will lack the discipline to get out of bed
in the morning and do what needs doing. They will lack the focus to keep an eye on the
figures and make sure they are profitable. They will lack the self control to not dip into the
meagre profits to buy a flashy car or expansive toy.
Most times they will not even get that far. They will dream and chatter and chatter and
dream about this or that scheme they are going to run which will be the big one.
145
That is why business opportunities sell so well. Most of the buyers are (let us be honest)
lazy dreamers drifting from one scheme or idea to another but utterly lacking the
discipline to make anything happen.
So being in debt is actually good in one respect. If you can learn and hone the skills
required to get out of debt, this will make you a lean and mean fighting machine when it
comes to running you own business.
And running a business is what is going to give you your best shot at a fortune.

146
 Lesson Seven: Start Saving
Regular saving and investments are excellent ways to gradually build a secure future.
Maybe even more importantly they are a sign of discipline and belief in yourself.
You can even become fairly wealthy doing this, if you start young enough. But the best
and fastest way to get rich is to invest in yourself that is, your own business. This should
be done alongside your regular savings and investment program.
Let us look at a few figures (we will assume throughout that inflation is 3% over the
period it is the comparison of the figures which is important).
Supposing you save 200 a month at say 7.5% annual interest. After 10, 20 and 30 years,
this will be worth 30k, 78k and 155k in real terms. In other words, modest inflation
has been taken into consideration.
Now if you invest the same amount in the stock market, you can expect to get about 10%
year in, year out on your money (amazingly this even includes crashes unless they are
serious. It certainly includes sharp downward corrections). This does not seem
spectacular, but few amateurs can do better than this, and most professionals would be
pleased to achieve this year on year. Now here is the important point. Those few extra
percent make a big difference to your future wealth. Here are the figures for 10% growth
over 10, 20 and 30 years with inflation factored in already:
10 yrs 35k
20 yrs 105k
30 yrs 242k
That is a significant difference. If you do a little better than average on your investments
and make 12.5% year on year, then the figures increase dramatically again:
10 yrs 40k
20 yrs 142k
30 yrs 393k
Here is the key take home on this: by investing a mere 200 a month, year on year in the
stock market, you can retire after 30 years with something between 242,000 and
393,000 in today's money unless you get really unlucky and a mega crash happens the
very moment you want to sell your shares. The actual figure you retire with is much larger
than this, but as mentioned, we have accounted for modest inflation so that you can see
what the money will really be worth.
Savings rates go up and down of course as does inflation. At the time of writing they are
both very low, but this does not matter. It is the habit of saving which is so vitally
important. It sends a signal to your subconscious that you are investing in yourself and
your future. Spending everything now sends a signal that you do not care about the future
and you are just living for today.

Comparison With Running Your Own Business

Now here are the really exciting figures. When you run your own business, as an absolute
minimum you would expect to make 20% return on capital, year on year. It is not really
worth being in business if you cannot achieve this.
147
So let us take a look at how the figures stack up if you run a business:
10 yrs 62k
20 yrs 365k
30 yrs 1.8million
By the way, that is for investing just 200 a month in a business which is a pitifully small
amount. Most businesses do not work like that. You invest a lump sum (say 20,000) and
then get that capital working for you. If you were to invest 20k and make a smallish 20%
return on your investment, year on year, you would make:
10 yrs 123k,
20 yrs 766k,
30 yrs 4.7 million!
And 20% would be not an exciting return. Obviously we have not taken taxation into
account.
So perhaps the most interesting comparison is between putting 200 a month into a
savings account, and 200 a month in your own business. After 30 years, the savings
account yields 153k and a successful business yields 1.8 million!
We cannot imagine which it would be best to do...
Of course, 1.8 million after thirty years is not exciting (it is only 60k a year). But the
above was not a real business. It was a pocket change business for illustration purposes
only. The Author made three million in 2-3 years from just one of his businesses. Others
have similar experiences.

Risk/Reward
There is obviously a risk/reward factor here. You are fairly safe with the savings account,
somewhat less safe with the stock market and banks (as 2008 showed us!) and you have
the potential to lose the lot if your business fails. So, in reality, you should do all of these
things: save regularly in a high interest account; save regularly in a stock-market vehicle,
and invest some 'risk money' in your own business venture.
This latter project is what will bring the big rewards if you are successful and is essential
if you want to make a million or more.
Obviously it is up to you to decide how much you can afford for each.
Here are those figures for comparison based on 3% inflation and investing 200 a month:
10 yrs 20 yrs 30 yrs
Savings Acct (7.5%) 30k 78k 153k
Stockmarket (10%) 35k 105k 242k
Lucky stocks (12.5%) 40K 142k 393k
Yourself LTD (20%) 62k 365k 1.8million

Saving For a Better Tomorrow

The task for this chapter involves getting you into the savings habit with the added side-
effect of getting you out of your lobotomised Thrall spending habits. Yes it may not be
148
easy to get a high return on your savings at the time you are reading this, but that is not the
point of the exercise.
If you already have one or more savings accounts, into which you deposit money regularly
(no matter how small the amounts), then you can consider yourself to have completed this
task already. Well done!
However, if this isnt you.....
This task involves going out today, now (or at the first available opportunity) and opening
a savings account. It does not matter how much money you put in it but make it 100
minimum. It doesnt matter if you think you havent got 100 to spare. It doesnt matter
how you do it, just go and open that account, today if possible.
There are lots of accounts to choose from. Do a bit of research first. The object is to save
money and allow interest to accumulate, not to use a savings account as an extremely
temporary deposit for money until you think up something to spend it on!

RealvPretendSavingsAccounts
Why is it important to have a real savings account, rather than a pretend one?
Because the Thralls use 'pretend savings accounts as follows:
1. They are spending more than they earn but are unable or unwilling to address this,
their real problem. So they open a 'savings' account which gives them instant access to
their money.
2. They do this so that they can pretend to themselves that they are saving money on
a regular basis.
3. They then proceed to use this account like a child would use a pocket-money
savings scheme. In other words they indulge themselves in a long string of trivial deposits
and withdrawals. Typically 50 in, 40 out; then 75 in 80 out; then 10 in 11 out etc.
Stand behind anyone using an ATM machine and notice how trivial the withdrawals often
are 10 or 20. After a year or so of this, they let the account lapse with a sum of 1.97p
still remaining! They behave like this because they are little more than children who are
totally incapable of having any money without dreaming-up something to spend it on. And
that comes from allowing themselves to be endlessly indoctrinated by the adverts aimed at
controlling the compliant Thralls.
At this advanced stage of your training you must realise that such behaviour is totally
beneath your contempt, and certainly you will not indulge in it yourself.

Why Save?
There are two reasons for having a savings account. The first is to break you out of the
spending habit where every penny you earn must be spent on something you need. The
second is to allow you to accumulate money, such that the exponential effect of interest
earned will eventually significantly multiply your money. Also, having a sensible savings
account is a buffer against disaster and makes you feel more substantial. But be hyper
vigilant, particularly around your life partner who may nag you to spend it as soon as you
have a few hundred.

149
This is just a minor part of your wealth journey. It is hard to become a wealthy man or
woman merely by saving but you will be amazed how much difference it makes!
In a curious kind of way, the savings habit can almost double its effect. If you spend
1,000 on consumables and you borrow the money to do it, then within five years you are
maybe 1700.00 in the red. But if you save the same money then after five years you are
maybe 1500.00 in the black. The difference between these positions is significant.
In fact let us take a brief look:
Action After 5 Years You Will Have
Do nothing and start with 0 0
Borrow 10,000 for junk -17,000.00 + some old junk
Do nothing with 10,000 you have 10,000.00 (no change)
Spend 10,000 that you have 0 + some old junk
Invest 10,000 that you have +15000.00
Once again note the huge difference after five years between borrowing 10,000 for junk
and saving the same amount. It is 32,000!
So go out and make a start by opening this account. You should make a solemn vow to
yourself that no matter what happens, no matter what 'emergencies' occur, no matter what
'essential' purchases arise, you will not touch this money in under five years. Set up a
standing order to pay a regular sum each month into it. Avoid instant access accounts for
obvious reasons.
Do not worry if things like savings account seem part of Wonderland. They are, of course.
In fact, you need to be clear here. Everything around you the entire society you inhabit
comprises Wonderland. 99.99% of the people you meet are in Wonderland. When you
drive a car down a street you are trapped in Wonderland. When you use a bank, you are
using part of Wonderland. This book was printed by a printing company trading in
Wonderland. You paid for it with Wonderland money, through the medium of a
Wonderland institution. None of that matters.
To escape from Wonderland we need to wake ourselves up as far as we are able, then we
can float above its outer form.
If you do not think you can complete this relatively simple task of opening an account,
then Beyond Wealth is not really for you because you are not a serious person you are
an armchair dreamer.

Privacy
Now, a word of caution. Do not tell anyone about your special account, even (or
particularly!) your spouse or life-partner. The more people who know about your secret
stash of money, the more people will be able to dream-up ways in which you (or rather
they) should use that money.
Every time a minor financial crisis occurs, they will be saying to you: Oh, but what about
that money you have in that account? We really ought to use it at this stage, after all, that
is what savings are for a rainy day. Hey look! Its raining!
If you do not believe this, find out the hard way.

150
Everyone has the absolute right to privacy in their financial affairs and that means you.
It is a good idea to learn to be fairly tight-lipped about your finances. There is a very good
reason for this.
The more people who know how much money you have, the more people will come and
try to take it away from you!
You will not regret acting in this manner, but you will almost certainly regret it if you do
the opposite. You do not need millions in a Swiss account for this to apply to you. The
principle applies equally, or possibly more, to an account with a few thousand pounds in
it. Many people feel threatened by you if you have money. This is the motivation behind
them getting you to spend it.
If your spouse finds out about your secret account which might have as little as 1,500 in
it, they may feel threatened and jealous. They may wonder what you are 'up to'. They may
demand answers. They may wonder what other money you have which you are hiding
from them.
You should avoid this scenario!
Remember, we are talking here about your financial freedom, about your wealth and your
power.
So start your 'secret' savings account, and put whatever you can afford into it. This might
be as little as 50 a month, if that is all you can manage.
You should choose an account which makes it difficult for you to withdraw your money.
If you have to give (say) two weeks notice of withdrawal and suffer an interest penalty,
you will think two or three times about dipping into the money in order to buy more
rubbish which you do not really need.
After opening this account, you should deposit as much money as you can, every week or
every month. Ideally this should be money that you would normally have spent on more
consumer junk. Small amounts (20 and above) are fine. You will be absolutely amazed at
how quickly this money builds up. Very soon you will have an account with hundreds of
pounds, then thousands. You might find this hard to believe, but it is true.

A Word on Being Maxed-Out

Many people come across an idea for a neat little business they would like to start but
they need a few hundred or a couple of thousand to get going. Almost every business
needs a few hundred at least (and usually a few thousand), when you are starting it. Just to
get yourself some headed notepaper and some business cards will cost something. Even a
window-cleaning round requires you to get insurance, a bike, some ladders, a bucket, a
squeegee and so on. You get the idea.
The point is this. Countless numbers of such people have, quite literally, no spare money
whatsoever.
They couldnt raise 300 if their lives depended upon it. They see the potential of the
business, they want to start the business, but they are totally tapped-out. They are maxed-
out on every credit card they own; they have a maximum bank overdraft; they have
borrowed up to the very last penny on their house (usually to consolidate loans they have

151
previously taken to buy more junk); their monthly outgoings exceed their income by a
considerable margin.
All this means that when opportunity comes a-knocking at their door, they have to slam it
shut they have no options; they are maxed-out with no place to go.
And what have they spent it all on?
Well we have covered this several times already. It is the usual ego-driven status
consumer junk. Their houses are usually stuffed full of the latest rubbish.
Ten years from now, none of their possessions will fetch more than a few pounds at a
garage sale.
When you ask them if they have 500 to invest in a business which could make them
wealthy and free them forever, they look doe-eyed and helpless. They have spent the lot.
They have to walk away from a fantastic opportunity.
Do not let this be you. Your savings account is for one thing only your financial
freedom. It is not, repeat NOT for spending on consumer garbage created to titillate and
hypnotise the Thralls.
I hope the point has been made loud and clear.

Other Vices
Finally, if you smoke and/or drink take out your WealthPlanner CD and fire-up the
spreadsheet called smokedrink.xls. Type in the number of cigarettes you smoke and the
amount you drink then weep!
In case you do not have access to this spreadsheet, here are some highlights. If you smoke
15 cigarettes a day and drink a modest 20 units of alcohol per week (about 10 pints or ten
large glasses of wine each week) then if you saved the money at 6% instead of spending it,
you would have 64,000 after ten years; 159,000 after twenty years; 306,000 after thirty
years and 550,000 (i.e. half a million) after forty years!
Thirty years may seem a long time, but it is only age 16 46! Forty years is age 16 56,
still ten years off retirement age and with half a million in the bank!
Hopefully this chapter has really made you think about saving and the sort of thing you
squander your money on at present.

152
 Lesson Eight: Stop Spending!
The two keys to getting out of debt are to stop spending and earn more.
In a recent episode of a radio programme on personal finance, people were phoning in to
ask for help with their credit card debts. It was a real eye-opener. One man had run up
37,000 on credit cards and another had 46,000! Totally extraordinary. Several were
looking for ways to run out on their responsibilities for paying their debts. They were
investigating voluntary arrangements, bankruptcy, tiny errors in the issuing banks
contract and so on.
Let us be perfectly clear here:
1. They had spent every single penny they earned and had been entirely unable to
create a surplus to put by for a rainy day.
2. Having spent every penny of their salary, their greed was still not sated. There
was a lot more consumer junk they just had to buy. So they borrowed the
surplus of other people and spent all this too.
3. Finally, they wanted to walk away from their debts so that they did not have to
repay that surplus created by others and loaned to them in good faith and trust
that they would repay it. Effectively they were looking for ways to steal it.
What a life! What a way to be! Hopefully you are not like this a spoiled, greedy little
child who cannot keep their hand out of the sweetie jar. Someone who eats all of their own
sweets, then borrows sweets from other children and gobbles those down too. Then
whinges and whines that they cannot repay the debt and begs to be let off so that they
can do it all over again.
What a miserable excuse for a Thrall!
Is getting out of debt rocket science? No.
If you are up to your ears in debt, this is the thing which is destroying your life. It is like a
cancer a disease. It eats away at your wellbeing. Each day brings more fear fear of
another bill you cannot pay, fear of foreclosure, maybe even losing your home.
Yes the lenders are also to blame as they make it very tempting for people to borrow more
money. Really, they make this ridiculously easy for us. Each day another mailing lands on
your mat offering you thousands of pounds in loans. And it is blatant. Years ago you
would never get a loan offer which suggested you spend it on a car or holiday; these days
they accompany the offer with glossy pictures of people lying on beaches! They have
headlines like: Have that holiday you deserve.
Deserve? You deserve an exotic holiday when you have created the cash to fund it, and
not a moment sooner. It is truly scary to know that this sounds almost old-fashioned!
It is also frighteningly easy to release equity from your house these days and many
people are doing it, leaving them mortgaged up to the hilt and paying a huge amount each
month. When interest rates rise (as they will) these people are going to be in serious
trouble. Their 600 a month mortgage repayment could suddenly go to 700, 900 or
more leaving them unable to pay and facing repossession.
This would not matter so much if they were releasing equity to get into a business, or buy
an investment property, or whatever. But this is not what people are re-mortgaging their
153
homes for. They are borrowing tens of thousands and putting their financial futures on the
line for cars, holidays, clothes and sofas.
If you doubt any of this, watch some daytime television. It is wall-to-wall loan adverts, all
with aspirational selling pitches cars, holidays, boats, clothes, trinkets, watches etc.
Why are these adverts on during the day? Think about it! Who is at home during the day
watching television? The out-of-work, the broke, the unemployed. They watch these
adverts and then they want the stuff that is being pitched to them. More importantly, they
want it with no effort on their part. They want the money which others have created and
they want to spend that money.
Do you get that? Have you heard it explained that way before?
Also check out any cheap, tabloid newspaper and look in the back. Apart from the endless
pages of mobile phone adverts, the other sort of advert which dominates is adverts for
loans. Those, and the clear your debts; remove County Court Judgements; erase your
bad credit adverts which want even more of your money for their dubious services.

Pure Greed
Here is the big reason why people are re-mortgaging their homes. You see, what they have
done is spent, spent, spent on all the usual things. They are maxed-out on about 5 credit
cards; they have taken the maximum bank overdraft; their greed has also usually made
them borrow from family and friends. And now they are totally bankrupt. Their debt-
service amount is over a thousand per month and that is before food, gas, electricity etc!
There is just no way they can pay this and they are going down fast.
So they have a bright idea! Borrow loads and loads of money against the house; pay
off all their debts, and (of course) Have a nice little bit left over for that new kitchen
weve always wanted and a holiday for us and the kiddies.
Sound familiar?
So they have their nice little holiday, get a new kitchen and they get a tacky new sofa and
they pay off all their debts.
But the greed kicks-in soon afterwards and they start to spend on their credit cards
again, only this time they have larger credit limits because they have been good
customers in the past and paid off large amounts of money.
So they spend, spend, spend again. Within a year they are maxed-out once more, only this
time they also have a thumping mortgage and no equity left in their property.
And millions of people are in exactly this situation.
It all comes from wanting it now, not later, and wanting it with no effort, preferably with
other peoples money, which they often do not pay back.
What a life!
Yes, the banks and loan companies push this cash in our faces, but you know what?
You are an adult not a child. If a weird looking stranger offers you a packet of sweeties
and a ride in his car, you dont have to take it. You have autonomy and choice. You are
not a slave to any advert which tries to trap you into debt (there is big money in lending
money it has been going on for thousands of years). If you can say no to drugs, you can
say no to debt for debt (or rather spending) truly is a drug. People use it to give them a
154
small rush to make up for the drab monotony of their lives. True. But like a heroin fix,
the spending rush does not hit the spot for very long and soon you need more and
more and more.
More shopping, more stuff. It accumulates and weighs you down.
Look at your house. It is stuffed full of junk, isnt it? Every cupboard you own is full to
bursting. Is every drawer in your house (or flat etc.) full as well? What about the shed
and/or garage if you have either? Full? Even the loft has a load of junk in it, doesnt it?
No matter how big the house, whether it is 1-bed or 8-beds, it is stuffed cellar to roof with
junk. And all that junk costed big money at some point. It is worth virtually nothing now.
You could just throw the entire lot into a skip. But when you bought it, it cost 10 here,
100 there. 1,200 for that item; 600 for that item. It all adds up to tens of thousands over
a few years. And most people are still paying for that junk the junk they bought years
ago. The junk they really needed but now never even look at.

Stop Spending!
So the take home here is to stop spending. This requires discipline a word that has been
mentioned several times already. A word which runs through your wealthy life like letters
through a stick of rock.
Can you do it? Can you make a large alarm bell go off each time you reach for your
money to buy something? Remember we are talking about you being broke here. If the
item you want is small change compared with your capital base, then this is no problem.
You do not have to be like a monk. This is about getting out of debt. If you are not in debt,
it does not really apply.
Get angry, Start saving. Stop spending. How hard can it be?
Now let us make a start on this business of getting wealthy. Where does it all begin? We
cannot just plunge-in to this tricky task and expect to succeed without thinking about
beginnings.
Having got yourself out of debt (or being well on the way) your wealthy life starts with a
dream...

155
 Lesson Nine: Finding Your Dream
How to Discover Your Dream
Earlier we discussed how hard it is to become wealthy without a big enough why. It is
certainly hard to be happy if you do not have a reason to get out of bed in the morning.
Spending some time discovering your dream can give you a big enough why to get
wealthy and also bring meaning to your life. Having meaning is a significant contributor
to your happiness.
It is almost certain that you are not doing what you love to do. It is equally certain that you
are not putting your dream out into the world and probably are not even aware you have
one.
You are likely to be working in a job you barely tolerate, for a wage which hardly meets
your outgoings.
How did this come about?
The answer is that you were probably side-tracked as a youngster shunted off the main
line into an insignificant branch line. And there you are, right now, rusting in the sidings...

Side-tracked
You probably had the glimmer of a dream when you
were a youngster, but this was soon knocked out of you.
Your parents and teachers undoubtedly called your
dream unrealistic.
Then, to the sound of a points-lever being pulled, they
suggested to you that you get a 'practical' education in
order that you might follow your dream at a later date.
There was probably no malevolence here; you need to
remember that your parents, and all preceding
generations, did not have the luxury of fancy life-
planning.
The name of their game was survival. To survive you needed money. To get money you
needed a steady job. To get a good job you needed a good education.
They pulled those levers on you for the best of intentions, but the result was probably a
disaster for your fledgling ambitions.
This message was reinforced by teachers, friends and careers advisers, until by the time
you left full-time education you were almost certainly way off the main line and heading
down some insignificant branch line.
Throughout these years, you learned the trick of suppressing your dream. You could not
maintain this dream in the face of such ordered opposition and so you buried it in a secret
place within you.
Then the pace of life started really to heat up, and problems came at you like a pack of
hungry jackals. No time for fancy, childish dreams now. All of your energies were
involved, and probably still are involved, in fighting off the pack of slavering dogs.

156
Dreams are... well for dreamers. There is a life to be lived, food to put on the table, a
mortgage to pay and other people to worry about.
If you even remember your dream (unlikely) you probably fool yourself into thinking you
will pick it up later, when the family has grown up, when you are retired. The tragedy
here is that most people's dreams become so deeply buried they not only forget what they
are, but even forget that they had a dream in the first place. Certainly, few people can put
a name to their dream. Instead, they sit in the sidings, rusting away, perhaps (if this is not
pushing the railway analogy too far) hoping that some bright, gleaming locomotive will
arrive one day to pull them to safety.
To be fair, we are not well equipped to get in contact with our dreams and to plan a
glittering, fulfilling and exciting life for ourselves. We humans have only existed for
around one million years, perhaps two million at the absolute maximum.
For most of that time, we lived short, brutish lives which were wholly obsessed with
generating sufficient food, water and shelter for our basic survival. Few people lived
beyond 35 years old. Life-planning was not an issue which occupied the thoughts of men
and women prior to a few hundred years ago.
Even in more recent times, the wealthy had few choices. The son of a rich family joined
the army, became a priest, or took over the running of the family business. Daughters sat
around waiting to be married off. In general, they were not full of angst regarding their
special purpose on the planet. Such thinking is a luxury, brought about by material wealth
and the increase in health and hygiene. We live longer. We are all richer. We have the
luxury of being able to consider our true purpose and the meaning of our lives. We have
the leisure time to be unhappy if we do not fulfil that purpose or find that meaning.

Living a Meaningful Life

Each person is a very special, unique individual.
Everyone has a passion if only they could discover it.
If you wish to put your faith in something, you could do worse than believing that if you
will only follow your passion your dream then everything will be all right. It will work
out. You will make enough money to live on, perhaps even get rich, but more importantly
you will have a joy-filled and truly meaningful life.
The alternative is to live a life like our primitive ancestors gruelling, desperate, toil-
filled days devoid of meaning other than brute survival.
The difference is that they had no choice. You do.
Let us say a word or two about 'meaningful.'
Do you equate the words 'meaningful' and 'dream' with something hugely important, of
tremendous significance to mankind? For example, do you think that a dream in order to
be meaningful has to be something like this?
Invent antigravity.
Cure cancer.
Write a book which will profoundly change the lives of all seven billion people on
the planet.

157
 Create a world-changing philosophy.
Eradicate poverty, disease and hunger from the world.
Overthrow the government, and start an entirely new political system invented by
you.
Write a series of symphonies which make Mahler and Mozart look like amateurs.
Climb every mountain; ford every stream; follow every rainbow.
In other words, are you seduced by the belief that your 'meaningful dreams' have to be
grandiose, otherwise they are not worth pursuing?
Do you believe that small dreams are for small people and that only giant dreams are
worth having? That is not true. Your dream can be any scale from gigantic to modest, but
if you are to grow it should be something just at the cutting edge of your fear zone. You
can help people and make the world a better place on whatever scale you want. Big
dreams command a big price tag (save the whale, cure AIDS, feed the hungry) more
modest dreams command a smaller price but the key point is to discover your dream so
that at least you have the option of following it. If your dream resonates with a lot of other
people, the money to make it happen will come. If you are a bit of a lone voice, or ahead
of your time, remember the other option which is to work in a job (or business) which
brings you pleasure, and to use all of your spare time and resources following your dream.
That can lead to a very happy life.
It is worth reiterating that you do not have to become wealthy to be happy.

No Approval Required
It is your dream that counts, not somebody else's definition of what constitutes a valid
dream.
You do not need to get your dream countersigned by society and have them approve it as
big enough or important enough.
The dream is for you. It should bring you happiness to fulfil it. If you are making money
from your dream and others are also benefiting, then this is just perfect. You are doing it
because you want to do it and that is the only reason you need. If you want to make money
from your dream, then it will have to benefit others as well, for it is a very rare authentic
dream which has no positive impact on the lives of others.
Big, planet-changing dreams are allowed, of course! Just make sure it really is your
passion and not something you are claiming to believe in for one of these three erroneous
reasons:
1. It is so big you know you will never do it and so there is no point in making a start.
In other words, your grandiose passion is little more than an excuse for inaction.
2. This is not really your passion, but you think it sounds grand enough, altruistic
enough, or worthy enough to be allowed under society's definition of 'meaningful.' in other
words, you feel that small dreams are not allowable, are too insignificant and make you
look selfish or trivial. You also maybe seek the kudos which comes when you tell people
about your grand dream.

158
3. Your dream is merely one, grandiose strategy for filling your need for (say)
approval you could fill that need far more easily than via this complex and unlikely
scheme you have envisaged.
When you get in contact with your passion, and follow it, remarkable life-changing events
will happen to you sometimes not exactly what you might expect!
Okay so how do you uncover your dream?

Your Job From Heaven

Here is an amazingly powerful method of helping you to realise what your dream might
be. This originally came from the author Barbara Sher who has written a number of
excellent books on life-planning.
Take a blank sheet of paper and on the top of it write:
'My Job From Hell.'
Now fill that sheet of paper with a detailed description of your total job from hell.
Describe the nightmarish work environment; write in detail about the dreadful people you
will be working with and the awful tasks you will be performing. You will hardly be able
to stop writing! You will take a ghoulish glee in putting down every awful detail. You will
run out of paper and ink long before you run out of ghastly details of that job.
This exercise gives you a fantastic opportunity to glimpse your creative potential when
you are not running hard against the brakes of the subconscious mind.
Please do this exercise, and do not just read about it. You will be impressed by its effect.
The next part of this exercise is to take your Job From Hell and write the exact opposite of
everything you have put down.
For example if you have written I work in a dark, noisy, fume-filled factory, with loud
music blaring all day over loudspeakers, you might rewrite this as follows: I work in a
light, quiet airy office, or I work outdoors in the peaceful countryside.
Another example should suffice. If you wrote Each day is identical, I produce an endless
stream of identical widgets, and never receive any praise or thanks for my work, you
need to rewrite this as follows: Each day I work on something different, no two projects
are the same and I receive a huge amount of praise, admiration and respect for my work.
What you are doing is using the 'job from hell' as a method of bypassing the subconscious
mind. Effectively, you are finding out what you don't want, and reversing it to produce
your job from heaven. If you had just tried to write out your job from heaven, the
subconscious would have kicked-in and told you that it was impossible, that you could not
have it and that you did not deserve it.
Try this exercise you will be surprised!

The Fear of Finding Your Dream

Consider the 'you' of today. This is not a criticism, but you probably live a fairly dull
routine without much excitement. Do you have any real plans, or are you just jogging
along, letting life happen to you? You are probably in a job which has nothing whatsoever
to do with that quirky, brilliant 'you' inside.

159
Remember? The one which got suppressed all those years ago? The one that was shunted
onto the sidelines?
Start trying to uncover that buried desire and do not let 'shoulds' and 'oughts' get in your
way!
Try, just for once, to listen to yourself without immediately leaping in with habitual
negative thoughts about the impossibility or impracticability of your dreams. Even if your
dream seems crazy, at the very least it will point you in the right direction and perhaps
trigger a more realistic dream along the same lines.
Remember, the purpose of a dream is to get a deep need filled in you the dream is just a
vehicle or method for getting your needs met. So when you ask the question, what are my
dreams? you are really asking what are my deepest needs?
Our deepest needs are often to do with peace, love and making the world a better place.
This is why Beyond Wealth teachings are so powerful. When you get in touch with the
real You which was mentioned right at the start of this book, the why of getting wealthy
is transformed from getting a big house and a fancy car into a deeply fulfilling desire to
create something beautiful, to bring peace, love, joy and security to yourself and others.
It is your deep needs which have been suppressed all these years, often (particularly for
women) by thoughts of sacrificing your needs to the needs of others or total lack of belief
that you deserved to find your true calling.
So what better time than right now to examine what it is you really need, what it is you are
really on the planet for? Out of countless thousands of generations of humans, you have
the luxury of being born into a time and place where you can decide how to live and what
to do.
That is scary, but also amazingly exciting.

Fight The Fear of Success

Finding your dream can be a scary process. Suddenly, there are no more excuses. You are
faced squarely with the terrifying knowledge that you have a passion and that you long to
follow it. You will be sharply reminded that you have buried this passion for a great many
years and there may be some remorse there. The next step is, of course, action. But most
people are frozen by fear when faced with the decision to change their lives so
dramatically.
One of the reasons we keep our passions submerged is because we know that once we
release the beast we will never be the same again, and our comfortable, boring routine
will be upset. Big change is frightening, which is why people habitually choose safety.
Here is another great Barbara Sher technique for overcoming this obstacle.
What you must do is:
1. Vow to take action towards realising your dream, right now. But...
2. You only have to do this for one hour.
Set your alarm clock for exactly one hour from now, and then spend the next sixty minutes
(not a minute longer) in the active pursuit of your dream. For example you could call some
people to arrange a meeting; do a spreadsheet analysis of the profit and loss on a proposed

160
business idea; book yourself onto a course do any one of a thousand things to make a
start on your dream. That is all we are after at this stage a start.
This is a brilliant technique and deceptively simple and powerful. It gets you moving
towards your goal and overcomes the fear and insecurity associated with starting out on a
huge life-change. It also programmes your subconscious mind that you are serious about
this change. It is not just talk.
When the decisions are clear, the way is easy.

Your Dream Business

As you know, one of the very few ways of becoming wealthy is to run your own business
(even if this is a one person show).
So how does this link in with finding your dream?
The link is that you should not start just any old business with a view to making a ton of
money. It will grind you down if you are not passionate about it. Sure, you may do better
than average after ten or twenty years. You will probably have a bigger house, a better car
and a salary of fifty percent above the average. But that is scant compensation for half a
lifetime spent fighting to make it in something you despise or barely tolerate.
It is probably not the noble purpose of your life to run Precision Pipe Bending Services
for the next twenty years. Let us pause for a moment and ask how did this company start?
The answer is: in the same way as tens of thousands of others.
Joe was working shifts at the local diesel generator manufacturing company and had been
for ten years. They buy in lots of components, some of which were copper pipes pre-bent
into intricate shapes ready to fit into the generators. The supplier became unreliable; prices
went up, quality went down. Joe and his mate Steve started bending pipes in his garage at
weekends and making up the shortfall. Soon they were the sole supplier and making good
money. Fast forward a year and they have left their jobs to run Precision Pipe Bending
Services full time. They have two more clients and are breaking even after buying some
specialist bending equipment.
Fast forward ten years and PPBS turn over a million a year with fifteen staff. Joe and
Steve have decent cars and are both about to upgrade to a 4-bed executive home. After
twenty years, PPBS turns over three million and Joe and Steve are both doing quite well
but twenty years have passed in 10 hour days, 6 day weeks and they are getting pretty
tired. Here is the problem: neither one of them have ever been that interested in pipe
bending. It was just something they sort of fell into as young men to make some better
than average money. Neither of them are very happy they are okay. They hope to retire
one day and maybe sell the business. Until then, they keep working sixty hour weeks to
keep it competitive.
The scary truth is that 90% of businesses are run by people who do not care that much for
the goods and services their businesses provide. What does that tell you? These people are
not passionate about their businesses and that does not make for a happy life.
You should aim higher than this. Be careful what business you start. Start dreaming about
making a ton of money and doing what you love to do.
Does this excite you? Do you think you have the fight to make it happen for you?

161
Rediscovering The Real You
If so then you have probably felt that something was wrong for quite a large part of your
life. Maybe going back to when you were a little boy or girl. Did something in you protest
even at that tender young age? Did you want to be something greater than this mediocre
world was imposing upon you?
The little boy or girl you once were, never disappeared they just got forgotten about.
You can still hear their cry sometimes though. When you are stuck in traffic on the way to
work, do those faded dreams come back to haunt you?
Did you want to be a world explorer, a famous writer, sing in a band, paint, dance, live in
a lighthouse, be a beach-bum, fly planes, play football all day, be an actress, invent
something wonderful, just be free or maybe just have the time to be a great parent,
partner or friend...?

Day Dreaming
Take some time to day-dream for a bit. There is nothing wrong with this. It is only when
you want something badly enough that you get motivated to achieve it, and it all starts
with a dream, as we shall see.
Your true self is buried deep within and its cries are muffled by layer upon layer of
social conditioning. This conditioning is just one facet of Wonderland which entraps you.
You have been corrupted by the world. Your fanciful and unrealistic dreams have been
derided and then erased by society. You have been fashioned into a slave of society or a
creature of Wonderland a good, compliant worker drone who can be sacrificed to keep
the machine going. Just another Duracell battery to be plugged-in to the machine to
provide your thimble-full of power to keep the whole show rolling along.
If you want to live your dream full time you need freedom. To gain freedom, you need
enough money to escape wage slavery (your Freedom Figure), but this is deemed to be
just another pipe-dream by many around you.
The accumulation of wealth is our main concern here, but it is only a means to an end.

Money = Freedom = Choices

If you do not have a dream (let us call it a passion) it is hard to become a millionaire other
than by winning a game of chance such as the National lottery.
To make this kind of money you need to be highly focused, and you cannot be that if you
only have a half-hearted interest in what you are doing. You know this is true.
Just look at some famous multimillionaires who still keep working ten or twelve hours a
day, even though they do not need the money.
Why do they do this?
Because they have a passion for what they do! They would probably do it without
payment.
Dreaming is a type of visualisation.

162
It is visualisation plus passion. These are the things that you really want to be, to have or
to do. If you do not achieve these things over (say) the next ten years, you are going to be
seriously disillusioned and upset.
You should be able to write a list of six important things you would like to be, have or do.
If you cannot think of a single one then you are most unlikely ever to live a life of power
and passion. Also, your chances of making big money and escaping from Wonderland are
vanishingly small.
This is blunt, but also it is a major reality check.
Can you think of a few things about which you are passionate? One or two things which
you care deeply about? Just one would be a start...

The Blank Slate

Many people who try this exercise look inside themselves and find a big, blank nothing.
They shrug helplessly and say something like: Thats always been my problem I dont
know what I want or what Id like to do.
Do not beat yourself up if you cannot immediately think of something. It is hard to dream
up a better life for yourself after the decades of the negative conditioning you have
allowed yourself to accept. All those years spent under the control and influence of
Wonderland have taken their toll upon you.
You have been deeply asleep for many years.
How often did your teachers, parents and friends encourage you to dream and ask you to
share your vision with them?
Approximately never?
How often did someone shoot your fledgling dreams down in flames or pour scorn upon
them? How often did they tell you to get serious, or stop dreaming?
Small wonder that your dreams are no longer on public display to be ridiculed.

The Future You

Here is a little exercise which might help you get in touch with your dream.
Imagine walking into a room and meeting the 'you' of ten years from now. What will you
be wearing? Where will you be living? What will your lifestyle be like? What car will you
be driving? Will you be running a business? If so, how successful will you be? What will
your net worth be? How will you be contributing to the wellbeing of others?
You really only have three choices here about how the you of the future will look, and
this is where the power of this exercise lies:
1. Somewhere in between how you are now, and a depressed, broke and scruffy
tramp.
2. An exact clone of how you are now absolutely nothing has changed in a decade
except you have got a little older, a little fatter and a little slower.
3. A happier, wealthier, healthier version of the you of today.
Only a suicidal depressive would visualise number one! Number two is effectively saying
that nothing will change; you will not grow over the next ten years, you will not get richer,
163
happier, wiser, healthier anything. The 'you of tomorrow' will be an older clone of the
'you of today.'
So that just leaves number three, and if you selected this it remains for you to back this
glittering vision of the 'future you' with all the force of your imagination.

Thinking Back
Try to remember what you loved doing as a child. Write it down. This is probably not
what you are doing as an adult, but it is a pointer in the direction of your dream. If you
loved to climb trees, maybe your dream work is outside rather than in an office. If you
loved to colour with crayons, maybe you long to be in an artistic endeavour. If you loved
to write stories, maybe you yearn to be a novelist. You get the idea. Use your childish
passions to point to your adult dreams.
Do not be afraid. You can follow your dream part-time to begin with. Take that
watercolour class; go to that writing weekend; go on a forestry maintenance week just
have a go at something which calls to you and stop putting it off until tomorrow. Stop
saying when the kids have left home, when the redundancy money comes in, when
Bill has recovered from his knee operation. Stop being so afraid.
What have you got to lose by trying, right now, today? Nothing. Soon your part-time
passion could become your full time career. Then you will be in heaven doing what you
love.
It bears repeating: when you do what you love, you will never work again.

164
 Lesson Ten: Goal Setting
It is very likely that you have read something about the importance of setting goals before.
It is very likely that, despite this, you do not set goals.
Why is this?
It is not ignorance. Everybody now knows the importance of setting goals. Fifty years ago,
this was a startling new idea. No longer. It has been proved beyond reasonable doubt that
people who set written goals lead richer, happier, more fulfilling lives than people who
merely drift through life, rudderless.
Everybody knows this, but still they do not do it.
It is not the difficulty of the task. Writing out ten goals is not a particularly arduous job
in fact it is quite enjoyable and only takes an hour maximum. Yet 99% of people never
write a goal in their entire lives. Why do you think this is, since the task of writing out
your goals is so easy and the rewards so obvious?
It is not even the difficulty of pondering what it is you ultimately want out of life just
ease yourself in with some simple goals, say to move up to the next bigger house and to
earn an extra ten thousand pounds this year. Leave more complex life-goals (What is my
real purpose here on earth?) until you are happier with the whole goal-setting process.
No, for people to miss out on such an obvious and easy technique there must be something
else going on some deep-seated psychological block somewhere. That block is the
subconscious realisation that every goal has an associated price tag that it does not come
free. It does not flow freely from the wondrous bounty of the universe. There is a price
to pay in order to achieve each goal.
This knowledge evokes two responses in most people: fear and laziness (this last is also
called inertia).
To set a goal means to set yourself up for change. Any goal that you can think of, large or
small, reduces to the statement: I hereby promise to change in the following way...
People fear change it is the unknown. Fear immobilises. Fear stops you dead in your
tracks. It is safer to stay well within your comfort zone.
Next comes our old enemy laziness, or inertia; and this is the real reason people do not set
goals.
Above everything else, a goal is a written contract with yourself to do something.
To achieve even the smallest goal requires discipline, work, and focus; all three in some
measure. Despite popular DVD programs like The Secret which talk about attracting
wealth, people know deep in their gut that you do not get something for nothing in this
world. Since most people are very lazy, how do you think they react when faced with a
contract containing the words discipline, work and focus?
Why, they break out into a cold sweat. Their hands tremble and seem unable to grasp the
pen. They go to write their goals, then draw back, then go to write again. Suddenly, they
feel faint. The pen slips from their numbed hand and clatters to the floor. They feel tired.
Perhaps it is time for a lie down?
They will sign that contract one-day real soon now perhaps tomorrow...

165
This is why people do not set goals.
They still want all of the rewards and goodies which would have come their way had they
set goals and applied the required discipline, work and focus. Oh yes, they want all of
these things, but they want them for free. They seek a short-cut to reality, and now embark
upon a path which leaves them prey to the mystical attract wealth gurus and instant
wealth business opportunities.

Infinite Bounty of The Universe

The packaging varies, but the message is the same: The universe has an infinite store of
wealth, bounty and benevolence there is more than enough for all. Just tune your mind
into the pulsating rhythm of the universe using the following method (CD set 49.95,
manual 29.95, course 199.70) and manifest your share of this infinite bounty.
A recent weekend course advertised in a brochure is called: Channelling Chakra Energy
to Manifest Abundance in Your Life.
People love this message. They sign up for it in their millions in one form or another. They
think: Why bother to sign that stuffy old contract with all those tedious work, discipline
and focus clauses? I could channel it all for free!
And so a few more irreplaceable years slip by. They buy the books; their collection of
boxed CD and DVD sets grows. Yet they remain as broke and powerless as ever. How
odd! Hmm perhaps another seminar will help me re-tune my cosmic receiver.

Making a Start
So let us leave all this feel-good mumbo-jumbo behind and get down to the serious
business of becoming wealthy.
You claim to want to be a wealthy man or woman and yet apparently you have been 'too
busy' to set your goals this year. That is about to change because right now you are going
to write yourself some goals.
You need to be specific with your goals as this allows your brain to latch on to something
concrete. If you want more money, you need to know how much and by when. If you want
to help others, you need to state specifically how, and what level of money is needed to
make it happen.
Realise that many of your dreams can be achieved just by raising your game by 10%. That
is often all it takes. Just doing that alone will mark you out as a winner. Most people do
10% 20% less than is expected of them rather than 10%-20% more.
Do not be cheap with your goals and do not be grandiose. If you want a million, set the
goal for two or three million just to be sure, but do not set it for a hundred million if thats
not what you want and you are not prepared to pay the price.
Buy yourself one of those little credit card wallets at some point in the near future. The
ones that hold about 10 credit cards. You can even use the one which used to hold your
credit cards, now you have cut them up!
When you have written out your goals, you should keep the cards in this wallet and carry
them with you always. Normally, goals are written on a sheet of paper fine if you live
alone you can leave the sheet lying around to remind you of your goals. But if you have

166
a family, or people coming to visit you regularly, then you do not want these people to see
your private dreams. So what happens is that you tidy that piece of paper away in a drawer
and there it stays for several months, forgotten about! This card idea means that you
always have your goals with you, and they remain private.
Unusually, you are going to be told the first four goals you should write.

Goal One Your Passion

The first goal should be something which you cannot complete in your lifetime. This
makes you dream big. It makes you realise what is important to you, and what you are
about as a person. As Charles Noble says: You must have long-range goals to keep you
from being frustrated by short-term failures.
You might be very surprised at what you eventually write down for this goal it might
bear no relationship to what you are doing at present.
As an example, if you are a writer, your goal might read: One day, every educated adult
on the planet will have heard the name John Doe, and have some idea about my
philosophy.
Or: I will create the countrys largest chain of dog rescue kennels.
Or: All homeless people in London will have access to a temporary night shelter.
Or: No child will go without education in (insert country)
Or: I will start and run a meditation retreat.
This goal is to do with your power, passion and purpose the real reason you want the
money. If you do not yet know this, keep a blank card in your wallet to symbolise your
current ignorance on this matter. This goal card is the most important one of them all.

Goal Two Your Financial Goal

The next goal should state an exact amount of money which you will one day have. Again,
this is a lifetime goal and should not carry a date.
Example: One day I will have a net worth of 100 million pounds. This goal quantifies your
dreams of wealth and sets an ultimate target.
But before you write this particular goal, think very carefully about the price you will have
to pay, and if you are willing to pay it.
For example, achieving a net worth of 100 million pounds will have the following
consequences at least:
1. You will have very close friends. You just will not have the time to nurture and
sustain all those buddy-pal relationships. All relationships have a time-overhead.
2. You will be attacked, ridiculed, smeared and hounded by the gutter press and
media. Their sworn mission will be to drag you down to find some dirt in your
background, some chink in your armour which they can then use to destroy you.
Why? Because their readers want you destroyed and their readers are their customers.
Why on earth do these readers want you destroyed?
By this stage of your initiation, you know! The Thralls detest successful people because
they act like shining beacons, lighting the steep, rocky pathway which leads from a life in

167
the sheep pen, to a life of heroic excellence. A successful person, by merely existing,
causes the average Thrall to think: This is terrible! If this ordinary person can make a
success of their life, that means... perhaps I could improve my life too. Well I guess I now
have two choices. I can apply the energy, discipline and focus required to follow their path
to excellence. Or... I can scour the gutter press for evidence that this person is corrupt,
lower than me and really belongs in the sewer. Hmm... now which is the easy path...?
3. You will not be able to sustain a standard family. You might have children, but
you will be a remote, absent figure. Your family will not be able to rely upon you to attend
weddings, funerals, birthday parties, concerts and plays. Sometimes you will be there,
most times you will not.
4. Most people you meet will be consumed by cancerous jealousy and hatred. They
will also not know the price you paid. They will think, and sometimes even say to your
face, that you were lucky.
5. You will work 12 hour days, 360 days of the year. You will eat, live, sleep and
breathe your business. Every second spent away from the office or factory will seem like
agonising torture. Read Atlas Shrugged and study the character of Hank Reardon. The
company of others, even friends and family, will seem dull and you will be filled with an
overwhelming craving to tear yourself away and return to your empire.
6. You will be sued, attacked and will receive death threats, many of which will be
credible. You will require several full-time office staff to reply to the sacks full of
whining, begging letters you will receive and to field the hundreds of weekly calls from
charities. To sum up, the world will simultaneously be trying to destroy you and beg from
you.
That is just a tiny example of the price you will have to pay in order to get 100 million.
Too high a price? Do not write the goal down. You learned something. You do not want
100 million because you are not prepared to pay the price.
Sure, you want it for free who doesnt?
Do not commit the gross error of writing this goal (or any goal) in the hope that you will
attain it by mystical methods; that somehow God, or the bountiful universe will cause
this money to manifest or flow to you. It will not. This is Wonderland fodder for the
gullible masses. Wake up and stop dreaming! If you want to become wealthy you must
take the concrete actions required to make it happen for you.
Perhaps you think 10million will be easier?
Yes it will, but still you have a huge price to pay and you must decide now if you are
willing to pay it.
You will suffer a milder form of all of the consequences 1-6 above. You will lose every
single one of your current friends. You will work 10 hour days, 340 days of the year. You
will be a driven man or woman. Most, if not all of your other hobbies and interests will be
sacrificed to this goal.
You enjoy sailing, skiing, flying? Forget it! You will not have time. You always wanted to
write a play, learn jazz piano, study water-colour painting? These will have to wait. All of
your energy, talents and time will be devoted to achieving your goal of 10million.
If you do not want to pay the price do not write the goal.

168
Save yourself some heartache. You have learned something important. You do not want
10million; leastways, you are not prepared to pay the price for it and that leaves you
fresh out of trump cards. You only hold the four jokers 'prayer', 'luck', 'bountiful flow of
the universe' and 'hope'.
So before you write a figure on card two, spend a few moments considering if you are
willing to pay the price. If not, then you are deciding right now on a life of relative
poverty. At least you decided. That is far better than drifting into it and then wondering
what went wrong.
If your financial goal is less than three million you will not suffer most of the problems
listed above. Do not let this limit your goal though. If you really want a hundred million,
go for it, just know what the price is and be willing to pay it.
The rest of the cards are for specific time dated goals.

Goal Three Your House

On card 3, write a goal to improve the house in which you live in other words, to move
to a better house. Visualise this new house as clearly as possible and then write a goal in
the following type of style: By January 1st 2015, I will have moved into a four-bedroom,
detached house in large grounds located in the Poshbury area of Richville. Obviously you
can add, change or embellish this goal and date to suit yourself.

Goal Four Your Action Plan

Card four is special. Thinking about the goal you wrote on card two for the moment, on
card four you need to answer the question: What one thing can I do right now, today,
which will take me a step closer to this goal?
It could be a simple thing like a telephone call, but write it down as a goal: By the end of
today I will have................. which will advance me one step closer to my financial
dream. When you have completed the goal on card four, you write yourself out another
card which answers the question: What is the next thing I need to do in order to take
another step towards my financial goal?
On the remaining cards, write out your other goals. Just ask yourself what you want out of
life, and write it down. This is a book about wealth, not relationships, but these remaining
cards are the place to add goals about your personal relationships, self improvement,
health and so on.
Keep these cards with you at all times in one of those little wallets. Read your goals every
day the results will astound you.
If you have not written your goals within one hour of reading this then it is almost certain
that you will never write a goal in your life. The consequences of this are too awful to
contemplate. You will live your life to about one tenth of your ability and potential. That
would be a terrible waste of your talent.
Do not let this happen to you.
Let us leave the final word to the late, great Jim Rohn: Goals. Theres no telling what you
can do when you get inspired by them. Theres no telling what you can do when you
believe in them. Theres no telling what you can do when you act upon them.

169
 Lesson Eleven: Activate Your Dream
Having written some financial and other goals and done some work on uncovering your
dream, here is a proven technique to help you get started on creating the life you are
longing for.

The 4-Step Activation Method

Ask yourself the following questions:
What do I need to achieve in the next 12 months in order to make my future dream a
reality?
What do I need to do in the next month to start myself on this journey?
What can I do by next week to prepare myself for the journey?
What can I do right now, today, in order to start this process off?
Please make a point of taking a few minutes out to actually answer these questions. Do not
just keep reading. You cannot become wealthy by merely reading about it. You must take
action.
Do you see how this 4-step technique works?
You need to dream, but this is not enough. Like childrens shoes, dreams come a size too
large so that you can grow into them and this means that dreams are too large to realise
all at once, all in one hit.
Our minds are finite, and so all large projects must be broken down into bite-sized chunks
otherwise we become discouraged by the scale of the endeavour.
This is one of the secret keys of successful people. They are undaunted by large projects,
because they have the knack of breaking them down into simple steps. Each step is
manageable in itself, and can be completed in anything from a few hours to a few weeks.
One of your life projects is to get wealthy, and you cannot do this all in one hit unless
you win the lottery. So you need a plan of action.
In contrast, it is useful to analyse the situation of people who are stuck, both monetarily
and in spirit, if only to allow you to avoid these errors. This is based on experience of two
decades of helping both winners and temporary losers in the game of life. The term
temporary loser is used because if they could only wake up from Wonderland control,
they could become winners too.

The Temporary Loser Mentality

The temporary losers (Thralls) are frightened. Their lives are dominated by fear. They see
the world as a scary, threatening place and crave security, dullness and mediocrity. They
long for every day to be the same as the last and become scared and upset if even a small
change breaks the monotony of their days. This is the malevolent universe idea. It is the
orientation that the universe is, at root, an evil, dangerous place and that protection and
safety are the most important values.
These people lack visualisation ability. If asked to visualise their future self, they would
stare at you blankly. They are not pretending. They do not even understand what you

170
mean by this exercise. If you force them to try, they will come back with nothing more
than a helpless shrug.
Assuming that you could drag some sort of dream out of them (for example wanting to be
worth a million pounds some day) then they would be wholly incapable of working
backwards from that point to the present, and suggesting actions they might have to take,
starting now, in order to make this come about. Again, they are not faking. There is now
there is the future and in between, a yawning, fathomless chasm a blank.
Even if you were to do it all for them and break the task down into easily manageable
chunks, even write the steps out for them, 1-20, with a check box next to each one they
absolutely lack the discipline even to start on the task, let alone complete the steps.
At the first minor problem, or negative comment from a friend, they will give up. In any
situation which requires a choice between working for a better future, and instant
gratification now, they will unfailingly choose instant gratification. They always choose a
movie or soap-opera over a thinking session; a beer at the bar over planning for a better
tomorrow.
But this is not you, hopefully. If you recognise yourself here, then do not worry because it
is possible to change and get out of this 'stuck' pattern you have been in.
You need to develop the habits of a winner.
You want to enjoy today, but have an even better tomorrow waiting for you. To do this
you must model yourself on winners people who have achieved something in their lives.
This is why you are reading this. It is written by someone who has been there, done that.
It is truly hopeless trying to learn about wealth from broke people.
The term 'loser' is not meant in the usual derogatory sense. By a 'loser' we mean someone
who, by their own definition of winning and losing, is, for the moment, falling well short
of where they want to be.
By a 'winner' we mean someone who, by their own definition of winning and losing, is
pulling ahead of the game and achieving that which they set out to achieve.

The Habits of Successful People

This is how winners operate:
1. They are brave. Like all human beings they feel fear, but have mastered it to a
manageable extent and are able to rise above it in most cases. Whilst they acknowledge
that there are frightening people and places in the world, in general they view the world as
a benevolent place, full of great opportunities and wonderful people. This is a vital
benevolent universe principle for you to cultivate but it is hard to have this when still
trapped in Wonderland.
Winners view the world as mainly benevolent with some bad bits. Losers see the world as
mainly malevolent with some good bits. This is a critical difference in viewpoint. Where
do you stand?
2. They are good visualisers. They have the ability to imagine the future, often in
glorious Technicolor detail.
3. They have high self-esteem, and know that they are worth more than they have at
present. They are not some milk-cow to be exploited by greedy, dictatorial governments or
171
taken advantage of by Type B people. Life to them is an exciting adventure to be lived to
the full. In contrast, losers view life as a terrible chore to be somehow 'got through' with as
little pain as possible and leaving as small an impact as possible. They attempt to creep
unnoticed through life and hope to die without leaving a ripple on the pond. It is a timid,
subservient and self-effacing life. Often such people mask their timidity with a patina of
spiritual loftiness.
4. They are intelligent, rational and logical. If they have a dream of the future, they
know the secret technique for making this happen. Today's dreams are tomorrow's
realities. They know that large projects cannot be tackled by finite human minds unless
they are broken down into manageable, bite-sized pieces. They are able to work
backwards from a future dream to the present day, and to list the logical steps required to
make that dream come true.
5. Having written down the steps required to achieve their goals, they know what is
required next. Action. Up until this point, all of their plans amount to little more than
ethereal hot air. It is action which grounds the circuit and allows the current to flow. They
know that the journey will be long and hard. Any worthwhile dream will involve hard
work, concentrated effort and some suffering. Waking up from Wonderland control is not
easy. They need one more quality which we have discussed already. Discipline. This
keeps them going during setbacks, when the list seems too long, when others heap
derision upon their efforts and when nothing seems to be working out.
Here are some more pointers from the successful.

Five Tips to Turbo-Charge Your Dream

1. Dream of a brighter tomorrow! Your yearning power is more important than your
earning power.
2. Be rational! Mysticism is your mortal enemy. Do not get suckered into magical
thinking where you believe money will be attracted to you without effort. There are
obvious, logical steps between here and realising your dreams. Write them down in bite-
sized chunks and follow them like a route map. Praying, hoping and chanting will not get
you where you want to be. Neither will attracting the energies of the universe or any
other mystical snake-oil designed to put you off track and have you waste your life
energies in the pursuit of a phantasm.
3. Act! All is dust without action. Action is the key.
4. Be disciplined! Life is tough. Fight! Others want you to fail. Ignore them! The
world often seems to go one way. Go your own way! People will spout rubbish and try to
put you off your dream. Dont let them! (Remember, they want you in Wonderland!)
5. Start today! Procrastination is the thief of time. Winners start right now. Losers
chatter to themselves that they will start 'one day real soon.' It never happens. They have a
good idea in the car, but by the time they have pulled into the drive, the idea has been
forgotten.
You are now poised on the threshold of starting on an exciting new life-path. You have
nearly all the tools you need, so let us now complete the practical instructions on getting
wealthy.

172
 Lesson Twelve: Three Ways to Get Wealthy
There is no 'magic' road to riches, so we advise you to stop looking. There are, in fact,
only three ways of making a great deal of money. Here they are:
1. FORCE: Steal it (or other major crime).
2. LUCK: Be given it for free, e.g. inheritance or the lottery.
3. EFFORT: Run your own business.
It goes without saying that we do not want to be using the first method. As it happens,
crime rarely pays anyway. A recent survey of criminals showed that if you include the
average amount of jail time, the equivalent average salary gained through the proceeds of
a life of crime added up to below minimum wage!
Method 2 relies purely on luck and hence it is out of your control. It is obviously
wonderful if you inherit millions or win the lottery. Do not count on it though! The lottery
has rightly been called a tax on the poor. It is the ultimate Thrall panacea giving them
false hope and diverting them from the action required to become wealthy. Feel free to
have a go for fun, but it is a total waste of time and money as a way of getting wealthy.
That just leaves route #3 running your own show. We hope you did not imagine you
could become rich by working hard for someone else!

Only One Real Route to Wealth

For the normal person who does not inherit or receive wealth, there is only one option, and
that is to start your own business and make a success of it even if this business is a one
person show.
The rest of the population are hopelessly trapped wage-slaves who have no chance
whatsoever of becoming wealthy. Most employed people can hardly even pay their way,
let alone accumulate money because the system, Wonderland, is absolutely designed to
ensure their poverty.
The entire system of employment works on the principle of bosses paying the absolute
rock-bottom minimum wage which they can legally get away with. We are not
condemning the capitalist system, in fact we fully support it. We are just pointing out to
you the consequences of being on the wrong side of it; that is employed rather than
freelance. In a free market, the people scramble over each other to work for lower wages
just to ensure that they have got a job. In a recession this tendency increases. This is the
consequence of being a follower, not a creator.
For you, this means that regardless of how skilled you are or how professional you are,
unless you are unique and indispensable there is always someone waiting in the wings to
grab your job at a lower rate. Therefore, by definition, you are being paid the absolute
minimum which can possibly be paid to you. This is exactly as it should be. To demand
more than you are worth on the open market is nothing less than a plea for charity, alms,
special favours or pull. Free markets do not tolerate this. Only bureaucratic government
can cause such distortions.

173
Being Your Own Boss
Contrast this minimum wage with being self-employed, or running your own business.
When you are your own boss, you pay yourself the absolute maximum amount of money
you can and that can be quite a lot.
Faced with this one fact alone, you have to be slightly mad to want to work for someone
else!
The most common reason people give for pulling this stunt is security. But ask yourself
how much job-security is there nowadays?
Another reason people give is that they don't know what business to start. If you have
ever thought of running your own show, or are already running a small business and
struggling away, then here is a golden nugget of advice: there are lots of businesses you
could start, but you need to be highly selective about what you choose to do.
If you really, truly want to run a Hoover spare parts shop then go ahead it is a free
country! The vast majority of small businesses are totally mind-bogglingly dull, dull,
DULL. How the owners drag their weary bodies out of bed each morning to unlock their
Just a Bite sandwich shop, or ACME bait and tackle, we really have no idea at all! We
are often amazed whilst driving along the street to see the sordid collection of drab, dull
little shops and premises, all slaving away to earn a modest crust.

The Point of Running a Business

If you want to be wealthy you have to start a business, but you need to realise that the
object of running your own business is to make big money, work less hard and enjoy it!
There is no point in running some dreary little shop in some rundown area, working
twelve hours a day doing something you hate just to be slightly better paid than average
if you are lucky. 'Being your own boss' is not compensation enough for running this type
of business. It is also small beer and not worthy of you. You should not have to slave for
fiddling small change.
For example, on a nearby industrial estate there is a sandwich lady who runs around with a
small van: Tasty Bite or similar. She makes great sandwiches, but she gets up at 5.30
a.m. to make them, ready to take around the local offices for 9 a.m. 10 a.m. Furthermore,
she sells about 50 sandwiches each morning, at an average price of 2.00 each. Even if it
was all 100% profit (which, of course it isn't), she is making 100 a day at most
probably more like 35 after fuel, tax, insurance etc! You have to be mad or desperate to
get out of bed at 5.30 a.m. and work six or seven hours for 35. But she is happy because
she is 'running her own little business'.
We want to emphasise that it is not enough to be running your own 'little business'.
This is just a rather small-minded ego-trip. Not even a big ego-trip, which would be more
understandable. Most people in business are on an ego-trip by the way. This is because
they are trapped at the ego level of consciousness.
The ideal scenario is to run a business which makes good money for relatively little effort.
Remember that although running a business should be fun, it is (except in rare
circumstances) only a means to an end which is your financial freedom. There is no fun
whatsoever in running the same, tired old business for thirty years which just about keeps
174
you solvent or maybe puts you a touch ahead of the game. The point is to make enough
money to free yourself from the need to ever work again. That is your financial freedom
goal, remember?
When you have enough money so that you do not have to work, then suddenly life
becomes tremendously exciting, fun and challenging. For those not in this situation, life is
tedious, boring and a drudge. After you have your freedom, you can make even more
money to put out your unique vision into the world this is what you were born to do, and
it almost always involves either helping others or helping the planet (which is helping
others indirectly of course).
The vast majority of people are trapped at consciousness level 1 fear driven. They are
swamped by lack-mentality and spend their lives frantically grubbing around for cash to
pay their basic bills.
A minority of people make it to the level of normal businesses which, as has been said,
are mostly ego based. They want to be the boss, to feel top dog, to buy ego toys and show
them off. Most of these people never escape from this trap.
A tiny handful move Beyond Wealth. They are financially free and are using the money to
actualise themselves. That means working on a project (and yes, this can be a business)
which is genuinely making the world a better place.
This is true happiness.

175
 Lesson Thirteen: Choosing Your Lifestyle
This is hugely important. Before you start on the path to wealth you need to know what
level of lifestyle you are aiming for. Without this you will flounder helplessly. Many
people spend decades getting rich and when they arrive they have absolutely no clue at all
about why they are there. This may surprise you, but very often they wake up to find the
wealthy lifestyle they are leading (big house, gardeners, chauffer, etc.) does not suit them
in the slightest. Often they are more miserable than when they were broke.
So you need to put some thought to this now. To assist you we have put together a
selection of lifestyles to help you choose. It is perfectly possible that you do not know
which to choose at this point on your journey. You may be attracted to the super rich
lifestyle without any real notion of what this is all about. It may be just another
Wonderland meme which you have picked up unconsciously and woven seamlessly into
your belief system.
It will come as no surprise to you to learn that the Beyond Wealth lifestyle is the one you
should be aiming for, but this cannot be mandated. That lifestyle will only be attractive if
you are at that level of consciousness. This book gives you the wealth principles and it is
up to you what you do with the money.
Here are the seven main lifestyles...

Lifestyle 1: Broke and Embarrassed

Right away from the title you will realise this is not a lifestyle you would actively select
for yourself. We include it here in case you or someone you know is living it by default.
All lifestyles come with advantages and disadvantages by the way.
Broke and embarrassed is a very poor way to be. In the ultimate age of plenty, this person
has selected poverty. Lurching from pay cheque to pay cheque or living on handouts, they
can barely pay their way through life, living virtually at the bottom of the heap. They live
in the worst area of town; if they have a car it is old and falling to pieces; they default on
their bills and responsibilities (hence the embarrassed bit); they have no spare cash, no
savings. They eat cheaply and poorly, clothe themselves cheaply yet always have money
for their drugs usually some combination of recreational drugs, alcohol and cigarettes.
Their lives are spent slaving, scrounging and entertaining themselves.
What could possibly be the advantages of such a life? The answer is easy. Total
abnegation of responsibility and the avoidance of the difficult task of getting ahead. In
boxing terms they have thrown in the towel. They are quitters and there is an advantage
there because nobody asks you to get up and go out into the ring and start punching again.
Such a person is overwhelmed by fear and lack-mentality. They have no self-belief and
are envious and angry. Needless to say they are completely unaware that they have a gift
to give the world and they have zero spare time or cash to actualise it in any case.
It goes without saying that if this is even slightly your story you must take urgent decisive
action to change this.

176
Lifestyle 2 Broke but Paying Your Way in a Job You Dislike
In this scenario the persons life is much more together. They are not in terrible debt and
they are not sinking. They usually have debts but their income is enough to service these
debts and fund their rather minimal lifestyle. To earn this money they have to enter into
bondage to The Master, who will gladly put them to work for not very much money. At
best they are neutral about their job, at worst they despise and hate it. So their serfdom
comes with an added sting of having to drag themselves through hour after weary hour of
toil with no real end in sight.
This would describe the vast majority (maybe as high as 70%) of the people in the
country. Such people are the bulk of the wage slaves who keep the Wonderland circus
rolling along. They have almost no spare time as they are exhausted at the end of the day.
They usually only have time to eat and then flop down in front of the television for their
daily fix of entertainment and brainwashing. Very little money is saved. To assuage the
horror of their lives they spend all of their spare money on what they are pleased to call
luxuries. In this way they comfort themselves that life is not too bad.

Lifestyle 3 Broke but Paying Your Way in a Job You Like

This is a very special and different version of the lifestyle above.
Here is a very important point. Some gurus say Follow your dream, do what you love and
the money will follow. This is a great situation to be in if you can swing it, but it is fairly
rare. The ultimate life is to have enough income coming in either free from work, or doing
work you love. There is a true saying which was mentioned earlier: If you do what you
love, you will never work again. But... it is a challenge to find something you love to do
and which will make you a lot of money. Far from impossible, but not easy either. For
example you may love to horse ride, or paint in watercolours, or write novels, or dance, or
meditate, or look after kittens or... but you can see that unless you are very good at these
things it will be quite tough to get rich from these (and ten thousand similar) pursuits.
Does this mean you have to give up either great wealth or the things you love to do? Not
at all. You get to choose one, the other or even both.
Lifestyle three is an example of choosing what you love over great wealth and this is a
very viable option. You find a job you quite like (that is easy) and which pays you enough
to live on. Then in your spare time (evenings and weekends) you paint, write or cuddle
kittens. This can result in a happy, if rather a small-scale and relatively powerless, life.
Please note that in theory, this lifestyle could be enjoyed by the person in lifestyle 2 (in a
job they hate) but in practice it is far harder. You can probably see why. After a day spent
at the coal face you will be tired both physically and mentally and will seek anaesthesia
rather than creativity. It is hard (but not impossible) to slave in a job you hate then come
home full of creative energy to do what you love.
To complete this thought, how can we have the money and not do the things we love?
That is easy we deny ourselves the kitten-cuddling and go flat out to get rich. This can
work as long as it does not take us forever to get rich and we can pick up the kittens in a
few years. The danger is obvious we mortgage all of our present creativity and joy for a
future which may or may not come around. We get stuck working for twenty years in
Precision Pipe Bending Services Ltd.
177
Finally, how can we have the money and do what we love?
There are two ways. The first is to find a superb money-making venture which also gives
you amazing joy to be involved with. This is heaven. The second way is to be involved in
a money-making venture which although enjoyable, is not your life-calling. Then you use
your spare time and money to build your dream and do what you love.
This bring us on to:

Lifestyle 4 Ego Toys

This person is working hard and probably making quite good money. They may save a
little but all of the surplus is spent on consumption aimed at enhancing status and ego.
You know the type you may even be the type! They have a decent house, nicely
designed, a top of the range car (or at least a new one), they take exotic foreign holidays at
huge expense, the wardrobe is full of designer clothes, they have a 3,000 watch on their
wrist and so on. All good fun and this lifestyle is far more pleasurable than our first two,
but this person is caught in the ego trap and is still a slave who must work in order to
support this lifestyle. Once again very little thought is given to a dream, a special ability
they have, a way of helping others. Money may be given to others, but this is usually more
ego the benevolent uncle syndrome.

Lifestyle 5 The Seeker

This person has made enough money to live a minimal lifestyle either without working, or
by working maybe a little. They do not need much money because they are on a spiritual
journey. They will spend a lot of free time in meditation, reading, learning or sitting at the
feet of their guru.
This lifestyle is very sustainable and can lead to happiness. It is arguably the best lifestyle
we have discussed so far. It has the advantage of (usually) making you a better person. But
there are two disadvantages. The first is that it is rather weak and powerless, unless you
are a major or minor spiritual teacher. Every hour spent in self-contemplation is an hour
lost for helping others. The more deluded believe, of course, that their vibrations pass
through their sitting room walls and make the world a better place! This is known as a
cop-out! It is an insular, inwardly reflective life which can lead to The Seeker Trap. This
is all very comforting, but there is great need in a world crying out for help whilst you are
sitting on the cushion contemplating the eternal verities.
The trap is that of spiritual pride. It is very easy to imagine that you are better or more
holy than others. This leads you to feel superior to, and increasingly disconnected from,
your fellow travellers.

Lifestyle 6 Financially Free and Glimpsing a Way Forward

Often we pass through several of these lifestyles before settling where we are most
comfortable.
In this lifestyle the person is debt free and comfortable. He or she need never work again
as they have sufficient capital to live off the interest (or have some other unearned
income).

178
They spend a certain amount of time and money playing with toys, entertaining
themselves, taking holidays, shopping and suchlike but increasingly they are dissatisfied
with life and are bored. They are looking for a way to live a more meaningful life. The
amount they give to charity has increased recently (this can often be a proxy for really
helping others) and they are on the lookout for a way to do something meaningful. They
are on the threshold of full awakening into a Beyond Wealth Lifestyle.

Lifestyle 7. Beyond Wealth

The final lifestyle lies Beyond Wealth.
Here, money is not an issue. The Beyond Wealth initiate has all he or she needs. Such a
person will live comfortably but not extravagantly. They have realised that extra money
does not bring increased happiness unless that money is used in the service of the
mankind project. In short, that means helping other people or the planet in some way or
another.
They are in touch with their dream and are realising this in their daily lives. They are
likely to be on a spiritual path also, which transcends ego. These people are notable for
their modesty and lack of ego.
They will have virtually no ego toys and do not crave status, acknowledgement or respect.
They are their own people moving powerfully ahead with their life projects.
They have largely woken up from most of the illusions of Wonderland and are usually
very free thinkers and almost impossible to manipulate and control.
The pursuit of wealth is a goal they have left behind. Their higher consciousness takes
them beyond this goal, hence the title of this book Beyond Wealth. Their primary focus is
helping others.
They are happy, fulfilled and making a difference.
This is not some exalted state attainable only by grand masters. There are millions of such
people and it is a state achievable by you.

Where Are You?

So take a few moments to go through those lifestyles and note where you are and where
you want to be. The trick here is to be honest about where you are and then to follow your
own heart to decide where you would like to be. Obviously we are guiding you firmly
Beyond Wealth, but this may not be for you right now. No shame in that. Store it away in
your mind until you are ready to attain this state. Meanwhile, if you cannot see further
than a fancy car and bigger house, do not try to force it make these things your goals. In
other words, do not write goals because you think you should. Write goals from your
current state of consciousness, knowing that this is likely to change and grow as you
progress. Each one of us passed through the ego toys phase of wealth, so you will be in
good company if you cannot see further than that for the moment!

179
 Lesson Fourteen: X + Y = Z
Here is a brilliantly simple concept and one which is often overlooked by those seeking to
become wealthy.
It is based around the following formula:

X+Y=Z
Where...
X = the amount you are willing to put into the deal.
Y = the percentage gain you want over the period.
Z = the amount you want out of the deal over the period.
This will be explained fully in a moment, but for now you need to understand that the
golden rule associated with this formula which is...
You get to choose TWO out of THREE of the variables (X, Y or Z) but you DONT get to
choose the final variable.
If you choose X and Z (those are the two most commonly chosen) then you dont get to
choose Y that happens automatically.
If you choose X and Y then again you cannot choose Z as this drops out of the sum
automatically.
Looking at the formula, you can see this is just common sense, however it is completely
ignored by most people as we will see.
Before examining that, let us be clear what we mean by the terms X, Y and Z although
hopefully this is clear to you already.

X
This is the amount of money you are willing to put into your money-making venture.
Example: If you save 5,000 in a high-interest account, then X = 5,000.
Example: If you sink 20,000 into a franchise, then X = 20,000.
Example: If you put 35,000 down on a buy-to-let property then X = 35,000.
Hopefully that is now very clear. Its the cash you put in from your own pocket, hoping it
will multiply and bring you a profit.
Another important thing about X is that you cannot make serious money without
investing. X has to have some value. Put another way, you have to be in it, to win it.

Y
This is the percentage gain you expect or need to get over the period in question.
Example: If you can get 6% on your savings, then Y = 6% a year.
Example: If you expect to make 10,000 a year for five years (total 50,000) on your
franchise and then get out, Y = 50% a year or 250% over the five years.
Example: If you intend to keep your property for ten years and hope it has doubled in real
terms, and that you make 10% a year on your money in rental, then your expected return is
35,000 + (3,500 x 10) = 7000 or 200% over ten years (20% a year).

180
Z
This is the amount you want out of the deal over the period. Like the amount you put in, it
is a flat figure.
Example: If you want to make 1,000 a year from savings then Z = 1,000.
Example: If you want to make 50,000 over 5 years from a franchise, then Z = 50,000.
Example: If you want to make 70,000 in ten years from property, then Z = 70,000.
That is all quite simple, as you can see. You may be wondering if it is even worth
mentioning as it is so obvious.
It is worth mentioning because many people pay no attention to it whatsoever, with the
result that they have utterly unrealistic expectations of how long it will take them to get
wealthy.
The most common problem comes in the selection of X and Z. People are very good at
selecting these two. For example, if you ask someone how much money they would like
(Z) they can usually answer fairly quickly. Lets say the answer is a million.
When asked how much cash they have which they are willing to invest in (say) a business
venture to make the million, again they will readily answer. Often it is about 5,000 and
that is reluctantly offered. Remember, most people are totally maxed-out and 5,000
represents fear money to them.
Okay, remember the rule? You get to choose TWO out of three, but you cant choose the
third? So this person has chosen X and Z which means he or she cannot now choose Y
that drops out automatically.
We need one more piece of information from this person how long do you want to wait
for the million? Lets say they answer five years which is fairly typical. After all, theyre
not greedy!
So all we now need to do is plug in the numbers.
5,000 x Y = 1,000,000 in five years.
From that you can easily see that Y is 200 (or 20,000% if you prefer).
It is 4,000% a year!! A truly staggering return on investment and one which is virtually
impossible to achieve.
You can see that this person is living in fantasy land. There is almost no chance that they
will make 20,000% for each of five years!
Suppose we give them the bad news that they must put in a massive 50,000. Will that do
the trick? Lets see...
50,000 x Y = 1,000,000 in five years.
So Y = 20 (or 2,000% if you prefer 400% a year!)
Hopefully you will agree that 400% a year is super-impressive and way past what most
businesses and investments could hope to achieve. It gets a lot less if you compound the
figures year on year, but hopefully you are getting the message which is: do not pick
unrealistic combinations of X and Z. Do not say you have 1,000 spare cash and want to
make 300,000 in the next 24 months. It is most unlikely to happen.
If you pick the amount of money you want and then pick a realistic rate of return, that
dictates how much you must put into the deal.
Example: If you want 50,000 in 12 months and you reckon you have a wheeze to triple
your money (300% a year which is going some) then youll need to put in 16,600 or
thereabouts. Theres no point in turning up with 500.

181
Example: If you have a nifty scheme to quadruple your money in a year (again, thats
really going some) and you have 3,000 in spare cash then guess what? Z (the amount you
can make) is just 12,000 in that year.
So please keep this simple formula in mind when contemplating any money-making
venture.

182
 Lesson Fifteen: Working Your Niche
We have introduced you to the idea of running your own business. Here is a little tip to
help you decide what to do.
There is a fortune to be made from niche marketing. Every business is a niche, or course,
but some are absolutely huge and some are tiny.
A niche is a specific, specialised market with lots of fanatical buyers and only a few
specialised sellers. The buyers tend to buy again and again and again.
You need to narrow your market down to a particular niche. Do not make the mistake of
trying to sell to everybody; you cannot, because not everybody will want to buy no matter
how great your product. Think how huge the Coca-Cola market is and yet even they do
not sell to everybody by a long way. You are looking for a market that is not fully
exploited. This will be your niche and can be in anything from gardening and sports to
business opportunities and software, so long as people want to buy it.
Properly worked, your niche could be the equivalent of a pure seam of gold in a gold mine
you can follow that seam for years and mine its rich content.
Now if you had this seam of gleaming gold, would you pick away at it only for long
enough to extract a few nuggets before deciding that you had had enough and search for
another mine?
No! Great wealth is staring you in the face! You would extract every last scrap of gold that
you possibly could from that seam before you even thought about looking elsewhere. Yet
this is what people often do with their niche (seam of gold); they work it to a shallow
depth before they give up and try and find another niche to make money from. They then
stand amazed when a new prospector comes along and makes a fortune from their
abandoned gold mine.
The trick is to find your niche, work it to its full depth and to concentrate most of your
efforts only on this one rich seam whilst simultaneously planting a few other seeds to see
how they grow.
Do not dilute your efforts by diverting serious time and attention to other niches; you will
be throwing money away. Plant lots of seeds, yes, but spend only a small percentage of
time nurturing them and keep your main focus on the working mine.
Only when you have completely exhausted the mine should you abandon it and search
abroad for further riches and here your seeds will come in handy.

183
 Lesson Sixteen: Choose The Ideal Business
You now know that in order to become wealthy you must start your own business.
How do you decide which business? Look for a need there are plenty of those. People
are lazy, lazy, lazy they want others to sort out their problems. They will pay you to sort
out their problems. The 'problem' can be entertaining their children on a Sunday, keeping
their house warm, feeding themselves, getting fit, having the grass mowed or any one of
ten thousand others problems.
Pick your problem (need). Find a solution. Find a creative solution. Find a new solution.
Just a small amount of creativity is required. You do not need to invent anti-gravity in
your back shed.
Finding a solution requires that you....think. Most people drift through life on a survival-
level of consciousness. They rarely engage their rational mind and set it to work on a task.
This is why there are so many opportunities. The field is wide-open for you to come along
and scoop up the cash they are offering.
If you fill a need in a creative way, and enough people have that need (you must have a
sizeable niche market) then you will become very wealthy.
You are a human being. It is your nature to survive by using your rational mind. You must
think and then act in order to survive. You must engage your brain food does not just
come to you. Humans are not grazing animals. Lunch requires planning. You must
scheme. You must plan. You must act.
Thinking acting; thinking acting. This is the way we function. This is how we survive
as a species. Only in our current collectivist society do we allow people the luxury of non-
thought and to escape the consequences of their self-imposed blank-out.
In the countless millennia of human history, it is only in this century that we buffer people
from the consequences of their non-action; their laziness and their stupidity. In any other
century, the 'wake-up' call would have come, and swiftly!

Thinking and Acting

What does that mean for you? The 'thinking' part means taking the trouble to look around
you and open your eyes to the countless opportunities there are. If you cannot do this then
the consequences for you are a life of third-rate mediocrity. You will never rise above the
common herd. You will be normal in every respect. A normal house, a normal car, a
normal (= zero) bank balance. Becoming wealthy needs your concentrated, ongoing,
focused effort. It is not a plaything to divert your attention for five minutes.
Next, you need action. Most people cannot master this one it is far too hard for them.
You see, we live in a physical world which has a tendency to decay into a random warm
soup of molecules. This is entropy at work. Only energy, such as that supplied by living
creatures, can temporarily reverse this process and build structures. Food, clothing,
shelter, 'toys' all require energy to make them exist. All require human action.
Without action, everything is dust and decay.
Thinking is not enough. To complete the equation, you need action. YOU MUST DO
SOMETHING.

184
Here is the 'startling secret' of success in business.
1. Think.
2. Act.
Most people do neither (in a concerted, meaningful way of course).
Some act without thinking. No good.
Some think and never act. No good.
The winners, the rich, the successful all think first (come up with a creative solution to a
human need) and then they act (put that idea into a real, tangible program of action). This
is what you must do if you wish to join them.
Is this too hard for you? Then please, do yourself and everyone else a favour and stop
talking about 'one day' becoming wealthy. This is a delusion because you are not prepared
to pay the price. The price is thought followed by action. If you do want to become
wealthy, then start now today. Look around you particularly if you are employed. Every
company has a long list of 'needs' which it cannot fulfil due to:
1. Limited imagination of the directors, owners or managers.
2. Laziness.
3. Lack of time.
4. Lack of resources.
5. They see this opportunity as small beer and not worth bothering with.
The reasons do not matter. This gives you an opportunity. Countless thousands of new
businesses are started each year by the workers at a firm realising that the customers had a
need which was not being fulfilled by the present operation. They spotted this need, and
set to work straight away (action) to fulfil it. The thing to avoid is getting trapped in a
business for thirty years doing something you hate. If the business you are contemplating
is not your ultimate dream, then thats fine you just need to use it as a vehicle to make
maximum money in minimum time to propel yourself towards financial freedom then
you can put your dream into action.

Which Business to Start

But what business should you start? Many people rush into the first idea that comes their
way and end up regretting it. Remember most business owners have bought themselves a
high stress, minimum wage job.
Here are some key things to consider when choosing your business, you might not be able
to tick all the boxes of course:
1. The ideal business sells to the world, rather than a single neighbourhood or even
a single city or county. In other words, it has (in principle) a global market. This does not
mean that everyone is a potential buyer. Remember we work in niches? But your niche
should ideally be global. Today this is more important than ever, since world markets have
now opened up to an extent unparalleled in your lifetime. How many times have you seen
a retail store that has been doing well for years then another bigger and better retail store
moves nearby, and it finishes off the first store?
The smaller and more local your market, the smaller the profit you can make and the more
vulnerable you are to change. And change is the norm now, not the exception.
185
2. The ideal business offers a product which enjoys an inelastic demand.
Inelastic refers to a product that people need or desire almost regardless of price.
You should sell to peoples desires, not to their needs. People will pay far more to have
their dreams fulfilled than they will for the basic necessities of life. Low margin, high
volume businesses are a nightmare and you should avoid them leave that to the big boys
with vast resources, deep pockets and a suicidal tendency to slug it out in a price war.
Instead, seek lowish volume (but unlimited global marketplace) high margin products.
3. The ideal business sells a product which cannot be easily substituted or
copied. This means that the product is an original or at least it is something that can be
copyrighted or patented.
The world is bursting with people who are prepared to cheat and steal their way to a
fortune. Creation takes sincere effort. Copying saves a lot of bother. These plagiarists live
by the motto: Hard work pays off tomorrow, but laziness pays off today! So if your
product is easily copied, for almost zero cost, then there will be a long queue of people
lining up to copy your work. The ideal business should not sell any products which can
easily be reduced to a bit-stream as these are easily stolen and sold or given away on line
as downloads. Sell a seminar rather than an e-book.
4. The ideal business has minimal labour requirements (the fewer personnel, the
better). Today's example of this is the much talked about 'Virtual Corporation.' The Virtual
Corporation may consist of an office with one or two employees, where literally all
manufacturing and services are farmed out to other companies. The ultimate business
consists of just you and your laptop.
5. The ideal business enjoys low overhead. It does not need an expensive office or
factory; it does not need large amounts of electricity, advertising, legal advice, high priced
employees, large inventory etc. This is why most businesses fail they are crippled by the
high overhead at a time when they are struggling to make a profit.
6. The ideal business does not require big cash outlays or major investment in
equipment. In other words, it does not tie up your capital (incidentally, one of the major
reasons for a new business failing is under-capitalisation).
Because the world is so rapidly changing, you do not want to be involved in a business
which requires a large capital investment. The days of investing 250,000 in (say) the
latest 5-colour printing machine and hoping to pay it back over ten years, are gone. Ten
years is a lifetime. Anything could happen next year, let alone a decade away! Besides,
this is all jam tomorrow. Why should you invest a fortune now and hope to get it back
next decade? It does not make sense in this economy.
You need to be nimble, flexible, light on your feet, ready to twist and turn with the tide.
You do not want to be bogged down with a large number of staff, vast echoing premises
and outdated expensive machinery.
7. The ideal business enjoys cash billing. In other words, it does not tie up capital
with lengthy or complex credit terms.
Many businesses go broke because they cannot get their customers to pay, despite offering
an excellent service. You should aim to get your money first and deliver later. The mail
order business is ideally suited to this, of course. In most businesses, you do a first-class

186
job and then grow old waiting for them to pay you. This ties up huge amounts of capital as
you finance their bad-debts. In mail order and much of retail you get paid immediately.
8. The ideal business is relatively free of all kinds of government and industry
regulations and restrictions (and if you are now in your own business, you most
definitely will have experienced this).
We are beset on all sides by government and bureaucratic jobsworths all limiting what we
can do with our businesses. No matter what the industry, their number one nightmare is
government tentacles stuck into every crevice of their company. Regulations cover
everything from how much you pay your employees (minimum wage) to how you can fire
duff employees (basically, you cant). They cover the number of toilets you have, the
width of your doors, the wheelchair ramps and fire escapes you must install, the smoke
detectors, the lighting, heating, etc.
9. The ideal business is portable or easily movable. This means you can take
your business (and yourself) anywhere you want to.
This is the PT (Perpetual Traveller) principle invented by the late Harry Schultz and
continued by Bill Hill. The perfect business is one which can be run on a laptop. You want
to be able to snap the laptop shut, pick up your briefcase and leave town or even the
country. When arriving at a distant location, you plug in the laptop, connect to the
Internet, and off you go again. The ideal business can be run from a hotel room or a deck
chair on the beach.
As regulation and bureaucracy move in to stifle your initiative, you just vote with your
feet and move your ass and assets elsewhere. To your customers, nothing has changed.
They didn't know where you were located in the first place!
10. Here is a crucial one that is often overlooked; the ideal business satisfies your
intellectual and often emotional needs. There is nothing as good as being fascinated
with whatever you are doing. When that happens you're not working, you're having fun.
You must have a passion for your business otherwise you will never drag yourself out of
bed each morning to run it.
Making money is hard. Making big money is very tough. You must believe in what you
are doing and positively enjoy it day to day, otherwise the big bucks will forever elude
you. You need to be totally motivated and focused to make several million. You cannot do
it if you despise your work and products, or you are bored by them. So first find
something you are passionate about, or very interested in, and then find a way of making
money out of your passion.
11. The ideal business leaves you with free time. In other words, it does not require
your labour and attention 12 hours a day.
The older you get, the more important this becomes. Life is for living, not working. You
work to make maximum money in minimum time at something you really enjoy. You do
not want to postpone all your happiness and enjoyment to some remote future date,
perhaps when you retire. It will be too late by then. We work harder and are certainly
under more stress than perhaps at any time in the past. We are not digging the fields for 12
hours a day, but most people's lives are a frantic whirl of activity with precious little time
for enjoyment. Most people have little peace in their lives. They have a lot of stress, a lot

187
of worry and a lot of angst. Despite working flat out, most people are flat broke too.
Something is very, very wrong with the way we are handling the balance between work
and real life.
There is no point in making ten million if it consumes every waking moment for twenty
years, and you have no friends, no family contact and you miss your kids growing up.
Many wealthy people have made this mistake. You need to find a way to make a lot of
money and have time for other things too. It is possible.
12. Super important: the ideal business is one in which your earnings are not
limited by your personal output (e.g. lawyers and doctors have this problem despite
being very highly paid). No, in the ideal business you can sell 10,000 customers as easily
as you can sell one. Publishing is a good example.
This is known as 'gearing.' No matter how high an hourly rate you charge, you will never
become wealthy as a consultant, or running any business limited by the hours which you
can personally contribute. Examples: Lawyers, psychiatrists, dentists, consultants, doctors;
all one-person trades (plumbers, electricians, decorators, etc.) and many others. Publishing
is an ideal example of gearing because you write the item once, and then print as many
copies as you can find customers, thereby multiplying your effort.
That is the complete list. Examine your business (or proposed business) and see how it
matches against the check list below. If you are starting a business, check it against this
list before starting.

The Ideal Business Check List

Does the business you are currently operating, or are thinking of operating:
Have the potential to sell to a global niche market?
Offer a product which enjoys an inelastic demand?
Sell a product which cannot be easily substituted or copied?
Have a minimal labour requirement?
Enjoy low overhead?
Not require big cash outlays or major investment in equipment?
Enjoy cash billing?
Have relative freedom from all kinds of government and industry regulations and
strictures?
Offer portability or is easily movable?
Satisfy your intellectual and emotional needs?
Leave you with free time?
Not limit your earnings by your personal output?

188
Lesson Seventeen: The 12- Piece Jigsaw to Financial Freedom
Becoming wealthy is not usually a one-shot deal, rather it is a carefully constructed matrix
with several elements. People get this so wrong. They think that just one idea or one lucky
break will propel them into the rich league where they can rest without further effort.
Nothing could be further from the truth.
So let us look together at some of the elements of this wealth jigsaw.

JIGSAW PIECE #1: Property

Property will always be part of the matrix of financial freedom. As we will see it is both a
hedge against inflation and the perfect way of having a secure income in your retirement.
But not all property is a good investment in fact over 90 percent of property is a poor
investment. Like all investments, property must be chosen carefully. It is a myth that any
fool can make money out of property you have to choose wisely.
Very few people understand exactly how the property market works. They just notice that
over the last 30 years it has gone up in value and so they instinctively think it must be a
good thing.
The dynamics of the property market are not as straightforward as many people think.
It is important to understand that the property market is not just one market. To talk about
the UK property market as if it were one entity makes little sense. London for example
could be a different country from the rest of the UK, that is how different London property
is. Nearly 50% of property in London is foreign owned.
One obvious way to make money from property is to buy a place and rent it out. It is the
rental market that has driven the buy to let market. That dynamic has made the difference,
aided and abetted by banks willingness to lend money. The hope is, of course, that the
property will enjoy a capital gain and that the rental income will more than cover the
outgoings.
Property will always play a part in your investment portfolio but it is important to
remember that the entry and exit costs are high (legal fees, estate agents fees, stamp duty
etc.) and selling times can be very long, particularly if you need to get out in a hurry.
In the easy money era many thought they would make a fortune from buy to let. There
are still buyers who think they can buy a property, rent it out and it will shoot up in capital
value and make them rich overnight. But property is a long term investment it always
has been. The property market is not a market for poor people. In the good times maybe
but in the bad times it can wipe you out. Leverage works both ways you can make big
money and you can lose big money.

Other Peoples Money

Here is how that works: in the good times you use Other Peoples Money (OPM)
borrowed at a reasonable interest rate to buy as much property as you are able. The capital
gain over the next few years massively exceeds the interest on the money you have
borrowed. Eventually you cash out your chips and retire. But in the bad times, money gets
expensive and property prices fall. Soon your cash flow is negative and you find you are

189
paying out more in interest than you are getting in rent. If prices fall too much you can slip
into negative equity and the bank can call in the loan, leaving you to take the hit.
Cautionary tale: At the time of writing, an acquaintance has just lost 4million of his
money in the following way. He owned a property worth 12million on which he had
8million financed and 4million of his own money. Right now money is extremely tight,
commercial property prices are falling and banks are not lending (most banks are bust at
the time of writing). The bank called in his loan on a 30-day clause. Their justification was
that they now valued the property at well under 10million and so the loan-to-value ratio
exceeded their safety margins. As we will see, this is rubbish and they are playing a
greedy game called how to steal 2-4mllion in 30 days or less.
Their actions meant he had two choices. First choice: raise 8million in 30 days with
another lender. No chance of that in the current climate. Second choice: sell the property
in 30 days or less and pay off the bank. No chance of that, the market is totally stagnant.
Final choice, hand the property to the bank and walk away. This is the choice the bank
wanted and this is what he had to do. The bank will sell that property, at their leisure, for
between 10 and 12 million thereby pocketing between 2 and 4million for themselves.
They are currently repeating this stunt with thousands of properties. Very nasty, but
typical of greedy banks who are utterly focused on money. End of cautionary tale.

When to Buy
If prices are falling and you are cash rich, this is a buying opportunity. But only buy
distressed property at 25% under current market value. There are tens of thousands of such
properties in a falling market.
So the time to buy is as early as possible in a rising market, or as late as possible in a
falling market. The worst time to buy is at the top of a bubble there is only one way to
go from there.
It is unlikely that UK property will ever crash. The fundamentals are just against it.
There is still a massive shortage of property. Four million people in the UK are now on the
social housing list. That is 1.6million households, so demand is still there. Couples are
separating at ever increasing rates and that doubles the number of houses needed.
Immigration is massive and the UK population is still rising.
There is a pent-up demand but money is still tight and this is what is stemming the flood.
If you buy a house for cash and do not rent it you really are in the property market.
There is no other variable on that property but the expected capital gain. You are in the
property business because if house values go up you make a profit.
If you take out a mortgage for 70% of the property, you need to be clear, you are not in the
property market you are in the rental market.
If you fund your mortgage by the rent you receive, then no rent means you can say
goodbye to your property as it will be repossessed after a certain interval. If this is you,
understand that you are not in the property market, you are in the rental market. They are
two completely different things.

190
You must understand the rental market and you must understand what that market is like
in your area. If you have a mortgage of any significance you are in the rental business.
And that is what will make or break you. Capital gain is just the icing on the cake.

How Good a Rental Proposition is Your Rental Property?

Pretend to be a renter. Go and take a look at the kind of properties you are buying for
rental. Look at the competition. See it from the point of view of the people upon whom
you totally depend those to whom you are hoping to rent.
Whats the competition like in your chosen market? If you were renting would you rent
the property you have bought with a view to letting it out? If you wouldnt then you have
got a problem.
Do you need to spend 500 cleaning the walls and replacing the carpet? If so, get on with
it!
This is a business so get out there and work it. The concept of the armchair landlord
makes no sense unless you want to give most of your money away to a full service
agency. The basic minimum due diligence you can possibly do is to see your business
from your customers point of view.

Property Works For You All the Time

If you employ people in a business, they work for you some of the time. Property works
for you all of the time. The only difference is it does not need bank holidays or time off
sick. It is always out there working long after you are too old to work; it gives you a
chance to earn money without taking up your time. It will make money 24 hours a day 7
days a week.
So why is it that many people end up with properties that do not do that?
If you have a lot of lemons in your portfolio someone has not been doing their due
diligence. That person would be you. You were probably suckered-in with phrases like
armchair investing and it is just a box that makes you money. Sometimes it is but
most times it needs a bit more TLC than that if it is to be successful.
It is not what you ask, its who you ask. Do not ask the guy who is selling you the property
how much you will get in rent, he or she will most likely tell you what you want to hear;
ask someone independent. The easiest way to do it is to just be the person you are going to
rent the property to. Thats right, be a potential tenant. You will see your market as it
really is not how you think it is.
Understand the basics of what you are getting into. Do not worry about the minutiae; do
not worry about choosing the curtains or the bed linen. It is not about the cost of purchase
that is not important. It is not about the interest rates or even the mortgage deal they
are not important either.
So what is? The rent is the only thing that matters.
And that is why you can buy lovely property in Bulgaria for 75k. Is 75k cheap? Similar
property in London is a million and half; is that dear? It is relative value that counts. And
it is relative to the rent. If nobody wants to rent the property at 6% or more of its value
each year then its a pup.

191
It is all about who wants it and how much you can rent it out for.
Do not try and find the deal of the century. You are far better off finding property that is
quality.
Do not worry about who you rent to, there is a market for students, business clients and
retired people. Do not think Id want to live in that or I dont like the look of that
house. It is not for you. You are not going to live in it. You have to buy property that
appeals to your market at a price they will pay. The people who want to rent properties,
who want to play golf in Spain for example, are not looking at it the same way as you are
looking at it they just want a place to rent. Thats right, in this instance it is a box that
makes money.
Decide what you want it for. Decide what you are buying it for, i.e. which rental market.

Basic Drivers
By 2026 it is estimated 70% of all homes will be for single people. There will be 1 million
too few homes to accommodate them.
Basic Drivers for the rental and property market are
Is there a shortage in the area you are looking at?
Is there a need?
Is there a desire?
Is there the money around?
What will it be like 5 years from now?
If you are in an area where there is a glut, the prices will fall. We all know that, but there
is another side to this. History tells us that if there is a glut the builders stop building. That
will lead to a shortage.
Everything is short term or cyclical, if you like.
So, you should be buying when prices go down. Not when you see them go up. This buy
low philosophy should permeate your entire investment strategy.

Your Future and Property

What percentage of your total wealth is in the house you live in?
Understand this is not property investment, because you live in it. When you buy for
yourself you do not buy with the same business criteria as when you buy a BTL. You
always pay the top price for starters. How do we know? Because if someone would have
paid more than you, they would have got the house not you. Secondly, you do not consider
rentable criteria like where are the nearest shops and public transport. Thirdly you buy
high maintenance. Thatch roof? Ah how perfect! People say they bought for 400k and
sold for 500k but they never tell you how much the replacement windows cost. They
never mention the endless hours spent on the garden and the endless list of improvements
they have made. Neither do they mention the total lack of rental income on their 400k!
Or the hefty mortgage payments they made for ten years.

192
Property has the potential for an ordinary person to make a million pounds. As a
comparison for swapping time for money, it takes some beating.
But it does not mean any idiot can buy property and can make money.
Chosen wisely it is one foundation piece of the wealth puzzle.

JIGSAW PIECE #2: Take a Position

This part of the jigsaw is all about taking a position big enough that if the market turns in
your favour then you hit the jackpot.
If property goes down 50% in the next 2 years how does that affect you?
If it doubles how does it affect you? If you have no position, the answer has to be not at
all and you should waste no time worrying about property prices.
If gold doubles in the next four years how will it affect you? If you are talking about gold
or about property and yet you do not have a position then there is little point in talking
about either.
If anything goes up (or down) and you are not in it, well, it doesnt really matter what
happens to the price does it? If youre not in it you cant win it. Rich people are in
everything they constantly take a position. Poor people constantly talk about taking a
position but only to impress dinner guests!
In a nutshell if you know about a 14-1 dead-cert at Cheltenham there is absolutely no
point in putting 10 on that horse. The gains are just not worth bothering about. You have
not taken a serious position on that investment.
Let us go back to property for a minute. If you knew the property you are about to buy
would not increase in real terms for 5 years, a lot of people would say forget it. If you
knew it would never increase (in real terms) most people would back off. Yet if you rented
it out and paid off the mortgage with the rent you would own it after 20 years and you now
have a valuable asset and one which could pay you an excellent pension for the rest of
your life.
House prices do not have to go up in value to be a good investment!
When a business invests in things like equipment the value goes down overnight. The
concept of it going up in value is beyond comprehension for most businesses.
But that is exactly what we do. We look to put as much spare cash as we possibly can into
things that have the potential to make us a great deal of money. What things? Here are a
few examples: gold, silver, stocks, property, business opportunities anything that can
quantum leap you closer to financial freedom.
You have to take a position if you want to see the gains. One thousand pounds in gold
does not mean you have taken a position! You will feel like a complete fool when your
prediction comes true when gold doubles in value and you are holding a mere 2k.
Rich people all have stories of courage and massive gains they have made in a particular
sector. They are the kind of stories that keep you up late into the night listening to them
with your eyes wide open. Poor people never take these sorts of chances. They are always
spending their money on consumer items that lose value the moment they walk out of the
shop. Many of these purchases are to make others, or even themselves, think they are rich.
Very sad.
193
In contrast, rich people do the exact opposite. Rich people put money aside and then invest
that money in areas they hope will go ballistic in the coming years. They win some, they
lose some but on the whole, they win.

JIGSAW PIECE #3: Optimization

This is the easiest way for almost everyone to boost their income overnight.
The jigsaw piece called Optimisation is not about doing something new, its about making
the most of what you have got. It comes in two shades reduce your outgoings by cutting
your bills or increase the value/price of what you are bringing to the market.
Optimize the current bills you are paying. Car insurance, best gas deal, best Broadband
deal.
Most people are too busy to do that. They are too busy making someone else rich to
sort out their own finances.

Product Optimization
If you are in business, how do you know you have fully optimised the price of your
products?
Could you double the price?
Remington doubled the price of their shavers. Sales went through the roof. You can do
this with any product where the perceived value could be a lot higher than the current
price.
Are you optimising all of your outgoings and income?
You must put aside one day every year and optimise every one of your outgoings and your
income streams.
Most ordinary people can make a 10% improvement in their finances just by optimisation.
That does not sound a lot but if someone knocked on your front door on January 1st each
year and handed you 2,000 you would be quite pleased! It amounts to the same thing.

How To Boost Your Investments Returns By 50%+

Tax optimization is a very valuable exercise. Do you use your annual capital gains tax
allowance for example? Do you even know what it is?
If you put your spare money into savings you will be taxed. As you know, you are allowed
to earn so much without paying tax. You are also allowed to earn so much without paying
capital gains tax. You can make 10,000 or so in capital gains (depending on when you
are reading this) and not pay any tax at all. And yet people insist on making all their
money as earned income and by doing so pay tax at their nominal rate on every penny of
that income.
Everyone should make sure they use their annual capital gains exemption.
If you save money and you get interest from those savings you will get taxed on it.
But move it over to a capital gains environment and you will not pay a single penny.
Once a year sit down and ask, Am I making my money sweat or am I just giving it
away?

194
That is the springboard for you to optimize your household and business finances. Do not
dismiss it is trivial. If you cannot pay attention to these smaller matters you are
unlikely to have the focus needed to get rich.

JIGSAW PIECE #4: Plant a New Seed Today

One reason why rich people get rich and poor people stay poor is because the rich plant
seeds whilst the poor eat their seed corn.
The difference between your average successful entrepreneur and the rest of the world is
that successful entrepreneurs plant seeds. They plant lots of them in fact, whilst
concentrating most of their efforts on their current gold mine project.
The analogy is that you plant, and you nurture, and you water. Half of those seeds will die
despite your tender ministrations. That is to be expected because this is a numbers game.
The problem is, if you only plant one or two seeds in your entire life you are so protective
about these little darlings that you cannot let go. You love them like they are your
children. You give them credit and love that they do not deserve because the truth is,
many of them should have been abandoned long ago.
When you plant seeds on a regular basis then they are just another seed and if they refuse
to grow, fine, you let them die and you plant some more.
If you only plant one or two seeds you will take huge possession; huge ownership. It
cramps your decision making and your ability to act rationally.
Make your seed ideas simple to understand.

Deals Should be Easy to Explain

If you cannot tell someone about a deal in one or two sentences, chances are it is not a
good deal. All great deals are short, sharp and simple to understand.
Examples might go like this:
Im buying property in Nottingham because theres a huge shortage.
The market collapsed in Birmingham, theres an oversupply so Im buying on the
dip.
I got into the shoe industry because I know a lot about it and can see an amazing
opportunity being missed by my employers.
I started selling beach balls down on the beach because nobody else was doing it
and there is amazing demand.
All simple propositions. Do not overcomplicate things. Keep it simple, you know where
you are.
If a deal goes wrong just get out and move on. The mental anguish of holding on to any
lemon will ultimately exhaust you.
Should you keep a lemon property? Dead easy to answer. Just ask yourself What is the
rental potential?
The value of the property is less important.
Ask: Can I rent it out and for how much? If the answer is yes, and it will make a profit
or at least wash its face, then keep going. If not get out there are far more things you can
195
be doing with your money. Another question to ask: Would I buy this property right now
if I did not own it already? If the answer is no, sell it.
If you made a mistake when you bought and you are going to lose 20,000 get out and
make that money back somewhere else. Business and property can give you big money
in property terms 20,000 is not a big hit.
You see it is just a deal, it is just a seed. Practice non-attachment.
There is nothing wrong with admitting you have made a mistake. The worst thing you can
do is stay in there for the next ten years, losing sleep over it, and all that time your money
is tied up when it could be making money elsewhere.
Do not let these business ideas consume you. These are not your children, they are just
seeds you planted. Making money should be fun, not a chore.
Let it go, and go and make some money let us plant some seeds every month or two
you must aim to plant at least one new seed.

JIGSAW PIECE #5: Gold and Silver

Nothing gets simpler than buying a lump of gold.
A lot will depend on when you are reading this of course but one thing will not change
precious metals are real money, everything else is fake.
There is no tax to pay if your gold increases in value either because it is viewed as a
capital gain and you will only ever sell enough to keep you under your yearly allowance.
You do not get a dividend or a yield cheque. But you havent got somebody bleeding you
for service charges either.
Some people are fearful that the gold will be stolen. They would rather leave their money
with someone else like a financial institution! Totally safe there, right?
Very few people own gold. Most people are selling gold. Putting it in envelopes and
sending it to someone who gives them half its value.
Let us look at the value of gold over time and when we as investors should buy:
In 2001 gold was $300 an ounce and it remained at $300 an ounce for three years. How
would you feel if you invested in something that did not move for three years?
The answer is you have got to be in the game; taking a position. You must have a
strategy. The best thing to happen once you started to invest in gold is for the price of gold
to fall. If it goes down or stays the same you are buying it at the right time.
In 2004 it was $400 an ounce. 2005 it was $500 an ounce. In 2006 it was $600 an ounce
and 2008 it was $800, 2009 it was $900 and 2010 it was $1100. 2011 it is $1500 and
rising.
Throughout this entire period governments were selling gold. The banks were selling.
They had an agreement about how much gold they would sell. They told us.
Why would they do that?
What happens to gold when you have a huge amount coming onto market like that? It
should go down. It went up.

196
Now it has all changed. Governments are not selling gold, the banks have stopped as well
now they are buying. Pension funds are buying gold. If gold can do that, you know it is a
solid investment.
Gold has gone up and dipped in small troughs over the last seven years but it has gone up
overall.
Gold has proven itself for thousands of years.
A golden sovereign will be worth more in ten years than it is now. Paper money will not.
Your savings will likely have decreased in real terms due to inflation.
Get into commodities. People need commodities. But if you are new to this, gold is easy to
start with.

Gold and Insurance Where do I Keep my Gold?

If you insure gold you will be required to buy a safe and put the gold in it. If you buy a lot
of gold, do not put it all in the safe. Hollow out a piece of wood and put it in your garage.
It is safer there, than it is in the safe. You do not have to take possession if it scares you.
Take possession of at least half of it though. If times get really tough you need physical in
your hand gold, not a receipt from a distance bullion storage depot.

Buying Gold When Prices Dip

Buy on dips. What happens when you cannot catch the dips? The dips are not low, say
840 last week and then 873 a week later, so if you missed a dip it shoots back to where
it was few weeks ago. You will get another chance.
Gold has been a good investment for the last seven years. It can only go up in value. It
originally fell in value because people lost interest in gold due to paper money.
Have we reached peak gold in mining terms? We are producing less gold each year than
we have ever before. It is getting harder to extract and harder to find. That can only do one
thing for the price.

Paper Money
Paper money devalues and it is set to seriously devalue in the coming years as
governments crank up the presses to buy their way out of the financial black hole. There is
hardly a single currency in the world that has not been devalued to a small fraction of its
value. For example, the dollar has lost 97% of its value in 97 years and amazingly, the
dollar is one of the better performing currencies in the world.
The problem is it devalues so slowly that people do not notice. But stop! Just think back to
when you were a child. How much pocket money did you get and what would it buy? That
is why after 40 years of pay rises you are not much better off. Your salary keeps going up
every year, if you are lucky, but inflation means the purchasing power of your salary has
not changed.
Ever wondered why you are always broke? It is because of inflation eating away at your
salary and your savings.
Inflation means that you are not really making a gain it is only perceived value. When
savings in the bank are giving you 4% return, inflation is 4%. If you are getting a 15%

197
return, inflation is at 15%. Inflation, by the way, is calculated, deliberate theft of your
money by governments as we saw earlier.
So when people say they are living off the interest they are not, because inflation wipes
out profit.
Gold has kept well above inflation level.

Investment Risk
Investments are risks, we have to look at the worst and the best that can happen. For gold
the worst that can happen is not particularly bad. The best? It has already doubled four
times. It could easily double another four times. Gold and silver will go up massively in
the coming years why? Because governments keep printing paper money.
Of course, gold is a two play bet.
You are buying gold and playing the gold market, and you are also playing the exchange
rate between the dollar and the pound.
Gold is the exact opposite of paper money. Paper money has no intrinsic value, it is only
because I can swap this paper money for something that it is worth something. But it
devalues just remember what you used to get for your pocket money.
An ounce of gold today is worth a new decent quality suit. You can swap an ounce of gold
for a suit. Guess what? You could do the same 200 years ago and today. Now take money
out of your pocket and ask how much you could buy with that amount ten years ago and
what can you buy with it today?
Inflation is the elephant in the room it is one of the biggest government scams of all time
and no one seems to notice.

Future Plan
You need to have a plan with all of your investments, not just gold. You need to have an
exit strategy. When you buy gold you need to know why you bought it and when you
would sell it. So when should you sell? One good system that many people use is if they
buy something and it doubles in value they sell half of their investment. Because the price
has doubled you actually get back all of your money and have the same amount still riding
the market. That is one good approach. Another is to let your winners ride, particularly if
the signs are good which they are for gold.
What affects the gold price? Many things. It is more than something we turn into
jewellery, although the jewellery trade, particularly in places like India, makes a big
difference. Indian relatives give gold to the married couple because it is the only thing of
value. Here in the UK we give an electric toaster how stupid have we become that we
have forgotten the value of real money?
Buying your first gold and silver can feel odd. You send your cheque off to someone you
have never heard of and some weeks later a piece of gold turns up in the post. Well you
hope it is gold it could be gold painted lead for all you know!
It doesnt feel right at first, it feels odd. But when you have your first piece of gold,
buying the second piece is just a little bit easier. It feels more natural. By the time you
have bought your fifth piece it will feel like the most normal thing in the world.

198
The smallest piece of gold you can realistically buy and take possession of is a sovereign.
It is legal tender. As legal tender there is no capital gains tax here in the UK.
Of course, if you buy Krugerrands (1oz gold coins), that is a currency in South Africa but
it is not legal tender in UK and so you pay capital gains tax on any increase in value.
A Kruger is one ounce of gold. The bar is 33 ounces.
So, if the price of gold were to fall this week, should you sell? You need to ask if you
exchange gold for paper money, what are you going to do with the money?
No, if gold fell 15% it is time to buy more that is a dip and we always buy on dips. Any
short term downward movement is a chance for us to top up at a lower price. It is hard to
do in practice but when you have done this a few times and seen the price come back up
and then rise even higher you will soon get the confidence to do this without worrying.
Do not get too analytical. Do not get hung up on this stuff, it is not your son or daughter, it
is just a seed.
It is one piece of the puzzle.
As an aside consider buying gold and silver mining shares. If gold goes up 100% then
mining shares can go up 500%!

JIGSAW PIECE #6: Managing Risk

The only reason you would ever lose everything is because you risked too much on any
one deal.
Jigsaw piece #6 is all about managing your risk making sure you never fall off the log,
to use a theme park analogy. Many property investors feel exposed when the market falls
because they risked so much on those deals. Someone convinced them that house prices
only ever go up and so you should bet the whole farm on a few buy to lets that they had
never seen.
It is never too late to look at your portfolio and say, you know what? I made a big mistake
here I need to reduce my exposure quickly.
Managing risk can mean realising a loss. Thats okay. Again a big difference between rich
people and poor people is that rich people are willing to walk away from a deal even if it
means taking a loss. Poor people will never do this. That is why they end up with a
portfolio full of losing shares. They take the profits on the good ones and hang on to the
losers so they end up with a portfolio full of losers. Is that you?
Remember that what got you from A-B may not get you from B-C.
You probably got from A B through prostitution, to put it rather less crudely, you
swapped your limited time on planet Earth for some paper money. You then deferred
gratification and saved some of that money.
And that got you got from B C . Most people will not achieve even this level.
Now, the C D is getting that money sweating for you. You try and manage the risk of
this process the best you can.
The problem is there is not a single investment that is guaranteed. Property is not, neither
is gold or silver so managing risk is vital. Here are a few tips:

199
 Never be a forced seller of anything. If a property has dropped to such a low level
and it is such a good buy at that price dont sell it, keep it yourself. Understand the
lifetime value of everything you buy. Watch interest rates; they can kill you overnight. If
you are on a variable mortgage right now you are massively exposed. If interest rates went
up half of one per cent how much would this cost you a month? Can you afford that?
What if they go up just one per cent?
Ask yourself what is the best thing that can happen and what is the worst thing that
could happen? And could you survive if the worst thing happened? If the answer is no,
then you should not invest as the gamble is too great. Yes you need courage to become
wealthy but this does not translate into recklessness.

JIGSAW PIECE #7: Play Away

This is such a big concept. Poor people always want the game to come to them, but it
refuses.
They insist on playing on their pitch, with their strip, their ball and their rules.
Unfortunately the money does not recognise their rules. Even as you are reading this you
are trying to take these words into your world. That does not work.
To make money you sometimes have to play away. You have to play on someone elses
pitch, with their rules, with their ball it feels uncomfortable but that is the only way you
will make money. It will never just come to you.
The problem is we all want life to fit our view of the world. Every sentence you read,
everything you hear, you view it from your point of reference. It is always easier just to
add new information to your present viewpoint than to see things differently, to accept
change, but that is what you must do.
If you are not making the money you think you should, it is probably because you do not
play away on a totally new pitch, you are rigid in your ideas, you will not compromise, it
always has to be on your terms. This is what is keeping you poor.
So if you have exhausted the possibilities of your home turf (and check to make sure this
is really true) it is time to go and play another game.
If it is no longer working for you, stop doing what you have always done, stop getting
what you have always got and learn to play away.
If you do not have a spare million pounds in the bank and you have been doing the same
things for the last 25 years, dont you think its time you should try a different approach?
One day a month, look at new ideas. Ask, is it me thats stopping me from moving
forward? Am I the problem? Consider changing just a few things you do.
What you have been doing in the last 25 years counts for nothing. What you do in the next
2 years counts for everything. If you change even 1%, how many seeds will you plant how
many new ideas will you have put into place?
Please play away, try some new things that are out of your current comfort zone.

JIGSAW PUZZLE PIECE #8: Joint Venture

It makes no difference whether you are totally broke or worth millions, in the investment
world the easiest way to move up is to do deals with people you have never met before. In
200
some ways stocks and shares are a kind of joint venture. You are taking a punt on
someone elses performance rather than just relying on what you can do alone. That is a
step in the right direction because you will never get rich on your own, it always comes
about in conjunction with others.
The TV programme Dragons Den demonstrates that some entrepreneurs cannot get their
heads around joint venturing. Look at the deals they try to negotiate! They would rather
have 70% of nothing than 30% of a multi-million pound business! If a dragon wants to put
in 30,000 you know you have got a good idea. You also know they are capable of
bringing you to market within 12 months, whereas it would take you five years or
forever.
So why wouldnt you give them the controlling vote on your board? They know a lot more
than you do. When you do a joint venture do not be possessive. It is petty minded to be
worrying about 10% or 20%, particularly if it is 10%-20% of nothing!
That is how you should be with some of your investments. Gamble a bit of money with a
third party take a risk let them have a controlling say in how things are run. Note:
better to do this with people who have a proven track record of making money rather than
your broke brother in law. Measure your partners by how much money they have
made so far in their lives.
Surround yourself with the right people. Note that in business this will rarely be a friend or
member of your family.
Another way to do joint ventures is to find a business doing a similar thing to you (not
identical). You offer them this proposition: if they will sell your product and service to
their customers, they can keep half of the profit and give you the other half. This is truly
an amazing way to kick-start a business which has no customers at its inception.

JIGSAW PIECE #9: Own a Business

You must own at least one business and ideally more than one. Remember this is about the
only way of getting rich apart from luck or if you are ultra highly paid. Owning a business
has many advantages. The primary ones are the professional look and feel, and the tax
advantages.
Forming a limited company is an essential way of protecting what you have already made
in your life. Form a limited company and you can then remove the risk of having all your
assets, property, house etc. exposed. You must get these things off the table from the start.
You will never sleep at night if one random law suit could end up in your losing the roof
over your head. Never expose the family home when a limited company can protect
you from this.
Of course there are many tax advantages to owning a company and there are allowable tax
deductions on many purchases wholly used for the business.
A limited company also gives you a professional look and feel. Often looks count for a lot.
If you are thinking of a business idea on which you are not even prepared to spend on a
web site and some business cards then nobody is going to believe in it or you. There is no
excuse these days for not looking professional. Everything is so easy to get and so cheap.
Start at least one new business in the next 12 months.

201
JIGSAW PUZZLE PIECE #10: Know Your Numbers
If you do all the other 11 pieces and you do not do this piece you will go bust.
Companies and individuals go bust because they do not know the numbers.
You have to know your numbers at the end of the month at the least ideally you should
know them weekly.
If things are not working you have to know.
What is the difference between bankruptcy and solvency? If you can pay your bills this
month are you bankrupt? Are you solvent? Cash flow is everything. If you can pay the
bills you can survive another month.
People say I dont know where all the money goes. What? Well then we want you
working for us! You dont know where the money goes? Come on! You have to know
where the money goes. You can always spend more money than you earn, any idiot can do
that.
Idiots can even lose money on winning propositions. Here is an example:
How to invest in a company that makes a 50% gain and still loses you money. Let us
imagine you have got 10,000 spare in your existing business. You decide to some shares.
Let us also say the shares will make 50% in the next 12 months guaranteed. Very nice.
So you take 10,000 out of your business, less tax @ 40% gives you 6,000 to put into
ABC Ltd. 12 months later it has gone up 50% so you have 3,000 profit less tax due, less
dealer charges for the broker on both in and out if you sell. So after 1 year at 50% gain
you now have 9,000 (without even deducting tax and dealer charges). You have invested
in a company with 50% gain and you have just made a 1,000 loss since you started
with 10,000!
How can you get around that?
Get the company to make the investment so it is all upstream of tax. Make sure that the
articles and memorandum of your limited company includes investing in stocks and shares
and can do anything it likes. If you start a hairdressers do not state that that is all the
company can do.
So with all your investments know your numbers and look for legal ways to lower
your tax bill.

JIGSAW PIECE #11: The Money Tree

There are two ways of making money.
Option A, you can swap time for money once. Or option B you can do something once
and get paid many times over. A bit of a no-brainer when it is spelt out like that? What a
pity our teachers did not tell us! Oh yes, of course they didnt know, did they?
Selling insurance is a great example of a money tree. If you sell somebody a policy you
get a kick back on that policy you get something every year, even though you do not do
something every year.
Copyright is another great way of creating a money tree, if you create music or a great
book you own the copyright and you can sell that again and again. It is a money tree. That

202
is why successful musicians can live off their royalties and back catalogue until the day
they die.
If you can write novels or produce art, again you can do something once and get paid over
and over.
What do you currently do that you can leverage in this way? What can you do once and
then sell over and over? A great example is to produce a book, a course, a manual or a
DVD on what it is you do and sell it to people who may want to do that too! If this does
not apply to your job, could it apply to your hobby? Many people are getting quietly
wealthy selling simple information products on everything from fly-fishing to bongo drum
playing.
Most people who stay on the first ladder of financial freedom never create a money tree.
They never create something that will continue to fund their lifestyle when they become
too old to work.

JIGSAW PIECE #12: Your Unfair Advantage

Everybody has something that a lot of other people do not have. It doesnt have to be
unique. It is just something that other people will want and it is exclusive to the
knowledge that you have.
Sit down and think what you have that other people will want.
For instance you could have a mailing list. You may have the names and email addresses
of everyone at your club. If you know 200 people at your club who are interested in
something, it doesnt matter what that thing is it gives you an unfair advantage. You
could sell to that list.
It is a very hard concept to get your head around but any group of people are a huge
marketing opportunity if you can access them. Given the choice between a hot new
product and a hot mailing list you should unhesitatingly choose the latter.
Everyone has at least one unfair advantage that they can make money out of, they just do
not realise it.
We all start off working for the man, which is fine but you slowly have to move into new
areas. You do not suddenly leap into a successful business. But you have your weekends
and your evenings to start these things.
When you work for somebody else, they pay you the minimum they can get away with.
When you work for yourself, you pay yourself the maximum you can get away with.
So what is your unfair advantage? What do you have or know that you can put to use in
the next few weeks?
Ask yourself
What do I know that I can leverage to my advantage?
Who do I know that I can leverage to my advantage?
If you sit down and write this out on paper it will take a couple of hours before you
complete it. Do not be tempted to think nothing. There is almost always something.

203
Finally
This jigsaw will work for you this year and next year and every year. If you are not
making enough money it is because one or more pieces of this jigsaw are missing from
your wealth picture.
Work the 12 piece jigsaw on a regular basis. Revisit it and keep working your weakest
piece.
It is very hard to succeed if we always re-act. We must be pro-active to make money,
not just re-act to what comes our way. The world is not geared to making you any richer
than you are now in fact the world is very much geared to making you poorer than you
are now.
You must turn this around.
You have to put time aside, sit down and make this happen. You have to be pro-active.
No-one can make you do that you must want to do it.
If you spend your life re-acting to events, all the stuff that comes your way is designed to
make other people rich. You have just become more cannon fodder, that is why you need
to take time off and plan.
Every one of the twelve pieces gives you the opportunity to create something you would
not have created in a re-active way.
Most success comes from energy and focus. It does not matter where you are in life or
what you have achieved so far, it is what you are going to do from now that counts. It is
not about what you have done in the past it is about what you do today that counts.
Today not tomorrow because by definition tomorrow never comes.
Remember: clever people do not make money fast they know too many reasons why it
wont work for them!

204
 Lesson Eighteen: How to Make 10,000.00
As mentioned earlier, when opportunity comes knocking many people are completely
unable to take advantage of it for one main reason they are totally tapped-out. They have
no spare cash whatsoever; literally nothing. They could not raise 1,000 if their lives
depended upon it and 10,000 seems an impossible fantasy.
You now know that the only way you are going to get wealthy (apart from luck) is to start
your own business. This you must do at the earliest conceivable moment. If you have not
made at least a start on this within a day of finishing this book, then you are not really
serious about becoming wealthy, powerful and free.
The serious people will have made a start long before finishing the book. If you are
serious get on with it.
But even a tiny business requires some money to get it started. 1,000 is really the
minimum amount, with 10,000 being more like it. Obviously some businesses require
millions, but we are not discussing those here. We are talking about small, ideally home-
based businesses which can be started for under 10,000 and which go on to make you
wealthy and free.
This chapter is concerned with the very lowest level of wealth a mere 10,000. But this
money is not for buying more things, having a holiday or squandering on trivia it is a
very special chunk of money. It is your seed capital for a business which will bring you
everything you want in life.
If you can easily raise 10,000 or have it in a savings account already, then you can skip
this chapter (but you might want to read the double your way system towards the end of
it). The following chapter tells you the strategies for raising 100,000; and subsequent
chapters discuss a million, ten million and even a hundred million!

Small Change
First realise that 10k is a very trivial sum of money. Please allow yourself a little
embarrassment and discomfort if you need this chapter, for you are truly broke. And guess
what? It is totally your fault. That may not be what you want to hear, but it is the truth.
The faster you acknowledge that, the faster you can move forward to making a million or
more.
Why is this? Because if you believe it is somebody elses fault then you are admitting that
you are powerless. You just have to wait until that somebody else (e.g. bosses, society,
government etc.) change their ways and allow you to become wealthy. That will be a
long wait.
In The Teachings, The Author exposed the con artists (religions, media, government etc.)
not for the purposes of whining and saying Oh well, theres no point in trying as they
will just stop me. No, the point was to know your enemy so that you might triumph
over them.
So the excuses are over. You are broke because of your decisions and actions leading up
to where you are now. Acknowledge it. Accept it. Get over it and move on.
So if 10k is such a paltry sum (which it is). How are we (or rather you) to raise it?

205
We cannot give you an exact method as it will not suit everyone and in any case it will
become dated before the ink is dry on these pages. For example, imagine if we gave you
this advice: To make 10,000 one of the fastest ways we know is to sell generic
typewriter ribbons at half the price of the named brands. You can buy such ribbons for
27p each in bulk, and sell them for double (50p or even more!) and still be under the rip-
off cost of a new ribbon which can often exceed 1!
You would be disgusted with that old-fashioned, way-out-of-date advice. So we are
avoiding the temptation to talk about specific (e.g. Internet based) ideas which are making
good money right now. They will be laughably out of date within just a few months, let
alone years.
However, here is some top-notch practical advice though about how to achieve this first
rung on the ladder of wealth.

Stop Spending!
Firstly, 10,000 can rapidly be achieved by stopping spending. You can make it even
faster by simultaneously earning more. Spend 5k less a year and earn 5k more a year
and there is your 10k in under 12 months. Easy.
We have discussed stop spending already. Please go back and re-read that section.
Get a grip of your income and outgoings. You need to know exactly what you are
spending and what you are getting in. Very few people know this. They are like children,
pretending they can spend their pocket money twice. They are scared of getting out a sheet
of paper and writing down their income and expenditure because then they would have to
be adult, face reality and see the truth of their bad situation. Far better to just carry on
spending for comfort and hoping that maybe something will turn up. Do not let this be you
any longer. You need to change.
What does stopping spending 5k look like? It is just 14 a day or 100 a week! Most
people can do this if they had the willpower. Many people spend way more than this a
day on crisps, snacks, junk food, cigarettes and alcohol. That is a serious point and one
worth repeating. Most people spend more than 14 a day directly and wilfully ruining
their health yet when they need money to start a business they are tapped-out!
As mentioned many times, people spend way more than this on the latest toys. They spend
3k-5k on a holiday. They remodel the kitchen or bathroom at a cost of 10k+. They
have two newish cars on the drive. If none of this applies to you, think of something that
does. What can you honestly cut back on?
The majority of people do not even turn a light off when they leave the room; or turn the
thermostat down a notch, or only 1/3rd fill the kettle when they make a cup of tea. They
leave their TV and computer on whether or not they are using them. These and a dozen
similar things can save hundreds a year, and reduce carbon emissions if you are into that.
Many people are in serious debt, as we have seen. The money they pay back in interest is
significant. Often it can be approaching this 5k a figure! So if you have big debts with
high interest rates, this is the first thing to tackle. Vow to do whatever it takes to pay off
the loan sharks and never borrow from them again.
Here are some more tips:

206
 Cut back on meals out, going to the bar, drink, cigarettes, junk food,
expensive ready meals and clothes. You do not need any more clothes probably ever!
Have you checked your wardrobe recently? Is it still stuffed full-to-bursting with clothes?
Do not buy any more non-essential consumer goods like televisions, mobile phones, tablet
computers, Hi Fi systems etc.
Drive just 12 miles a day less on average. Thats 4,380 miles, 110 gallons of fuel
and 600 a year saved! People think nothing whatsoever of jumping in the car every time
they want to pop out for something. Save up your journeys for one big round of errands
rather than taking the car out several times.
Do not upgrade your car unless totally on its last legs. Particularly do not do
this for status. That is a sad ego trip and one which you will pay dearly for. If you think
anyone is admiring your brand new Vauxhall you are dreaming!
Stop going on holidays. You do not need a holiday! Leastways you do not need
one away from home. These are illusions sold to the Thralls. Holidays are stressful,
expensive and exhausting in case you hadnt noticed! Sure you can have fun sometimes
but the price per fun unit is exorbitant. You can have easily as much fun (or more)
staying at home and going for long walks or going on some day trips. If you desire to see
more of the world add it to your goal list and go when you have a million to spare. Do not
go when you are scratching around for 10,000. You are being conned by the Thrall
illusion of the good life which includes manipulative images of thirty-something couples
strolling hand in hand along white sands lapped by crystal blue water. It is never like that
(as you know). Stop being a greedy, gullible Thrall.
Stop upgrading your home apart from essential repairs. The Thralls are again
conned by the good life delusion which includes new carpets and sofas; new kitchens
and bathrooms. The time to spend 30k on a kitchen (if you really must) is when you have
three million in the bank. Even then, that kitchen is costing 1% of your total wealth! Are
you sure you want to spend that on a kitchen? The same applies to bathrooms, driveways,
landscaping the garden, new carpets throughout, interior designers, expensive curtains and
sofas. This is Thrall-fodder sold to you by big business. People buy this stuff to cover up
their emptiness and to gain a quick ego-fix. Notice how the adverts for these things often
include an envious neighbour?
Expunge any freeloaders on your payroll. The most likely candidates here are
Ner Do Well children aged between 18 and 40! Many times we have seen families
desperate for money, but with one or two young adults still living at home. They are either
not earning at all (sponging) or whatever they earn they keep most of because they need
it to take the girlfriend out, remodel the car, pay off a loan or pay down their credit card.
They need a minimum of 100 a week to go out on a Friday and Saturday because a
single round of drinks costs 25 a time. Not to mention their marijuana habit or worse!
If this is your situation you need to lay the law down immediately. The law is pay and
do your share or get out.
Sell things. Your house or flat is stuffed full with things most of which you
never use. Start selling it. De-clutter and start making some money from this junk. The
bass guitar you played once; mums old accordion; your spare books; the second
lawnmower; the three tennis racquets you know the sort of things. Get rid of it all.
207
Lighten up. This is worth doing even if you do not make much from it. You would be
amazed how much money you could make on an auction site off-loading the loft-full of
rubbish you have stacked away for a rainy day.
Stop all of your bad habits right now, today. Smoking costs a fortune. So does
drinking. Hopefully you do not gamble. Do you have a junk food habit? Just 3 a day on
crisps and chocolate is 1,000 a year! Hard to believe, but true. Do the sums.
What are you spending on mobile phones and the Internet? Many people
easily spend 1,000 a year (85 a month) on this when you add in everything!
What are you spending on Christmas and birthdays? For many poor people
this well exceeds 1,000 a year.
What are you spending on food? It is truly astonishing how cheaply and healthily
you can eat if you cook for yourself rather than rely on ready meals. Saving just 15 a
week (2.14p a day) is 780 a year! Again its hard to believe these figures sometimes.
Lets add them up:

Crisps, chocolate and fizzy drinks 1,000

Mobile and Internet 500 (save 500 of the 1,000)
Christmas and Birthdays 1,000
Junk food 780
TOTAL 3,280!!
Smoke 10 a day 1,000
Drink 3 units a day 1,500
TOTAL 5,780!!
Alarming, isnt it?
Nearly six grand and we havent even looked at cutting down petrol, gas and electricity
use, Sky sports, excessive driving, holidays you dont need, clothes you dont need, other
impulse purchases and so on. That ten grand is looking easily attainable by stopping
spending, dont you think?

Earn More!
Stopping spending is just half of the battle. You can get your 10k in double quick time by
earning more as well.
Assuming you are employed, are you due a 10% rise? Possibly no, but this is something to
consider. And here is a question: if you are not due this rise, what can you start to do right
away, today, to make yourself worth more? What extra responsibility can you take on?
Many people keep their noses to the grindstone and shy away from any extra work or
responsibility. Guess what? They rarely get a rise above inflation.
Sheila, on the checkout for fifteen years, is broke and complains about it. She has been
passed over for the supervisors job (on far more money) several times because she does
not want the hassle. And anyway, there is a supervisors meeting every Wednesday that

208
goes on until 6.30pm. She will miss her favourite soap opera on TV if she goes for that!
Sheila is very typical of many.
3,000 extra a year is about one hours overtime a day. That is all. If you are not
prepared to do this you are not at all serious about your financial future.

Get on Your Bike!

If you are unemployed, why? You had better have a really superb reason such as a major
mental or physical disability. Please do not say there are no jobs around here. Come on!
That is a true loser speaking. You do whatever it takes, however long it takes, wherever
you have to go to get a job. Not for any moral reasons this is not a book on morals. The
reason is that you claim to want to be a wealthy person. If that is true and not just idle bar-
room bragging, you need to do whatever it takes to become rich. That starts with getting
your seed-corn capital and the quickest way to get this is to start earning.
Do you honestly believe that any millionaire would ever have said There are no jobs
around here when they were starting out?

Change Your Job

If for some reason there is truly no potential in your current job, consider changing.
Consider getting some training so you are worth more. Remember most people watch 3.7
hours of television or mindless Internet surfing, twittering, facebooking and other such
nonsense each day. In one year that is 1,350 hours or the equivalent of 33 full working
weeks. That is a startling statistic. Do you think you could get yourself some really great
skills if you devoted 33 full time weeks to it? Sure you could. The fact that people do not,
means they are non-serious about improving their lot in life. Yes, they chatter about this;
they pontificate, whine or brag, but they do not really mean it. Their actions confirm this.
Given a choice between night school or more telly, there is just no competition telly
wins hands-down.

Start a Spare Time Mini-Business!

If you cannot or will not change your job, what are you doing in your spare time and at
weekends? Chillin with your homies? All around you people are desperate for paid help.
That might be gardening, lawn mowing, DIY, car cleaning, window cleaning whatever.
If you spent each Saturday doing a humble window-cleaning or lawn-mowing round you
would make 6,000 extra a year! Add just one evening pulling pints down the Dog and
Ferret and the total comes to 7,500. Now these might not be ideal jobs. You may
consider them beneath you, but unless you have something better in mind like a little
weekend brain surgery at 2,000 a pop, it is time to get your sleeves rolled up and get to it
if you are a serious person, not a chatterer.
By the way, doing something like this not only makes you money it gets you into the
business mode. Lawn mowing is a business. It is 15 per lawn but whilst you are there
you notice a bramble or tree stump that needs removing can you upsell them to that?
You are window cleaning and notice the guttering is blocked or damaged can you help
with that? Rapidly that 6k a year becomes 12k a year with very little extra work. These
are examples only, you understand.

209
They key concept here is earn it save it invest it in a business.
What does that mean?
When you are broke and maxed-out, the only way out of the hole is to work in the various
ways we have suggested. Then every penny you earn, you save (invest) and make it grow.
You do not spend it. When you have sufficient money you invest it in (say) a small
business which will grow your wealth hugely. Then you reinvest that... and keep going
until you are rich. Thats the only way we know, apart from luck and crime. Its exactly
what we all did to make our millions.
Please understand that what gets you from A to B will probably not get you from B to C in
terms of wealth. In fact you probably wont even be able to see C from A. So just do what
it takes to get you to the next stage, then the next stage, then the next.
In a moment we will reveal an amazingly simple system which trains you in this concept.

Too Proud to Make a Start at Getting Rich?

Do not be too proud to get rich.
If we lost all our money we would do whatever it took to make a start on getting it back. If
that means washing cars then pass us the buckets and sponges and we will get cracking.
We are not too proud for honest work if thats the only game in town, and neither should
you be.
Basic work will not make you rich of course. That is not the intention of this chapter.
Honest work will get you started on the ladder and give you an insight into running your
own business which you must do if you are to get wealthy.
You do not have to get your hands dirty if you dont want to. Can you buy, sell or trade
something for money? Can you become an expert in a small niche and seek out items at
car boot sales or on the Internet and sell them for a profit? An estimated 67,000 people
are currently making in excess of 10k a year from home doing exactly this in the
UK alone. These are very ordinary people making serious second incomes. Can you join
them? We often hear people say but I dont know about anything! Of course they dont
they are spending 1,300 hours in front of the television each year and that leaves no time
to study and become an expert.
If this chapter has been a little hard on you, we have done what we set out to do. If you are
so broke, in this wonderful era, that you cannot scrape together ten grand then you need a
good, hard talking to. Hopefully you have just received it and are willing to do whatever it
takes to get your seed money together.
A final word of warning which we hope hardly needs saying. Do not spend this money
on anything other than making a start on the business which will make you a million.
Please remember the warning from earlier about dreaming up ways to spend it as soon as
you have a few pounds and watch your partner too! They can get very twitchy about
money in an account just begging to be spent on consumer junk.

210
Double Your Way to a Million
Here is a concept which is fun, but which also has a serious side. It proves to you what has
just been said about what gets you from A to B will not get you from B to C (C to D, D to
E and so on).
It is called How to Double Your Way to a Million Pounds. This unique system started
as a bit of fun, but rapidly became serious as many people began to report their success
using the method. The exciting thing about it is that you start from nothing zero, zilch,
nada.
You are not required to put one single penny piece of your
own money into this system!
It also teaches the vital strategies for becoming wealthy strategies which change as you
get richer. The techniques you use for making pocket change will not work when you
come to make the big bucks. Through using this system you receive a vital training in
how to make a million, ten million or even a hundred million!
The really big temptation is to spend the loot as soon as you get a sizeable chunk. Please
try to resist this temptation!

What is The Doubling Method?

The human mind is a funny thing. It can't cope with large projects. Instructions such as:
Make one million pounds from nothing, or put a man on the moon are likely to be met
with a feeling of defeat and then inaction. The project is just too large you cannot get
your mind around it. But as every software writer, engineer or designer knows, these large
projects can only be handled if they are broken down into a series of smaller steps. In fact,
the longest journey starts with the first step is a very true saying.
The impossible is achievable if you break it down into 'bite-sized' steps.
The advantages of this unique doubling method are as follows:
1. It teaches you to start from nothing. Any fool can make a million, given a 'kick
start' of (say) half a million. But it takes guts, determination and real spirit to do this from
nothing flat broke.
2. It teaches you that making money is all about people, marketing and selling.
Everyone is in sales. Even if you are employed, you are selling yourself (and your skills)
to your boss; day by day, hour by hour.
3. It teaches you that different strategies are required for different levels of wealth.
The strategy for doubling 50 into 100 is not the same strategy for doubling 250,000
into half a million, but they both involve selling, or trading (which is the same thing).
4. It teaches you to be fearless because you don't put one single penny of your own
money into the scheme. With most ideas you are always worried about losing your 'stake
money'. There is no stake money with this system! You really (for once) have nothing to
lose by trying this method. When we say nothing, we mean nothing. You will not have to
part with one single penny piece of your money.
5. It teaches you the limits of labour. You will rapidly realise that physically working
has strict limits and will not get you past step 20 at best. After that (and preferably before)

211
you have to 'get smart' and start trading without adding your labour as a significant factor.
Slaves labour not you, but you haven't realised that yet!
6. It teaches the tremendous power of breaking large tasks into small, achievable,
steps. All major life-goals are reached one step at a time. But perhaps best of all, it's FREE
and it's FUN!
The object is to start with nothing, get 1p and then double your way to way to over
one million pounds.
Surprisingly there are only 28 steps required to achieve this. They are:

Your Twenty Eight Steps to a Fortune

Step 1 Find a penny lying on the ground, or be given it without asking for it.
Step 2 1p-2p
Step 3 2p-4p
Step 4 4p-8p
Step 5 8p-16p
Step 6 16p-32p
Step 7 32p-64p
Step 8 64p-1.28p
Step 9 1.28-2.56
Step 10 2.56-5.12 (Call it 5 to make it easier.)
Step 11 5-10
Step 12 10-20
Step 13 20-40
Step 14 40-80
Step 15 80-160
Step 16 160-320
Step 17 320-640
Step 18 640-1,280
Step 19 1,280-2,560
Step 20 2,560-5,120 (Call it 5,000 to make it easier.)
Step 21 5,000-10,000
Step 22 10,000-20,000
Step 23 20,000-40,000
Step 24 40,000-80,000
Step 25 80.000-160,000
Step 26 160,000-320,000
Step 27 320,000-640,000
Step 28 640,000-1,280,000
There! You've even got some spare change out of the million 280,000 to be exact!

212
The Power of Stepping Stones
If your task were to turn a 1p piece into a million pounds in a fixed period of time, most
people (ourselves included) would find this somewhat daunting. However, if you were
given (say) 500 and asked to double it into 1,000 this would seem achievable. Indeed,
you could probably think of quite a few ways of doing it. The same principle applies to
any single step above, e.g. 40 into 80, or even 80,000 into 160,000.
If you were asked: Could you make a million pounds in one year? you might reply No
way! But if the question was: Look, how about if I start you off with half a million. Do
you think you could turn it into a million? Your reply might be I'll give it shot! Give me
the money and let's get cracking! Certainly this task would not seem a 'ridiculous',
'preposterous' or 'stupid' suggestion would it? You'd have to be a real spineless wimp to
say No thanks. Keep your 500,000; there's no way of doing that. Youre talking pure
fantasy.
Right, so this is your task:
To turn 1p into one million+ pounds in a series of steps.
There are some important rules which must be followed. Think of this as a game with a
tasty prize at the end. If you don't want to abide by the rules, don't play the game. Also,
don't ask questions about the rules. The umpire's decision is final!

Rules For The Doubling Method

(The actual rules are in bold type. Supplementary information is in lighter type.)
Definition: The amount of money you have at any one time (depending on which step you
are on) is called 'the stake'. Initially, your stake is nothing. Then it's 1p, then it's 2p, etc.
On starting (say) step 16, your stake would be 160.
Rule 1. You must find or be given the first coin; a 1p piece. Ideally you should find it
in the street or car park, etc. Give yourself at least one month to do so, although in reality
you will find it in the first day or week at most. You must not use 1p of your own
money. Any money you find after this 1p (during any stage of using this system) can be
added to the stake money. E.g. finding a 10 note in the street (assuming you cant find
the owner!) immediately leapfrogs you on step 12 (or can be added to the stake money if
you are on a later stage).
Rule 2. You must use only the stake money during the current doubling attempt
you cannot supplement it with your own money, borrowed money, etc. You don't have to
use all the stake money but you can't use more than the stake money. This is explained
further in rule 4.
Rule 3. During the first ten steps you must use the actual coins and notes gained in
the preceding step. Supposing you are on step 9 and have just doubled 1.28 into 2.56
(say two 1 coins, a 50p, a 5p and a 1p). You must use these actual coins as your stake
money for step 10, and not different notes/coins, or a cheque for 2.56. After step 15, set
up a separate bank account just for this doubling operation, but this is not a rule, just a
suggestion.
Rule 4. If your current step results in more than doubling, then you must spend the
surplus on yourself and leave only the approved stake money. For example, if you are
213
on step 17 and manage to change your stake of 320 into 700, then you must spend the
extra 60 (leaving you with 640) and not carry this onto the next step to make it easier.
Put simply start each step with only the stake money allowed for that step.
Rule 5. If your current action results in less than doubling, then you may use as
much of the original stake and profit to complete this step. On any one step you don't
have to double the money in a single transaction. You can carry out as many transactions
as you like until you have succeeded in doubling the stake money.
Example: You are on step 18 (640-1280) and you manage to do a deal which increases
the 640 stake to (say) 900. You may now use that 900 in another deal to try and reach
1280.
Rule 6. You must keep a diary of events. Use any notebook. One page per step. Head
each of the 28 pages with a title e.g. STEP 11 5-10.
On the page you will record the date and method of achieving the step. You will also use it
for planning the next step coming up with ideas of how to achieve it.
Rule 7. Throughout your doublings, you will need several different strategies. It's obvious
that the strategy for turning 1.28 into 2.56 will be different from the strategy for turning
160,000 into 320,000. Because of this, rule 7 (the most important rule) is: Don't worry
about how you are going to manage future doublings. Concentrate only on the
current doubling. (Thinking too far ahead will discourage you. Avoid deadly thoughts
like this: Sure, I can double 5 into 10, but how am I going to double 40,000-80,000?
Its impossible. I may as well give up now.) Remember: what gets you from A to B
probably will not get you from G to H.
Rule 8. You will be tempted to break the chain when you get to a reasonable amount of
money (e.g. 50,000). This temptation will be overwhelming the more money you make.
So here is the most difficult rule of all to follow: You are not allowed to spend one
penny of the money (apart from as a stake) until you have one million pounds+ in the
bank. Then it's all yours.
Most people remain poor for one major reason as we have seen lack of discipline. This
indiscipline permeates their lives from top to bottom. Rule eight is the toughest of the lot.
Do you have what it takes to keep your sticky hand out of the sweetie jar? You think so?
Imagine you have 100,000 in the bank right now. Can't you think of a lot of 'stuff' you
would want to run out and buy? Can you resist this temptation? We'll see...
Rule 9. Another tough rule: You must not divert money into the system which you
would have got anyway had you not been doing the system. You must always use the
stake money to achieve the next step. Essentially then, you must trade to achieve each
step, rather than work (in employment) to achieve it. You may take on extra work outside
of your normal field of occupation, but be warned, there are strict limits to how far you
will get using this approach. Trade; dont work for an hourly rate.
Rule 10. You must use only the stake money, and not 'stolen' or 'hidden' resources.
You can use resources that you own and are fully paid for (e.g. a PC, printer, car, etc.) but
these should retain their value after you have finished the step (e.g. you can't sell them to
raise money!). You should also avoid using anything which is part of an existing business
run by you because the hidden costs are being born by that business and not by the system.
Ditto for using your car, if the running costs are not being paid out of the stake money.
214
Use common sense. The odd phone call 'on the house' or trip in the car is okay. Running a
taxi service using a car you already own, or making 200 copies of a manual on the office
photocopier, free of charge amounts to stealing from outside the system.
The doubling system should ideally 'stand alone', ring-fenced from your
normal employment and method of making money.
Rule 11. This is the snakes and ladders rule. If you 'fail' on a step, you must drop down
the 'snake' until you arrive at the step represented by your remaining stake money
and start again from that step. E.g. suppose you are trying to double 5-10. You buy
something for 5, hoping to sell it. You fail and only sell it for 1. You are now back to
step 8 (64p-1.28p).
Rule 12. You are allowed to add your labour. For example, you can buy raw materials
for 20 (stake money), and rework them into something which you sell for 40. You will
quickly realise the limits of this approach, however, and this is a powerful teaching lesson.
You can't get rich by working in a conventional manner.
HINT: The 'master strategy' which works for every step is as follows...
Use the stake money to create a value which you can sell for more than
it cost you.
Ponder on this, meditate upon it. Herein lies the key to your success. Incidentally, this is
the master strategy behind every single company, large or small, across the globe.

Further Notes and Examples

In case the rules are not clear, these notes expand upon the basic concept.
Rule One: There is magic in finding or being given money. It is quite important that you
find this initial coin, and you almost certainly will if you look hard enough. This is step
one finding a 1p piece. Try supermarket car parks! To double 1p-2p and a few further
steps, just ask a friend (or even a stranger): I'm trying an experiment. If I give you this 1p,
will you give me 2p? They'll give it to you. Avoid getting involved in discussions. Invent
a reason why you need it. Don't talk about the doubling program. This technique works
for the first few steps! Just go up to a friend and say: Look, I know this sounds crazy, but
I'm doing an experiment. Don't ask me any questions, I'm not allowed to talk about it, but
if I give you 16p, will you give me 32p? I know you lose out to the tune of 16p, but it's only
small change and it will help me prove a point. I'll tell you everything about it when I've
finished the experiment in a few months. Few people can resist this. It only works up to
about 32p, for obvious reasons. Any more money you find is regarded as a gift to the
system and can be added to your stake money. As soon as you start this system, one thing
you will immediately notice is that you start finding money all over the place!
Rule Two: Supposing you are on step 13 (20-40). You see an amazing bargain which
costs 30 and could be sold for 80. Sorry, but you can't add 10 of your own money to
the 20 stake. You must either haggle them down to 20, or find another strategy. Think
of 'outside' money as contamination to the special magic of the 'doubled' money. Don't let
outside money taint your stake.
Rule Three: Supposing you have just made 2.56 (in step 10). This rule means you can't
put it in the bank (or spend it) and then use another different 2.56 (cash or cheque) as
215
your stake money. This breaks the chain. In the initial tentative first ten steps this has an
almost magical effect. By then, you'll believe in the system and it becomes less important.
It is also tricky to deal in cash over a few hundred pounds.
Rule Four: For example, you do better than expected at step 14. Instead of 80 you find
yourself with 90. This rule means that you must retain 80 and spend 10 on yourself as
a treat. You must not use the full 90 as stake money in step 15, to make this step easier.
Rule Five: For example, you are on step 14. You invest 40 and only get back 60 instead
of 80. That's okay, you can use all 60 (or less) in an attempt to make the extra 20. If
you make more, then rule four applies. You don't have to complete each step in one
transaction or 'deal', although the earlier steps will almost certainly be 'one deal per step'.
Later steps will almost certainly be several transactions per doubling.
Rule Six: This is most important for charting your progress and for planning new ideas. It
will also be an amazing document to own once you have completed the system, and will
help other people to follow you.
Rule Seven: More than anything, this is an exercise in mind power. You can ruin your
chances of success if you fret about step twenty whilst on step three. It will stop you
progressing. You'll be thinking: This is nonsense. How am I going to turn 80,000 into
160,000? I can't do that! And this whilst you are on step five trying to turn 16p into
32p! As you progress, the next step will seem easy. For example, having successfully
turned 5,000 into 10,000, you'll have some good ideas about how to turn 10,000 into
20,000. But you won't have these ideas whilst you are several steps before this so don't
worry about it. Concentrate on the step you are currently trying to achieve, and
ONLY this step.
Rule Eight: None of the rules can be 'enforced', particularly this one. It's up to you what
you do with the money. But if you spend it at any point during the process, then that's the
end of the system for you. Don't bother trying to pick it up again from where you left off,
because it won't work. The only thing you could do would be to start from 1p again at
some future date. This is the most difficult rule. People just can't keep their hands off
the money. The second it builds up to more than a few hundred, they 'dip' into it for some
'essential' junk they need and ruin everything. This is about self-will and determination.
If you don't think you've got what it takes to see it through, don't even start the
system.
Rule Nine: The money gained must be new money. Money you wouldn't normally have
got unless you had started the doubling system. For example, you are on step 10 and
struggling for a way to get to step 11. It is not permissible to work a few extra hours down
the pub (or wherever you normally work) to get the money. You could have done this
anyway, it is not 'new' money. Also, you are not employing the stake money to achieve
this step. Supposing you are already running a small business; you are not allowed to use
stake money to buy and sell within your existing field of operation (using overheads paid
for outside of the system). This is not new money and you are using all sorts of 'hidden'
advantages (existing products, customer loyalty, infrastructure etc.) to help you achieve
this step. You could have done this without the system. As a rule of thumb, you should
trade in totally unrelated areas to your normal employment or business.

216
Rule Ten: For example, it is not permissible to buy 40 worth of paper and then use the
office colour photocopier to run off art prints which you can sell for 80. Why? Because
you are inputting more than the stake money. You are not counting the cost of purchasing
and servicing the copier, toner, paper or creating the original artwork. In effect you would
be stealing these values from someone else. The correct way of doing this would be to
create the artwork yourself (or genuinely be given it, free) and then to go to a copy shop
and pay the true price of colour photocopying. Hopefully you see the difference. This rule
says little more than dont cheat.
Rule Eleven: Supposing you invest 80 and it goes horribly wrong. Instead of the
expected 160, you end up with (say) 6. This can happen, don't worry about it. This
means that you must consider yourself now to be back on step 11, trying to turn 5 into
10 (again).
Rule Twelve: Be aware that this strategy will only work up until about step 20, after
which you have to work too long and hard to make each successive step happen. Again,
this must be something you're not doing already. Ultimately you will have to trade buy
and sell or start a profitable company with the stake money. Now please reread rule seven.

Hints & Tips

Dont discuss this with anyone outside the system. Most people are negative,
hopelessly entrenched sceptics. They will bring you down. They will laugh. They will
scoff. They want to destroy your confidence. Why? If you succeed, that means they
have to do something and they don't want that. Its easier to knock YOU down to
size.
People will only part with money for something of value to them. Anything else is a
'con'. Create values which fulfil needs resulting in honest trade. Anything else is
highly likely to fail. You could gamble the stake money (e.g. place a bet on a horse),
but because you are not creating values, you are most likely to fail and lose the lot.
Form a mastermind group of four or five friends, all doing the system. Like weight
watchers meet regularly and compare progress. All members help the slowest
member. Discuss/share ways of doubling a particular step. Meet once a week to start,
then once a month. Keep telephoning each other. Keep the momentum going. The
biggest enemy is losing steam. Some people have done the first ten steps in ONE
AFTERNOON and then run out of puff!
Start thinking positively. Get out of your previous negative habits. Start reaching for
the stars. You may not get there, but you sure as hell wont come back with a handful
of mud.
Make this work for you. Stop dreaming about becoming rich or winning the lottery.
The world is there for the taking by doers, not dreamers. Dreamers remain broke.
Now go out and find that first penny!
When you do, it will be an amazing experience. You WILL find one, probably today. If
you find more than 1p, that catapults you straight to the relevant stage.

217
 Lesson Nineteen: How to Make 100,000.00
The techniques you used to make your 10k seed corn capital are not so useful when it
comes to making 100,000.
In fact one thing you will notice as we move up through the ladder of wealth is how the
wealth techniques must change with each step. You will find the same thing if you try the
double your way system. This, by the way, is one of the main reasons people do not get
wealthy the methods they know and love will not get them up the next rung. They need
to abandon these old ways and use completely different methods. Then abandon those in
favour of the methods needed for the next rung... and the next.
People are unwilling to do this because they are petrified of change. They cleave to the
known and safe. They managed to acquire a handful of mediocre skills many years ago,
and they are not about to abandon them and learn new skills. That seems like a lot of hard
work and effort. Or... they lucked into a way of making a few thousand pounds several
years ago and now, like laboratory rats, all they can think to do is repeatedly press the
lever, hoping for the same modest food pellet reward.
But abandon these old ways they must, if they are to shoot for the real money.
The methods you used to get 10k (e.g. working harder, stopping spending) will not get
you 100k leastways not in under ten years. Presumably you would like to achieve
100k in a quicker time frame?

Working In or On Your Business?

One of the leaps you need to make is to bridge the gap between working in your business
and working on your business.
It is possible to make 100k working in your business. But if you want more money than
this (say a million) you will eventually need to down tools and become a strategiser and
business manager. This 100k level of wealth is your perfect training ground for that.
At 10 an hour you need to work an extra 10,000 hours to make 100k. 10,000 hours is
five years of forty hour weeks on top of whatever you are currently doing. Whilst not
impossible, you can see this is a long, hard slog. It is best to abandon this as a strategy
right now.
On the other end of the scale, if you stopped spending to the tune of 900 a month (and
that is a very large sum to cut back) you would save about 10,000 a year and it would
take you ten years to save your 100,000. Cutting back by that amount is probably very
hard and in any case it does not achieve what you want in any sensible time scale.
So hopefully you can see that stopping spending and working harder will not get you
where you want to be, even though they worked really well to get your 10k. This is a
perfect example of what gets you from A-B will not get you from B-C and beyond.
To make 100k you will almost certainly have to start a small business. This must be a
business which is not selling your time by the hour unless you can command very
sizeable fees of 100/hour or more.
So this rules out our window cleaning round, car washing, gardening, driveway cleaning,
handyman services, carpet cleaning and many similar services. There are not enough

218
hours in the day for you to make 100k in any sensible timescale. It would take 3-5 years
or more. If you are able to charge three times the average hourly rate, then you can
achieve 100k in a year but you also need to live so this probably reduces to 50k saved
each year or two years to get 100k clear.
For example if you charge 50 an hour, then 48 weeks at 40 hours a week is about
100,000.
If you charge 200 an hour you can make 100,000 in three months. Why do you think
lawyers do so well?!

Leveraging the Work of Others

If you cannot command a high hourly rate, one way to make this money is to leverage the
work of 3 or 4 other people. They do not have to be employed by you, although they can
be. Many people want steady work at a reasonable rate of pay. They do not want the
hassle of getting customers, advertising, providing customer service, handling the
accounts or any of that stuff. They want to be told where to go, what to do, and to collect a
simple pay packet for doing it. At the end of eight hours they want to clock-off, crack a
beer and go and watch the telly.
Here is where you could gear-up your simple one-person business which you used to get
your first 10k you know, the window cleaning round or grass cutting service. If the
demand is there, you make that vital transition from working solely in the business to
working in at and also on it. Put simply you do some of the actual work, but spend at least
50% of your time organising other people to do the work too and you keep a third of
their money.

Worked Example 100k in Two Years

Look at the figures for a simple gardening service (it could be windows, car cleaning,
carpet cleaning any one of a dozen similar things):
You work 20 hours a week at 15 an hour = 300 a week. The rest of the time you spend
managing others.
You run 4 other people, 40 hours a week at 15 an hour and you keep 5 (pay them 10).
Your workers are delighted to get 10 an hour with none of the marketing hassle you
will have a large queue of people.
4 x 40 x 5 = 800 a week. Total 1,100 a week with the 300 you are making = 50,000
a year. So there is your 100k in two years. Yes there will be some expenses and
overheads but we are talking basic principles here. Also you will have to live so this is
more like a four year deal.
Please notice something really, really important. Notice how we are struggling to make a
fast 100k through selling simple manual services like gardening and car washing even
with five people slaving away! If you recall, earlier we explained how people pay for
solutions, but only pay big money for solutions to hard problems and pay a pittance for
solutions to easy problems. Remember the bin emptying problem? Anyone can do that if
you can lift a bin and walk, you can solve that problem, so the amount we are willing to
pay to have our bins emptied is minimal. This tends to apply to gardening, carpet cleaning
and driveway sweeping as well. Most people can do these things they just cant be
219
bothered to and would rather pay someone a few pounds to do it for them. But if the fees
get too high they will clean their own carpets and wash their own cars.
Dont let this put you off using manual methods to make your first 10k 100k. Just
get smart and realise this will not easily make you a million. You would need a team of
50-100 people working for you to do this in two years or so.

Working Smarter
A better way is to find a turnkey system which is not limited by the hours you put in.
A turnkey system is something you sell, trade or do which can be repeated like a
cookie-cutter preferably on autopilot and which requires almost none of your time to
run. In particular, it does not require you to do something to make each sale happen
(unless it is just a few minutes of course, to handle an order).
For example, if you sell a simple manual on how to make money from trading the
financial markets, then you write the manual once, and then sell copy after copy. The
work consists of popping a manual into a jiffy bag and posting it. Such a manual could
easily sell for 97. Heres the exciting part, you only need to sell 1,000 or so to make your
100,000! Compare that with two years of forty hour weeks in some service job alongside
four employees. There is absolutely no comparison.
100,000 is 1,000 widgets at 100 profit each. Or it is 10,000 widgets (books, items,
whatever) at 10 profit each. For example, if you sold 10,000 items for 20, of which 10
was profit, this would do the trick for you. 10,000 items is about 30 a day so we are not
talking ridiculous figures here. 10,000 people is just one in every seven thousand UK
residents, or one in every 24,000 USA residents. Again, we hardly need the world to beat
a path to our door to make this kind of money.
Even better is selling something people want time and again. Many disposable items fit
this bill.
100,000 profit a year is a small business turning over, say, 400,000 (about 8,000 a
week). Again, not telephone numbers here. Most small shops, take-aways, restaurants, taxi
firms and 101 other small businesses turn over about this amount and make about
100,000 a year.
On the artistic side, 100,000 is 1 royalty on each of 100,000 items (books, art prints,
CDs, DVDs or whatever).
100,000 is making 5 each on 20,000 items which you sell (say) on line. That is 50 items
a day. Quite achievable.
100,000 is just 100 projects on which you make 1,000 a time. That is two projects a
week. A project can be anything from laying a block-paving drive to installing solar
panels and any one of ten thousand similar things. It could be as mundane as buying and
selling used cars. Please do not think you know nothing about these (and other) areas. You
probably do not. But what you have at your disposal is your entertainment time the
wasted 1,000 hours a year which you are currently squandering on trivia amusements.
With 1,000 hours of study you could become an expert on almost any subject you
decided to look into. Most people do not do this because they are not serious about
becoming rich. They want it for nothing.

220
100,000 is just ten projects on which you make 10,000. For example, you might buy
and sell houses whilst doing some basic renovation in between this can easily net you
10,000 a time, probably more like 30,000 a time. Three projects = ninety grand.
100,000 is offering some little service which will net you 5 profit each time. 20,000
transactions will do the trick. That sounds a lot, but many would be repeat transactions.
E.g. if only 500 people used your service once a month, that would be 20,000 transactions!
100,000 is selling a tiny business with an annual profit of just 16,000!
Hopefully you can see that you need a shift of perspective. You need to start thinking like
an entrepreneur. How do they think? Thats easy to answer! They have one main thought
which is: Where is the money? They are radar-scanning for opportunities all the time.
You need to be the same. Whereas to get 10k you needed to roll your sleeves up and get
to it, to make 100,000 you need to roll your sleeves down get off the tools and start
managing your business instead of slaving in it.
All of this is laying the groundwork for the next step making a million.

221
 Lesson Twenty: How to Make a Million
The skills that you used to make 100,000 are not the exact same skills you need to make
a million, as we shall see.
You might be surprised to learn that it is far from impossible to make a million pounds. At
the time of writing there are 500,000 millionaires in the UK and 8 million in the USA ($1
million is the equivalent of about 650,000 in Sterling). So how hard can it be?
Many of these people need to include their home equity into the equation to make the
million mark, which is cheating a little as that money is not really accessible. But still the
figures are large.
It takes a minimum of three years to become a millionaire from a standing start. It is
possible to do it in less, but rare.
Apart from winning or inheriting it, there is only one way to make it. That makes life easy.
You have to start and run your own business as we have said, even if this is a one person
business like a successful author or entertainer that is still a business.
If you deal in property that is a business.
If you buy and sell used cars from home that is a business.
You do not need fancy premises or staff to be in the running for a million but you do
need a business. There is perhaps one exception, those captains of industry at the very
pinnacle of their profession who are paid million pound performance bonuses.
Assuming you are not one of them, that leaves just one way. That makes life very simple.
The excuses are over. You know how to make a million start a business.
The type of business you should start was discussed in a previous chapter. You also need
to be willing to pay the price. That was mentioned earlier in the book. The price is long
hours, a devotion to your idea, less time with friends and family and no time goofing off.
If you want the million, you need to get serious.
Most people want the million but they are not serious people. They are flakes.
What Does it Take to Make a Million?
Can we get a feel for what it takes to make a million? Yes. It is a company with, say, half
a million profit a year for four years. After tax and a bit of messing around, that will leave
you with a million in the bank.
If the company is any good, it will need to turn over about two million a year to make half
a million profit. So your sales are about 200,000 a month or 50,000 a week. Quite high,
but not silly. If you were selling double glazing for example, it would only be about two
sizeable jobs a day.
All of these numbers come crashing down if you are prepared to wait five or ten years for
your million. That is not a huge long time by the way. Think back ten years. What were
you doing? Probably some job which barely paid you a decent wage. You may still be
doing that job, or something very like it, today, ten years later. That time goes by very
quickly.
If you deal in property you could make a million by doing twenty transactions in which
you took 50k a time. So we are not talking fantasy numbers here.

222
Many authors are millionaires. So are many singers. Here the equation is different. You
sell a million books or CDs and get (say) 1 royalty from each one.
A million is 10,000 items sold at 100 profit each. Or it is 100,000 items sold at 10
profit. Again, not fantasy numbers.
A million is something you get paid 10,000 a time for, and you do it 100 times over 3-5
years. That does not sound impossible. The average swimming pool or conservatory
costs 15,000 of which 10,000 is profit! So doing this you could make a million in five
years doing just a couple of jobs a month and many have.
A million is having ten people working for you and you make just 400 a week profit
from each person. Five years later you have a million.
A million is having ten Internet products which make a mere 60 a day each. Five years
later you are a millionaire.
A million is selling your small business which makes just 150,000 profit a year. The
typical price of such a business is six times the annual profit. Such a business makes just
3,000 profit a week (600 per working day), so it is not huge.

Ten Tips to Making a Million

1. Do something. Do not sit around any longer. Forget television, forget the bar; start
taking action to improve your life, even if it is just that first, small step. You will stay
broke forever unless you take action right now, as soon as you put this book down.
2. Be rationally selfish. Take 'good for me' decisions. You do not owe anything to
anyone apart from your children. They need love, consistency and honesty. They do not
need brand name trainers and the latest computer games. When you live your life trying to
take 'good for others' decisions, you are playing God and trying to second-guess other
people's lives. This is arrogant.
3. Stop believing in something for nothing. Wake up from your childish dream of
fast cash. Stop believing programmes which promise to show you how to attract wealth
they are laughing at you. This one tip can save you thousands of pounds and a lot of lost
time. There is no such thing as something for nothing. Ditch all of those 'business
opportunities' which come your way. 99% of them are scams operated by small-minded
people of limited vision trying to cheat their way to a fortune. They are relying upon your
laziness and gullibility. Do not support them, and above all, do not join them. The
financial loss is minimal to you, but the loss of time and momentum is far more serious.
4. You should have one burning question which you must answer as soon as possible:
What honest value can I create which others will voluntarily buy from me time and time
again in order that I might become guiltlessly wealthy?
Only you can answer this question and you must work at it rather than expecting the
answer for nothing. Nobody is going to hand you a wonderful, magic pre-packaged
business on a plate. It is obvious why. If you had some superb practical 'make a million'
business, would you operate it yourself and make a million, or sell a 30-page 'how to'
manual for 24.95 to a few hundred hopefuls?
5. When you create values you become wealthy. When you trade equal values you
merely survive. There is nothing wrong with survival. Most people do only this. But make

223
sure you have consciously selected this option, and not chosen it by default out of laziness
or fear.
Most small businesses merely allow you to trade equal values You watch my sheep and
I'll mend your roof and so you will not become wealthy by operating one of the million
or so businesses you might think about getting involved in. For example, I'll cook fish
and chips if you repair my car. At best, you will do slightly better than average due to the
division of labour and your superior bartering (battering?) skills, but you will never make a
million. This is the main reason the proprietors never get wealthy. They are weary
copycats of a hundred near identical businesses. Yet another pizza shop. Yet another print
room. Yet another carpet cleaning service.
To become wealthy you must create new values and then run with your idea until the
copycats grab your idea and rake over the bones of your fortune. Then you have another
new idea which creates more unique values and you run with that... These ideas do not
have to be earth-shattering; many are just small creative twists on an existing idea.
6. Remember that honest wealth is not gained at the expense of others. In other
words, contrary to socialist doctrine, other people do not become poorer as you become
richer. By trading with you, they should become a little richer whilst you become a lot
richer. Evaluate all business ideas by this standard: Does this business allow me to trade
with others whilst enriching their lives, or am I trying to scam, con, cheat and lie my way
to wealth? Am I using smoke and mirrors to pretend there is a benefit to my customers,
when no such benefit really exists?
7. Anything can be justified by the clever human brain. Robbery can be justified: It's
not fair that some people have so much money, I'm just redistributing wealth. In a fairer
society I wouldn't have to do this. Cheating can be justified: I'm giving people the
expensive education they need in gullibility. I am helping them to become less gullible.
Even murder can be justified: We're all going to be dead soon anyway, so what's the
difference? In view of this ability to justify our evil-doing, you need to keep your
business clean and make sure it follows your own impeccable standards.
8. Make yourself wealthy so that you can help others. Operating in the way just
described (by creating values which others will want to buy from you) will both make you
wealthy and improve the living standards of those around you. Everyone is a winner. But
if you have altruism as your doctrine the idea that you are a sacrificial animal only fit for
consumption by others then you will live a powerless, unfulfilled life as a slave or an
interfering, do-gooder busybody. When you have filled your own needs, then you become
powerful enough to help others, if this gives you pleasure.
9. Do not listen to broke people. They know nothing about money. If they were
merely neutral, it would not matter, but they are not. Your friends, your family, society,
the media, religions and the government all want you broken back down to drone status,
no matter what they say or how much they protest to the contrary. There is one person you
can really trust on this wild adventure and that is you. You doubt this? See the reactions of
others when you start making a bit of money and buy a new house or car. This is a general
rule about people there are, of course, exceptional people out there who will support
you. They are a rare breed so cherish them.

224
10. You must be prepared to pay the price, whatever it is, for becoming wealthy. There is
always a price. You cannot get rich for nothing. Most often the price is hard work,
tenacity, guts, determination and effort. Little more is needed to succeed in our society
because so few people have these characteristics. The rewards are unlimited wealth,
guiltless affluence, freedom from stress, power and the feeling of leading a meaningful
and worthwhile life. The last of these is the most important, and no lottery win can buy
you that feeling. It comes only from creating lasting worthwhile values which enrich the
lives of your fellow human beings.
11. Be bold. Have a go! Stop sitting timidly on the sidelines thinking one day. That day
will never come and you will die broke and embarrassed. There is only one life and this is
it. Time is running out for you. If not now, when? Stop making excuses about waiting for
the right time that time will never come. If you dont make a start almost immediately
after reading this book you probably never will. Half a million people are millionaires
right now in the UK what is stopping you from joining them?

225
 Lesson Twenty-One: Knowing When to Stop
In the following two chapters we will be looking at what it takes to make ten and a
hundred million respectively. But for the moment we will pause and allow ourselves to
consider if a million or two is enough for you, and if not, how much will be enough.
The wise person decides how much is enough before setting foot on the path to riches.
Knowing when to stop is more difficult than making the money in the first place. Many
people never manage to stop and they die whilst in the act of accumulating yet more
money which they never spend or use in the service of others.
The aim of life is to be happy. Money is one way (yes, a big way) in which you can
achieve happiness, particularly if that money is used to help others, but never lose sight of
the fact that it is happiness you are after as a final goal, not money.
If you ever make any real money you will be so caught up in your astonishing success that
you will find it very hard to quit. It is like a drug. You will be tempted to work harder and
faster to get more whilst the going is good. Then, if you hit a lean time, you will work
harder and faster to try and get back what you have lost. In short, you will always be
working harder and faster! Knowing when enough is enough is the most difficult wealth
challenge you will ever face.
Most people do not face this challenge because they rarely make enough to live on and
almost never create a surplus.
Here is one of life's big questions, and it would help you to try and answer it right now, no
matter what your financial situation. The question is Do you have enough?
Enough money, enough material possessions, enough 'things.' And before you answer a
resounding No that's why I bought this book! here are some interesting facts about
your current level of wealth. (These statistics are in real terms, not inflated money.)

Wealth Fact #1
You are approximately one thousand times richer, in real terms, than the average ancient
Egyptian, ignoring Pharaohs you are only a mere ten times richer than a Pharaoh. Of
course you do not have the piles of gold they had, but that is not the point. The point is
what they could and did buy with that gold, which was mainly slave-power. It has been
estimated that modern inventions such as the motor car, washing machine, dishwasher,
etc. are the equivalent of owning one thousand slaves, making you wealthier now
(whatever your level of poverty) than the kings of the ancient world. All the gold they
owned would not have bought them a ticket to Australia, or insulin for their diabetes.
Are you ten times happier than a Pharaoh? Are you one thousand times happier than the
average ancient Egyptian?
Are you even as happy as they were?

Wealth Fact #2
You are about three hundred times richer than the average ancient Briton living at the start
of the first millennium; i.e. the year AD 1. You are an estimated thirty times richer than
the wealthiest king or lord of that era. Richer means your access to clean wholesome

226
food, potable drinking water, transport, power, medicine, shelter, clothing and labour-
saving devices, to mention only a few things. Piles of gold stacked up in a warehouse are
not riches, any more than five thousand unused acres or ten million in a Swiss bank
account which is never touched is 'money.' Wealth is only meaningful if it is used.

Wealth Fact #3
You are an estimated one hundred times richer than the average Briton living at about the
time of the Battle of Hastings, i.e. at around the start of the second millennium, the year
AD 1066. You are ten times wealthier than the richest person on the planet one thousand
years ago. (Land ownership is not included in these statistics. The mere ownership of land
is not wealth: riches are measured in what the land produces and what that is used for.)
Are you one hundred times happier than someone from 1066? Are you even as happy?

Wealth Fact #4
You are fifty times richer than the average peasant living in the year 1500. Life was hard
back then, but are you fifty times happier than they were?
You are thirty times richer than the average man or woman living in 18th-century Europe.
You are twenty times richer than the average person in 1850. Looked at another way, you
have the equivalent today of twenty servants working for you. A household with twenty
staff would most definitely have been owned only by the superrich.
On average you are likely to be five time richer than your grandfather. Are you five times
happier than he was?
On average, you are likely to be twice as wealthy as your own parents were when they
were your age now. For example, think back to the forties, fifties, sixties, seventies or
eighties, whichever decade is closest to when you were growing up. Did each family have
two cars? Mobile telephones? Dishwashers? Microwaves? Two televisions? Did your
mom and dad take expensive foreign holidays, sometimes even more than one in a year?
Did they wear expensive designer clothes? In the 1930s, which surely is only 'yesterday,'
over 25 million Americans had virtually no income whatsoever; only 1% of UK homes
had a telephone; only 50% had electricity and nutrition was so poor that six out of ten men
who applied for the army failed their very basic medical test and could not join up.

Wealth Fact #5
You are already in the top 1% of the world in terms of wealth. Most people on the planet
still live on subsistence farms, carry water from long distances and till the fields with
oxen; they are without sanitation, clean running water on tap and electricity. Are you
happier than they are, on average?
At this point in the proceedings it is worth asking again: Do you have enough?
Think about it. You are already one thousand times wealthier than an ancient Egyptian,
three hundred times richer than someone living in AD 1; twenty times wealthier than the
average person in 1850; five times wealthier than your grandfather and in the top 1% of
wealthy people on the planet.
Do you have enough?

227
This is not a one-shot question, it is a question for life. You need to continuously ask
yourself this from now until you die. If the answer is still no, then ask yourself a
supplementary question which you need to answer, right now: When do you think you
will have enough? The answer to this question provides one of the keys to your happiness
for the rest of your life.
People are working harder, faster and certainly under more stress than at any time in
history. Labour is not usually hard physical toil, but still the average person is slaving
away forty or fifty hours a week to make enough money to make ends meet i.e. to
sustain their 'poor' lifestyle which is twenty times wealthier than the average 1850-
dweller. Furthermore, they are not very happy.
In general, people are overworked, highly stressed and on a treadmill getting nowhere fast.
It is the rat-race which was identified long ago. Incredibly, although people are all
approximately one thousand times wealthier than an ancient Egyptian, they feel broke.
Most people are fighting a losing battle against a tide of debt, taxation and expenses which
threaten to sweep them away if they do not keep their noses pressed firmly to the
grindstone. Despite their huge wealth, in historical terms, many people are anxious and
depressed by their 'poverty.'

Visitor From The Past

What on earth would an ancestor from 500 years ago make of us if you brought her here in
a time capsule?
She would see the clean, safe water on tap it took her one full day each week of
backbreaking labour just to get enough water, and that was brackish and flavoured with
dead sheep. She would see the stunning abundance of food at almost give-away prices
you have to work just 24 hours a month to buy all the rich abundance of family food you
need, she would have to work an average of 160 hours for some basic meat and bread. She
would note your clean clothes and the dozens of different sets of clothing you owned she
owned one set and it was constantly filthy as there was no soap and no hot water. She
would marvel at your health, your teeth, your longevity her life expectancy was 40
years, her teeth were rotten stumps and people died all around her from disease and
hunger.
We could go on about transport (she had none), opportunities (zero), education (crude),
entertainment (sitting around a fire and telling wild boar jokes), but she would also be
shocked at the level of unhappiness and stress we are all living under. She would
legitimately ask why on earth we were all striving so hard when we had everything we
could possibly need, and more.
Why, she would ask, did we not all feel incredibly wealthy and happy?
Ask yourself a few questions: Do you feel extraordinarily wealthy? Are you happy? Do
you have an almost stress-free life? Do you have plenty of time to do the things you want
to do, or are you always working to hold back the tidal wave? Are you engaged in a
constant struggle for more, more, more?
If so ... when do you think you will have enough?
Because this is the ultimate book on wealth, there is no suggestion here of some kind of
anti-wealth, back-to-nature, tree-hugging crusade. Nothing could be further from the truth.
228
No comment has been made about how much enough might be. This is for you to
decide. It could be 50,000 or 100 million or more.
The point is to get you to think about the question, because the answer has profound
implications for your happiness.

How Much is Enough?

To explain this, here is a blunt statement: Your greed is insatiable. There is almost no
limit to what you would want to possess. The only limit is the price you are willing to pay
to obtain it, and your imagination. To prove this, let us play a little game in which the
bank is open, has unlimited resources at its disposal and you can have as much as you
want. No penalty, no tax, no problem. It is yours to have and to spend however you see fit.
How about 50,000 in cash for a start?
Remember, you really do have an unlimited account, so let us think a bit bigger. How
about a quarter of a million? You could buy a modest house with that, mortgage-free.
Hopefully your imagination is not quite so shackled and you are already starting to think
about a fat bankers draft for a million pounds. No problem. The money is unlimited.
Have what you want there are no strings attached.
One million pounds will buy the house of your dreams, and the car(s) of your dreams. Are
you starting to think bigger? Ten million pounds? This will give you all the money you
could ever need for the rest of your life. It would take care of your children and your
grandchildren.
Enough? Remember, it is free. All that is limiting you is your imagination...
Let us get serious. Ten million pounds would not even buy you admission to the outer
circle of the superrich. To tempt you further, and in case you were doubting that
'unlimited' promise, the banker has just told you that there is one hundred thousand
million, billion pounds in this account, earmarked to give away and you are first in the
queue. You can have it all, if you want. In fact you would be doing the banker a favour as
he could then close the account and stop worrying about it.
What would you do with it? Come on now! Think! You could buy your own country and
run it the way you wanted to. You could own and run the entire United Kingdom or
America or even (pause for evil laugh...) the world! Why not? Your vision for the world is
surely no worse than that of many of our current leaders? Couldn't you do a better job if
you had absolute power? How about being absolute ruler of the planet? How does that
sound? But wait... the earth is just one planet in the solar system. How about owning a few
other planets too? How about owning Mars, and having the money to teraform it exactly
as you want?
Your own world, and you as....God.
Now perhaps you dropped out somewhere on that continuum, possibly at the one million
or ten million level? Or perhaps you were there to the end. If you did drop out, it was
because your imagination failed you. You could not imagine having more money or power
than this.
Now back to reality...

229
Our Insatiable Greed
The point was to show you that your greed (everybody's greed) is almost limitless if it is
made a free lunch for you. Apart from your lack of imagination, the only thing which
holds you back from owning the whole planet is something known as 'paying the price'.
Everything has a price in time, effort, risk, stress and strain. There truly is no such thing as
a free lunch. If you want 50 you have to pay the price (e.g. a few hours work). If you
want 25,000 each year, then the price is typically forty hours of your irreplaceable life
each week working in a job you barely tolerate.
If you want one million pounds, the price is typically 3-5 years of 60-80 hour weeks;
moderate stress, little social life, poor family life and some personal and financial risk.
That is about the going rate. You may get it cheaper, or it may cost you more.
If you want ten million pounds, as you will soon see the price is typically ten or more
years spent in the fast lane as an industrialist, entrepreneur, artist etc. The price is active
media coverage of your personal and corporate life; ten or more years of 80 hour weeks;
permanent stress; living in the white water of a constantly changing market place and
absolute devotion to your vision to the exclusion of almost everything else. You will have
no real friends you can never tell who your real friends are when you have this level of
wealth; you will attract government surveillance money equals power, governments
cannot allow the Thralls to have too much personal power and so they become very
interested in you when you make more than ten million.
If you want one hundred million or more, the price is everything associated with getting
ten million, plus a pack of press wolves, desperate to strip you down to the lowest
common denominator. You will have many enemies both personal and political.
You will be unable to live anything approaching a normal life. You will not be allowed
out on your own without bodyguards, and you will live in a heavily guarded fortress. Most
people will loathe and despise you, no matter how much of your wealth you give away to
charity as a token gesture. Even if you give away one billion pounds you will be despised
and vilified for being mean and keeping the other three billion most people will just
shrug and say he can afford it.
That is the price, give or take. You may get lucky and make 100 million without
problems. You may get unlucky and suffer even more than has been indicated.

What Does This All Add up to?

We are ready to pull a few threads together here.
1. You are already staggeringly wealthy compared with at any previous time in
history, yet you are running harder, faster and under immense personal stress in order to
get more. You do not know how much more, because you have never thought about it.
You are also probably not very happy.
2. Your greed is, to all intents and purposes, insatiable. This is not a moral
judgement. It is a statement of fact about human beings. What you would like to have is
limited only by your imagination, and your willingness to pay the price required to get it.
3. Given that there is a price to pay in time, effort, stress, emotion and risk in order to
obtain a given amount of wealth, any sensible person would ask themselves the very basic

230
question: How much is enough? Or, put another way: Do I have enough? If not, when
will I have enough?
The purpose of life is not to stack up money in the bank. The purpose of your short stay on
the planet is to be all you can be and to live a happy, fulfilled and balanced life. You need
money to live a decent lifestyle, and depending on your vision, you need money to help
others and make your dreams a reality. More than this you do not need. If it were free, you
would take it, of course, and rightly so. But it isn't free. Everyone must pay a price to
obtain it.
When you ask yourself the simple question: Do I have enough? something almost
magical happens. Many people describe a feeling of release a sort of letting go. You
might feel that you are finally able to drop a burden which you have been carrying all your
life.
Whatever you feel, there are surely only three possible answers to this question:
1. I have more than enough.
2. I have exactly enough.
3. I do not have enough and am willing to pay the price to get more. I now need to
ask myself: So when will I have enough?
To expand on these three answers:

I Have More Than Enough

Now you bring it to my attention, I realise that I have more than enough. I am debt free,
and have considerable savings, yet still I am working too many hours a week in a high
stress job. A lot of my money actually goes to pay for my high profile lifestyle which is
required by the job. For example, I need to live close to my job and housing is very
expensive in our area. If I moved, I could get a larger house for half the money but it costs
a fortune to commute to work. My children are in private school. We pay a nanny to look
after the children because my wife works as well. It's crazy. Why do we do it? Probably
because we've always done it. I guess it is just a habit. If I made certain life changes, I
could work two or three days a week. We would have to move, and have a simpler
lifestyle, but we are both so stressed at the moment, surely it could not be worse? I've
realised one thing, I could easily make more money. I just need to work harder, faster or
smarter. But I choose not to. That is a breakthrough for me. I choose not to. That is real
power.
Could you live a simpler, lower stress life? Could you work less hard and live more
simply, doing more of the things you want to do whatever they are? Sure, you could
easily make a lot more money, but how about considering the choice of not doing this?
This book is all about you taking one of two choices; to become wealthy and live a
powerful life but realising you must pay the price this demands; or to live a simpler more
balanced life. This would not be so powerful but the price you would pay is less. There is
no right or wrong path.
A very quick reminder about power: when you are wealthy you can help hundreds or
thousands of people; when you are poor you can only help in a modest way and the help is
usually restricted to just a few people. Do not be tempted to quote Mother Theresa here!
She had tens of millions of dollars at her disposal to allow her to carry out her good works.
231
You can make more money by working harder, faster, longer, smarter. Nobody is denying
your abilities. It is easy. But... why not consider the option of choosing not to do this? This
means setting a limit on what you have, saying, in effect, I have more than enough and
using the time you would have spent in striving for more, to do the other things you have
always promised yourself you will do. This phenomenon is known as 'downshifting' and is
sweeping across America. Please understand there is no requirement on you to help others
or save the world. You are here to live the life you want to live.
If this is not an option for you right now, still you need constantly to be thinking about this
option throughout your life.

I Have Exactly Enough

Yes, now you mention it, I have exactly enough at the moment. Of course, I would like
more, and if it was free I would take it from you with thanks. But I know that in order to
get more I need to sacrifice more of my life and I am not willing to do this. There are
many other things I want to do with whatever time is left to me. I would rather do those
than work harder, faster and take on yet more stress in order to accumulate more money. I
am not willing to pay the price for higher financial rewards. Making more money is not
difficult. There is plenty of overtime at work, and I could take a second job in the
evenings. But I have taken a powerful decision in my life. I have decided that I have
enough. I have chosen not to pursue yet more money.
Could you be at peace with your current level of wealth? Taking such a decision frees you
from the constant struggle to make more. It frees you from the nagging guilt about not
starting your own business, or expanding your current one. It saves you having to buy
more books like this and CDs and go on yet more seminars...

I Do Not Have Enough

No, I do not have enough. I want more a lot more. I am willing to pay the price. If that
means five years of constant struggle to make three million, then that's what I'll do. I have
asked myself the question: When will I have enough? and I have an answer. I do not
want to struggle in a high-stress environment forever, accumulating cash until I die. I want
a five-bedroom detached house in a decent area (fully paid), a brand-new Mercedes, and
the equivalent of a million pounds in today's money in the bank, so that will all cost two
million give or take. That would mean I never have to work again. I would also like
another million to put into various projects I am keen upon. That's enough for me. If I can
make three million pounds free and clear, I know I could make ten million. I have no
doubt about this. But I have made a choice. I know what I want and I'm going to get it. I
am willing to pay the price. I know what that price is, approximately. I also know how
much is enough and this lets me know when to stop chasing wealth, and concentrate on
many of the great things which life has to offer.
How about you? If you desperately want more and are willing to pay the price, then great!
But make sure you ask the supplementary question: When will I have enough? You
need a plan and an exit strategy, assuming the work you do is not your total passion and
reason for existing.
We are talking exit strategies here. Exit from the rat-race, as it used to be called.

232
Make Money Until You Drop?
Are you going to work at making money until you drop? If so, why? What is it all for?
Only a fool would do this without a big reason (such as every penny you make helps to
save lives).
If you are not going to work until you drop, when are you going to stop, or cut back? This
does not mean atrophying, it means you stop accumulating cash. Answer: When you have
enough so you need to know what enough is for you, bearing in mind the price you
have to pay to get it.
Also, you need to think about what else you want to do with your life, if anything. And
this is a problem for many people. We are all so conditioned to work until we drop that we
have given little thought to what else we want to do with our lives. Perhaps now is the
time for you to think a little about this?
The best way to get wealthy is to start a business as we have seen, but you should not start
or run a business unless you have a clear answer to the questions: What is this business
for? When do I get out? When will I have enough? Running a business as a pure money-
generator (rather than as a life passion) is all about making maximum money in minimum
time, then selling out or closing down and getting yourself a real life. If your business is
also your passion, then you might never actually close it down, but it becomes more of a
hobby than a driving force which dictates your life.

The Stasis Concept

If you run your own business (or are thinking of starting) no matter how large or small,
consider the following proposal...
All businesses need to expand, otherwise they are dying, so the conventional wisdom
goes.
But consider this: when you expand your business, two things happen...
1. You run harder and faster and pile on the stress both for you and your employees.
2. You do not make any more money because you plough every penny back in to fuel
the expansion. Worse, you frequently go into heavy debt to fund the expansion. It is all
jam tomorrow.
If you continue this process, you are pinning all your hopes on selling the business some
way down the line, and cashing in your chips. This may, or may not happen. Most times it
does not happen due to a variety of factors. Markets change, people change. You find you
have this huge gaping mouth to feed every month. You wake up one morning and realise
you need to make 100,000 each month just to meet payroll and other bills. You run faster
and faster, growing all the time. New staff, new premises, new products, new territories,
take-overs, mergers; and all with little additional profit because of the expansion drive.
Now if this is what turns you on, then go for it. You can make many millions doing, this
just as you can lose the lot and go broke of course.
So how about running a business which does not expand? A business in which you choose
not to make ever increasing amounts of money, even though you could. This is a business
which makes a great deal of money each year, but does not grow (in real terms). It
changes and morphs, but does not get larger. This concept is known as 'stasis.'
233
For example, let us say you currently turn over one million and make 150,000 profit
the exact figures are not relevant. Your business might be ten times larger than this, or one
tenth as large. Let us say you decide always to do this, give or take 10%, and ignoring
inflation, for the next few years at least.
Supposing you make a deliberate decision not to go large. Why? Because you have
enough, and the price of growing is just too high a price to pay.
Suppose you could run this company working three days a week instead of six? Think
what you could do with the spare time! Supposing this made you happier, less stressed and
a far better manager/entrepreneur during the three days you worked?
Could you turn over 2 million and make 300,000? Sure. There is no question, but...
suppose you decide not to? You take a conscious decision that 150,000 a year income is
enough for you. Yes you would take 300,000 if it was free, but you know it is not free.
There is a price to pay in extra hours, extra stress, extra work and sacrifice of your
irreplaceable life. What an amazing decision to make! During the course of a typical
business year, all sorts of projects arise with the potential to make money but you turn
them all down. Why? Because they would push your turnover above the preset 1 million
mark and you have decided not to do this. You are not going to run after every project just
because it could make more money for you.
The analogy is deciding not to take an evening job down at the local bar in addition to
your day job, because you have decided that you already have enough. Could you make
extra cash working at the bar? Sure. But the price is long hours and evenings away from
the family, and you have chosen not to go for this.

The Money Lever

This thought process alters the way you view your business or your job. You now
correctly view it as a moneymaking machine. You pull a heavy lever, and out comes a
crisp 20 note. You pull the lever again and out pops another. Great! So what are you
going to do?
1) Pull the lever repeatedly, morning, noon and night for 30 years, never even
counting the huge pile of notes, until you drop dead of a heart attack one day, beside a
large pile of ten million pounds in crisp twenties.
2) Sit back and think for a moment. Think to yourself something like this: I have a
neat little money making machine here. It could provide me with enough if I operate the
lever 8 hours a day, for 3 days a week. Sure, I could operate the lever six days a week for
twelve hours a day, and I would definitely get more money, but I am choosing not to do
this. I want to do a lot of other things in my life instead of pulling that lever. If I play this
right, I can keep this money-machine ticking for many years with minimal effort.
So think carefully about your working life and your plans. Do not just blunder into making
money only to look up from your workbench in thirty years to realise that life has passed
you by. You are going to live a lot longer than anyone at any previous time in history. It is
going to be even easier for you to make 'enough.' Why not have a careful think about what
'enough' might be for you, and then formulate a definite plan to get this, and no more?
Meanwhile, you need to do a lot of work on what it is you are really on the planet for, and
go and do it!
234
 Lesson Twenty-Two: How to Make Ten Million
We have discussed wealth at the level of about one million pounds. But what about getting
really rich? Say ten million pounds?
These days you are not rich if you have one million. Although not small change, a million
in the bank would merely allow you to live in modest comfort for the rest of your days.
You would have to be careful with money. You could not be extravagant. One million in
disposable capital would give you around 50,000 a year in salary after tax, which is a lot
less than a good company director gets. If you took this 50k salary, the million would
slowly be eaten away by inflation until it was worth just 350,000 in about twenty years.
(Inflation, as you now know, is a calculated government tactic to steal yet more money
from you, in this case by devaluing it. If a company perpetrated this fraud for such it is
the directors would be arrested and jailed.)
350k is hardly a kings ransom. It is barely enough for a decent house.
The days are long gone when becoming a millionaire was a crazy dream. Being a
millionaire is not what it used to be. A millionaire in 1900 would have the equivalent of
one hundred million pounds in today's money!
But ten million pounds is quite a lot of money. We could call that rich.
With ten million in the bank you can spend about 250,000 a year (20,000 a month!) and
still have modest growth on your capital, but interestingly, you would be in the bottom
echelons of the wealthy, knocking for admittance to the fringes of their outer circle. If
your ten million were ever reduced to one million, you would be described as flat broke
by your new circle of wealthy friends. They would talk about you in hushed and
sympathetic voices. They would turn away as you walked into a room. This would not be
snobbery; just embarrassment and pity for one reduced to such poverty.
When you have had ten million, this level of wealth seems normal for you. To be down to
your last million really does seem like flat broke an horrific state to be in!
In contrast, when you have an overdraft and exist on a pittance, then a 10,000 win on the
lottery feels like a staggeringly large pile of cash a gleaming mountain of gold. And a
million? Well, this seems unimaginable; a sum of money which cannot be held in the
mind, it is so vast.
It is this sense of perspective which aids the rich person and hampers the poor. Consider
this: If you have made a few million, how do you think you view your chances of making
it again if you were to lose it? A bit of a nuisance. An irritation. But a ludicrous fantasy? A
crazy, impossible dream? Hardly! So do you think people with this attitude manage to
make a million again if they lose it?
Yes, they do. Often they do it several times over, if they are particularly careless with
money.
But when you are broke and have never managed to accumulate more than a modest sum
of say 10,000, how do you think you view the possibility of making a million or ten
million?
This appears to be an un-scaleable mountain, the dizzy heights of which tower to infinity
above you, a mere mortal. These slopes seem impossible to climb. You cannot imagine

235
how another person could have climbed to that lofty peak, let alone the millions who have
done so before you. There are over two million dollar millionaires in the USA alone. How
hard can it be? Answer: certainly not impossible.
Yet your fear and doubt alone prevents you from following these people. You don't really
believe you can do it.
In contrast, those who have made it and lost it know with complete certainty that they can
make this kind of money again. They have done it once; they will do it again if need be. It
is this certainty which allows them to repeat their previous success. Yes, they have some
technical knowledge and experience which comes in handy the second (or third) time
around, but the real secret is their belief.
They believe they can do it. Actually, they know they can do it. The poor person is filled
with doubt and indecision; this prevents them from taking action. They are afraid to fail
when really, they have nothing to lose.
If you are broke, what can you lose? Nothing. But you need to start taking action as soon
as possible because your life has a certain amount of inertia. Like a super tanker it cannot
be diverted from its course immediately. To change course, the steering wheel must be
turned by an effort of your will, and then after a few weeks or months, your life will start
slowly to change for the better as it settles into its new course.
The trick is this; knowing about the time-lag between steering wheel or rudder movement
and actual course change, you need to start turning the wheel early. This means as soon as
possible, preferably now, today, after you have put this book down.

The Secrets of Getting Wealthy

At this stage of your studies you should have five things firmly in mind:
1. You know you want to be wealthy and free. We are not talking about a hundred
million here, we are talking between three and ten million.
2. You realise there is a price to pay and that three or ten million will not drop into
your lap through luck, chanting, praying or waiting. You know it will take effort,
and you are prepared to get your sleeves rolled up.
3. You have genuinely abandoned Get Rich Quick rubbish and know they are all
fantasies. You realise that to become wealthy will require your consistent applied
effort for a sizeable amount of time.
4. You know it is very possible to achieve wealth because millions of others have
done it. Whilst it would not be right to call it easy, this is not some crazy, bizarre
dream of little substance.
5. This is not a game for you. You are serious and you are willing to fight.

Please go down that list and put a tick mark against all five. If you miss any out, you are
reading the wrong book!
If you want ten million you need to ask yourself if you are willing to pay the price.
We will discuss what the price is in a moment, but realise that if you are not willing to pay
the price you need to adjust your mind-set immediately and accept the fact that you will

236
never be really wealthy (luck to one side). You should not waste any further mental
energy fantasising about this, or saying one day... Just forget it. Put big money out of
your mind forever, and be happy with what you have got.
This is (seriously) a perfectly valid position to take.
You don't have to become rich. It is not essential. Just stop pretending. If you have
decided not to pay the price, then fine just stop talking about it! It is boring and others
are probably secretly laughing at you behind your back.

The Price
Just to remind you, the price involves devoting a reasonable chunk of your life to the
project of making this kind of money. Probably at least ten years, more like twenty.
Obviously some have done it in less, but very few.
Remember this means that you have to love whatever it is you are going to do to make this
money. This cannot be a twenty year prison sentence. You cannot mortgage your present
for some future benefit twenty years down the line. You cannot do something you hate
whilst persuading yourself that it will be worth it in a couple of decades when you retire.
You will not last three years, let alone twenty. That business will eat you up long before
then.
To make ten million you need absolute laser beam focus and dedication to the task at
hand. This means love for your work and belief in what you are doing. This is something
worth going for, and a price worth paying for many people. Your focus is almost certainly
going to be on the project and not on the ten million. Mere money is not sufficient
incentive to do what it takes to make it! That may surprise you.

Your Future Plans

Its worth asking what other plans you have, apart from trying your very hardest to be all
you can be, to fight to dare and to win? What other plans could you possibly have that are
more pressing than this? Flipping mags? Watching some TV? Drinking down the bar?
Surely there is only one plan worth having? To be all you are capable of being. To push
the limits and keep pushing until the day you die. To drop down dead trying for that next
goal shooting for the bigger dream, helping yet more people. This is a masterful life. A
life filled with power. A life worth living. This is not a greedy life spent in the mindless
pursuit of ever more money for who knows what reason. As we have said several times,
you need a big enough why to shoot for this level of wealth.
Now the price... We have touched upon this already but it bears repeating. Many claim to
be happy to pay the price, but they havent thought it through. They are bedazzled by the
lure of the ten million and will nod automatically in agreement to any sacrifice asked of
them to attain it.

The Price
The price is a busy life with little time for standard relaxation of the sort engaged in by the
Thralls. It is a full to bursting life with your energies and talents directed purposefully on
positive goals. It is a focused life in which you work very hard on things which matter.
You will be a driven person going from phase to phase of your wealth-building project.
237
You will be endlessly fascinated by life and its challenges.
You will take on too much.
You will ideally be helping others in some very meaningful way otherwise your project
will eventually turn out to be meaningless and your triumph hollow.
Your social life will not be good because you will be unwilling to squander the endless
hours it takes to maintain the dozens of friendships and acquaintances craved by the
insecure. That is the hard truth.
Most people will not understand you. They cannot understand why you do not want to
waste hundreds of hours chatting about trivia and socialising.
Almost the entire world will be against you. Most people will consider you lucky to have
made some money. To them, money making is a purely random event which happens
accidentally to someone for no effort on their part.
They spend their lives sitting around waiting for this miracle to happen to them. When it
happens to you, many people will be jealous.
You will lose a lot of friends maybe all of them. There is also a very high chance that
your current relationship will not survive.
The state and the press are against you too. They do not like the worker drones to have
personal power. They do not like strong-minded, wealthy individualists. They will seek to
break you down to drone status if you ever threaten to get above your station.
All this, and more will be your lot.
Still interested? Still want to make ten million?
Good. You are our kind of person. You are prepared to fight and win or go down trying.
Are you a docile factory farm animal to be milked by the government? No. The very
thought makes you angry.
Are you prepared to settle for a life of third-rate mediocrity? No. The thought makes you
sick.
Do you wallow in the warm human soup of vapid companionship? Do you compete with
others to see who can be the more ordinary? No? Great! You could have what it takes to
make ten million.

The Ten Million Pound Business

Assuming you have decided to go for it, there is only one legal way of making this kind of
money (apart from luck such as winning the lottery or if you are an ultra highly paid
senior banker or top business executive with millions of pounds in share options).
As with the million, the one way for us mere mortals to make this kind of money is to run
our own business, but there is a new and important dimension to this formula. This single
twist makes the difference between modest success in your own small business and
making the ten million which you claim to seek.
Firstly an acknowledgement. The following thought stream was inspired by Michael
Gerber who single-handedly, has released tens of thousands of business people from
slavery and into the clear light of freedom. Please read his book E-Myth (this is
absolutely required reading) or buy the Nightingale Conant CD series E-Myth Seminar.

238
E-Myth stands for 'Entrepreneurial Myth and Michael blows apart the standard myth that
it is good and noble to have your own small business if you want to be rich.
Here is the inside track on this secret...

The Entrepreneurial Myth

Everyone will tell you that you cannot get rich working for someone else. This is true
with a handful of exceptions (top bankers on huge bonuses, maybe top surgeons or
captains of industry). The alternative, they say, is to start your own small business. That is
true as well...up to a point. As we have seen this will get you from 10k to maybe a
million or two if you play it right.
The problem is that most small businesses are little more than a licence for the owner to
work for minimum wage or less. Yes they have independence from bosses, but they
become slaves to a far more tyrannical master themselves.
Please listen very carefully. We have all been down this path and we know what we are
talking about. This experience is not unique to us. Countless thousands of business owners
have made this same error. In fact most business owners have made the error and are still
making it.
They are trapped by their businesses.
This chapter should save you wasting ten years of your life finding out the hard way how
to make ten million from your business.
The trick to making ten million involves no extra work for you at all. In fact your
personal work load can even reduce. The trick is in making the very difficult mental
transition from working IN your business to working ON your business.
Thats it. There is nothing more to it than that.
You can make 100,000 working IN your business. You can just about make a million
working IN your business. But making ten million it is very hard to achieve without
working ON your business. We would all agree that this is, in fact, impossible.
Sounds easy to make the switch? Maybe, but fewer than 1% of business owners manage to
do it. That is 1% of business owners, not 1% of the general public. The reason is lack of
training and knowledge. They signed up to the E-myth and never looked back.
It is time for some home truths.

The Harsh Truth of Running a Little Business

Here is a portrait of the typical business owner. They are now entering their twentieth
year of being in business for themselves. For most of those years they have worked 10-12
hour days six or seven days a week.
When they started, they had absolutely no picture of what their business would look like
when it was finished.
Read that last sentence again.
What do we mean When the business is finished? Surely a business is never finished?
Error number one!

239
They made some money, they lost some money. They bought a fancy car but had little
time to drive it except up and down the motorway to endless meetings. They moved into a
larger house, but did not really have the freedom or time to enjoy it.
When business was good, they were at work 24/7. In the lean times they were panicking
and trying to drum up business so they were at work 24/7.
At the end of each year they paid an accountant to tell them how much they had made.
They were doing okay about 50% better than the average middle manager, but they were
paying a huge price and were a long way from even a sniff of ten million.
Also, the business was entirely in their heads. If they had dropped down dead, or been
taken ill, the business would have suffered tremendously maybe even folded. It began
and ended with them. Little was written down. They had no exit strategy or even a dim
view of a date at which they would cash in their chips. There was no exit strategy.
This is employment by another name. This is the situation with 99% of owner-managed
businesses. There is no chance of making ten million like this. Really, no chance.
If you want to make ten million, you have to short-circuit this slow, tortuous path.
Look at the numbers. The average small business turns over between a quarter and a half a
million. That is turnover. The profit on that is typically between 25k and 50k and that is
the salary the business owner typically draws, cleaning the business out at the end of
each year. Then he or she starts again next year. Even at 50k a year, it would take you
twenty years to amass a million pounds and two hundred years to amass ten million and
that is assuming you never spend a dime of it!
It cannot be done this way. Really. Forget it. The best you can do is make up to a million
or two in the average business, and even that marks you out as very special. Most do not
make a quarter of this.
The next mistake these aspiring multi-millionaires make is to run a business in an area
they know something about.
Error number two!
Remember this chapter in about making ten million. Different rules apply for this,
compared with making a million, so do not think this is contradicting anything previously
said. It is a different game, played on a different pitch in a different strip.
Yes, most people start a business doing what they know how to do. It is an obvious entry
point and one to be considered. The point is that this is usually the only thing people
consider because they flee for the safety of the known.
If you are a welder for ABC Steel Sheet Co, you start your own freelance welding
company.
So what are you going to be doing for the next twenty years? Yes, youve got it welding.
Welding by day, welding by night. Welding into the small hours of the morning. Welding
until your hands shake and your eyes grow tired trying to get that big job out of the door.
There are only so many joints you can weld and so regardless of what you charge per
joint, your turnover (and profit) are pegged firmly at a low level. A million pounds seems
(and is) ten years away. Ten million is an impossible dream.

240
Do you employ other welders? Probably not. Nobody knows more about welding than
you. They just mess-up the jobs. It is easier to do the thing yourself than it is to get some
monkey to do it. By the time you have explained the job you could have welded it up
yourself.
Please understand: if this is you, you are a welder, not a businessman.
You work for ACME carpet cleaning Co? They are doing a lousy job and the customers
are annoyed. The cleaners never turn up at the right time. When they do turn up they do
half a job. Customers complain. Right! Here is a business opening for you. So... you start
up Janets Carpet Cleaning with the usual quality and value stuff. You put yourself in
hock to buy a van and some equipment. You print leaflets, you hit the road. Soon you get
a couple of customers. Wow! This is great. Instead of the pathetic 10 an hour your
stingy boss used to pay, you now get to keep the whole, whopping 25 an hour paid by
the customer.
Guess what? Soon you are cleaning carpets morning noon and night. You start at 7 a.m.
and stop at 8 p.m.. You work and work. You arrive home half dead. You fall into bed and
start again the next morning. There are only so many carpets you can clean and so
regardless of what you charge, your turnover (and profit) are pegged firmly at a low level.
Whilst this is a good option for getting your first 100k, a million pounds seems (and is)
ten years away. Ten million is an impossible dream. Do you employ some help? No. Who
can clean those carpets as thoroughly as you? Nobody. By the time you have shown some
doofus school leaver how to do the job properly, you could have done it yourself.
Please understand: if this is you, you are a carpet cleaner, not a businesswoman.
A gentle reminder once again: this is not knocking owner-managed small businesses if
that is what you want. You can certainly do better than average in such a venture.
100,000 is easily achievable and if you do a mixture of working in, and on, your business
you can make a million in about five to ten years.
We are talking here only about making ten million pounds and this is flat out impossible
in an owner-managed business unless you can make that essential transition from working
IN your business to working ON your business.
You see, the problem with the welder and the carpet-cleaner is that they both knew how to
do the detailed job and were good at it.
Why is this a problem? Because when you know how to do something, you are tempted to
do it. This is why 99% of businesses never really make it big. The owners just cannot keep
their sticky hands off the welding torch or the Sudso-Foamer. And as soon as they pick up
those tools, they are consigning themselves to a semiskilled minimum wage job which any
one of fifty thousand people would gladly do for a few pounds an hour.
So now, the missing ingredient in the start your own business myth is to complete the
unfinished sentence.
Start your own business and then.... sell that turkey!
Michael Gerber says: If you havent sold your business, then youve bought it.
That is true. And this, my friends, is one of the tiny handful of ways of making ten million
or more, legally.
Here is the step by step plan.
241
1. Start a business, preferably in something you do not know how to do yourself.
This is harder than doing something you know how to do, but it will save you endless
heartache later. If you really, genuinely must start a business doing something you have a
skill in, then at the earliest opportunity you must be prepared to make the monumental
leap of stopping work at the semi-skilled level, and starting work at the managerial level.
This leap is far, far harder when you are skilled in the service offered by your business,
but it can be done by the dedicated few just.
2. Have a firm picture in your mind of what your business will look like when
you have finished with it.
Picture a certain size company with a turnover of (say) ten million with twenty employees
housed in a nice office unit somewhere or whatever is appropriate to your business. If
your aim is ten million, then picture a company which is worth ten million pounds. That
would typically be a company with about one and a half million pound annual profit. This
is a rule of thumb, but there are many factors affecting the value of a business.
3. Work ON the business, not IN it. Strive from the earliest moment to remove
yourself from the detailed day to day running of the operation. Do not run the photocopier;
instead work only on marketing and business strategy. Every minute spent on manual
work is a minute not spent on moving the business forward. This is so, so hard for the
average owner-manager. It takes an extraordinary effort of will to stop yourself from
picking up the welding torch, particularly when times get hard.
4. Make yourself redundant. That is, build a business which can carry on even if
you were to die tomorrow. Sure you would be missed, but the business would continue.
You should aim to build a company in which a good, competent manager could replace
you. If you do not achieve this, your business is unsaleable it is literally worthless in that
nobody wants to buy it at any price. Who wants to buy a business which is 100%
dependent upon you? Supposing you resign, or fall ill? What then? Most owner-managers
wallow in pride at their own indispensability. Why, without me, this business would be
nothing! They are arrogant and foolish. And by the way this is an excellent example of
ego consciousness. Most people start a business because they want to be somebody.
They want others to look up to them. They want to be the boss. Their business is little
more than a sad ego trip.
You must make yourself dispensable. To achieve this you must:
5. Make your business a turnkey operation. That is, a company which runs like
clockwork according to instructions written by you.
Make your business a MacDonalds. That is a great example of a turnkey operation. The
staff do not have to work out from first principles how to make a profit from selling
hamburgers. It is written down. You just follow the instructions, A, B, C. Dont deviate.
Buy the frozen chips from this supplier at this price. Put this exact number into the fryer.
Fry at this exact temperature for so many minutes. Remove. Put into a warmer, set it to
this temperature. Shovel this exact quantity into these cardboard cartons supplied by this
manufacturer at this price. Get the idea?
Any business can be made into such a turnkey operation, even though the decisions taken
by your people will be of a higher order than those taken by the average MacDonalds
employee.
242
To turn your business into a turnkey operation you answer the critical question: How do
we make money?
There should be an exact, detailed answer to this.
Although the answer might be long enough to fill a 100 page operations manual, it will
still be a definitive answer to these questions:
1. How do you attract customers?
2. How do you advertise?
3. What steps do you take to bring in new business?
4. How do you make your product or supply your service?
5. How do you deliver it, wrap it, pack it?
6. How do you run your accounts system and your administration?
7. How do you cope with customer complaints? Refunds?
All these questions can be answered in exact detail, even the esoteric ones.
In the standard owner-managed business, these answers are in the form of a nebulous mist
swirling around in the owners head. Many answers will be instinctive. Several will vary
from day to day. This is not how to build a saleable business.
A business should be just like a product.
You build it, you quality assure it, you market it and then... you SELL IT.
This cannot be emphasised strongly enough.
An exit strategy should not consist of clutching your chest one day and slumping in a heap
over the desk. You should have a vision for your business and a sell by date.
You should build a perfect little turnkey money-making machine which any half way
competent person could operate. Then you sell that sucker, collect the ten million
and...start again if you feel like it! The real fun is in building such an organisation, not in
running the business once everything is working like clockwork. Leave that to others.
If you want to actually run a clockwork business, then buy yourself a MacDonalds
franchise and shovel fries all day. Someone else has done the hard work to ensure that this
perfect turnkey operation can produce profits even in the hands of a half-wit. The business
has been made to work automatically. This is what you should aim for in your own
business.

Selling The Business

You will never find a buyer for your business if it is You Ltd. But there are plenty of
buyers for a nice little cash-generating machine with a simple set of operating instructions.
Do this, this and this and the money will come rolling in. Who can resist that? You will
also have a good set of accounts showing that the business has made great profits year on
year. The buyers will also be able to see that they could replace you with any decent
manager on 50k and the thing would still run smoothly.
What is the third most important question in the mind of a prospective buyer? Is this a
good viable business? That is probably question one. Is it making a profit and can we
increase the profits? That is probably question two. Can you guess what question three
is? It is this:
243
Can we fire the idiot who started this thing and replace him or her?
Do you see this?
Reminder once again: we are still talking about ten million, not one million. There is
nothing wrong with having your own little wool shop or car cleaning service, if that is
what you want. Just be sure that you understand what you are doing and what level of
wealth this will (and wont) bring you.
If you want ten million, you must follow the steps explained here.
Now here is something else: having built up and sold your first business, you become
instantly financially independent. Guess what? That puts you in a very powerful personal
position. The next venture you undertake becomes fun, not a life and death grind which
must succeed otherwise you are dead in the water. With some money in the bank, you do
not need to pick up the welding torch and you would be a fool if you did.
Now you can start (or buy) a business in an area which interests you, but of which you
have no personal knowledge or skill. Perfect! The less you know about the detailed
running of this business, the better. If it is a car repair company, you should know nothing
about how to repair cars. Why? If you know something about it, you will be tempted to get
under the hood instead of employing someone to do this for you.
Also, another vital point is this. If you are doing it yourself then you are masking the real
figures underlying that business. Here is how this works...
All businesses exist solely to make a profit. That is their primary reason for being in
existence. It is not the function of a business to dig holes in the morning, fill them in again
in the afternoon, and make a loss. That business might be busy, but that has nothing to do
with it. You must make a profit or close the thing down and sit on a beach all day. Busy-
ness (turnover) has nothing whatsoever to do with it. It is about PROFIT making money.
So, to run any business you ask yourself three basic questions: What can I buy this stuff
for, and what can I sell it for? Is the difference enough for me to build a business upon?
The things you buy can be goods, raw materials or expertise. Often you will buy all three.
The thing you sell can be a finished product, a service or a combination of the two.
To determine if this business has any viability you must pay the correct price (the current
market price) for the skills, services and materials you are buying.
You cannot build a business if your raw materials are being given to you by your brother.
That will stop one day and your business may then be unprofitable. You cannot build a
business if relatives are working for you for free. They will stop one day, and then you
will be faced with the true wage bill. This will probably skew the equation to make the
business insolvent. In fact it never should have been started in the first place.
You cannot build a business if you are welding for 3 an hour, typing invoices at midnight
for free, doing the books on weekends for free and using your mates company car and
work telephone to make sales calls for your own private enterprise. From day one you
should try and pay the true market price for these services because only then will you get a
realistic set of financial figures.

244
Know Your Numbers!
These figures are important. They determine whether you have a viable project, or
whether you would be better off lying on a beach someplace. You need to know this. If
you waste five years on a business which never should have been started, then that is
serious.
Most people fling themselves into a new venture armed with enthusiasm and little else.
You must determine if your business idea is viable as soon as possible. Can you make a
good profit and build a saleable organisation? That is what this is all about. If the answer
is negative, or marginal, then do not venture into that arena. You would be far better off
doing nothing.
It is possible to turn a profitable hobby or home-business into a ten million pound golden
handshake. Many have done this, but the process involves a serious mental adjustment
which you should ideally make from day one. It is to work ON the business, not IN it.
That means spend 95% of your time on marketing and strategies (business direction), and
5% on the actual detail of the business (you leave such details to others).
Most owner managers operate the reverse ratio. They spend 5% of their time on last-
minute panic marketing and business development, and 95% of the time running the
photocopier or equivalent.
Do you think you have what it takes to do this? You have had a reality check, but do not
let that stand in your way if you really want it.
Why not have a go? What else are you planning?

245
 Lesson Twenty-Three: How to Make One Hundred Million
Confession time none of us has made a hundred million so you might want to take this
chapter with a pinch of salt.
However, we know several people personally who have made a hundred million or more,
so if you are interested, we are happy to pass on what they have disclosed to us.
The main way of achieving this level of wealth is similar to making ten million you
build a business and sell it either float it on the stock market or sell it outright to an
interested buyer.
To make a hundred million your business should have annual profits of around 15
million because the average selling price for a business is six times annual earnings. That
is quite a big business, but interestingly it is not a huge one. It is a chain of just fifteen
outlets each making about a million a year profit. Or fifty such outlets each making a mere
25,000 profit a month. This is hardly a global enterprise as you can see.
If you are lucky, you may get bought out for way more than six times earnings. You will
recall some of the insane figure paid to the founders of dotcom companies in the early
days of the internet revolution.
The standard way to achieve such a 100 million buyout is as follows:
1. Start a business and make it profitable.
2. Turn the business into a cookie cutter operation. Armed with your instruction manual,
any fool should be able to copy that business and make the same money as you.
3. Either franchise out, or start your own chain of cookie-cutter businesses based upon
your tried and tested model.
4. Create a mini-empire with about 15 million total annual profit.
5. Float it or sell it for 100 million, pocket the cash and walk away.
That route is fairly slow. It will take maybe ten years to put that package together. The
franchise route is a little quicker, mainly because others are setting up the clones for you
and they are also fronting the money. But the profits are less (because the business
operator takes a large cut) and so you will need many more outlets to reach the 100
million mark.
If you do not go the franchise route, hopefully you have spotted a challenge which
stands between you and the hundred million. It is the capital injection needed to start your
fifty (or however many) clone operations. For example if you have a profitable retail
outlet, you need enough capital to open fifty similar outlets in towns around the country.
That can run into many millions, so you will need a superb line of credit.
You will also be a highly driven individual, laser-focussed on the task of cloning your
operation fifty times over. This will take you many years to achieve so it goes without
saying that you must be fairly passionate about your adventure.

The Consolidation Route

Here is another route to the one hundred million and one which requires less capital to pull
off.

246
You need to identify a lot of small businesses which could be amalgamated into one large
chain. Examples would be independent pubs, restaurants, opticians, hairdressers,
accountants, newsagents there are many possibilities.
You then create a brand which will act as the umbrella organisation for these individually
owned businesses. Next you approach the owners of such businesses with an interesting
proposition. If they agree to become part of your large organisation, you will offer them an
exit route when you float the whole operation in (say) three years from now. They will
receive an excellent price for their business plus in the meantime they will benefit from
being part of the Nationwide Bennetts chain (or whatever) rather than being a Mom and
Pop small-time organisation. Such benefits will include brand awareness, nationwide TV
coverage and so on. When you have sufficient individual businesses in your group (say
50-100) you float or sell the entire operation with its multi-million turnover and profits.
You pocket a very, very large amount of money for your efforts after buying out the
original owners.
Obviously there are lots of details missing there, but this is an indication of the way
forward.
In summary, here are the three ways:
1. Build a business with a 15 million annual profit and sell it.
2. Do this either by slowly building the outlets, or through franchising.
3. Consolidate a chain of owner-operated outlets and subsume them under one major
brand. Float or sell the whole operation.

Other Ways of Making 100 Million

There are one or two other routes to 100 million which are mentioned here for the sake of
completeness. The author J K Rowling is worth many hundreds of millions at the time of
writing, with Harry Potter being a global brand worth 7 billion. The point here is that she
has made this just by writing some books.
Several major pop stars are worth around the 100 million mark but only a few as this is
a very great deal of money to make from music. Sir Elton John is worth around 400
million and Sir Paul McCartney around 725 million. Madonna is worth around 300
million to mention just three. So it is possible to make this kind of money from ones art.
You could make 100 million from property dealing at a high level.
You could make a hundred million by starting an amazing new Internet idea (Facebook,
Linkedin etc.) which takes off; but this is a spin on the start a profitable business and sell
it idea.
You could make a hundred million with an astonishing new invention (anti gravity, a
highly efficient and cheap battery, a way of removing carbon from the air etc.) but this
rarely happens.
You could make 100 million if you discovered oil in your back yard but we are
clutching at straws here!
If you are not a brilliant artist, writer, inventor or musician there is only one tried and
tested route to the money and that is to build a business empire and sell it.

247
Who Makes This Kind of Money?
Please know that this level of money is not within the reach of everyone. To get it, you
will need to be the toughest S.O.B. on the block. You will be utterly focussed on your
empire to the exclusion of almost everything else. It will be a ten year deal maybe
twenty. You will have to kiss a lot of frogs and be a complete bastard to many people who
will not thank you for it.
You will have to want it very, very badly. Your why must be huge enough to encompass
a hundred million. Why do you want a hundred million? A vague, arm-waving answer
will not get you there. The sort of people who make this money are lean, mean fighting
machines, hell bent on getting to the very top of the financial tree. They are probably not
the sort of people you want at your party. They wouldnt come anyway as they are too
busy for such trivia.
You will need a deep personal commitment to get this wealthy. That means a total
commitment of time and energy. No rest, no vacations, no outings, no squandered time. It
will be meetings, figures, skin of your teeth schedules and heart-stopping moments where
you could lose the lot.

Can You Handle The Crap?

How robust are you at handling failure? You will have some big failures on your road to
this kind of cash. Can you stomach them? Do you have what it takes to pick yourself up
again and again and keep on fighting? Many do not.
Are you okay if several people truly hate you? It is hard to make this money without
making some big enemies. You will have many enemies both personal and political, some
of which will actively want you terminated. For example, an estimated thirty million
people world-wide detest Bill Gates. About 10,000 of these are crazy enough to murder
him, given a chance and a clear shot. Very wealthy people receive an almost constant
stream of death threats, begging letters and blackmail attempts. So how do you feel about
always travelling with a close protection team? What about needing bodyguards for your
children?
Are your family behind you? If not, forget it or ditch the family. You will not be able to
do this with dead weight dragging you down. Your partner must be 100% on side or you
will fail.
Are you prepared to lose everything? It may come to that, for this route is far from certain
and not for the faint-hearted. You will be using a lot of borrowed money, of course, but
the lenders will want to see financial commitment from you as well. If your neck is not on
the line, why should theirs be? Are you happy to risk the family home?
Can you handle top level stress? Each day there will be a series of problems, some big,
some small, crashing over your life like waves upon the shore. Every day no exceptions.
Some of these problems will threaten to destroy everything you have worked to achieve.
Can you handle that? Can you handle a fifty million dollar lawsuit landing on your desk?
Can you handle a bank telling you they are terminating all of your funding forthwith? Can
you handle the fact that a worker has just died on one of your construction sites and you
could be in the frame for a corporate negligence manslaughter suit?

248
Only the very toughest can take all of this on a daily basis and come up punching for
more. Most peoples emotional bank accounts run out long before their financial bank
accounts they just cant take the stress and hassle.
And why should you?
Is your why big enough to shoot for a hundred million? If so, go for it. You will get to
hunt with the big dogs and pee in the long grass. It will be exhilarating and an amazingly
powerful life. With that sort of money you can start to make a serious difference to your
chosen life-project. That might be the why you will need to take you to the end of this
path.
If not, choose yourself a smaller fish to fry. We certainly did!

249
 Beyond Wealth
Here is a final message from The Author.
If you have read this book faithfully from cover to cover, you should congratulate yourself
on completing a long and hopefully fulfilling journey.
The lessons you have learned in these pages, like all knowledge, can be applied towards
good, or not so good outcomes for yourself. I have tried to steer you towards a certain path
the one which leads Beyond Wealth but I cannot force you to walk that road.
Ultimately you will seek and use money according to your current level of consciousness
and continue in that mode until you wake up to a higher level. That may have happened
for you during our journey together; it may happen to you soon, or you may spend the rest
of your life in a more or less unconscious mode. It is your choice. Your life is constructed
from moment by moment micro decisions, each such decision is a choice about waking up
a little or going to sleep a little. The vast bulk of humanity routinely and habitually choose
the sleep option. Indeed they are mostly unaware that there is another option.
Remaining asleep is probably the easiest and the most comforting choice. This, of course,
is why people choose it. But it results in a very small life which consists of alternating
between fear and greed. It results in a life spent in a frantic scrabble for status with almost
every spare penny of money being yoked to its service.
Status, acknowledgement, respect, admiration, wishing to feel superior to, or better than
others these are the drugs the ego craves and this is what the huge majority of wealth-
seekers desire money for.
If they are unlucky, they will never amass enough cash to glimpse the illusory nature of
the ego. They will die believing that if only they had managed to get more, all would have
been well.
If they are fortunate they may amass enough wealth to realise that no amount of money or
status will ever satisfy the ego, for its demands are insatiable. Making a million only
allows them to realise that others have ten million. Making ten million moves them into
the circle of people who have a hundred million, and so on.
The lucky few who make some money wake up at this point, shake their heads briskly and
realise they have prostituted their lives to a false idol. But even these are the few. Most
wealthy people never glimpse the true depths of Wonderland and continue to amass larger
and larger fortunes chasing an ever receding dream. Often they die, puzzled about why
their huge wealth did little more than allow them to live a comfortable life, with their fear
assuaged by a mountain of possessions and shop-bought respect.
Then there are the few...
These people have realised the noble purpose of their lives and have transcended the ego
to the extent that this is possible for we humans. They have realised that status, respect,
admiration and all their derivatives are shallow ego-desires, unworthy of the great life
project. They have discovered that our deepest needs are to do with peace, love and
making the world a better place. Understanding this, the desire for a third car, a luxury
boat or second holiday home seems laughable. Instead they desire money to create
something beautiful, to bring peace, love, joy and security to themselves and others.

250
For such a person, money is not an issue. Whilst those still in the thrall of the ego
scramble around to accumulate yet more status possessions, the Beyond Wealth initiate
has all he or she needs. Such a person will live comfortably but not extravagantly. They
have realised that extra money does not bring increased happiness unless that money is
used in the service of the mankind project. In short, that means helping other people or
the planet in some way or another.
They are in touch with their dream and are realising this in their daily lives. They are
likely to be on a spiritual path also, which transcends ego. These people are notable for
their modesty and lack of ego.
They will have virtually no ego toys and do not crave status, acknowledgement or respect.
They are their own people moving powerfully ahead with their life projects.
They have largely woken up from the illusions of Wonderland and are usually very free
thinkers and almost impossible to manipulate and control.
The pursuit of wealth to bring more status and possessions is a goal they have left behind.
Their higher consciousness takes them Beyond Wealth and their primary focus is helping
others.
This is the path which awaits you if you dare to take it. This is the ultimate steep and
rocky path which looks so daunting compared with the wide, flat, downwards sloping
pathway which leads to deep unconsciousness.
My final thought for you is in the form of a promise.
I promise that if you want true contentment and deep peace in your life, you must take the
high, rocky path. You will never find these things if you choose to remain ensnared in the
egoic illusions which have controlled you all of your life so far. The low path leads to
background fear, agitation, irritation, separateness, wanting, hunger for that which you do
not have and anxiety. No amount of doing what you have always done will free you from
that although the ego likes to think it will.
To break free from the ultimate tool of Wonderland control your own ego requires
your total commitment and minute by minute focus. Very few manage to achieve this,
such is the strength of the ego.
Thank you for reading. I wish you success on your own journey towards finding a deep,
lasting peace and happiness in your life.
That, after all, is the real journey.

251